JP2019092895A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a fraudulent act to control means from a back side of the game machine.SOLUTION: A protection cover member 140 for covering a setting key 501 provided in a main control device 110 from a back side of a Pachinko machine 10 is mounted to a right-side plate 11d of an outer frame 11, and the setting key 501 is configured not to be exposed to the back side of the Pachinko machine 10 by the protective cover member 140 in a situation in which an inner frame 12 is closed to the outer frame 11. In a situation in which the inner frame 12 is open to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 installed on the back of the inner frame 12 is exposed to a front side of the Pachinko machine 10 following rotation of the inner frame 12 and a front frame 14, and becomes a state for permitting immediate operation by a person concerned with a hall.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 67

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, on the back side of the gaming machine, a plurality of control means for executing various settings and processing of the game are disposed, and the player contacts the control means when the opening / closing body mounted with each control means is closed. It is configured to be impossible.

  On the other hand, the person in charge of the hall opens the opening and closing body outside the business hours of the hall, and executes various setting and maintenance work for the control means (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2015-024202, A

  However, there is a risk that such a game machine may be tampered with the control means from the back side of the game machine even when the opening and closing body is closed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing fraudulent acts against the control means from the back side of the gaming machine.

  In order to achieve this object, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, a first control means and a second control means for controlling the game on the back side of the opening and closing body of the opening and closing body supported on the supporting body. A control means is mounted. Then, at least part or all of the back surface side of the first control means is covered by the first protection means mounted on the back side of the opening / closing body of the game machine. Further, at least a part or the whole of the back side of the game machine of the second control means is covered by the second protection means provided on the support. Here, a part of the first protection means is formed to abut on a part of the second protection means in the direction of the back of the gaming machine in a superimposed manner.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the opening / closing body is supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to the support, and the first control means and the second control means for controlling the game are mounted on the back side of the opening / closing body. Ru. Then, at least part or all of the back surface side of the first control means is covered by the first protection means mounted on the back side of the opening / closing body of the game machine. Further, at least a part or the whole of the back side of the game machine of the second control means is covered by the second protection means provided on the support. Here, a part of the first protection means is formed to abut on a part of the second protection means in the direction of the back of the gaming machine in a superimposed manner. As a result, the gap between the first protection means and the second protection means covering the first control means and the second control means is eliminated, and there is no room for the wire etc. to enter the inside of the gaming machine from the back side of the gaming machine. There is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the machine can be improved. Further, the first protective means provided on the opening and closing body is formed so as to overlap the second protective means provided on the support in the direction of the back of the gaming machine, whereby the opening and closing body is released from the support Even if the first protection means of the opening and closing body and the second protection means of the support do not interfere with each other, the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine is improved without increasing the extra work in maintenance work etc. It has the effect of being able to

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a main control apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a holding ball storage area, and a holding ball execution area. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, and (c) is a diagram showing that the number of holding balls is 2 A diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table in the case of (d) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the out-of-order (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table when the number of holding balls is two (E) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table in the case where the number of holding balls is two. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the switch reading process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ratio management main process performed by the prize ratio management chip in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a part of setting information reception process performed by the thing ratio management chip | tip in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a part of setting information reception process performed by the thing ratio management chip | tip in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the thing ratio calculation process performed by the thing ratio management chip in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the test result output process performed by the thing ratio management chip in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation indication processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. (A) is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, (C) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information preservation | save process performed by the thing ratio management chip in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the test result output process performed by the thing ratio management chip in a main control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the duty ratio process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the duty ratio main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the duty ratio process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the duty ratio main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the base display device, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing display contents in the base display device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing information necessary for displaying a base value stored in an external work area of the RAM in the MPU of the main control device, and (b) is each base It is the model which showed the structure of value data typically. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the base value process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the base value calculation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a part of base value display process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a part of remaining of the base value display process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the setting key showing the case where the setting key is in the off state, and (b) is a front view of the setting key showing the case where the setting key is in the on state. Diagram showing the startup mode of the pachinko machine and the state of each of the RAM erase switch, setting key and door opening switch when the pachinko machine is powered on for startup in the startup mode for each startup mode It is. (A) is a figure which showed the role of RAM erasure | elimination switch and setting key in setting change mode, (b) is the figure which showed the role of the setting key in setting confirmation mode. It is the model which showed typically various examples of the display content of the base display apparatus in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. It is the model which showed typically various examples of the display content in the case of displaying an error log | history on a base display apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically arrangement | positioning of LED of a 1st symbol display device, (b) is in the case of alerting | reporting that the maximum round number is 2 in round number alerting | reporting LED A lighting pattern, a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15, a lighting pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed, and a light when notifying that the setting is being confirmed It is the figure which showed the pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the model which showed typically the data stored in the external work area of RAM in MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the base display process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the data stored in the internal work area of RAM in MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the starting mode set corresponding to each start-up operation when a power supply is turned on, after a power supply is cut off during setting change or setting confirmation. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 9th embodiment. (A) is a left front perspective view seen from the left front of the protective cover in a 9th embodiment, and (b) is a right back perspective view seen from the rear right of the protective cover in a 9th embodiment. It is a right view of a pachinko machine in a 9th embodiment. It is a left front perspective view for demonstrating the attachment method of the protective cover member with respect to the outer frame in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the outer frame in a 9th embodiment, and the protection cover member attached to the outer frame. It is a front view of the substrate box of the main control unit in a 9th embodiment. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line AA in FIG. 67. FIG. 74 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of a main control device and a protective cover member in a region B of FIG. 73. It is a left front perspective view which expands and shows an inner frame and a front frame with respect to the outer frame which attached the protective cover member in 9th Embodiment. The start-up mode of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment and the information of each of the RAM erase switch and setting key at power-on of the pachinko machine for starting up in the start-up mode for each start-up mode are shown. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 10th Embodiment. The start-up mode of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment and the information of each of the RAM erase switch and setting key at power-on of the pachinko machine for starting up in the start-up mode for each start-up mode are shown. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in a 12th embodiment. It is a right view of a pachinko machine in a 12th embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to Figs. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch 208g (see FIG. 6) for detecting that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). There is.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the upper plate 17 in a front view.

  The frame button 22 is a button pressed and operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later. In addition, the frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for causing the player to select the contents of the so-called super reach, which is one aspect of the change production.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as described later, the ball launched to the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (a second starting opening 64b as described later. 2) Refers to the start winning combination by the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed after the symbol (the third symbol to be described later) is variably displayed for a predetermined time after being entered into the ball (start winning combination). It is an effect of presenting the player with the result of the lottery that is performed (whether or not the jackpot).

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. The various effects such as the above-described change effects and reach effects performed during the change effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

  The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during a period in which no variation effect is being performed or during high-speed variation in which the third symbol is variably displayed at high speed in an invisible manner to the player. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, it is repeatedly changed in the order of "town stage" → "empty stage" → "island stage" → "town stage" →. Also, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

  In addition, when normal reach effect is started in the fluctuation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81, when developing from normal reach to super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of super reach during normal reach is the third symbol The display device 81 is configured to be displayed.

  On the selection screen, a plurality of effect mode candidates that can be selected as effect modes for super reach are displayed, and one of the effect mode candidates is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect mode candidate is changed. And based on the production | presentation mode candidate selected when developing to a super reach, the production | presentation aspect of a super reach is determined, and a super reach is performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 according to the production | presentation aspect.

  In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured to be pressed. However, instead of the frame button 22, the player can move the pachinko machine 10 in a predetermined direction (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10). Back, right, and left)). Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the effect mode of super reach may be selected.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left of the front frame 14 in a front view, a light emitting means such as an LED is provided, and a display lamp 34 is provided which can display the payout of the prize ball and the occurrence of an error.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and the sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) And the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit.

  In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in.

  When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. The firing interval of the spheres in the sphere launch unit 112a is set to about 0.6 seconds. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61, 62, and a first ordinary winning opening 63a, The second ordinary winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back side of the inner frame 12. Attached to The first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate the variation display performed in response to the ball entering the start opening of any of the first start opening 64a and the second start opening 64b (start winning combination) by the lighting state of the LED 37a, or the change display As a stop symbol after the end, the symbol according to the result of the lottery which is performed for the starting winning combination is shown in the lighting state, or fluctuation among balls entered in the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b The number of holding balls, which is the number of unexecuted balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, while performing the propriety determination (big hit lottery) whether or not it is a big hit for entering the ball to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, and if it is determined as a big hit, the type It also determines the As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 2R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared.

  The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation that is executed with the ball entering the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b. If the jackpot is a symbol according to the jackpot type is shown.

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a maximum number of rounds jackpot of 2 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation times) becomes a short time state .

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change, a definite change), in other words, a special gaming state (large hit) It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to). The high probability state (during a definite change, a positive change state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting opening 64b by increasing the probability of hitting a second symbol to be described later.

  On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability is not in a definite state, and means a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability state. Moreover, while the big hit probability is a normal state with the time saving state (time low) of the "low probability state", only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased with the big hit probability as it is, and the second starting opening 64b It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to enter.

  In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, instead of changing the probability of hitting the second symbol, the time when the electric combination later mentioned attached to the second starting opening 64b is opened, and once by the second symbol It is also possible to change the number of times the motorized jack is released at the hit point. Specifically, in the short time state, the time for which the motorized accessory attached to the second starting port 64b is opened is made longer than in the case other than the time shorter state, or the number of times the motorized prize is released per hit. The time may be increased more than in the short-time state. Also, in the time saving state, at least two of increasing the probability of hitting the second symbol, increasing the opening time of the motorized part, and increasing the number of opening times of the motored part at the same time Good.

  A first normal winning opening 63a is disposed on the lower left side of the game area, and a second normal winning opening 63b is disposed on the lower right side of the game area. When the ball enters the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c is turned on. Eight balls are paid out as prize balls. Also, when the ball enters the second ordinary winning opening 63b, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d is turned on. As a result, eight balls are paid out as winning balls. In addition, the number of winning balls when the ball is won in the first normal winning opening 63a and the number of winning balls when the ball is winning in the second normal winning opening 63b is not necessarily the same. The number of winning balls may be different from that of the ball, the latter being eight balls or the like.

  A variable display unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 and a second symbol display device 83. The third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 by using a ball (start winning) to the start opening of either the first start opening 64a or the second start opening 64b as a trigger. The third symbol is configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") which performs variable display (variation effect) of the third symbol. The second symbol display device 83 is provided with a second symbol display device 83 configured of an LED that variably displays the second symbol using a passage of a ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 8 inches, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 5) described later, for example, the left, middle And three right symbol rows are displayed.

  Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37 is It is performed by the third symbol display device 81. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned on the effective line L1 ) And the jackpot is generated after the fluctuation display is finished. When transitioning to the high probability state (probability state) after the big hit ends, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to "high probability patterns") to which the odd numbers are added are aligned on the effective line L1. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low probability state after the big hit ends, variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to "low probability symbols") to which even numbers are added are aligned on the valid line L1.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and 2/3 of the lower side is a variable display of the third symbol (main symbol) (variation effect) The main display area Dm to be displayed, and the upper 1/3 of the other display areas are the sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character and the like. In the lower base side central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a number-of-held-balls display area Db for displaying the number of held balls is provided.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and the symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display region Dm1, and the symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display region Dm2. The symbol row Z3 is displayed on Dm3.

  In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle step portion of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 at each variation production. Stop display. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the combination of the same main symbol) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot animation is displayed as a jackpot.

  The sub display area Ds is provided laterally longer than the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying the character and the notice effect image, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a sense of expectation of becoming a big hit as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The number of holding balls display area Db is the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which fluctuation display (variation effect) has not been executed among the balls entered into the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b. Is an area for displaying

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined action, sometimes performs a special action other than the predetermined action, or a black boy The notice effect is performed when the color of the hair of the hair or the color of the normally white bee maki changes or another character appears.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b while the fluctuation effect (variation display) is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), The number of hits is suspended up to 4 times. The number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the number-of-holding ball display area Db. In the holding ball number display area Db, one holding ball number symbol (“●” symbol) is displayed per one holding ball number, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the displayed number of the holding ball number symbol .

  That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the holding ball number display area Db, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is displayed. Indicates that the number of balls is four. In addition, when the number-of-held-balls design is not displayed in the number-of-held-balls display area Db, it indicates that the number of held balls is 0, that is, there is no held ball.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b is configured to be held up to a total of four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is four times in total The number of times is not limited, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number-of-hold-balls symbol in the number-of-hold-balls display area Db, the number of held balls is a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or the area divided into four It may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different only in the aspect. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 is a variable display that alternately lights a symbol of "o" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67. is there. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol of "o"), the motorized combination provided in the second starting opening 64b has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is suspended up to four times, and the number of balls retained is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed at the second symbol retention lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holdings is displayed by the number of lit second symbol holding lamps 84.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, instead of the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84, the variable display of the second symbol may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the passage of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times the maximum number of holding balls, similarly to the second starting opening 64b, and is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times) It may be set to Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  A first start port 64a is disposed below the variable display unit 80, and a second start port 64b is disposed below the first start port 64a. The first starting opening 64a is provided with an opening through which a ball can enter upward. The opening of the first starting opening 64a is always open, and the ball can enter the ball. When the ball enters the first starting opening 64a, the first starting opening switch 208a (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is performed due to the turning on of the first starting opening switch 208a. A lottery for a big hit is made with the device 110 (see FIG. 5), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 produces a variation of the third symbol. To be executed. The first starting opening 64a is also one of the winning openings where three balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  On the other hand, the second starting port 64b is provided with a motorized part having two blades covering the opening where the ball enters the second starting port 64b. The motorized part opens and closes the second start port 64b by opening and closing the two blades. In a normal state, the second start port 64b is in a closed state in which the blade of the motorized product is closed (the blade is raised upward), and the ball can not enter the second start port 64b, or enters the ball It is in a difficult state.

  Then, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped with the symbol of "o", the electrically driven combination of the second start opening 64b is operated for a predetermined time. From the state where the blade of the motorized part stands up while the motorized part is operated. The movable state is substantially V-shaped (inverted C-shaped), and the second start port 64b is opened. When the second start port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second start port 64b or the ball can enter the ball more easily than in the closed state. That is, as a result of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83, the ball stops with a symbol of "o" and becomes a hit, and the ball enters the second starting opening 64b when the second starting opening 64b is opened. It can be made the state which can do many jackpot lotterys.

  When the ball enters the second starting opening 64b, the second starting opening switch 208b (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is performed due to the turning on of the second starting opening switch 208b. A lottery for a big hit is made with the device 110 (see FIG. 5), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 produces a variation of the third symbol. To be executed. The second starting opening 64b is also one of the winning openings where two balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second starting opening 64b, and a substantially rectangular shaped large winning opening (also referred to as a large opening or a specific winning opening) 65a is provided substantially at the center of the second starting opening 64b. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery with the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed. A stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The special winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time, and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate covering the large winning opening 65a, and a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open and close forward about the lower side of the opening and closing plate. And have. The special winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the big winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front lower side, and a ball is temporarily formed in the big winning opening 65a to form an open state that is easy to win. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  When the ball enters the big winning opening 65a, the big winning opening switch 208e (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the gaming board 13 is turned on, and the number of times the big winning opening switch 208e is turned on is counted. The number of balls winning in the special winning opening 65a is counted, and the closing condition of the special winning opening 65a is determined. In addition, 12 balls are paid out as winning balls due to the turning on of the special winning opening switch 208e. Then, by the opening and closing states of the big winning opening 65a being repeated by the big hit, it becomes easy to win many balls in the big winning opening 65a, and it is possible for the player to have a gaming value (game value). As the award, a larger amount of prize balls will be paid out than usual. This state is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A special winning opening and a large opening which is opened and closed separately from the special winning opening are provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined time The game state in which the large opening is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined period of time may be formed as a special gaming state in response to the ball winning into the specific winning opening during the opening of the specific winning opening.

  Through gates 67 are provided on the left and right of the variable display unit 80, respectively. The through gate 67 is provided with through holes (not shown) for passing the balls in the vertical direction. When the ball fired in the game area passes through the through gate 67, the through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 causes the second symbol (the second symbol (FIG. A lottery is held for a normal symbol.

  As a result of the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed on the ball that has passed through gate 67, when it is determined to be a hit, the second symbol display in second symbol display device 83 through the variation display of the second symbol " After the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed, the motorized part of the second starting opening 64b operates. As a result, the blade of the motorized part that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting opening 64b is moved to a substantially V shape (reverse C shape) from a substantially upright state, and the ball is held for a predetermined time Is in a state where it can enter the second starting opening 64b, or a state in which the ball can enter the ball more easily than in the closed state.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a is guided to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. In addition, the balls entering the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b and 65a are guided to the ball discharging path after passing through the switches for detecting the entering of the balls provided for each winning opening. Ru. The ball guided to the ball discharge path is discharged to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 10 is installed, after passing through an out switch 208f (see FIG. 6) for detecting the guided ball. .

  Here, the ball fired into the game area of the pachinko machine 10 always enters any one of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out opening 66. Therefore, the balls having entered the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the out port 66 are guided to the ball discharging path and always pass the out switch 208f. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, it is possible to grasp the number of balls fired in the game area (the number of balls used in the game). Also, the out switch 208 f actually passes through the game area, and detects a ball that has entered any one of the winning openings 63 a, 63 b, 64 a, 64 b, 65 a or the out opening 66. That is, a ball which has been fired to the game area but caught somewhere in the game area and consequently not used for the game is not detected. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, it is possible to suppress the counting of the balls not used as a game as a result as such balls being shot into the game area.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  Further, on the main board, an inspection terminal 207a (see FIG. 5) to which an inspection device 300 for inspecting the performance such as the property ratio of the gaming machine can be connected is provided. The inspection terminal 207 a is usually covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94 and appears by opening the back pack 92. However, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the inspection terminal 207a, and the inspection terminal 207a may be exposed from the opening. When the connector of the cable connected to the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection device 300 can inspect the gaming performance such as the property ratio of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  In main controller 110, main components of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of fluctuation display (variation effect) in first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display result in second symbol display device 83 Execute the process The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, and the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer for storing various counters for controlling the processing.

  A power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201 Then, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the big winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a special winning opening solenoid for opening / closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized product etc. is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals for these via the input / output port 205. Send

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group including a ball entering each winning hole, various switches for detecting a ball guided to a ball discharge path through each winning hole and an out port, and a sensor group Are connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erase signal output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on SG2.

  The main control device 110 is provided with a property ratio management chip 207 for managing information on the property ratio in the pachinko machine 10. The item ratio management chip 207 is connected to the MPU 201 via the bus 206, receives information necessary for management of the item ratio from the MPU 201, processes and stores the received information, and thereby the item of the pachinko machine 10 It is a microchip (integrated circuit) that manages information on the ratio.

  An inspection terminal 207 a is connected to the feature ratio management chip 207. The inspection terminal 207a is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 300 that inspects the performance such as the property ratio of the gaming machine, and when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and a connector, Information on the item ratio managed by the item ratio management chip 207 and other information on the inspection are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. The inspection apparatus 300 can determine whether the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal range based on the information on the accessory ratio received through the inspection terminal 207a.

  Here, the detailed configuration of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of main controller 110. Referring to FIG.

  As described above, the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is connected to the input / output port 205 as the input side, and the solenoid 209, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 38, the second symbol hold lamp 84, as the output side. As well as being connected to the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, as various switches 208 connected as an input side, a first starting opening switch 208a for detecting a ball winning in the first starting opening 64a, a second A second starting opening switch 208b for detecting a ball winning in the starting opening 64b, a first ordinary winning opening switch 208c for detecting a ball winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a, and a winning in a second ordinary winning opening 63b The second normal winning opening switch 208d for detecting the ball that has been shot, the large winning opening switch 208e for detecting the ball winning in the large winning opening 65a An out switch 208f for detecting a ball that has won a prize in each winning hole 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and a ball that has entered the outport 66 and is guided to a ball discharge path, an inner frame 12 and A door open switch 208g is connected to detect that at least one of the front frames 14 is locked and released.

  The input / output port 205 includes a start port 205a to which the output of the first start port switch 208a is input, a start 2 port 205b to which the output of the second start port switch 208b is input, and a first ordinary winning port switch 208c. One port 205c to which the output is input, two port 205d to which the output of the second ordinary winning port switch 208d is input, a special winning port port 205e to which the output of the special winning port switch 208e is input, and an out switch An out port 205f to which the output of 208f is connected and a door open port 205g to which the output of the door open switch 208g is connected are provided.

  The MPU 201 executes switch reading processing (see FIG. 11) for confirming the states of various switches in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) executed every two milliseconds. In the switch reading process, the MPU 201 refers to the first port 205a, the second port 205b, the first port 205c, the second port 205d, the large winning port 205e, and the out port 205f, and the winning port is a winning prize. To determine the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path, the number of balls won in each winning opening in 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, Count the number of balls fired to the game area). Then, the number of each ball counted and the gaming state at that time (whether the jackpot is in progress, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (so-called door) is open, an error state, etc.) It is set to the feature ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. The prize ratio management chip 207 calculates and manages the prize ratio based on the number of balls. Note that whether or not the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door open port 205g and confirming the output of the door open switch 208g.

  The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores at least a big hit random number table 202a, a big hit type table 202b, a stop pattern table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, a prize ball number table 202e, and trigger information data 202f. The main control unit 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 by the various counters stored in the RAM 203 and the various tables 202 a to 202 d stored in the ROM 202. The prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are data used to manage the symbol ratio in the symbol ratio management chip 207, and the symbol ratio when the main control device 110 is powered on. It is sent to the management chip 207.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are mainly used to perform a jackpot lottery, setting of fluctuation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, etc. Used by the MPU 201 of the control device 110. In the description of the various counters, various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will also be described with reference to FIG.

  In the setting of the variation display (variation production) of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the jackpot, and the first used for selection of the jackpot symbol A type counter C2 per one, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. .

  The second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 17) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a storage ball storage area 203b consisting of four storage areas (storage first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first starting opening 64a and The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored according to the timing of entering the second starting opening 64b.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and then reached 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to. Also, when the first random number counter C1 is updated by one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the first value is updated from the initial value. The random number counter C1 is updated.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball wins in either of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b ( At the timing when the start winning combination), the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is the first random number counter storage area of the first holding area of the first to fourth holding areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 It is stored in 203b1. The value of the jackpot random number is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the first punch random number counter C1 stored in the holding area is set by the jackpot random number table 202a If it matches the value of the random number that will be the jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. In the jackpot random number table 202a, the gaming state for the low probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (period in which the probability change is not in progress) and the gaming state for the pachinko machine 10 is more successful than the low probability state It can be divided into two types, one for high probability states used in the case of high probability states (during definite variation). And the number of the random numbers used as the big hit included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set differently. As described above, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that will be big hits in the low probability state is 3, and the values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the big hit random number table 202a. ing.

  On the other hand, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that will be a big hit in the high probability state is 30, its value “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322 , 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a .

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number values are set so that the jackpot random number value for the low probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state do not overlap. It is set. Here, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, if there is a value that is a jackpot random value, the value is easily predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of jackpot being fraudulently increased. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), changing the value of the random number to be the big hit Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The first collision type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball starts one of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b. The value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is the first hit random number counter C1 among the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the mouth is won (start winning). It is stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the same hold area as the hold area to be stored.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is not a large random number, that is, if it is a random number falling out, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect Or, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of removal. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that makes a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the type of stop in the change production become the one at the big hit . In this case, the variation pattern at the big hit and the stop type are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C 2 and the jackpot type table 202 b stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (b). FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot “15R probability variation jackpot”, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot and 100 During the number of times of fluctuation, there are "15R normal jackpots" that are short-lived, and there are "2R probability variation jackpots" in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after two round jackpots.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of a first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8B, the value "0 to 39" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the value "40 ... of the first hit type counter C2 for the 15R normal jackpot. 79 "is associated, and the value" 80 to 99 "of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the big hit type is "20" If the 15R normal jackpot is determined, and the value of the first collision type counter C2 is "90", the "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected with a probability of 40% when the jackpot is achieved, the 15R regular jackpot is selected with the probability of 40 percent, and the 2R probability variation jackpot is selected with the probability of 20%. . The probability that each jackpot type is selected when it is a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first collision type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table.

  The probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to each gaming state may be prepared, and in each jackpot type table, the number of first hit type counters C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed.

  Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed by the entering start opening. That is, as a probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a big hit triggered by entering the first starting opening 64a, For example, "15R probability variation big hit" is 40%, "15R regular hit" is 40%, "2R probability variation big hit" is 20%, and it is stored in the storage ball storage area 203b triggered by entering the second starting opening 64b. As a probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a jackpot random number, for example, “15R probability variation jackpot” 55%, “15R normal jackpot” 40%, “2R probability variation jackpot” "May be 5%.

  In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to the first starting port 64a and a jackpot type table corresponding to the second starting port 64b are prepared, and each jackpot type table is associated with each jackpot type in the first hit type table The number of values of the counter C2 may be changed. And in the first to fourth reserved areas of the storage ball storage area 203b, the values of the various counters stored in each area are for winning any start opening of the first start opening 64a and the second start opening 64b. A flag indicating whether or not stored together is also stored, and the jackpot type used when determining the jackpot type based on the first hit type counter C2 stored in each area based on the flag A table may be selected. Alternatively, a flag is separately provided in a form corresponding to each of the first to fourth reserved areas, and the value of the various counters stored in the corresponding area corresponds to that of the first start opening 64a and the second start opening 64b. A jackpot type used when determining a jackpot type based on the first hit type counter C2 stored in each area based on the flag indicating which one of the starting openings has been stored with the winning a prize A table may be selected.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type displayed at the third symbol display device 81 at the time of detachment, and after reach is generated, the final stop symbol shifts by only one before and after the reach symbol. Three stops of "reach out of back and forth" and "stop out of reach other than out of back and forth" in which the final stop design stops other than back and forth of reach design after reach similarly occurs. Effects) pattern is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is set to one of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b. At the timing of winning (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored as the first random number counter C1 among the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the same hold area as the hold area.

  A plurality of stop pattern tables 202c having different ranges of random numbers for which the stop type is selected are provided in the ROM 202, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. A plurality of stop pattern tables 202c are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in the high probability state, the stop pattern table 202c selects a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated And “complete removal” is likely to be selected. In this stop pattern table 202c, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out" difficult to select Become.

  In the low probability state, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. And the narrow stop pattern table 202c is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "complete removal". In this stop pattern table 202c, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than back and forth deviation" is wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than back and forth deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b, and variation by the third symbol display device 81 It becomes easy to continue the display. Also in the latter stop pattern table 202c, the range of the random number values corresponding to the stop type of “front-rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 17). In addition, the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time is provided in the holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) in any one of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b. Among the first to fourth reserved areas, the first hit random number counter C1 is stored in the same variation area counter storage area 203b4 of the reserved area as the stored area.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is used to determine the fluctuation pattern. That is, when the MPU 201 performs the fluctuation effect based on various counters stored in one reserved area, the MPU 201 stores the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 of the reserved area and the ROM 202. The fluctuation pattern is determined by the fluctuation pattern table 202d. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the reach type or the fine symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The variation mode is determined, and the presence or absence of the advance notice effect execution and the execution mode of the advance notice effect are determined.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 (c) to 8 (e). In the pachinko machine 10, as the fluctuation pattern table 202d, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 used at the time of jackpot, and deviation fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 used at the time of detachment are prepared. In addition, as the variation pattern table 202d2 for disengagement, depending on whether the gaming state is a short state or a high probability state at the time of a definite change, or a low probability state at a normal time excluding the short state, for (probability change) A fluctuation pattern table 202d3 and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 are prepared.

  Further, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is a table to be referred to when the number of holding balls is 0 (that is, when there is no holding ball), and a table to be referred to when the number of holding balls is 1; A table referred to when the number of balls held is 2, a table referred to when the number of balls held is 3, and a table referred to when the number of balls held is 4 are separately provided.

  Note that it is not necessary to prepare the variation pattern table for each number of holding balls as in the present embodiment, and each variation pattern table 202d1 to 202d3 is changed so that the table referred to simply as the number of holding balls is changed. May be prepared. For example, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 may be separately prepared as a table to be referred to when the number of holding balls is less than 3 and a table to be referred to when the number of holding balls is 3 or more . Moreover, in each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3, the condition of the number of holding balls for determining the table to be referred to may be different. For example, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, a table to be referred to when the number of holding balls is less than 3 and a table to be referred to when the number of holding balls is 3 or more are prepared As the table 202d2, different tables may be prepared for each holding ball number, and as the out (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, one table may be prepared regardless of the holding ball number.

  FIG. 8C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 referred to when the number of holding balls is 2 among the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type, regardless of the number of holding balls. Specifically, it is divided into 15R jackpot common to be referred to when the 15R probability variable jackpot and 15R regular jackpot are determined as the jackpot type, and 2R probability variable jackpot dedicated to be referred to when the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined. There is. The values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are associated with the divided groups.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit (large hit random number value), the variation pattern according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area The group (group) to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is determined. In the group (group) of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect held in the holding area Be done.

  Common to the 15R jackpot, three fluctuation patterns of fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds are prepared, and each fluctuation pattern is prepared. Is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  The fluctuation A is a fluctuation pattern in which the so-called normal reach in which the third symbol is aligned after the short reach of the fluctuation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The change B is a change pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 executes a so-called super reach in which the third symbol is aligned after reaching with a longer change time than the normal reach. The super reach includes, for example, a reach that develops from a normal reach, and a long reach which only has a long reach time. The variation C is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 executes so-called special reach in which the third symbol is aligned after reaching with a longer variation time than the super reach. The special reach includes, for example, a reach further developed after super reach, and a special reach where the destination from the normal reach is different from the super reach.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8C, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 when the number of holding balls is 2 corresponds to 0 to 10 with respect to fluctuation A in the common table of 15R big hit 11 to 99 for B and 100 to 198 for fluctuation C. Since the 15R jackpot common table is selected when it is the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot, it is easy to select the variation C for which the special reach is executed to give the player a sense of expectation It has become. However, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a jackpot from any reach by configuring that the change A for executing the normal reach and the change B for performing the super reach are also selected.

  In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lot of things that effect contents differ in each reach are prepared, for example, in the super reach, the back image (the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81) The image displayed on the back side of the image) is rapidly changed and displayed, or the image is displayed with a certain character suddenly displayed. In addition, a notice effect before the start of the change is added. It includes multiple reach with different presentation content, such as one to which is added. In the case of 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, main controller 110 determines only fluctuation A, fluctuation B and fluctuation C as fluctuation patterns, and in audio lamp control device 113 and display control device 114, each fluctuation A ̃ Determine the detailed variation pattern corresponding to C. In accordance with the detailed fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  For the 2R probability variation jackpot only, only a variation pattern of "2R variation" with a variation time of 59 seconds is selectable. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, as shown in FIG. 2R fluctuation is associated with 0 to 198). That is, when the jackpot fluctuation type is 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R fluctuation is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

  When the 2R variation is selected in main controller 110, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation is determined in audio lamp control device 113 or display control device 114. Therefore, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot type in the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 executes the variation effect with the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation. In the pachinko machine 10, characters such as “chicken” or “girl” are finally displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, for example, as detailed fluctuation patterns corresponding to the 2R fluctuation. The variation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a particular symbol, and the variation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a particular symbol are included along with the lighting and blinking of a particular lamp.

  In addition, although the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, it may be determined by another fluctuation type counter whether or not to add a notice effect for giving notice of the start of a jackpot or reach effect before the start of a change or during a change effect, or when reach is established, It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the symbol 3 to be stopped is to be shifted and stopped (for example, 1 symbol shifted front and back, etc.).

  In addition, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is provided with a dedicated 2R probability variation jackpot group, but in the present pachinko machine 10, when it becomes a 2R probability variation jackpot, only the variation pattern of "2R fluctuation" is selected, Only the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in the case of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R regular jackpot may be defined in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 without providing a group exclusively for 2R probability variation jackpot. In this case, when it becomes 2R probability variation as a jackpot type, 2R fluctuation may be determined as a fluctuation pattern without referring to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, only "2R fluctuation" is selected when it becomes 2R probability variation jackpot, but one fluctuation pattern is selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns when it becomes 2R probability variation jackpot You may do so. In this case, as in the 15R jackpot common group, even in the 2R probability variation jackpot dedicated group, the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected when the 2R probability variation jackpot becomes, and a certain reserved area The variation pattern associated with the value of the stored variation type counter CS1 may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect reserved in the reserve area.

  FIG. 8D schematically shows an example of the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 referred to when the number of holding balls is 2 among the out-of-out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (d), the outlier (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a completely outlier only, which is referred to when a complete outlier is determined as the outstop type at the time of outlier, and a back and forth out of reach and an out of back It is divided into groups (groups) based on reach common which is referred to when the non-reach is determined and the stop type at the time of out-of-range, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area is not a big win value (big hit random number value), that is, if it is a value that goes out, the gaming state is normal except for the time saving state When in the low probability state, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the hold area according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the first random number counter C1. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of is determined from the out-of-order (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

  For complete deviation only, two fluctuation patterns of fluctuation D with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and fluctuation E with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set for each fluctuation pattern. It is associated. When the fluctuation D or the fluctuation E is selected as the fluctuation pattern, in the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol is started, a fluctuation effect is performed in which stop display is performed without reaching reach. As shown in FIG. 8 (d), in the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, when the number of holding balls is 2, the correspondence between the completely deviation-only fluctuation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation D 0 to 98, the variation E is 99 to 198.

  In addition, for reach common, the three variations A to C mentioned above, that is, the variation A where the variation time is 30 seconds and the normal reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the variation time is 60 seconds the super reach Three fluctuation patterns of fluctuation B executed by 3 symbol display device 81 and fluctuation C executed by 3rd symbol display device 81 with fluctuation time of 90 seconds are prepared to be selectable. In the out-of-order (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence between each reach common fluctuation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 when the number of holding balls is 2 corresponds to 0 to 98 for fluctuation A and 99 to 190 for fluctuation B. , And the variation C is 191 to 198.

  FIG. 8E schematically shows an example of the out-of-order (probability-change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 to be referred to when the number of holding balls is 2 among the out-of-order (probability-change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 stored in the ROM 202 FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8E, the out-of-normal (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202 d 3 is referred to when the complete out-of-point is determined as the stop type at the time of out-of-out, similarly to the out-of-normal (normal) fluctuation pattern table For complete out-of-the-box only, where fluctuation D and fluctuation E can be selected as a fluctuation pattern, and common reach where reference is made when out-of-front and out-of-front reach are determined and fluctuations A to C can be selected as fluctuation patterns, It is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type at the time of departure, and in the divided groups, the value of the change type counter CS1 is associated with the change pattern which can be respectively selected.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area is not a big hit, that is, it is a value that is out, if the gaming state is a time saving state or a high probability state at a definite change, According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area has a deviation pattern for out-of-order (probable change) It is determined from the table 202d3.

  As shown in FIG. 8E, in the out-of-order (probable-change) change pattern table 202d3, the correspondence between each change and the value of the change type counter CS1 in the complete release only when the number of holding balls is 2 is change D 0 to 190, the variation E is 191 to 198. In addition, the correspondence between each variation in reach common when the number of holding balls is 2 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for variation A, 99 to 190 for variation B, and 191 to 198 for variation C. ing. That is, the correspondence between each fluctuation in reach common and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same in the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and the out (probable fluctuation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is short or a high probability state at the time of definite variation, the ball is likely to enter the second starting opening 64b, and there are many complete deviations (variation E) with a long fluctuation time If this is done, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, which may cause the player to wait and feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is not preferable because the operation rate decreases as a hole.

  Therefore, if the game state is completely out when the game state is in the time reduction state or the high probability state at a certain change, the completely out of the variation time is shorter than in the other game states (normal state except time reduction state) In order to facilitate selection of the fluctuation D), a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and a deviation (probability fluctuation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 are configured. Thus, the possibility of giving the player a sense of discomfort can be reduced by performing the start of the next variable display early. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

  Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination (selection of presence / absence of advance notice, etc. may be selected). Also, although the selection of the outlier type is divided into the outlier (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table and the outlier (probability change) fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of holding balls (for example, even if the gaming state is normal) In the case of four or more, if three or more, the variation display may be ended early, so it may be selected with reference to the out-of-order (probable variation) variation pattern table.

  In addition, since the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 selected when the fluctuation type is a reach other than the front or back reach or the front or back end is the same regardless of the gaming state, Normal) The variation pattern table 202d2 and the out-of-order (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 do not include the reach common group, and these variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 are referred to only when the stop type is completely out. The fluctuation pattern table to be referred to may be separately prepared in the case where the stop type is reach other than the front or back reach or the front or back out regardless of the game state.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence between the changes A to C and the value of the change type counter CS1 selected when the change type is a reach other than the front or back reach is the same regardless of the gaming state Although it has been described, it may be different depending on the gaming state.

  Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern tables 202d and 202d3 for each deviation shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the fluctuation D and the fluctuation E are simply referred to as “complete outlier fluctuation”, and the “complete outlier fluctuation” is selected. In this case, the variation D and the variation E may be selected with a predetermined probability with reference to another table. Of course, also in this case, a table corresponding to the number of holding balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed either the left or right through gate 67. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, it is determined to be a hit when the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5-153", and the symbol "o" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) in the second symbol display device 83. At the same time as the light is displayed, the motorized part of the second starting port 64b is operated, and the second starting port 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) While being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter etc. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting of (variation effect) and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The award ball number table 202e of the ROM 202 is a table that defines the number of award balls to be paid out when the balls enter the ball (winning) for each winning opening 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a. Here, with reference to FIG. 9, the details of the winning balls number table 202e will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the winning number table 202e.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the prize ball number table 202e, as the "starting opening type", the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the special winning opening 65a. Is defined, and for each winning opening, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is specified. Specifically, in the winning balls number table 202e, the winning balls number 3 is associated with the first starting opening 64a, the winning balls number 2 is associated with the second starting opening 64b, and the first ordinary winning The number of winning balls 8 is associated with the mouth 63a, the number of winning balls 8 is associated with the second ordinary winning hole 63b, and the number of winning balls 12 is associated with the large winning hole 65a.

  The winning balls number table 202e defines the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning hole for all winning holes provided on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when a winning opening is provided in addition to the above winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a, the winning ball number table 202e including the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening. Is defined.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the number of winning balls is the same between the first ordinary winning opening 63a and the second ordinary winning opening 63b. Therefore, in the prize ball number table 202e, the first ordinary winning opening 63a and the second ordinary winning opening 63b are combined to define the "starting opening type" as the "normal winning opening" and correspond to the "normal winning opening". The number of winning balls may be defined as eight. If the number of winning balls in the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b is the same as "3", then the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b are aligned in the winning balls number table 202e. The "starting opening type" may be defined as "starting opening", and the number of winning balls may be defined in association with the "starting opening".

  The prize ball number table 202 e is transmitted to the item ratio management chip 207 in the initialization process of the MPU 201 executed when the main controller 110 is powered on, and the item ratio management chip 207 uses the item Used when calculating the ratio.

  The trigger information data 202 f is data that defines the timing (trigger) at which the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio. Although the details will be described later, the character ratio management chip 207 calculates the character ratio at the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202 f.

  The combination ratio management chip 207 corresponds to three timings (triggers) as timings (triggers) for calculating the combination ratio. The first is the number of balls emitted, and the item ratio management chip 207 calculates an item ratio each time the number of balls fired reaches a predetermined number of balls. The second is time, and the item ratio management chip 207 calculates an item ratio when a predetermined time is reached. The third is the game time, and the item ratio management chip 207 calculates the item ratio when the game time by the player has passed a predetermined time.

  The trigger information data 202 f defines information indicating any of “number of shots”, “time”, and “game time” as calculation timing (trigger) of the item ratio in the item ratio management chip 207.

  The trigger information data 202 f also defines information indicating a “predetermined number of balls” at which it is time to calculate an accessory ratio when information indicating “number of shots” is defined. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "number of shots" and information indicating 500 spheres as "predetermined number of spheres", the feature ratio is determined each time the number of firing balls reaches 500. In the management chip 207, the feature ratio is calculated.

  When information indicating “time” is defined, the trigger information data 202 f also defines information indicating “predetermined time” at which to calculate the role ratio. For example, when the information indicating “time” is defined in the trigger information data 202 f and the information indicating “12 o'clock, 17 o'clock, 19 o'clock, 22 o'clock as“ predetermined time ”, the time is 12 o'clock At the timings of 17 o'clock, 19 o'clock, and 22 o'clock, the bonus ratio is calculated in the bonus ratio management chip 207.

  The trigger information data 202 f defines information indicating “predetermined time” at which it is time to calculate the role ratio when information indicating “playing time” is defined. For example, when the trigger information data 202 f defines information indicating “playing time” and information indicating “two hours as“ predetermined time ”, the bonus ratio management chip 207 is displayed every two hours of playing time. The feature ratio is calculated at.

  The trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the prize ratio management chip 207 in the initialization process of the MPU 201 executed when the main controller 110 is powered on, together with the prize ball number table 202e, and the prize ratio The management chip 207 is used to determine a trigger for calculating the feature ratio.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area where the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply unit 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off (including when a power outage occurs, the same applies hereinafter), the power outage signal SG1 output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201. By this input, power off occurrence information is set by NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) to be executed. Then, when it is determined in the main processing (FIG. 17) of the MPU 201 that power generation interruption information is present, the stack pointer at that time and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 20), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 19) when the power is turned on.

  The RAM 203 further includes a holding ball number counter 203a, a holding ball storage area 203b, a holding ball execution area 203c, a first one counter 203d, a first two counter 203e, a first one counter 203f, a second two counter 203g, and a large winning opening counter 203h, out. It has at least a counter 203i.

  The holding ball number counter 203a is a starting opening of either the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Count the number of holding balls (number of waits) of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of entering the ball (start prize winning) up to 4 times Counter. The holding ball number counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process (S616 in FIG. 16) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S202 and S203 in FIG. 12). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by one each time the variable effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 13).

  The value of the holding ball number counter 203a (that is, the holding ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S205 of FIG. 12). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the starting winning is detected and the holding ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of balls for holding of the variation effect that is held for the main control device 110 by the number of balls for holding command. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 can manage the number of holdings of the variable effect without accessing the main control device 110. Also, every time when the start winning is detected, the main ball controller 110 transmits a ball number command for holding balls to the sound lamp control device 113 so that the number of holding balls of the fluctuation effect managed in the sound lamp control device 113 is noise. Even if the main ball control unit 110 deviates from the actual number of balls held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of the etc., it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the ball number command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display holding ball number command for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 each time the number of holding balls internally managed changes. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held balls number pattern in the number-of-held balls display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held balls command for display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits the holding ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, not only the value of the holding ball number counter 203a added by 1 in the holding ball number command but The first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) in conjunction with the start winning combination triggered by the addition of the holding ball number counter 203a. Each value of C3, fluctuation type counter CS1 is also included.

  That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the change type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 is , And is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the command of the number of holding balls.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the holding ball number command are changed based on the respective values Before the effect is executed, it is read ahead and it is judged before the execution of the variable effect that the change effect will be (whether the jackpot, the fluctuation time, etc.). And based on the judgment result by the pre-reading, execution of various performance can be decided now.

  The storage ball storage area 203b includes a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 and a change type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of the start winning. It is a memory for storing each value individually. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won (start winning) into either of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), each counter from the counter buffer The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained and stored in the holding ball storage area 203b. The storage ball storage area 203b has four storage areas (storage first to fourth) so that data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. 4 areas) (see FIG. 7).

  The holding ball execution area 203c is data to be referred to in processing such as a big hit lottery and setting of fluctuation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 Memory) for storing values.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, in order to execute processing such as a jackpot lottery and setting of fluctuation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the holding ball storage area 203b described above, the data corresponding to one starting winning combination is the holding ball execution area 203c. Shift to Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7 again, details of the holding ball storage area 203b and the holding ball execution area 203c will be described. The holding ball storage area 203b and the holding ball execution area 203c are the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a big hit lottery and setting of fluctuation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Used by

  In the setting of the variation display (variation production) of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, and the first used for determining the jackpot type A hit type symbol counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the stop type at the time of removal, and a change type counter CS1 used to determine the change pattern are used. In the holding ball storage area 203b, each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball wins (start winning) to any one of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b. Store each value.

  The holding ball storage area 203b is configured of four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas). The first per-random-number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the first per-random-number counter C1 and the first per-class-type counter C2 are stored in four storage areas (reserved first to fourth areas) respectively A type counter storage area 203b2 per unit, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are one holding ball storage area. Although provided in 203 b, a plurality of holding ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203 b 1, 203 b 2, 203 b 3 and 203 b 4 may be provided in any of the holding ball storage areas.

  As described above, in the holding ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) to the second starting opening 64b is stored up to 4 times However, in that case, data are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reservation areas (first to fourth reserved areas). That is, as the area number decreases, data corresponding to the start winning combination that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data that corresponds to the oldest starting winning combination in time is stored.

  On the other hand, the holding ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. In the holding ball execution area 203c, similarly to the holding ball storage area 203b, the first hit random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are stored. A first collision type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided.

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect comes, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the first holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b is stored in the holding ball It shifts to each area 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c. Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 17), and a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result decide. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variable display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and the stop type.

  Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, and are also notified to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113. . Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start the execution of the variation effect, the random number value of the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the first holding area to the first random number counter storage area 203c1 of the holding ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number value in the first type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first type counter storage area 203c2, and the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. The random number value of the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4.

  Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203c is completed, the first holding area becomes empty, so it is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed to pack data in an area (first to third) having a small area number. In the present embodiment, in the holding ball storage area 203b, data is shifted only for the holding areas (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

  Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the holding ball number counter 203a when the judgment of the start of the change effect is made is "4" and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203b. Do. In this state, when the data of the holding first area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c and the holding first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 makes the data of the other areas (second to fourth) an area, respectively. Shift to an area (first to third) with one smaller number. That is, the data of the holding second area is shifted to the holding first area, the data of the holding third area is shifted to the holding second area, and the data of the holding fourth area is shifted to the holding third area.

  Also, for example, if the value of the holding ball number counter 203a when the judgment of the start of the change effect is made is “2”, the MPU 201 shifts only the data of the holding second area to the holding first area. , End the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift process is not performed on the reserved areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of times of data shift can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

  Note that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the reserved areas (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area with a smaller area number, respectively. In that case, since it is unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the reserved area (second to fourth), it is possible to facilitate the creation of the program.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The start 1 counter 203d is a counter for counting the number of balls winning in the first starting opening 64a, the start 2 counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls winning in the second starting opening 64b, a counter 1 counter 203f. A counter that counts the number of balls that have won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a, a counter that counts the number of balls that have won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b, a large winning opening counter 203h The counter for counting the number of balls winning in the winning opening 65a, the out counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game) is there. Each of these counters 203d to 203i is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process (S616 in FIG. 16) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on.

  Also, the MPU 201 performs the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed every two milliseconds, the start port 205a and the start port 205b, and the normal port 1 The first starting port switch 208a, the second starting port switch 208b, the first ordinary winning port switch 208c, and the second ordinary winning port switch 208d with reference to the port 205c, the normal port 2 205d, the special winning port 205e and the out port 205f. In each of the special winning opening switch 208e and the out switch 208f, it is determined whether or not a ball is detected. And, when there is a prize in any winning opening (a ball is detected in the corresponding switch), the counter corresponding to the winning port in which the winning is found is incremented by one, and the ball is turned off at the out switch 208f. Is detected, the out counter 203i is incremented by one.

  The counting of the number of spheres in the counters 203d to 203i is continuously performed for 0.5 seconds. When 0.5 seconds have passed, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are used as the winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is set as the out information in the bonus ratio management chip 207 together with the information indicating the gaming state at that time. Be done. When the setting of the values of the counters 203d to 203i in the item ratio management chip 207 is completed, the values of these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to zero, and again, the winning openings for the next 0.5 seconds are won The number of balls played is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won in each winning opening at every 0.5 second interval and counts the number of balls that have been won in each winning opening. The number (ie, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, as described later, the item ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until it is time to calculate the item ratio, so that it is not possible for the first time after the power is turned on. The number of balls that have won in each winning opening until the timing to calculate the item ratio or until the timing to calculate the next item ratio after the last calculating the item ratio is the winning opening It counts every time, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game).

  As described above, since the number of winning balls to the winning opening actually detected by the MPU 201 is input from the MPU 201 to the bonus ratio management chip 207, the bonus ratio management chip 207 is used in the actual game. You can accurately grasp the number of balls that are recognized as winning.

  Also, temporarily, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won in each winning opening, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). If you do not perform this, and perform these counts only with the item ratio management chip 207, the item ratio management chip 207 will give a prize to each winning opening at a short interval (for example, an interval of 2 milliseconds), and guide to the ball discharge path These balls must be monitored, which may increase processing load and power consumption.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, these counting results are set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 at intervals of 0.5 seconds according to the counting of the MPU 201. Each winning combination is from the time the power is turned on until the timing at which the feature ratio is calculated for the first time, or from the previous calculation of the feature ratio to the time at which the feature ratio is calculated next The number of balls won in the mouth may be counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game) may be counted. Therefore, increase in processing load and power consumption in the item ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts, for each winning opening, the number of balls that have won in each winning opening, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) In order to monitor, for example, winnings to each winning opening and balls guided to the ball discharging path at intervals of 2 milliseconds, these monitorings are primarily the main game, such as a jackpot lottery or a prize ball judgment. It is necessary to perform such control, and processing is originally performed at 2 millisecond intervals and short time intervals. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the firing interval of the balls fired to the game area by the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is about 0.6 seconds, each winning opening counted in 0.5 second intervals is The number of balls won and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game) are in most cases 0 or 1 ball, and at most several balls Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, the capacity increase of the RAM 203 can be suppressed by the process of this counting. Therefore, in MPU 201, the number of balls winning in each winning opening in 0.5 seconds is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path (ie, balls used in the game) Even if the process of counting the number of

  The feature ratio management chip 207 is provided with a CPU 261, a buffer 262, a first reading memory 263, a second reading memory 264, a setting register 265, and a real time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") 266. They are connected to one another via a bus 206. The bus 206 is also connected to the MPU 201 and the inspection terminal 207a.

  Further, a large capacity capacitor 267 is connected to the item ratio management chip 207. The capacitor 267 is charged while power is supplied to the main controller 110, and when the power supply to the main controller 110 is stopped due to a power failure or the like, the item ratio management chip 207 The power stored in the capacitor 267 is used to execute the process associated with the power-off. Note that instead of the capacitor 267, a chargeable / dischargeable secondary battery may be connected to the feature ratio management chip 207.

  The CPU 261 is an arithmetic device that controls the operation of the item ratio management chip 207 and executes the control program stored in the ROM (not shown) provided in the item ratio management chip 207 to execute the role of the pachinko machine 10. Management of the product ratio, etc. is performed by the role ratio management chip 207. By performing management of the role ratio in the role ratio management chip 207 by the CPU 261 and the like, by changing the software, it is possible to flexibly cope with the function change or the specification change of the role ratio management chip 207.

  The RTC 266 outputs the current time. The RTC 266 incorporates a chargeable / dischargeable secondary battery (not shown), and the secondary battery is used as a power supply, and the RTC 266 outputs the current time while constantly cutting the current time. The time output by the RTC 266 is referred to by the CPU 261 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio set by the trigger setting area 265 b is “time”, and the time indicated by the RTC 266 is the trigger setting area If it matches or exceeds the "predetermined time" set in 265b, a process of calculating the bonus ratio is executed. In addition, although the details will be described later, the first reading memory 263 for the jackpot middle data 263g, the open data 263h, the error middle data 263i, and the overtime data 263j respectively the jackpot information, the door open information, the error middle information or When out-of-time information is added, the time at that time is read out from the RTC 266, and the read out time is added to each data together with each information.

  The buffer 262 is a memory for temporarily storing various information set by the MPU 201, and is configured by a static random access memory (SRAM) that is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing data. The first buffer 262a, the second buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, the special winning hole buffer 262e, the out buffer 262f, the middle hit buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, the error buffer 262i, etc. Is at least provided.

  The value of the start 1 counter 203 d set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the start 1 buffer 262 a. The value of the start 2 counter 203 e set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the start 2 buffer 262 b. The value of the common 1 counter 203f set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the common 1 buffer 262c. The value of the common counter 203g set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the common buffer 262d. The value of the special winning opening counter 203h set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the special winning opening buffer 262e. The value of the out counter 203i set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the out buffer 262f.

  If the gaming state set by the MPU 201 at a 0.5 second interval is in the middle of a big hit, the information (big hit information) is stored in the big hit middle buffer 262 g. When the gaming state set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is during the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, the information (door open information) is stored in the open buffer 262h. In the error buffer 262i, when the gaming state set by the MPU 201 at an interval of 0.5 seconds is in error, the information (error information) is stored.

  In the item ratio management chip 207, setting (writing) is performed by the MPU 201 on various buffers provided in the buffer 262, and when an interrupt signal is received from the MPU 201, the CPU 261 performs setting information reception processing described later (FIG. See). The setting information reception process counts the number of balls won for each winning opening on the basis of various information set in the buffer 262, and the balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls fired to the game area) The number of these balls is counted in the first reading memory 263 and information on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

  The setting register 265 is a register for setting a setting value necessary for the operation of the item ratio management chip 207. The setting register 265 is provided with at least an award ball number data setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b.

  In the award ball number data setting area 265a, an award ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set. In the trigger setting area 265b, trigger information data 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set. When the main controller 110 is powered on, the winning balls number table 202 e and the trigger information data 202 f are transmitted to the role ratio management chip 207. Then, the CPU 261 sets the award ball number table 202e in the award ball number data setting area 265a, and sets the trigger information data 202f in the trigger setting area 265b.

  The winning balls number table 202e set in the winning balls number data setting area 265a is referred to by the CPU 261 when calculating the character object ratio. Here, the number of winning balls when each winning opening is won is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is stored in the ROM 202 conventionally. The information on the number of winning balls is sent to the prize ratio management chip 207 each time the power is supplied, and the winning balls number table 202 e stored in the ROM 202 is sent to the prize ratio data setting area of the prize ratio management chip 207. By setting 265 a, it is not necessary to store information on the number of winning balls different for each model in the ROM of the bonus ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the manufacturing of the property ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. If the model of the pachinko machine is different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same item ratio management chip 207, the combination ratio can be accurately calculated.

  The trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is also referred to by the CPU 261, and it is determined whether it is a timing (trigger) to calculate the role ratio shown in the trigger information data 202f, and the timing is reached. If it is determined, a process of calculating an accessory ratio is executed. Here, since the timing (trigger) of the calculation of the item ratio is physically limited to the storage capacity which can record the information on the item ratio in the item ratio management chip 207, the item ratio management chip 207 It is preferable not to fix the timing but to consider the jackpot probability and the probability change ratio in the pachinko machine 10 or the like. As in the case of the pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f defining the timing of calculation of the part ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability and the probability change ratio in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202 and supplied with power. Every time the trigger information data 202f is sent to the role ratio management chip 207 to the ROM 202, the feature ratio management chip 207 makes it possible to use the feature at a timing that matches the jackpot probability or the probability change ratio in the pachinko machine 10. The ratio and the continuous character ratio can be calculated and stored in the second reading memory 264.

  It should be noted that only the award ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f transmitted in the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on are the award ball number data. The setting area 265 a and the trigger setting area 265 b are configured to be set. The startup process is a so-called boot process and is a non-user program that is not programmed by the user. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent player from setting the lie number ball table and the trigger information data for the number ball data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

  The first reading memory 263 is a memory for temporarily storing the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 while accumulating, until the feature ratio calculation timing. The first reading memory 263 is configured of a volatile memory capable of reading and writing data, such as an SRAM. Note that the first reading memory 263 may be configured by a dynamic random access memory (DRAM), which is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing larger amounts of data.

  The first reading memory 263 includes a first counter 263a, a second counter 263b, a first counter 263c, a second counter 263d, a special winning opening counter 263e, an out counter 263f, a middle hit data 263g, an open data 263h, an error Data 263i and overtime data 263j are at least stored. These counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to 0 by the CPU 261 based on an initialization signal transmitted from the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on ( See S710 in FIG. 18).

  Further, these counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are referred to by the character ratio calculating process executed by the CPU 261 when it is time to calculate the character ratio, and necessary processing is executed. After that, the CPU 261 initializes them all to 0 again (S744 in FIG. 21). Thus, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored again in the first reading memory 263 until it is time to calculate the feature ratio next time. .

  The first counter 263a is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls won in the first starting opening 64a until the timing of calculating the item ratio. When the value of the start counter 203d indicating the number of balls won in the first start port 64a for 0.5 seconds is set in the start buffer 262a by the MPU 201, the value set in the start buffer 262a by the CPU 261 is set. (That is, the number of balls having won the first starting opening 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263a.

  The start 2 counter 263b is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls won in the second starting opening 64b until the timing of calculating the item ratio. When the value of the start 2 counter 203e indicating the number of balls winning in the first starting opening 64a for 0.5 seconds is set in the start 2 buffer 262b by the MPU 201, the value set in the start 2 buffer 262b is determined by the CPU 261 (That is, the number of balls having won the second starting opening 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 2 counter 263b.

  The common counter 263c is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a until the timing of calculating the item ratio. When the value of the general counter 1 203 f indicating the number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63 a for 0.5 seconds is set by the MPU 201 in the general buffer 262 c, the CPU 261 sets the value in the general buffer 262 c. The value (that is, the number of balls having won the first normal winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the counter 1 263c.

  The counter 2 263 d is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won in the second ordinary winning opening 63 b until the timing of calculating the item ratio. When the value of the common counter 203g indicating the number of balls won in the second normal winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds is set in the common buffer 262d by the MPU 201, the CPU 261 sets the value in the common buffer 262d. The value (that is, the number of balls having won the second normal winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the counter 2 263d.

  The special winning opening counter 263 e is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won in the special winning opening 65 a before the timing of calculating the item ratio. When the value of the special winning opening counter 203h indicating the number of balls winning in the special winning opening 65a for 0.5 seconds is set in the special winning opening buffer 262e by the MPU 201, the CPU 261 sets it in the special winning opening buffer 262e. The value (that is, the number of balls winning the big winning opening 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the big winning opening counter 263e.

  The out counter 263 f is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls fired to the game area) until the timing of calculating the item ratio. When the value of the out counter 203i indicating the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 0.5 seconds is set in the out buffer 262f by the MPU 201, the value set in the out buffer 262f by the CPU 261 (that is, 0 The number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 5 seconds is added to the out counter 263f. When the trigger for calculating the character object ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is the "number of shots", this out counter 263f is referred to, and the number of balls indicated by the out counter 263f (number of shots) is the trigger setting area When the "predetermined number of balls" set to 265b is reached or more, the CPU 261 executes a process of calculating the character ratio.

  The jackpot middle data 263 g is the jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has become a jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become a jackpot by the time the feature ratio is calculated and the time at that time It is the data defined together. When the MPU 201 sets the jackpot information indicating that the jackpot is being played as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the jackpot middle buffer 262 g, the CPU 261 controls the jackpot information together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266, the jackpot Medium data is added to 263g.

  The opening data 263h indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is open when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is opening the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (door) before the timing to calculate the character ratio. It is the data which specified the door opening information which shows that it became a state with the time at that time. When the door opening information indicating that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open is set as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the opening buffer 262h by the MPU 201, the door opening information is displayed by the CPU 261. Are added to the open data 263 h in conjunction with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

  The in-error data 263i is in-error information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in error if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in error before the timing of calculating the item ratio. It is the data specified together with the time of. When the MPU 201 sets an in-error information indicating that an error is being made as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the in-error buffer 262i, the in-error information is matched by the CPU 261 with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. , During error is added to the data 263i.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the overtime data 263j is set (written) to the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 in a late-night time zone (for example, from midnight to 6 o'clock in the morning) which is usually outside business hours. It is data in which overtime information indicating that an operation has been performed late at night is defined together with the time at that time. When the setting (writing) to the buffer 262 is performed by the MPU 201, the time at that time is read from the RTC 266 by the CPU 261, and when it is determined that the time is in the late-night time zone, the overtime information is The current time indicated by the RTC 266 is added to the overtime data 263 j.

The second reading memory 264 is configured of a non-volatile memory capable of reading and writing data, for example, a flash memory. The second reading memory 264 only needs to store the stored data even while the power is turned off, and it is also possible to use a ferroelectric memory (FeRAM: Ferroelectric Random Access Memory), a magnetoresistive RAM, or the like other than the flash memory. (MRAM: magnetoresistive random access memory), resistance change memory (ReRAM: resistive random)
(Access Memory) etc. may be comprised. In addition, while the second reading memory 264 is configured by the DRAM, the backup voltage is continuously supplied from the power supply device 115 while the power is cut to the DRAM so that the data is held even while the power is cut. You may do it.

  In the second reading memory 264, at least an accessory ratio data 264a, a continuous character ratio data 264b, a fired ball number data 264c, and a game state data 264d are stored.

  The character ratio data 264a is data in which data representing the character ratio calculated at each timing (trigger) of calculating the character ratio is recorded together with the calculated time. The continuous service ratio data 264 b is data in which data representing the continuous service ratio calculated at the same timing (trigger) is recorded together with the calculated time.

  Here, the item ratio is paid out with the winning of the second starting opening 64b and the big winning opening 65a at which the item is operated out of the total number of balls (winning balls) paid out to the player. It shows the ratio of the number of balls (winning balls) and is set to 70% or less. Further, the continuous character ratio is a number of balls paid out in association with the winning of the large winning opening 65a in which the characters are successively operated out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player. Shows the ratio of the number of spheres, and is set to 60% or less.

  Essentially, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio refer to the above ratio when the game ball is subjected to a test shot for 10 hours, but here, in the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b Between the time when the power is turned on for the first time after the power is turned on, or between the previous timing and the current timing, at each timing (trigger) at which the feature ratio shown is calculated. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out with the winning of the second starting opening 64b and the big winning hole 65a out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out is calculated. It is recorded in the feature ratio data 264a along with the time of day. In addition, during the period from when the power is turned on to when the timing is reached for the first time, or among the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from the previous timing to the current timing, a big prize The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out with the winning of the mouth 65a is calculated, and is recorded in the continuous character ratio data 264b along with the time at that time.

  In addition, even when the power is turned off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used, and it is paid out while it is determined that the power is turned off from the timing (trigger) at which the nearest object ratio is calculated. Based on the number of balls (prize balls), the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated, and are respectively recorded in the character ratio data 264a or the continuous character ratio data 264b along with the time at that time. . As a result, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded, and thereafter, the character ratio and the continuous character without leaking even for the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off. The ratio can be calculated.

  The number of balls winning in the first starting opening 64a indicated by the first reading counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263 and the number of balls winning in the second starting opening 64b indicated by the opening second counter 263b The number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a indicated by the 1 counter 263c, the number of balls winning in the second ordinary winning opening 63b indicated by the second counter 263d, and the large number indicated by the large winning opening counter 263e The number of winning balls corresponding to each winning opening shown in the winning balls number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the winning balls number data setting area 265a for each of the winning balls in the winning holes 65a. The number of balls paid out for each winning opening can be calculated. And by totaling these, the total number of balls paid out to the player can be calculated.

  As a result, with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player, the number of balls paid out with the winning of the second starting opening 64b and the ball paid out with the winning of the big winning opening 65a. By calculating the ratio of the sum to the number of, it is possible to calculate the role ratio. In addition, it is possible to calculate the ratio of consecutive winnings by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out with the winning of the large winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player.

  The number of fired balls data 264 c is the total number of balls fired to the game area counted by the out counter 263 f of the first reading memory 263 and the time at that timing for each feature ratio calculation (trigger) It is the data recorded together. The total number of balls fired to the game area from when the power is turned on to when the timing is reached for the first time or from the previous timing to the current timing is indicated by the out counter 263 f. When it is time to calculate the feature ratio, the value of the out counter 263 f at that time is recorded in the firing ball number data 264 c together with the time at that time indicated by the RTC 266.

  The game state data 264d is the jackpot data 263g in the first reading memory 263, open data 263h, error data 263i and overtime data 263j stored jackpot information, door open information, error information and overtime information Are data recorded together with the time associated with each piece of information. The jackpot information stored in the jackpot middle data 263g, the open data 263h, the in-error data 263i and the overtime data 263j of the first reading memory 263 when it is time to calculate the feature ratio, the door open information, The in-error information and out-of-time information, and the time associated with each information are recorded by the CPU 261 in the gaming state data 264 d.

  At this time, for example, when the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot middle data 263g at intervals of less than one second, it means that the jackpot is continuously generated as the gaming state, and therefore the jackpot of the oldest time Only the information and its time are recorded in the gaming state data 264 d. Similarly, when information is stored in each data 263h to j at intervals of less than one second in the door open information, the error information and the overtime information, the information on the oldest time and the time Is recorded in the gaming state data 264 d. Thereby, the storage capacity required for the gaming state data 264 d can be reduced.

  When the jackpot information, the door open information, the error information and the overtime information are recorded in the gaming state data 264d, the CPU 261 arranges (sorts) the respective information from the information of the old time to the gaming state data 264d. Record. Then, when outputting the information recorded in the gaming state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 outputs the information in the order of recording. As a result, each information is output in order from the old time, so that the inspection device 300 can easily analyze the change in the gaming state with the passage of time by analyzing the information in the output order.

  However, the CPU 261 does not necessarily have to arrange the pieces of information from the information of the old time and store them in the gaming state data 264 d. In this case, when the information recorded in the gaming state data 264 d is output to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 may sequentially read information from the gaming state data 264 d from the information of the old time and transmit it to the inspection device 300. Each information may be output to the inspection apparatus 300 in the order of recording, and the inspection apparatus 300 may rearrange the received information from the information of the old time.

  Note that the jackpot information stored in the jackpot data 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i and the overtime data 263j of the first reading memory 263 correspond to the door opening information, the error information and the overtime information, respectively. All may be recorded in the game state data 264 d in combination with the attached time. Although the storage capacity required for the gaming state data 264 d is increased, by outputting this to the inspection device 300, it is possible to analyze the operating state of the pachinko machine 10 while observing the minute changes in the gaming state.

  Here, a predetermined number of pieces of information can be recorded on the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b and the fired ball number data 264c, respectively, regarding the character ratio, the continuous character ratio and the total number of balls fired to the game area For example, it is limited to 1024). Further, the total number of jackpot information, door open information, error information and overtime information that can be recorded in the gaming state data 264 d is also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). If a predetermined number of information has already been recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c or the gaming state data 264d, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is stored there. Is recorded. For example, the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d are respectively configured as ring buffers, and each manages a position where information is written on the ring buffer. The oldest information is prepared by separately preparing a memory in the second reading memory 264 or in a non-volatile memory provided separately from the second reading memory 264 and shifting the writing position by one each time the information writing is performed. Can be realized and the process of recording the latest information can be realized. As described above, an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264 can be suppressed by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in each data. In addition, when the information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit number, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded, and the analysis is performed by the inspection apparatus 300 including the state of the latest pachinko machine 10 It can be done. Incidentally, by preparing a memory for managing the position where the information is to be written on the ring buffer in the second reading memory 264, even after the power is turned off, after the power is supplied, the memory is managed. New information can be added and recorded from the continuation of the information stored up to.

  When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt is generated to the CPU 261, and the CPU 261 performs combination ratio data 264a, continuous combination ratio data 264b, and release which are recorded in the second reading memory 264. The ball number data 264 c and the gaming state data 264 d are sequentially transmitted to the inspection device 300. When transmitting each data 264a-d to the inspection apparatus 300, the CPU 261 records each information recorded in each data 264a-d (including recorded time information associated with each information). It reads out in order and transmits to inspection device 300. Since connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a causes an interrupt and processing of transmitting each information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300 is performed, the transmission is executed quickly, It can be completed. Therefore, the inspection apparatus 300 analyzes the character ratio and the continuous character ratio from the information received from the pachinko machine 10, and can quickly and easily find out the fraud from the character ratio and the continuous character ratio.

  Specifically, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 from now on does not satisfy the upper limit number of recordable information (the above-mentioned predetermined number) determined for each, the CPU 261 first gives information to the data. The information recorded from the position where the data was written to the position shown in the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information of the latest time is recorded) is sequentially read and inspected Send to device 300. On the other hand, in the data for transmitting information to the inspection apparatus 300, when the upper limit number (the above-mentioned predetermined number) of recordable information determined for each is satisfied, the position for writing the information is indicated by memory The position indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is to be written by shifting the reading position one by one sequentially from the position next to the selected position (that is, the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded) The information recorded up to the position at which the information of the latest time is recorded is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information is output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the information of the old time.

  Since the second reading memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, even if the power is turned off halfway, the second reading memory 264 records information on the role ratio etc. in the pachinko machine 10 Keep being done. Therefore, the inspection apparatus 300 can receive and analyze information on the feature ratio and the like including the information before the power is turned off.

  Here, among the fraudsters, the second starting opening 64b can be opened by fraudulently opening the motorized part of the second starting opening 64b or guiding the ball to the second starting opening 64b. There are things that try to increase the chance of winning a jackpot by increasing the number of wins. In addition, there are those that try to obtain many winning balls by opening the opening / closing plate of the big winning opening 65a illegally by some method or guiding the ball to the big winning opening 65a. In the case of such fraud, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio increase.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 is provided with the item ratio management chip 207, and in the item ratio management chip 207, winning information for each winning opening is obtained from the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the pachinko machine 10 are calculated at a predetermined timing and kept recorded. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207 a, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio recorded in the character ratio management chip 207 are output to the inspection device 300. Thus, by analyzing the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the inspection apparatus 300, if the cheating has been performed, the cheating can be found.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, information related to the number of balls fired to the game area and information related to the game state are also recorded in the feature ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched based on the information on the number of balls fired to the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

  Further, the item ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, and is housed in one substrate box 100 together with the MPU 201, the ROM 202, and the like. As a result, it is difficult for the fraudster to modify the winning information etc. input to the feature ratio management chip 207. Further, it is also difficult to falsify or delete the character ratio and the continuous character ratio recorded by the character ratio management chip 207. Therefore, high reliability can be maintained with respect to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated and output by the character ratio management chip 207.

  In addition, the feature ratio management chip 207 is provided with a first reading memory 263 and a second reading memory 264, and the first reading memory 263 counts the number of balls won for each winning opening, and the first reading memory 263 The feature ratio and the continuous feature ratio are calculated on the basis of the number of balls awarded for each winning opening counted in step b, and are recorded in the second reading memory 264. Here, the second reading memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, but generally a non-volatile memory requires a large amount of power for writing, takes time for writing, and is durable. There is a limit to the number of writes. The present embodiment separates the first reading memory 263 composed of a volatile memory and the second reading memory 264 composed of a non-volatile memory, so that, first, winning is achieved using the first reading memory 263. By performing processing for counting and storing the number of balls won for each mouth at high speed, it is possible to count the balls won for each winning opening without losing them. Then, from the number of balls awarded for each winning opening stored in the first reading memory 263 later, the symbol ratio and the continuous symbol ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264 at a predetermined timing ( By executing this for each trigger, it is possible to reduce the number of times of writing to the second reading memory 264, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems due to the configuration using the nonvolatile memory.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired at an interval of about 0.6 seconds with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 is an output of sound in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as illumination parts 29 to 33, and a display lamp 34). The setting of the display mode of the effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 such as the advance effect is controlled.

  The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the time presentation mode, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the frame button 22 is operated for the purpose other than the change of the stage, such as changing the effect mode of the super reach, the frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 displays an image according to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the frame button operation command.

  The RAM 223 indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and indicates that the fluctuation effect should be started in the on state. It has a change start flag (not shown) and the like.

  The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data reading and writing are performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1005 in FIG. 25). Then, when setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made, it is turned off (see S1102 in FIG. 26).

  The display control device 114 is a device for controlling the screen display of the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, and is an audio lamp for various screen displays such as variation display (variation effect) of the third symbol and jackpot effect at the time of big hit. It controls according to the command transmitted from control device 113 (main control device 110).

  The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have. The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 237, and the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236 are connected to the output side of the input port 237. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the jackpot lottery probability and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed by the third symbol display device Since the display control device 114 is a common part, cost reduction is achieved.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command and other various commands output from the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

  The character ROM 235 is a memory storing compressed data (character information) for effect such as a symbol (a background symbol or a third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The video RAM 234 is an area (not shown) for storing a plurality of character information read out from the character ROM 235 in a decompressed format to generate an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the plurality of decompressed characters It is a memory having a frame buffer area (not shown) for temporarily storing display data of one frame generated using at least a part of character information until the display is performed.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminal of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Accordingly, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 17. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started with power on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (with a 2 millisecond cycle in this embodiment) There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and the main process will be described.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be performed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, a command etc. to be sent to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, etc. is generated based on various processes, and temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

  For example, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 12) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the determination command, etc. set in the variation start process (FIG. 14) which is one of the variation process (see FIG. 13) and the variation process are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a ball emission signal set when emitting a ball in the process of S111 described later is transmitted to the emission control device 112.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the big winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is performed (S103). That is, the big winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified number of balls has won in the big winning opening 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the special winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a is repeatedly performed for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, symbol of "o" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball has passed through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the passing timing, and the variation of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 83 Display is implemented. Then, the second lottery is conducted based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the motorized accessory attached to the second starting opening 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

  Next, a switch reading process is performed (S106). That is, the state of the various switches 208 connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the acquired ball number to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. The details of the switch reading process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values. When ((in the present embodiment, 899, 99, 99, 198, and 250, respectively) are reached, they are cleared to 0, respectively. When the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the first random number counter C1 or The second random number counter C4 is read as an initial value, and the initial value is set to the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then, the first starting opening 64a And the starting winning a prize processing with the winning a prize to one starting opening of 2nd starting opening 64b is executed (S110). The details of the fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 13, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S111), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the Then, when the ball emission is on, in order to transmit a ball emission signal to the emission control device 112, the information of the ball emission signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the ball emission signal is transmitted to the emission control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

  Further, the other process (S112) includes a process of determining whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the error state. For example, although the information of the ball firing signal is set in the process of S111, the ball guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the ball fired to the game area) is detected by the out switch 208f for a predetermined time or more If not, it is determined that there is an error condition because there is a possibility of ball clogging. Further, when the payout abnormality signal is read in the processing of S102, it is determined that the payout of the ball is in the error state. Furthermore, when a large vibration is given to the pachinko machine 10 or when it is determined that the magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that the game is in error as there is a possibility that the game is cheating. .

  It should be noted that the judgment as to whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is given a large vibration is provided with a vibration sensing sensor for sensing the vibration in the pachinko machine 10, and the output of the vibration sensing sensor is inputted to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. In the process of S112, the output of the vibration sensor is read. In addition, to judge whether the magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a magnetic sensor that senses a change in magnetism, and the output of the magnetic sensor is input to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. It is carried out by reading the output of the magnetic sensor in the process of S112.

  If it is determined in the process of S112 that there is an error state, an error command including information on the error type is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. Then, a warning sound corresponding to the error type can be output from the voice output device 226, and the display lamp 34 can be turned on and blinked, and an image corresponding to the error type can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .

  Next, the switch reading process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the switch reading process (S106).

  In the switch reading process, first, each switch of the first start opening switch 208a, the second start opening switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the special winning opening switch 208e and the out switch 208f. The output is read by referring to the first port 205a, the second port 205b, the first port 205c, the second port 205d, the special winning port 205e and the out port 205f of the input / output port 205, and the first start port 64a, It is judged whether or not there is a winning to the second starting opening 64b, the first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, the large winning opening 65a, and the presence or absence of the ball guided to the ball discharging path, The winning detection information is stored (S151). The determination of one ball and one ball guided to the ball discharge path is performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the outputs of the switches 208a to 208f.

  Next, based on the winning detection information, among the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, and the special winning opening 65a, it is determined that a prize has been won by the process of S151. If there is a determined winning opening, it corresponds to the number of winning balls so that the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening on which the winning is made (that is, the number defined by the winning number table 202e) is paid out. The award ball command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S152). As a result, the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Then, based on the winning detection information, among the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, and the special winning opening 65a, it is determined that a prize has been won by the process of S151. When there is a determined winning opening, among the start 1 counter 203d, start 2 counter 203e, general 1 counter 203f, general 2 counter 203g, and special winning opening counter 203h, the counter corresponding to the winning opening on which winning is performed is 1 When it is determined that there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path while counting up, the out counter 203i is incremented by 1 (S153).

  Next, it is determined whether or not 0.5 seconds has elapsed since the winning information (information on the values of the counters 203d to i and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10) has been set to the feature ratio management chip 207 last time S154). As a result, if 0.5 seconds have not elapsed (S154: No), the switch reading process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that 0.5 seconds have elapsed (S154: Yes), the processing of S155 to S157 is executed. First, in the process of S155, the values of the start 1 counter 203d, the start 2 counter 203e, the counter 1 counter 203f, the counter 2 counter 203g, and the special winning opening counter 203h are winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is out information. Together with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of, is set in the character ratio management chip 207 (S155).

  As a result, the value of the start 1 counter 203 d is set in the start 1 buffer 262 a of the item ratio management chip 207, the value of the start 2 counter 203 e is set in the start 2 buffer 262 b of the object ratio management chip 207, and The value of 203f is set in the general-purpose buffer 262c of the character ratio management chip 207, the value of the general-purpose counter 203g is set in the general-purpose buffer 262d of the character ratio management chip 207, and the value of the special winning opening counter 203h is The value is set in the large winning opening buffer 262 e of the object ratio management chip 207, and the value of the out counter 203 i is set in the out buffer 262 f of the prize ratio management chip 207.

  As described above, counting of the number of balls in the counters 203d to 203i is continuously performed for 0.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds elapses, the value of the counters 203d to 203h becomes the winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i. Is set as the out information in the feature ratio management chip 207 together with the information indicating the gaming state at that time. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won in each winning opening at every 0.5 second interval and counts the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharging path. That is, the number of balls used in the game is counted, and the counted result is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, as described later, the item ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until it is time to calculate the item ratio, so that it is not possible for the first time after the power is turned on. The number of balls that have won in each winning opening until the timing to calculate the item ratio or until the timing to calculate the next item ratio after the last calculating the item ratio is the winning opening It counts every time, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game).

  Temporarily, the MPU 201 does not count the number of balls winning in each winning opening for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) If it is assumed that the item ratio management chip 207 alone performs these counts, even the item ratio management chip 207 is guided to the winning openings in each winning opening at short intervals (for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds) or to the ball discharge path. The sphere must be monitored, processing load may increase and power consumption may increase.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, these counting results are set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 at intervals of 0.5 seconds according to the counting of the MPU 201. Each winning combination is from the time the power is turned on until the timing at which the feature ratio is calculated for the first time, or from the previous calculation of the feature ratio to the time at which the feature ratio is calculated next The number of balls won in the mouth may be counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game) may be counted. Therefore, increase in processing load and power consumption in the item ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts, for each winning opening, the number of balls that have won in each winning opening, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) In order to monitor the winnings to each winning opening and the balls guided to the ball discharge path at intervals of 2 milliseconds when the timer interrupt process is executed, these monitorings are primarily a jackpot lottery or It is necessary to perform main control of the game such as award ball determination, and the processing is originally performed at 2 millisecond intervals and short time intervals. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the firing interval of the balls fired to the game area by the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is about 0.6 seconds, each winning opening counted in 0.5 second intervals is The number of balls won and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game) are in most cases 0 or 1 ball, and at most several balls Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, the capacity increase of the RAM 203 can be suppressed by the process of this counting. Therefore, in MPU 201, the number of balls winning in each winning opening in 0.5 seconds is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path (ie, balls used in the game) Even if the process of counting the number of

  The game states set by the process of S155 include, for example, a jackpot, an opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, and an error. Whether or not the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door open port 205g and confirming the output of the door open switch 208g.

  In addition, whether or not the game state is in error is based on the result of the process of S112 of the timer interrupt process. In the process of S155, when it is determined in the process of S112 that there is an error state, information indicating that the game state is in error is set in the role ratio management chip 207.

  If the game state set by the process of S155 includes a big hit, then the big hit information is stored in the big hit buffer 262g, and if the playing state includes the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, it is opened. If the door open information is stored in the middle buffer 262h and the playing state includes an error, the error middle information is stored in the error buffer 262i. Then, in the item ratio management chip 207, these pieces of information are finally recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information on the game state is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the information on the feature ratio. Therefore, the inspection apparatus 300 searches for the cause by referring to the information indicating the gaming state, when an inexplicable tendency is recognized in the symbol ratio while the symbol ratio of the pachinko machine 10 is analyzed. Can.

  After the process of S155, an interrupt signal is transmitted to the item ratio management chip 207 (S156). The item ratio management chip 207 executes setting information reception processing (see FIG. 19) to be described later based on this interrupt signal, and based on various information set in the buffer 262, a ball is won for each winning opening. The ball number is counted, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the ball shot to the game area) is counted, and the number of these balls is stored in the first reading memory 263 and the pachinko machine Information on ten gaming states is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

  After the process of S156, the start counter 203d corresponding to each winning opening, the start counter 203e, the common counter 203f, the common counter 203g, the special winning port counter 203h, and the out counter 203i corresponding to the out switch 208f are set to 0. Is initialized (S157), the switch reading process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to 0 by the process of S157, the number of balls winning in each winning opening in the next 0.5 seconds is counted again for each winning opening by counters 203d to 203h. Also, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game) is counted by the out counter 203i.

  In the process of S154, when the main process is executed for the first time after the power is supplied to the main control unit 110, the winning combination information (values of the counters 203d to i and pachinko After setting the information regarding the gaming state of 10), it is regarded that 0.5 seconds have elapsed (S154: Yes), and the process proceeds to S155. Thus, the number of balls that have won a prize in each winning opening detected before the power is turned off, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and set in the feature ratio management chip 207 at the time of power off On the condition that the values of the counters 203d to 203i of the RAM 203 which are not stored are held even during the power-off, they can be set to the combination rate management chip 207 immediately after the power is supplied. Therefore, in the item ratio management chip 207, it is possible to suppress the record leak of the winning information and the out information accompanying the power-off.

  Next, the start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S110). In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entry (start winning) into any one of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b, and if there is a starting winning, each counter C1 to C3, A process of storing (holding) the value of CS1 in the holding ball storage area 203b is executed. In addition, the value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be suspended is combined with the number of balls to be suspended, and processing for transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

  After executing the start winning process, the MPU 201 first determines whether the ball has won in the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b (start winning) (S201). Here, by the process of S151 of the switch reading process (refer to FIG. 11), the first starting opening switch 208a for detecting winning in the first starting opening 64a and the second starting for detecting winning in the second starting opening 64b. The result of the presence or absence of winning on the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b, which is determined based on the output signal from the opening switch 208b, is used.

  If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b (there is a starting winning combination) (S201: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (held by the main controller 110 It is determined whether or not the number N of holding balls of the fluctuating effect is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S202). Then, whether there is no winning on any of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b (S201: No), or even if there is a winning on the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b. If the number of holding balls N <4 (S202: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning on the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b (S201: Yes) and the number of holding balls N <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (pending The ball number N) is incremented by one (S203). Then, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) and provided in the holding sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area of the areas corresponding to the value indicated by the hold ball number counter 203a among the held first to fourth areas Each is reserved (stored) in 203 b 3 and the variation type counter storage area 203 b 4 (S 204).

  Specifically, when the value of the holding ball number counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the first holding area. In addition, if the value of the holding ball number counter 203a after the addition is "2", each storage area of the holding second area is stored, and if the value of the holding ball number counter 203a after addition is "3," the holding third area If the value of the holding ball number counter 203a after the addition is "4" in each of the storage areas, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the holding fourth area.

  Next, the value of the holding ball number counter 203a after addition by the process of S203 (the holding ball number N) and the first per random number counter C1 stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203b by the process of S204 A ring for command transmission provided with the ball holding ball number command in the RAM 203 to transmit the ball holding ball number command including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113 It sets to a buffer (S205). As a result, the ball holding ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the holding ball number symbol corresponding to the holding ball number N in the holding ball number display area Db (see FIG. 4) by receiving the holding ball number command. Do. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number-of-hold-balls command to pre-read before the variable effect based on the respective values is executed and which change effect is It is judged before the execution of the fluctuation production that it will be like (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will be the fluctuation time, etc.). And based on the judgment result by the pre-reading, execution of various performance can be decided now.

  Note that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball number command in the process of S205 may use the values themselves read from the counter buffer in the process of S204, or the pending ball storage area in the process of S204. The value stored (held) in 203b may be read.

  When the process of S205 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the variation process (S109) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S109). The fluctuation process (S109) is to control fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and fluctuation effects performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring (S301). The jackpot includes the middle of a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), the present processing ends.

  If the jackpot is not inside (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S302: No) Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S303: No), the present process is ended as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 only for a predetermined time, so the player can be made to visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation stop (S303: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (the holding ball number N of the fluctuation display being held in the main control unit 110) Whether or not is larger than 0 is determined (S304). As a result, if the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is judged that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, first, the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (pending The ball number N) is decremented by 1 (S305). This is because, in the fluctuation start process (S307), the execution of one of the fluctuation effects among the held fluctuation effects is started, so that the number of holding balls decreases by one.

  Next, the data stored in the holding ball storage area 203b is subjected to shift processing (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the reserved ball execution area 203c, ie, the first reserved area → the held sphere execution Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area 203c, holding second area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  After the data shift process of S306, the variation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of the various counters stored in the holding ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S307) Return to the timer interrupt process. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S304, when it is determined that the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (the holding ball number N) is 0 (S304: No), a demonstration effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81 It is determined whether or not it is in the process of demonstration (S308). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0 Determine that the interval is under demonstration.

  When it is determined that the demo is not underway (S308: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is being performed (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process as it is. The demonstration command set in the process of S309 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and voice is generated in the external output process (S101 of FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demonstration command, the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, as described above, the demonstration command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the change stop. Therefore, after the fluctuation stop, if the fluctuation display is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that the demo is not in progress in the process of S308 (S308: No), it is further determined whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped. The process may be executed, and the process of S309 may be executed to set the demo command when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the change stop. As a result, when there is no holding ball after stopping the change, it is possible to show the player the stop symbol of the stopped change effect for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration effect immediately.

  If it is determined in the process of S302 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether a changing time has elapsed (S310). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed If not (S310: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, a display mode for lighting the red LED is set.

  The variation process is executed every two milliseconds, but if the illumination color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the illumination color of the LED. Therefore, the counter (not shown) is incremented by one each time the fluctuation processing is executed so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 200 when the counter reaches 200. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set to the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is preset by the variation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. In the variation start process, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c by the process of S306, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter C2 Depending on the value of, the pattern will be 15R probability variation big hit after big hit (probability variation big hit to transition to high probability state after 15 round maximum number of rounds) or 2R probability variation big hit (maximum round number is high probability after 2 round big hit) It is determined whether the symbol to be the transitioning probability variation jackpot) or the symbol to be the 15R normal jackpot (the maximum round number is a jackpot transitioning to a low probability state after 15 round jackpots).

  In this embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the jackpot becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and the red LED and the blue LED when the 15R normal jackpot is hit Turn on the LED. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that each LED is released from lighting when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for several seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37 Then, in order to display the confirmation, the confirmation command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and to display the stop symbol. Do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a variation start process (S307) which is one process of the variation process performed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S307). In this variation start process (S307), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area, a lottery for "big hit" or "out of place" (big hit lottery) is performed and the first symbol display device 37 And the effect pattern (the fluctuation pattern) etc of the fluctuation production which is done with the 3rd design indicator 81 is decided.

  In the fluctuation start process, first, a big hit is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c and the big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A). A lottery (pass / fail judgment) process is performed (S401).

  Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at each time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low probability state, "7, 307, 582" is defined as the jackpot random number value. In addition, when the gaming state (mode) which the pachinko machine 10 can obtain is in a high probability state, “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420 , 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are defined as jackpot random number values.

  In the process of S401, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area is compared with the big hit random number value defined in the big hit random number table 202a, and they match In the case, it is determined that the jackpot. As a result of the process of S401, when it is determined that it is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c, and the big hit type table 202b (FIG. 8 (b) The display mode at the time of jackpot is set based on (refer to) and (S402).

  In this process, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c by the jackpot type table 202b, that is, the high probability state after the maximum round number is 15 rounds of jackpot 15R probability variation jackpot to transition to 15R, maximum round number transition to low probability state after 15 round jackpot, or 2R probability variation jackpot to shift maximum number of rounds to high probability state after 2 round jackpot, or It is determined. And the display mode (lighting state of LED37a) at the time of the big hit in the 1st symbol display device 37 is set based on the judged big hit type.

  In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, by setting the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) directly as the stop type 3 The display mode at the time of a big hit in the symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to the process of S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display in the display mode at the time of the big hit is determined. In the determination of the variation pattern at the time of big hit, first, the variation pattern table 202d1 for big hit to be used (refer to FIG. 8 (c)) is selected according to the number of pending balls indicated by the pending ball number counter 203a. Then, when 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S402, it is stored in the holding ball execution area 203c in the “15R jackpot common” group of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, any one of the fluctuation A, the fluctuation B, and the fluctuation C is selected.

  In addition, when 2R probability variation jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the variation type stored in the holding ball execution area 203c in the “2R probability variation jackpot dedicated” group of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 The variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. In this embodiment, only the 2R variation is selected in this case. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation A, fluctuation B, fluctuation C, 2R fluctuation) and fluctuation time is previously defined by a table or the like.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not the big hit in the process of S401 (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c, the third As the stop type to be displayed in the symbol display device 81, any one of the front and rear end reach, the reach other than the front and rear end, and the complete end is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type is in accordance with whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state. The table is set to be different.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to the process of S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state at the normal time except for the short time state, a variation pattern table for separation (normal) corresponding to the number of holding balls indicated by the holding ball number counter 203a. 202d2 (see FIG. 8D) is selected. Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state or in a high probability state at the time of probability change, the variation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability change) corresponding to the number of holding balls at that time indicated by the holding ball number counter 203a FIG. 8 (e) is selected.

  Then, when complete removal is set as the stop type in the process of S404, in the “complete removal only” group of the selected variation pattern table 202d2 for variation (normal) or the variation pattern table 202d3 for variation (positive variation) The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the sphere execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, the variation D or the variation E is selected.

  In addition, when reach other than back and forth reach and reach other than back and forth are set as the stop type in the processing of S402, “reach common” of the selected out-of-order (normal) change pattern table 202d2 or out-of-range (probability change) change pattern table 202d3 In the group, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, the fluctuation A, the fluctuation B, and the fluctuation C are selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relation between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time which is previously defined by a table or the like.

  In the process of S406, based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the fluctuation pattern is set via the audio lamp control apparatus 113 (S406). Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S402 or S404 via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S415), and the process returns to the variation process. The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) to be executed next, these commands are voiced. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based on the command, and transmits the same to the display control device 114.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 16, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S614. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S605). If not stored (S605: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S614 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S614.

  As described later in the process of S706 in FIG. 17, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S614, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S614). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 203, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S615, S616) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S615, S616) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S 615, S 616) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S615, S616), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S615), and then an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S616). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), the occurrence information of the power-off is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S607: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S608). Then, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of the driving power shutoff is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S610, an initialization signal is transmitted to the role ratio management chip 207 (S610). Thus, the item ratio management chip 207 receives the initialization signal, and executes initialization processing such as initializing all of the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 to 0 (S711 in FIG. 18). The role ratio management chip 207 is initialized to be able to manage the role ratio.

  Next, the information of the winning balls number table 202e is transmitted to the prize ratio management chip 207 (S611). As a result, in the prize ratio management chip 207, the award ball number table 202e is set in the award ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize in the case where there is a prize in each winning opening indicated by the award ball number table 202e. Based on the number of balls, an item ratio and a continuous item ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

  Here, the number of winning balls when each winning opening is won is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is stored in the ROM 202 conventionally. The information on the number of winning balls is sent to the prize ratio management chip 207 each time the power is supplied, and the winning balls number table 202 e stored in the ROM 202 is sent to the prize ratio data setting area of the prize ratio management chip 207. By setting 265 a, it is not necessary to store information on the number of winning balls different for each model in the ROM of the bonus ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the manufacturing of the property ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Further, when the model of the pachinko machine is different, it is sufficient to change the ROM 202, and even if pachinko machines of different models use the same item ratio management chip 207, the combination ratio can be accurately calculated.

  Next, the information of the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the role ratio management chip 207 (S612). As a result, the trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b in the item ratio management chip 207, and when it becomes the timing (trigger) to calculate the item ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f, the pachinko machine 10 Item ratio and continuous item ratio are calculated.

  Here, since the timing (trigger) of the calculation of the item ratio is physically limited to the storage capacity which can record the information on the item ratio in the item ratio management chip 207, the item ratio management chip 207 It is preferable not to fix the timing but to consider the jackpot probability and the probability change ratio in the pachinko machine 10 or the like. As in the case of the pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f defining the timing of calculation of the part ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability and the probability change ratio in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202 and supplied with power. Every time the trigger information data 202f is sent to the role ratio management chip 207 to the ROM 202, the feature ratio management chip 207 makes it possible to use the feature at a timing that matches the jackpot probability or the probability change ratio in the pachinko machine 10. The ratio and the continuous character ratio can be calculated and stored in the second reading memory 264.

  After the process of S612, the interrupt is permitted (S613). And, it shifts to the main processing which it mentions later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the process of updating the counter and the process at power-off are roughly divided.

  In the main processing, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S701: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1 and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S702, S703).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 10) (S703), and the process proceeds to S701.

  Here, while this main processing is being performed, the timer interrupt processing described with reference to FIG. 10 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the big hit, execution to control the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is performed, and if there is passage of the ball to the through gate 67, display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 83 is performed. In the jackpot lottery performed when variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random number values to be compared with the acquired first random number counter C1 depending on whether the high probability state or the low probability state Will be different. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, and changes according to the state of the occasional game.

  The above-described processes of S702 and S703, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly. . In particular, by updating the first initial random number counter CINI1 and the second initial random number counter CINI2 at random, update of the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C4 using these as initial values of update Can have randomness.

  In the process of S701, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. Since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 15 is executed, the process at the time of the power-off after S704 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S704), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmits the power-off information to the role ratio management chip 207 (S705). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S706), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S707), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  The process of S701 is executed at the end of one cycle of the processes of S702 and S703, which is performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. As a result, in the main processing of main controller 110, various settings by timer interrupt processing are finished, and the occurrence of power-off is confirmed at the timing when the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is finished. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process ends. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S701.

  Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S701. As a result, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  In the present embodiment, the processing to be executed periodically is executed by timer interrupt processing, and in the main processing, updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is executed during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. A part or all of the process being executed in the timer interrupt process may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main process. For example, the prize ball counting signal and payout abnormal signal reading process (S102) executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment, the large opening opening and closing process (S103), the second symbol control process (S105), and the switch reading A part or all of the process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

  In this case, a step of determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed in the main processing is provided, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the processing to be executed every predetermined time is executed. The updating of the counters CINI1, CINI2 and CS1 may be performed regardless of the presence or absence of a predetermined time. As a result, although updating of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is performed during the remaining time of the process to be performed every predetermined time, the process to be performed every predetermined time is performed according to the state of the game Since the time taken to change varies, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 can be updated at random even with this configuration.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the CPU 261 is roughly divided into an accessory ratio management main processing activated upon power-on, and winning information and the like set by the MPU 201, and setting information reception executed based on an interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 thereafter. There are processing and inspection result output processing executed based on the inspection device 300 connected to the inspection terminal 207a.

  First, with reference to FIG. 18, the bonus ratio management main processing executed by the CPU 261 in the bonus ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the accessory ratio management main processing. The accessory ratio management main process is activated when the accessory ratio management chip 207 is supplied with power.

  When the role ratio management main process is executed, it is first determined whether an initialization signal has been received from the MPU 201 (S710). While it is determined that the initialization signal is not received (S710: No), the determination of S710 is continuously performed. When it is determined that the initialization signal has been received (S710: Yes), the process proceeds to S711, and initialization is performed (S711). As a result, in the item ratio management chip 207, at least initialization of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 is completed, and initialization of the item ratio management chip 207 is executed after waiting for the MPU 201 to be able to start control of the game. It will be done.

  In the initial setting of S711, in order to start the operation of the item ratio management chip 207, initialization necessary for each device in the item ratio management chip 207 is executed. For example, the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to zero. Thereby, even if there is a buffer not set by the MPU 201 in each of the buffers 262a to 262i in the buffer 262, it is possible to suppress that meaningless data remains in the buffer, and the meaningless data is the first reading It can be prevented from being stored in the memory 263. Also, in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls that have won in each winning opening and the ball discharge path are notified before the timing of calculating the character ratio after power is supplied to the character ratio management chip 207. The accumulated number of balls (ie, the number of balls fired to the game area) can be accumulated and counted, and information on the game state during that time can be stored.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the winning balls number table 202e is received from the MPU 201 (S712). And while it has not received (S712: No), processing of S712 is continued and performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game has been received (S712: Yes), the received number-of-balls table 202e is set in the number-of-balls data setting area 265a (S713). As a result, in the prize ratio management chip 207, the award ball number table 202e is set in the award ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize in the case where there is a prize in each winning opening indicated by the award ball number table 202e. Based on the number of balls, an item ratio and a continuous item ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

  Next, it is determined whether the information of the trigger information data 202f is received from the MPU 201 (S714). And while it has not received (S714: No), processing of S714 is continued and performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the trigger information has been received (S714: Yes), the received trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b. As a result, when it becomes the timing (trigger) to calculate the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the bonus ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and The continuous character ratio is calculated.

  Thus, only the winning balls number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f transmitted in the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main control device 110 is powered on are the winning balls. The number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b are configured to be set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent player from setting the lie number ball table and the trigger information data for the number ball data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

  Next, when the processing of S710 to S715 ends, the interrupt permission is set (S716). As a result, after that, when the interrupt signal transmitted after the winning information and the like are set from the MPU 201 is received, the setting information receiving process is executed, and the occurrence occurs based on the inspection device 300 being connected to the inspection terminal 207a. The inspection result output process is executed by the interrupt signal.

  When the interrupt signal is simultaneously input, the setting information reception process is executed prior to the inspection result output process. Thus, after the latest prize information, out information and information on the gaming state input from the MPU 201 are accumulated and stored in the item ratio management chip 207, information such as the item ratio is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Since it can do, analysis in inspection device 300 can be performed including the latest information. On the other hand, when the interrupt signal is input simultaneously, the inspection result output process may be executed prior to the inspection device output process. In this case, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information on the property ratio can be transmitted to the inspection device 300.

  Next, it is judged whether or not the power-off information has been received from the MPU 201 (S717), and S717 is continuously executed unless the power-off information is received (S717: No). Also, during that time, when the CPU 261 receives an interrupt signal from the MPU 201, the setting information reception process is executed prior to the process of S717, and a split occurs based on the inspection device 300 being connected to the inspection terminal 207a. When the embedded signal is received, the inspection result output process is executed.

  As a result of the process of S717, when the power-off information is received (S717: Yes), the power to the main controller 110 (the item ratio management chip 207) is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Therefore, the feature ratio calculation process is executed (S718), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process can not be executed. Details of the role ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, the setting information receiving process executed by the CPU 261 in the character ratio managing chip 207 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the setting information reception process. The setting information receiving process is executed based on the interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after the winning information and the like are set by the MPU 201.

  In the setting information reception process, winning information (each value of start 1 counter 203 d, start 2 counter 203 e, general 1 counter 203 f, general 2 counter 203 g, special winning opening counter 203 h) set in each buffer 262 a to 262 e by the MPU 201 and This is processing for storing the out information (the value of the out counter 203i) set in the out buffer 262f and the gaming state set in each of the buffers 262g to 262i in the first reading memory 263. In addition, when it is the calculation timing of character ratio, the character ratio and continuous character ratio is calculated on the basis of each counter 263a-263e stored in the first reading memory 263, data on the number of balls fired and gaming state At the same time, processing for recording in the second reading memory 264 is also performed.

  First, FIG. 19 will be referred to. In the setting information reception process, first, it is determined whether or not there is door open information in the open buffer 262h (S720). If there is door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720: Yes), the door opening information is set (added and stored) in the opening data 263h together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S720) S721).

  If it is determined by the process of S720 that there is no door releasing information in the opening buffer 262h (S720: No), and then, after the process of S721, whether there is information in error in the error buffer 262i. (S722). If the error in-error information exists in the in-error buffer 262i (S722: Yes), the in-error information is set (added and stored) in the in-error data 263i together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S723) .

  If it is determined by the process of S722 that there is no information in error in the buffer during error 262i (S722: No), and after the process of S723, then the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is a midnight time zone (midnight time 0) It is judged whether it is in the period from 6 o'clock to 6 o'clock) (S724). Usually, since the late-night time zone is outside business hours, an interrupt signal is sent from the MPU 201 during this late-night time zone, and that this setting information reception process is executed means that some fraudulent activity occurs during the late-night time zone. It is also considered as being. Therefore, if it is determined by the process of S 724 that it is in the late-night time zone (S 724: Yes), the over-time information is shown in the over-time data 263 j by the RTC 266 to keep a record of that. The setting (addition and storage) is performed together with the time (S725).

  If it is determined that the late-night time zone is not reached by the process of S724 (S724: No), and after the process of S725, it is then determined whether or not there is jackpot information in the jackpot buffer 262g (S726). When there is the jackpot information in the jackpot middle buffer 262 g (S 726: Yes), the jackpot information is set (added and stored) in the jackpot middle data 263 g together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S 727).

  When it is determined by the process of S 726 that there is no big hit information in the big hit / medium buffer 262 g (S 726: No), and after the process of S 727, it is set in the buffers 262 a to 262 f corresponding to each winning opening and the out switch 208 f. Are added to the corresponding counters 263a to 263f of the first reading memory 263 (S728).

  Specifically, the value set in the start buffer 262a corresponding to the first start opening 64a (that is, the number of balls having won the first start opening 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls awarded to the first starting opening 64a is accumulated in the first counter 263a. The value set in the start 2 buffer 262b corresponding to the second start port 64b (that is, the number of balls winning the second start port 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls awarded to the second starting opening 64b is accumulated in the first two counters 263b.

  The value set in the common 1 buffer 262c corresponding to the first ordinary winning opening 63a (that is, the number of balls having won the first ordinary winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the common 1 counter 263c. As a result, the number of balls awarded to the first ordinary winning opening 63a is accumulated in the counter 1 263c. The value set in the common 2 buffer 262 d corresponding to the second normal winning opening 63 b (that is, the number of balls winning in the second normal winning opening 63 b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the common 2 counter 263 d. As a result, the number of balls awarded to the second ordinary winning opening 63b is accumulated in the second counter 263d. The value set in the special winning opening buffer 262e corresponding to the special winning opening 65a (that is, the number of balls winning in the special winning opening 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the special winning opening counter 263e. As a result, the number of balls winning to the special winning opening 65a is accumulated in the special winning opening counter 263e.

  The counters 263a to 264f and the data 263g to 264j of the first reading memory 263 are an initialization process (refer to FIG. 18) executed when power is supplied to the character ratio management chip 207, and the character ratio. It is initialized to 0 in S744 (see FIG. 21) described later that is executed when the timing for calculation comes. Thus, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored again in the first reading memory 263 until it is time to calculate the feature ratio next time. .

  Subsequently, the setting information winning process will be described with reference to FIG. After the process of S728, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is referred to (S729). Then, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the character item ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is the "number of shots" (S729: "number of shots"), the value of the out counter 263f (ie, the game It is determined whether or not the number of spheres fired to the area is equal to or more than the “predetermined number of spheres” (set value) included in the trigger information data 202 f (S 730). If the value of the out counter 263f is equal to or more than the "predetermined number of balls" (S730: Yes), it is determined that it is the timing to calculate the role ratio and the role ratio calculation process is executed (S733) , Shift to S734. The details of the role ratio calculating process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when the value of the out counter 263 f is not equal to or more than the “predetermined number of balls” (S 730: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S 734.

  By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio by the number of fired balls, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous symbol ratio in the event that a predetermined ball is fired. Therefore, since many balls have won prizes in various winning openings and can calculate the character ratio and the continuous character ratio at the stage when the winning balls are made, the average character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated. it can. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the fluctuation of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in a short time in a normal game, so that it is possible to more easily analyze the fraud in the inspection device 300.

  In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the character object ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is "time" (S729: "time"), the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is It is determined whether the "predetermined time" (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f is reached (S731). Here, reaching means not only the case where the current time indicated by the RTC 266 matches the "predetermined time" but also the case where the "predetermined time" is passed for the first time.

  If it is determined that the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has reached the "predetermined time" by the process of S731 (S731: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the role ratio. Then, the role ratio calculation process is executed (S733), and the process proceeds to S734. On the other hand, when the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has not reached the “predetermined time” (S731: No), the process proceeds to the process of S734.

  By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the bonus ratio by the current time, the bonus ratio can be reliably determined by the arrival of a predetermined time even under a situation where little game is played in the pachinko machine 10 And the continuous character ratio can be calculated. Therefore, it is possible to make the inspection device 300 analyze the presence or absence of the fraudulent action surely by the combination ratio of the combination and the combination ratio of the combination regularly calculated.

  In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the item ratio shown in the trigger information data 202f is "playing time" (S729: "playing time"), the player at the pachinko machine 10 It is determined whether the cumulative time (game time) in which the game was played is equal to or more than the "predetermined time" included in the trigger information data 202f (S732).

  Here, the game time can be calculated, for example, by the following method. That is, the gaming time counter is provided in the first reading memory 263. The game time counter, like the other counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263, is an initial setting process (see FIG. 18) executed when power is supplied to the item ratio management chip 207; It is initialized to 0 in S744 (see FIG. 21) described later that is executed when it is time to calculate the feature ratio. Then, in the setting information reception process, the value of the out buffer 262f is confirmed, and when one or more values are set, the ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected, that is, the ball is in the game area Since it means that it was fired, the game time counter is incremented by one. The setting information reception counter is activated by an interrupt signal transmitted from the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the game time can be calculated by integrating 0.5 seconds into the value of the game time counter.

  If it is determined that the game time has become "predetermined time" or more by the process of S732 (S732: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the role ratio and the role ratio calculation process is executed. (S733), the process proceeds to S734. On the other hand, when the game time is less than the "predetermined time" (S731: No), the process directly shifts to the process of S734.

  The character ratio and the continuous character ratio are originally calculated by performing a test shot of the gaming ball for 10 hours. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the character ratio by gaming time, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio close to the original definition can be calculated by the character ratio management chip. The analysis can be performed using the feature ratio and the continuous feature ratio close to the original definition.

  In the process of S734, the buffer 262 is all initialized to 0 (S734). As a result, even if there is a buffer not set for each buffer 262a to 262i in setting of winning information, out information and gaming information from the next MPU 201, it can be suppressed that meaningless data remains in the buffer, The meaningless data can be prevented from being stored in the first reading memory 263. After the process of S734, the setting information reception process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, an accessory ratio calculation process (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the accessory ratio calculation process. The character ratio calculating process is a process of calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording the same in the second reading memory 264, and the timing of calculating the character ratio ( It is executed when the power is turned off (refer to FIG. 18), in addition to the case where the trigger is generated (see FIG. 20).

  In the character ratio calculation process, first, the character ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 263, and added to the character ratio data 264a together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. And record (S740). Next, the continuous character ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 263, and added to the continuous character ratio data 264b and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S741 ).

  The character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated as follows. That is, the number of balls winning in the first starting opening 64a indicated by the first counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263 and the number of balls winning in the second starting opening 64b indicated by the second counter 263b , The number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a indicated by the normal counter 263c, the number of balls winning in the second ordinary winning opening 63b indicated by the ordinary counter 263d, and the large winning opening counter 263e An award corresponding to each winning opening shown in the winning balls number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the winning balls number data setting area 265a with respect to the number of balls winning in the big winning openings 65a to be played Multiply the number of balls and calculate the number of balls paid out for each winning opening with the winning to the winning opening. Then, by totaling these, the total number of balls paid out to the player is calculated.

  Then, for the total number of balls paid out to the player, the number of balls paid out with the winning of the second starting opening 64b and the number of balls paid out with the winning of the big winning opening 65a. By calculating the ratio of the sum to the number, the feature ratio is calculated. Further, the ratio of the number of balls paid out with the winning of the large winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player is calculated, thereby calculating the continuous prize ratio.

  Essentially, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio refer to the above-mentioned ratio in the case where the ball shooting test of the game ball is performed for 10 hours, but in this embodiment, the trigger information data set in the trigger setting area 265b Each time when the feature ratio shown in 202f is calculated (trigger), the game is performed between the time the power is turned on and the first time the time is reached, or the time between the previous time and the current time. Of the total number of balls paid out (winning balls), the ratio of the number of balls paid out with the winning of the second opening 64b and the large winning opening 65a is calculated as the feature ratio Is recorded in the feature ratio data 264a along with the time at that time. In addition, during the period from when the power is turned on to when the timing is reached for the first time, or among the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from the previous timing to the current timing, a big prize The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out as a result of winning in the mouth 65a is calculated as the continuous service ratio, and is recorded in the continuous service ratio data 264b along with the time at that time.

  In addition, even when the power is turned off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used, and it is paid out while it is determined that the power is turned off from the timing (trigger) at which the nearest object ratio is calculated. Based on the number of balls (prize balls), the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated, and are respectively recorded in the character ratio data 264a or the continuous character ratio data 264b along with the time at that time. . As a result, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded, and thereafter, the character ratio and the continuous character without leaking even for the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off. The ratio can be calculated.

  Next, the value of the out counter 263 f indicating the total number of balls fired to the game area is added to the shot ball number data 264 c and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S 742). Furthermore, various jackpot information stored in large hit medium data 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, overtime data 263j, door open information, error information, overtime information, and each information are correlated. Time (time when the information is stored) is arranged (sorted) in order from information of old time, and added to the gaming state data 264 d and recorded (S 743).

  In the process of S743, for example, when the big hit information is stored in the big hit medium data 263g at intervals of less than one second, it means that the big hit is continuously generated as the gaming state, so the oldest time Only the jackpot information of and the time are recorded in the gaming state data 264 d. Similarly, in the door open information, error information and overtime information, when each information is stored in each data 263h to j at intervals of less than one second, the information on the oldest time and its time Is recorded in the gaming state data 264 d. Thereby, the storage capacity required for the gaming state data 264 d can be reduced.

  As described above, when the prize ratio information, the out information, and the information regarding the gaming state are received from the MPU 201, the item ratio management chip 207 accumulates the information in the first reading memory 263 and temporarily stores the information. At each timing (trigger) to calculate the bonus ratio, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and added to the second reading memory 264 Record. As a result, it is possible to manage the character ratio and the like with a small storage capacity, and to transmit information on the character ratio and the like to the inspection apparatus 300.

  In addition, in the second reading memory 264, the time at which they are recorded in the second reading memory 264 is also stored with respect to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. Further, in the second reading memory 264, information indicating not only the character ratio and the continuous character ratio but also the total number of balls fired to the game area is recorded at the time when the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264 In addition, information about the gaming state (big hit information, door open information, error information, overtime information) is combined with the time when each information is stored in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory Stored in H.264. Therefore, as a result of analyzing the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the inspection apparatus 300, when there is a large change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the character ratio or continuous character ratio which has changed is 2) By analyzing the total number of balls fired in the game area and the game state near the time recorded in the reading memory 264, it is possible to find out the cause of the change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio.

  Here, a predetermined number of pieces of information can be recorded on the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b and the fired ball number data 264c, respectively, regarding the character ratio, the continuous character ratio and the total number of balls fired to the game area For example, it is limited to 1024). Further, the total number of hit information, door open information, error information and overtime information that can be recorded in the game state data 264 d is also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). If a predetermined number of information has already been recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c or the gaming state data 264d, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is stored there. Is recorded.

  Specifically, the continuous character ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls number data 264c, and the gaming state data 264d are respectively configured by a ring buffer, and each has a memory for managing a position to write information on the ring buffer. By shifting the writing position by one each time information is written, it is possible to realize the processing of erasing the oldest information and recording the latest information there.

  As described above, an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264 can be suppressed by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in each data. In addition, when the information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit number, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded, and the analysis is performed by the inspection apparatus 300 including the state of the latest pachinko machine 10 It can be done.

  After the processing of S743, the first reading memory 263 is initialized to all 0 (S744). As a result, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored while being accumulated again by the first reading memory 263 until it is time to calculate the feature ratio next time. .

  When the process of S744 ends, the character-item ratio calculation process ends.

  Next, the inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this inspection result output process. The inspection result output process is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when a cable connector for connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a is inserted. In the inspection result output process, the data of the second reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

  When the inspection result output process is executed, first, all the item ratios recorded in the item ratio data 264a and the item ratios corresponding to each item ratio are recorded in the second reading memory 264 The recording time is output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the combination rate with the oldest recording time (S751).

  Specifically, when the character ratio data 264a does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the CPU 261 first writes the character ratio information in the character ratio data 264a. Information of the bonus ratio recorded from the current position to the location shown in the memory that manages the location to write the information (ie, the location where the information of the bonus ratio at the latest time is recorded) It reads out one by one and transmits to inspection device 300. On the other hand, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied in the character ratio data 264a, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position to write the information (ie, The position shown in the memory that manages the position where information is written by shifting the reading position one by one sequentially from the position at which the information on the feature ratio of the oldest time is recorded) (ie the role of the latest time The information recorded up to the position where the information of the object ratio is recorded is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, to the inspection device 300, the information on the feature ratio is output in order from the information on the old time.

  Next, all the continuous character ratios recorded in the continuous character ratio data 264 b and the time when the continuous character ratio corresponding to each continuous character ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264 The output time is sequentially output to the inspection apparatus 300 in the order of the item ratio at which the recording time is old (S752).

  Specifically, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the continuous character ratio data 264b, the CPU 261 first determines the continuous character ratio data in the continuous character ratio data 264b. The continuous role recorded from the position where the information was written to the position shown in the memory that manages the position where the information is written (ie, the position where the information of the continuous character ratio of the latest time was recorded) The information on the product ratio is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. On the other hand, if the continuous combination ratio data 264b satisfies the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the next position of the position indicated by the memory that manages the position to write the information (ie The position shown in the memory that manages the position to write the information by shifting the reading position one by one sequentially from the position at which the information of the consecutive part ratio at the oldest time is recorded, that is, the latest time The information recorded up to the position where the information on the continuous character product ratio is recorded is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, to the inspection apparatus 300, the information on the continuous winning ratio is output in order from the information on the old time.

  Then, the information on the number of balls fired to all game areas (number of fired balls) recorded in the number of fired balls data 264c and the information on the number of fired balls corresponding to the information on the number of fired balls is [2] The time recorded in the reading memory 264 is output to the inspection apparatus 300 sequentially from the character / child ratio in which the recording time is old (S753).

  Specifically, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the number-of-launched ball data 264c, the CPU 261 first writes the information of the number of launched balls in the number-of-launched ball data 264c. Information of the number of fired balls recorded from the current position to the position shown in the memory for managing the position where the information is written (ie, the position where the information of the number of fired balls at the latest time was recorded) It reads out one by one and transmits to inspection device 300. On the other hand, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied in the number-of-launched ball number data 264c, the next position of the position indicated by the memory that manages the position to write the information (ie, The position shown in the memory that manages the position to write the information is shifted in order from the position at which the information of the number of shots of the oldest time was recorded), and the position shown in the memory that manages the position where the information is written The information recorded up to the position where the information of the ball number is recorded is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information on the number of fired balls is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information on the old time.

  Next, all the jackpot information recorded in the gaming state data 264 d, the door open information, the error information and the overtime information, and the time when the information corresponding to each information is stored in the first reading memory 263 Are output to the inspection apparatus 300 sequentially from the information having the oldest time (S754).

  Specifically, in the gaming state data 264d, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied, the CPU 261 selects information from the position where the information is first written in the gaming state data 264d. The information recorded up to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where writing is performed (that is, the position at which the information of the latest time is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. On the other hand, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied in the gaming state data 264 d, the next position (ie, the most position indicated by the memory for managing the position to write the information) The position indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is written by shifting the reading position one by one sequentially from the position where the information of the old time is recorded, that is, the position where the information of the latest time is recorded The information recorded up to) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As described above, in the gaming state data 264 d, pieces of information related to the gaming state are arranged (sorted) from information of old time and recorded in the gaming state data 264 d. Therefore, information on the gaming state is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information on the old time.

  Since each information is output in order from the old time by the process of S 751 to S 754, the inspection apparatus 300 analyzes the information in the order of the output, so that the item ratio with the passage of time, It is possible to easily analyze changes in the continuous character ratio, the number of fired balls and the game state.

  After the process of S754, the inspection result output process is ended.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 is provided with the item ratio management chip 207, the prize information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the item ratio management chip 207 calculates the item ratio and the continuous product ratio. And record. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207 a, information on the character ratio and the continuous character ratio recorded in the character ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

  Here, among the fraudsters, the second starting opening 64b can be opened by fraudulently opening the motorized part of the second starting opening 64b or guiding the ball to the second starting opening 64b. There are things that try to increase the chance of winning a jackpot by increasing the number of wins. In addition, there are those that try to obtain many winning balls by opening the opening / closing plate of the big winning opening 65a illegally by some method or guiding the ball to the big winning opening 65a. In the case of such fraud, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio increase.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, since it is configured as described above, by analyzing the symbol ratio and the continuous symbol ratio in the inspection device 300, in the case where the fraud is performed, the fraud is performed You can discover

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, information related to the number of balls fired to the game area and information related to the game state are also recorded in the feature ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched based on the information on the number of balls fired to the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

  Further, the item ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, and is housed in one substrate box 100 together with the MPU 201, the ROM 202, and the like. As a result, it is difficult for the fraudster to modify the winning information etc. input to the feature ratio management chip 207. Therefore, high reliability can be maintained with respect to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated and output by the character ratio management chip 207.

  In addition, since the special-purpose-item ratio management chip 207 for managing the special-effects ratio, etc. is provided instead of having the MPU 201 manage the special-effects ratio, etc., an increase in processing load of the MPU 201 can be suppressed, It is possible to dedicate the MPU 201 to such control.

  In addition, the prize ratio data setting area 265a is provided in the prize ratio management chip 207, and the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a when power is supplied. The prize ratio management chip 207 calculates the prize ratio and the continuous prize ratio using the winning number table 202e set in the winning number setting area 265a. As a result, it is not necessary to store the information on the number of winning balls different for each model in the ROM of the feature ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the manufacturing of the property ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. If the model of the pachinko machine is different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same item ratio management chip 207, the combination ratio can be accurately calculated.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 23, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S 915 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”) in the current startup process (see FIG. 24) It is determined whether or not it is started during the execution of (S802). As described later with reference to FIG. 24, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S912 in FIG. 24), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing of S915. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in step S915 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S802: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S915 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword "55AAh" is written by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data corruption in the RAM 223 (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S 915 after an instantaneous power failure occurs, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If the start of the program is started, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S803: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S802: Yes), the current start-up process is after a momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S915, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in this case, the process proceeds to S804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S806). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S808, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S915 is executed (see S914 of FIG. 24). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S915 is performed, it is instantaneous that the current start-up processing is instantaneous when the power-off flag is turned on until the processing of S808 is performed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in step S915 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S809), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810). The permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S808 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S 808: No), S 809 which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S 810 and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S 810). Then (S811), it shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S809 is that, when the process of S808 is reached via the processes of S804 to S806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S804. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the process of S901 was executed last time (S901), and if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S901: No) The processing proceeds to step S910 without performing the processing of steps S902 to S908. While it is not necessary to process S902 to S908 in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond) to determine whether 1 millisecond has elapsed in the process of S901, the variation display process of S910 is performed. This is because the command determination process of step S911 is preferably performed in a short cycle. Since the process of S911 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S910 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  In the process of S901, if it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed since the process of S901 was performed last time (S901: Yes), the process proceeds to S902. If the process of S901 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 21, the process directly proceeds to the process of S902.

  In the process of S902, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S903 to S911 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S902). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S906 described later (S903), and then the power on notification process is executed (S904). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S 905 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  Next, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S905). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and the rear surface image change for the display control device 114 is changed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S905 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S905) is finished, next, lamp editing processing is executed (S906), and then sound editing / output processing is executed (S907). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S907, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S908). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S906 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S907 is also synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 Run in time. After the process of S908, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  In the process of S 910, in order to display the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. The variable display process, which is a process set to transmit, is executed. The details of the variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation display processing, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S911). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S911 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S912). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S914), and the power-off process is executed (S915). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S916), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether the RAM 223 is destroyed (S913) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S913: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the command determination processing (S911) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S911). The command determination process (S911) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110 It is determined whether or not (S1001). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1001: Yes), the variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1002), and the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation display process described later (see FIG. 26), a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern Used when setting.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1003). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1003: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1004), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S1005), and the process returns to the main processing. .

  It should be noted that after the main control device 110 transmits the change pattern command when starting the change effect, the stop type command indicates the stop type of the change effect whose change pattern is indicated by the change pattern command, the main control device This is a command that is always transmitted from 110. By setting the change start flag to ON by the process of S1005, in the change display process executed later, based on the change pattern extracted from the change pattern command received earlier and the stop type extracted from the stop type command. A display variation pattern command and a display suspension type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern and the suspension type are generated, and processing for transmitting to the display control device 114 is executed.

  As a result of the process of S1003, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1003: No), next, it is determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1006). Then, when it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S1006: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the holding ball number command (ie, holding of the fluctuation effect held) The number of balls) is extracted and stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1007).

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins (start winning) in any of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b, the starting winning combination is At each time, the value of the number of holding balls stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the number holding ball counter 203a of the main control device 110 by the process of S1007. Therefore, even if the value of the holding ball number of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc., the holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is detected The value of the number counter 223a can be corrected to match the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  Next, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 included in the received ball number command are extracted and stored in the RAM 223 (S1008).

  The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the ball holding ball number command are acquired from the counter buffer in the main control unit 110 when the ball wins in the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b (starting winning combination) It is done. The audio lamp control device 113 can execute pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the RAM 223. That is, it is judged before the execution of the fluctuation effect that what will be the result of the fluctuation effect when the suspended fluctuation effect is executed (whether or not it becomes a big hit, the fluctuation time etc.), It is possible to decide the execution of various effects.

  Next, a display ball holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the ball holding number stored in the RAM 223 by the process of S1007 is set (S1009), and the process returns to the main process. The holding ball number command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. Thereby, in the display control device 114, processing is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls.

  As a result of the process of S1006, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S1006: No), it is then determined whether a confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1010). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the fluctuation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1010: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of receipt of the confirmation command is set (S1011), and the process returns to the main processing. . The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. The display control device 114 stops the fluctuation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display confirmation command, and corresponds to the stop type previously indicated by the display stop type command. By displaying the stop symbol, the confirmation display is performed.

  As a result of the process of S1010, when it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S1010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. (S1012), shifts to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114. The demo command received from the main control unit 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1013 and temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then the command output process of the main process (S902) ) To the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the variation display process (S910) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S910).

  This fluctuation display process (S910) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, displays fluctuation effects in the third symbol display device 81. In order to make it possible, a display fluctuation pattern command and a display stop type command are generated based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control unit 110, and these commands are set to be transmitted to the display control unit 114. Processing.

  In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, is off) (S1101: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display process is performed. Exit and return to main processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1102), and extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the processing of S1002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 25). The fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1103). The fluctuation pattern extracted here is fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 prepares a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns for each fluctuation time, and one detailed fluctuation among a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the extracted fluctuation pattern (variation time) A pattern is determined by lottery, and a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined detailed variation pattern is set (S1104).

  The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. By receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to perform the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 in the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. , The display control of the fluctuation production is started.

  Next, the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1004 in the command determination process (see FIG. 23) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1105). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the extracted stop type is set (S1104). The stop type command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. The display control device 114 sets a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the fluctuation effect executed by the display change pattern command set in the process of S1105 is displayed. Do.

  Next, in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, the value of the number of holding balls in the RAM 223 is decreased by 1 in accordance with consumption of the holding balls (that is, setting of the variable display corresponding to the holding balls is performed). (S1107), a display pending ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the pending ball count after update is set (S1108). Then, the processing returns to the main processing.

  The display holding sphere number command set by the processing of S1108 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. . The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number-of-held-balls number pattern according to the number of held balls indicated by the number-of-held-ball number display command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of the balls held by counting the number of the held balls number symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into main processing repeatedly executed after power on, command interrupt processing executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 236. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 27A, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 27A is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is started when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off.

  When the power is turned on and the main process is executed by the MPU 231, first, an initial setting process is executed (S1401). Specifically, first, the MPU 231 is initialized, and processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and an area in the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234 storing the decompressed character information The extracted character information is written in the prepared frame buffer area. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization.

  When the initial setting process is completed, next, interrupt permission is set (S1402), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1402, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27B, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 27B is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1501), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27C, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 27 (c) is a flowchart showing the V interruption process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. And the display to the image controller 236.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 236 is detected. The V interruption signal is a signal which is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 236 completes the drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 236 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image at the stage where the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 27C, first, a command determination process (S1602) is executed. In the command determination process (S1602), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and a process according to the command is executed. For example, when the display fluctuation pattern command is stored, the image is drawn so that the third symbol display device 81 executes the fluctuation effect according to the detailed fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern table command. And start controlling the display.

  If the display stop type command is stored, high-speed fluctuation is in progress so that the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicated by the display stop type command ( While the variable display of the third symbol is being performed so that the player can not recognize the contents of the third symbol, the third symbol being displayed is replaced. When the display confirmation command is stored, control of image drawing and display is performed such that the finalized display is performed in the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the command determination process (S1602), all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the change effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display change pattern command, the stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, it is possible to quickly grasp the aspect of the fluctuation effects and other effects selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image so that the third symbol display device 81 displays.

  When the command determination process (S1602) ends, next, the display setting process (S1603) is executed. In the display setting process (S1603), one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of the screen to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 determined by the command determination process (S1602) or the like. Concretely identify the contents of the image.

  After the display setting process (S1603) is executed, task processing is then executed (S1064). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S1603), the characters (sprites, displayed objects) constituting the image. While specifying the type, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite).

  Then, the drawing process is executed (S1504). In this drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined in the task process (S1503), are transmitted to the image controller 236. Thereby, the image controller 236 executes the drawing process of the image according to the information and also causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the image drawn according to the information received 1 V earlier, together with the drive signal Control for transmitting image data to the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  After that, after performing other necessary processing, for example, processing of updating various counters provided in the display control device 114 (S1505), the V interrupt processing ends.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the main controller 110 is provided with the item ratio management chip 207, the winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the item ratio management chip 207 Calculate and record the item ratio and the continuous character ratio. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207 a, information on the character ratio and the continuous character ratio recorded in the character ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

  Here, among the fraudsters, the second starting opening 64b can be opened by fraudulently opening the motorized part of the second starting opening 64b or guiding the ball to the second starting opening 64b. There are things that try to increase the chance of winning a jackpot by increasing the number of wins. In addition, there are those that try to obtain many winning balls by opening the opening / closing plate of the big winning opening 65a illegally by some method or guiding the ball to the big winning opening 65a. In the case of such fraud, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio increase.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, since it is configured as described above, by analyzing the symbol ratio and the continuous symbol ratio in the inspection device 300, in the case where the fraud is performed, the fraud is performed You can discover

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, information related to the number of balls fired to the game area and information related to the game state are also recorded in the feature ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched based on the information on the number of balls fired to the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the character ratio, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio based on the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263. Is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when it becomes the trigger (timing) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, each recorded in the first reading memory 263 The values of the counters 263a to 263e are recorded as they are in the second reading memory 264, and the values of the counters 263a to 263e recorded in the second reading memory 264 are outputted to the inspection apparatus 300 as they are.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and the descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. The electrical configuration of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment differs from that according to the first embodiment in that in the second reading memory 264 of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio data 264a of the first embodiment and The point is to record the winning counter data 264e instead of the continuous winning ratio data 264b.

  In the second embodiment, the meaning of the trigger information data 202 f set in the trigger setting area 265 b is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, in the second embodiment, the trigger information data 202 f indicates a trigger (timing) for recording the values of the counters 263 a to 263 e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264. The meaning of the trigger information data 202f is different from that of the first embodiment only, and the content itself is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  That is, in the trigger information data 202f, as the trigger (timing) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 to the second reading memory 264, the "number of shots", "time", " Information indicating any of "playing time" is defined.

  The trigger information data 202 f also defines information indicating a “predetermined number of balls” at which it is time to calculate an accessory ratio when information indicating “number of shots” is defined. For example, if the trigger information data 202 f defines information indicating “number of shots” and information indicating 500 spheres as “predetermined number of spheres”, the first reading is performed each time the number of firing balls reaches 500. The values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  When information indicating “time” is defined, the trigger information data 202 f also defines information indicating “predetermined time” at which to calculate the role ratio. For example, when the information indicating “time” is defined in the trigger information data 202 f and the information indicating “12 o'clock, 17 o'clock, 19 o'clock, 22 o'clock as“ predetermined time ”, the time is 12 o'clock , 17 o'clock, 19 o'clock and 22 o'clock, the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  The trigger information data 202 f defines information indicating “predetermined time” at which it is time to calculate the role ratio when information indicating “playing time” is defined. For example, when the trigger information data 202 f defines information indicating “playing time” and information indicating “two hours as the“ predetermined time ”, the first reading memory 263 is executed every two hours of the playing time. The values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the second reading memory 264 are recorded to the second reading memory 264.

  The winning counter data 264e is generated at the start counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 at each timing (trigger) at which the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264. The total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a counted, the total number of balls won in the second starting port 64b counted by the 2nd counter 263b, and the first ordinary number counted by the 1st counter 263c The total number of balls winning in the winning opening 63a, the total number of balls winning in the second normal winning opening 63b counted by the 2nd counter 263d, and the big winning opening 65a counted by the large winning opening counter 263e The total number of spheres recorded is data recorded together with the time at the recording timing.

  The total number of balls won in each winning opening from the time the power is turned on to the first arrival of that timing, or from the previous timing to the current timing, is the counter corresponding to each winning opening. Indicated by. When it is time to record the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 to the second reading memory 264, the values of the counters 263a to 263e at that time are indicated by the RTC 266 The winning counter data 264e is recorded together with the time of day.

  The winning counter data 264e corresponds to one time, and the total number of balls winning in the first starting opening 64a at that time, the total number of balls winning in the second starting opening 64b, and the first ordinary winning opening 63a The total number of balls, the total number of balls winning in the second normal winning opening 63b, and the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a may be recorded.

  In addition, the winning counter data 264e includes an area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting opening 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls winning in the second starting opening 64b, and a first ordinary winning opening 63a. The first reading memory is provided with an area for recording the total number of balls played, an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a. When the timing (trigger) at which the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in H.263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264 is reached, the total number of balls that have won in the corresponding winning opening for each area is The winning counter data 264 e may be configured to be recorded along with the time at the timing.

  Here, the information on the total number of balls awarded to each winning opening that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). For example, the total number of balls winning in the first starting opening 64a, the total number of balls winning in the second starting opening 64b, the total number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a, in association with one time When the winning counter data 264e is configured to record the total number of balls won in the second normal winning opening 63b and the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a, a predetermined number of information is already recorded in the winning counter data 264e. If it is, the information of the oldest time is deleted, and the latest information is recorded there. For example, the winning counter data 264e is configured as a ring buffer, and a memory for managing the position to write information is separately prepared on the ring buffer, and the position to write is shifted by 1 each time the information is written. Then, the process of erasing the oldest information and recording the latest information there can be realized. As described above, an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264 can be suppressed by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264 e. In addition, when the information to be recorded in the winning counter data 264e reaches the upper limit number, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded, thereby including the state of the latest pachinko machine 10 in the inspection device 300. Analysis can be performed.

  An area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting opening 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls winning in the second starting opening 64b, and a total number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a If the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for storing, the area for storing the total number of balls won in the second normal winning opening 63b, and the area for recording the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a. A ring buffer may be configured for each area, and an upper limit may be provided for the number of information that can be recorded in each area, and control may be performed as described above. By this, when the information to be recorded reaches the upper limit number in each area, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded, and the inspection device 300 including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 Analysis can be performed.

  When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt is generated to the CPU 261, and the CPU 261 causes the winning counter data 264e recorded in the second reading memory 264, the number of fired balls data 264c, and the gaming state data H.264d are sequentially transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. When transmitting each data 264e, 264c, 264d to the inspection apparatus 300, the CPU 261 processes each information (including the recorded time information associated with each information) recorded in each data 264e, 264c, 264d. , Read out in the order of recording, and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300.

  Specifically, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 from now on does not satisfy the upper limit number of recordable information (the above-mentioned predetermined number) determined for each, the CPU 261 first gives information to the data. The information recorded from the position where the data was written to the position shown in the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information of the latest time is recorded) is sequentially read and inspected Send to device 300. On the other hand, in the data for transmitting information to the inspection apparatus 300, when the upper limit number (the above-mentioned predetermined number) of recordable information determined for each is satisfied, the position for writing the information is indicated by memory The position indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is to be written by shifting the reading position one by one sequentially from the position next to the selected position (that is, the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded) The information recorded up to the position at which the information of the latest time is recorded is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information is output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the information of the old time.

  An area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting opening 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls winning in the second starting opening 64b, and a total number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a If the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for storing, the area for storing the total number of balls won in the second normal winning opening 63b, and the area for recording the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a. By reading out the information as described above for each area, the total number of balls that have won the winning opening for each winning opening is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the old time Become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the winning information storage processing (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this winning information storage process. In the first embodiment, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio is reached (see FIG. 20) and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18). In the second embodiment, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264 (see FIG. 21), but in the second embodiment, it is stored in the first reading memory 263. When it comes to the timing (trigger) to record each information in the second reading memory 264 (see FIG. 20) and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18), winning is achieved instead of the prize ratio calculation process. Execute information storage processing. The winning information storage process is a process of recording each information stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264.

  In the winning information storage process, first, the values of the counters 263 a to 263 e corresponding to the winning opening stored in the first reading memory 263 are matched with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 to obtain the second reading memory 264. In addition to the winning counter data 264e, it is recorded (S761). As a result, for each key position timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202 f set in the trigger setting area 265 b, the time from when the power is turned on until the timing reaches the first time, or from the previous timing this time The total number of balls awarded to the first starting port 64a counted by the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the second starting port 64b counted by the first counter 263b until the timing of The total number of winning balls, the total number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning hole 63a counted by the 1 counter 263c, and the total number of balls winning in the 2nd ordinary winning hole 63b counted by the 2 counter 263d The total number and the total number of balls awarded to the special winning opening 65a counted by the special winning opening counter 263e are additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  Also, even when the power is turned off, while it is determined that the power is turned off from the timing (trigger) at which the recording to the second reading memory 264 was performed most recently by using the power stored in the capacitor 267. The total number of balls winning in the first starting port 64a counted by the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the total number of balls winning in the second starting port 64b counted by the first counter 263b , The total number of balls winning in the first normal winning opening 63a counted by the normal counter 263c, the total number of balls winning in the second normal winning opening 63b counted by the normal counter 263d, The total number of balls won in the large winning opening 65a counted by the mouth counter 263e is additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, there is no risk of losing the winnings on each winning opening that has been determined that the power is turned off from the timing (trigger) at which the recording was performed to the second reading memory 264 most recently. The total number of balls can be recorded in the second reading memory 264 for each winning opening.

  In the subsequent S742 to S744, the same processing (see FIG. 21) as that of S742 to S744 in the character item ratio calculation processing of the first embodiment is executed, and the winning information storage processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this inspection result output process. This inspection result output process is executed based on the interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, as in the first embodiment. In the inspection result output process, the data of the second reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

  When the inspection result output process in the second embodiment is executed, first, the winning balls number table 202e set in the winning balls number data setting area 265a is output to the testing device 300 (S771). Next, all the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening recorded in the winning counter data 264e is recorded time, together with the time when the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264, associated with each information. Output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the oldest information (S772). In S753 and S754 executed subsequently to the process of S772, the same process as S753 and S754 of the inspection result output process of the first embodiment is executed, and the inspection result output process is ended.

  The inspection apparatus 300 calculates the bonus item ratio and the continuous product ratio based on the information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening output in S772 and the winning ball number table 202e output in S771. And analyze the calculated character ratio and continuous character ratio. Then, if the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched based on the information on the number of balls fired to the game area and the information on the game state. be able to. Further, in the process of S772, the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening is output in order from the old time, so that the inspection apparatus 300 analyzes each information in the output order. It is possible to easily analyze changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio with the passage of time.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, each time the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f stored in the trigger setting area 265b is reached in the accessory ratio management chip 207, The values of the counters 263a to 263e, which are stored in the first reading memory 263 and count the total number of balls won for each winning opening, are sequentially recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information indicating the total number of winning balls for each winning opening recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 is the winning ball number table 202e. Together with this, it is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the total number of balls obtained in the corresponding winning openings is obtained for each of the winning openings and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Therefore, the storage capacity required for the second reading memory 264 is larger than that in the case where the bonus item ratio and the continuous winning item ratio calculated as in the first embodiment are recorded in the second reading memory 264, but the examination Since the total number of winning balls for each winning opening is transmitted to the device 300, if there is a large change in the combination ratio or the continuous combination ratio as a result of analysis by the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 By referring to the total number of winning balls for each winning opening, the cause can be grasped more accurately.

  Further, the information indicating the total number of balls awarded to each winning opening transmitted to inspection device 300 is transmitted to inspection device 300 in association with the time when the information was recorded in second reading memory 264. Ru. Therefore, as a result of analyzing the symbol ratio and the continuous symbol ratio based on the information indicating the total number of balls winning in each winning opening in the inspection apparatus 300, there is a large change in the symbol ratio or the continuous symbol ratio The time at which the second reading memory 264 has recorded the total number of balls that have won in each winning opening used to calculate the character ratio or the continuous character ratio that has changed is specified, and around that time, By analyzing the total number of balls won in each winning opening, the total number of balls fired in the game area, or the game state, it is possible to find out the cause of the change in the item ratio or the continuous product ratio.

  Besides, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment can achieve the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Third Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments, the item ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control unit 110, and information about the item ratio in the pachinko machine 10 is managed by the item ratio management chip 207 explained. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the MPU 201 manages information related to the item ratio. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with a duty ratio display device 400, and displays information on the character ratio on the duty ratio display device 400.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the same configuration and process as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. The explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machines 10 of the first and second embodiments in that the configuration of the main control device 110 is different. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

  The main controller 110 of the third embodiment is not provided with the item ratio management chip 207 as described above, and the MPU 201 manages information on the item ratio. Specifically, the main part ratio management main processing executed by the CPU 261 of the main part ratio management chip 207 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment is executed in the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201. . At this time, each counter and data stored in the first reading memory 263 of the item ratio management chip 207 are stored in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment.

  Further, the second reading memory 264 provided in the item ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110 in a form connected to the input / output port 205. Further, in the third embodiment, the RTC 266 provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment utilizes the one incorporated (not shown) in the MPU 201.

  Further, the inspection terminal 207 a to which the inspection device 300 is connected is connected to the input / output port 205. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and a connector, the MPU 201 executes inspection result output processing, and information on the character ratio and other information on the inspection are transmitted to the inspection device 300.

  Further, the duty ratio display device 400 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The duty ratio display device 400 is configured of, for example, a plurality of seven-segment displays, and is disposed on a main substrate that constitutes the main control device 110. That is, when looking at the back side of the pachinko machine 10, it is assembled so that the display screen of the duty ratio display device 400 can be seen. The display screen of the duty ratio display device 400 may be assembled so that it can be viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  The duty ratio display device 400 displays a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, or information (for example, a base value or the like) related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio. For example, the information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning may be information for each winning opening, or all winning The total number of balls paid out by winning in the mouth, the total number of balls paid out by winning in the winning opening (the second starting opening 64b and the big winning opening 65a) where the prize works, and the prize is continuous It may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by the winning of the winning opening (large winning opening 65a) activated. Further, information indicating the total number of balls fired in the game area (number of fired balls) may be included in the information on the feature ratio and the continuous feature ratio displayed on the duty ratio display device 400. The duty ratio display device 400 includes a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, etc. Information related to the feature ratio or the continuous feature ratio may be displayed.

  The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 and a RAM 203 and has a plurality of registers 200 for storing various data in a layer closest to an ALU (Arithmetic Logic Unit) which is the heart of the MPU 201. A plurality of registers 200 are used generically in various situations without having a specific purpose, such as temporarily holding a value in the middle of operation or storing an address of a memory necessary for processing. It includes various registers such as general-purpose registers and accumulator registers for accumulating and summing operation results of the ALU.

  The plurality of registers 200 also include a flag register 200a (also referred to as a status register or the like) configured of a flag indicating overflow due to ALU operation, a flag indicating an interrupt state, and the like. Due to the nature of the register, the content of the flag register 200a can be updated each time an instruction is executed.

  The RAM 203 is provided with an in-use area 203x and an out-of-use area 203y, each of which includes a work area (inside work area 203x1 and an outside work area 203y1) and a stack area (inside stack area 203x2 and outside stack area 203y2). And are provided.

  In this case, when the MPU 201 performs main control of the game while the MPU 201 performs management of information related to the feature ratio, various counters and various counters used for main control of the game are stored in the RAM 203. This is because it is necessary to prevent data from being erroneously destroyed by various counters and data which are stored in the RAM 203 and used to manage information on the character / object ratio. That is, various counters and data used for main control of the game must be protected with priority in order to protect the interests of the player. In addition, the data saved in the stack area of the RAM 203 when performing the main control of the game also continues the main control of the game again without any problem after the processing related to the management of the information related to the feature ratio is performed along the way You must make sure that they are protected.

  Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 stores various counters and data used for main control of the game in the internal work area 203x1 of the in-use area 203x, and also performs the main control of the game. The data to be saved is saved in the inner stack area 203x2 of the in-use area 203x. On the other hand, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data used to manage information related to the item ratio in the outside work area 203y1 of the out-of-use area 203y, and also manages the information related to the item ratio in the stack area. The data to be saved is saved in the outside stack area 203y2 of the out-of-use area 203y. This makes it possible to reliably protect various counters and data used for main control of the game and data saved in the stack area when the control is performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 32, it is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be performed periodically are performed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a game process is performed to perform main control of the game (S2001). For example, the processing of S101 to S111 and the like of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the first embodiment is executed in the processing of S2001. That is, the main control of the game includes the lottery of the big hit, the setting of the variable display, the opening and closing control of the big winning opening (large opening) 65a at the time of big hit, the winning lottery of the second symbol display device 83, etc. . As described above, the MPU 201 uses the in-use area 203x (the internal work area 203x1 and the internal stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203 while executing the process of S2001.

  Next, a duty ratio process is performed to manage information related to the duty ratio (S2002). The details of the duty ratio process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S2002, the timer interrupt process is ended.

  As described above, in the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the game process is performed first, and then, by performing the duty ratio process, the main control of the game, which is an important control, is preferentially executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the details of the duty ratio process (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the duty ratio process. In this duty ratio processing, first, an interrupt is prohibited (S2011), and then the flag register 200a is saved to the inner stack area 203x2 by the PUSH instruction (S2012), and then the subroutine main processing is executed by the CALL instruction. The subroutine program to be read out is read out, and the main processing is executed (S2013). Details of the combination main process will be described later with reference to FIG. Note that at the stage of the processing of S2011 and S2012, the MPU 201 executes the processing using the in-use area 203x of the RAM 203.

  When the processing of S2013 ends and returns from the subroutine program of the combination main processing to this combination processing, the flag register 200a saved in the inner stack area 203x2 is then restored by the POP instruction (S2015), In step S2016, the combination processing is ended. Also in the processing of S2015 and S2016, the MPU 201 executes processing using the in-use area 203x of the RAM 203.

  In the process of S2012, the flag register 200a is saved to the internal work area 203x1 using a load (LD) instruction, and is saved to the internal work area 203x1 using a load (LD) instruction in the process of S2014. The flag register 200a may be restored.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the details of the main processing (S2013) to be executed by reading out the subroutine program in the processing (S2002) (see FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the winning combination.

  In the duty ratio main processing, first, the load (LD) instruction sets the stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 to the start position of the outer stack area 203y2 (S2021). As a result, data is saved to the outer stack area 203y2 in the subsequent processing. After this processing, the MPU 201 uses the outside work area 203y1 as a work area of the RAM 203. That is, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data using the external work area 203y1, and uses the external stack area 203y2 as necessary.

  Next, of the registers 200, the load (LD) instruction is used to individually set the registers 200 (except for the flag register 200a) used in the processing relating to the character ratio to each of the outside work area 203y1. It is evacuated (S2022). Then, the processing relating to the item ratio is executed (S2023).

  In the process of S2023, for example, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the same process as the bonus ratio management main process (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 of the bonus ratio management chip 207 is executed. Also, a process of controlling the display of the duty ratio display device 400 is executed. In addition, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment (see FIGS. 22 and 30). The same processing as in the above may be performed in the processing of S2023.

  When the process of S2023 ends, next, the stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 is set to a fixed address in the inner stack area 203x2 by a load (LD) instruction (S2024). As a result, in the subsequent processing, data is again started to the inner stack area 203x2.

  Here, in the part ratio processing (S2002) in which the part ratio main processing (S2013) is executed, one game processing (S2001) for executing main control of the game in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It will be done after finishing. The timer interrupt process is read out when the counter update process (S702 to S703) is not executed in the infinite loop (loop of S701 to S703) of the main process (FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 201. And run.

  Therefore, when the process of S2024 is executed, the inner stack area 203x2 includes the data saved when shifting from the main process to the timer interrupt process and the flag register 200a saved by the process of S2012. The number of data saved is fixed (however, when the flag register 200a is saved in the inner work area 203x1 by the load instruction, it does not exist in the inner stack area 203x2), and the number of the saved data is fixed. Therefore, when the stack pointer is designated at a position stacked in the inner stack area 203x2 in the process of S2012, the location can be surely designated only by setting the fixed address to the stack pointer. Then, before the stack pointer is shifted from the inner stack area 203x2 to the outer stack area 203y2 (before the process of S2012), the value of the stack pointer indicating the inside of the inner stack area 203x2 need not be saved. It is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 for the saving.

  Next, the values of the respective registers 200 saved individually in the determined area of the external work area 203y1 by the process of S2022 are respectively determined from the determined area of the external work area 203y1 corresponding to the load (LD) instruction. By reading out and setting in the corresponding register 200, recovery is performed (S2025). Then, after the processing of S2025, the combination main processing is ended, and the processing returns to the combination processing. Further, after the process of S2025 is completed, the MPU 201 uses the internal work area 203x1 as a work area of the RAM 203. That is, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data using the internal work area 203x1, and uses the internal stack area 203x2 as needed.

  As described above, the MPU 201 executes each processing using the out-of-use area 203 y (the outside work area 203 y 1 and the outside stack area 203 y 2) when executing the processing (S 2023) related to the character item ratio. At the stage of transition to the processing of S2023 using the out-of-area area 203y, among the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the item ratio are saved individually to the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203 Do. Then, before the process of S2023 ends and the MPU 201 returns to the process of using the in-use area 203x, the registers 200 saved in the outside work area 203y1 are restored to the corresponding registers 200 respectively. Thereafter, a game process is performed which performs main control of the game using the in-use area 203x (the inner work area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2).

  Here, from the game processing which performs the main control of the game which uses the use area area 203x, the processing concerning the property ratio which uses the use area outside area 203y is done, the game which uses the use area area 203x again In the case of returning to the game processing that performs the main control of the game, the game of performing the main control of the game from the protection of the player's profit and that the main control of the game must be continued without problems again. The process should not be affected by the process related to the feature ratio. Therefore, the RAM 203 is divided into an in-use area 203 x used for processing of main control of the game and an out-of-use area 203 y used for processing related to the feature ratio. However, since the register 200 has a smaller capacity than the RAM 203, and there is also a register 200 for which the purpose of use is specified, the register 200 is used for the main control processing of the game and the processing for the item ratio. It is impossible or difficult to separate

  In addition, before and after performing processing related to the ratio of goods, in other words, from the game processing to perform the main control of the game using the area of use area 203x to the processing related to the ratio of goods used area out of the area of use 203y The content of the register 200 is made the same in the step of performing and the transition from processing relating to the property ratio using the non-in-use area 203y to gaming processing performing main control of the game using the in-use area 203x. Thus, there is also a demand for ensuring that the game processing that performs the main control of the game is not affected by the processing related to the feature ratio executed between the two.

  On the other hand, before performing processing relating to the item ratio using the non-use area 203 y, the contents of all the registers 200 are collectively saved in the outer stack area 203 y 2 using a PUSH instruction, and processing relating to the item ratio is performed. It is also conceivable to restore all the registers 200 collectively from the outer stack area 203y2 using the POP instruction after the execution. However, in this case, in order to save the contents of all the registers 200, it is necessary to set the capacity of the outer stack area 203y2 large beforehand, so that the capacity of the outer work area 203y1 is reduced or the RAM 203 has a large capacity. You have to

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the MPU 201 is provided in the case of shifting from the game processing that mainly controls the game using the in-use area 203x to the processing related to the character ratio using the out-of-use area 203y. Of the registered registers 200, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the item ratio are saved individually to the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and after the processing relating to the ratio processing is executed, the non-use area 203y is When transitioning (returning) to processing for performing main control of a game using the use area area 203x from processing relating to the used item ratio, the registers 200 evacuated to the outside work area 203y1 are individually restored. In this way, from the game processing which performs the main control of the game using the use area area 203x to the processing concerning the character and article ratio using the use area outside area 203y, the role using the use area outside area 203y Since the contents of the register 200 can be made the same at the stage of transition from the processing relating to the object ratio to the game processing that performs the main control of the game using the in-use area 203x, the game that performs the main control of the game It can be ensured that the process is not affected by the process related to the feature ratio performed between the two.

  In addition, from the game processing which performs the main control of the game which uses the use area inside area 203x, the stage which it moves to the processing regarding the feature ratio which uses the use area outside area 203y, the goods which use the use area outside area 203y At the stage of transition from processing for the ratio to gaming processing that performs main control of the game using the in-use area 203x, instead of saving / restoring the contents of all the registers 200, processing for the character ratio Since the contents of only some of the registers 200 used are saved / restored, the capacity of the RAM 203 (outside work area 203y1) necessary to save the contents of the registers can be suppressed. Therefore, the capacity of the RAM 203 can be reduced, and a large area for storing other data can be secured in the external work area 203y1.

  The register 200 which is not used in the processing relating to the item ratio is not affected by the processing relating to the item ratio in the first place, and its contents continue to be held before and after execution of the processing relating to the object ratio. Therefore, without saving / restoring the content of the register 200 which is not used in the processing relating to the item ratio, it is possible to save / restore only the content of only a part of the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the symbol ratio. It is possible to ensure that the game processing that performs the main control of the game is not affected by the processing related to the feature ratio executed between the two.

  However, since the flag register 200a is a register used for all instructions executed by the MPU 201, it naturally becomes a register also used for processing related to the character ratio, but in the processing of S2022, the flag register 200a is used. Exceptionally did not save. This is because the content of the flag register 200a is changed only by reading out the main processing (S2013) in the processing of the ratio shown in FIG. This is because the value of the flag register 200a at the end of the game processing when playing can not be saved at the stage of the processing of S2022.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, only the flag register 200a is saved to the inner stack area 203x2 before reading out the main processing (S2013) in the main processing (S2013) shown in FIG. 33, and after the main processing (S2013) ends. , Only the flag register 200a is restored from the inner stack area 203x2. As a result, the value of the flag register 200a at the end of the game processing can be reliably restored after execution of the processing relating to the item ratio.

  In addition, from the game processing which performs the main control of the game which uses the use area inside area 203x, the stage which it moves to the processing regarding the feature ratio which uses the use area outside area 203y, the goods which use the use area outside area 203y Since the saving / restoring of the register 200 is performed separately for each individual register at the stage of transition from the processing relating to the ratio to the game processing that performs main control of the game using the in-use area 203x, Only the register 200 that needs to be saved / restored (ie, used for processing related to the character ratio) in order to ensure that the main processing game processing that performs the main control is not affected by the processing related to the character ratio performed between the two (Register 200 only) can be individually designated to perform saving / restoring.

  Further, since the register 200 is evacuated not to the outer stack area 203y2 but to the outer work area 203y1, the capacity required for the outer stack area 203y2 can be reduced and a large capacity of the outer work area 203y1 can be secured. Further, some MPUs 201 pre-specify the stack area and the work area according to the model (type). Such MPU 201 has a function of clearing (initializing to 0) the contents of the RAM 203 itself when data is further saved and stacked beyond the area of the pre-specified stack area. is there. On the other hand, evacuating the register 200 not to the outer stack area 203y2 but to the outer work area 203y1 can prevent the outer stack area 203y2 from being full with data immediately stacked. Therefore, in the MPU 201 having such a function, it is possible to suppress that the RAM 203 is cleared because the data is further stacked beyond the previously designated area of the outer stack area 203y2.

  Also, since the register 200 is saved using the load (LD) instruction rather than using the PUSH instruction / POP instruction, the location to be saved can be fixed by the program. Therefore, while performing the processing relating to the property ratio, the game is performed to perform main control of the game by setting a program to use the outside work area 203y1 while avoiding the area where the register 200 is evacuated clearly The contents of the register 200 used in the process can be protected securely.

  When all the registers 200 are used in the processing related to the item ratio, all the registers 200 are saved / restored to the determined area of the outside work area 203y1 individually using the load (LD) instruction. You may make it Also by this, it is possible to receive the effect of evacuating the register 200 to the outside work area 203y1.

  Also, when a part of the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the item ratio is saved, the PUSH instruction is used to save individually to the determined area of the outer stack area 203y2, and the outer stack area 203y2 is determined. The registers 200 saved in the above area may be restored individually using a POP instruction. Thus, the capacity of the RAM 203 required to save the contents of the register can be suppressed. Therefore, the capacity of the RAM 203 can be reduced, and a large area for storing the external work area 203y1 can be secured. In this case, when the register 200 saved using the POP instruction is restored, the LIFO method, that is, the register 200 saved later using the PUSH instruction needs to be restored first using the POP instruction. .

  In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments can achieve the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the main control device 110, from the game processing which performs the main control of the game using the area 203x of use area to a process related to the character ratio using non-use area 203y At the stage of processing, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the item ratio are individually saved, and after the processing relating to the item ratio ends, the processing relating to the item ratio using the out-of-use area 203 At the stage of transition to the game processing for performing main control of the game using the area 203x, the case where the evacuated register 200 is individually restored has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the main control apparatus 110 uses the in-use area 203 x in the accessory processing (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32). At the stage of reading an item main process (S2013) for executing a process relating to the item ratio using the out-of-use area 203y by the CALL instruction while executing the process, the register 200 used in the process relating to the item ratio. Are individually cleared to 0, and the character main process (S2013) is read by the CALL instruction. Further, in the character main processing (S2013), the character main processing (S2013) using the out-of-use area 203y is ended, and processing returns to the processing using the in-use area 203x After individually clearing the registers 200 used in step 0 to 0, the processing returns to the duty ratio processing.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to third embodiments. I omit explanation.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is compared with the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment in the ratio processing (S2002), which is one of the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The partial processing differs from the partial processing of the main processing (S2013), which is one of the processing of the processing (S2002).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a duty ratio process (S2002) in the fourth embodiment. In this combination ratio processing, first, after performing the same processing of S2011 and S2012 as the third embodiment, then all the registers 200 used in the processing related to the combination ratio (except for the flag register 200a) Clear to 0 using Load (LD) instructions individually. Then, the process shifts to the processing of S2013, reads a subroutine program that executes the main processing of the weight ratio using the out-of-use area 203y by the CALL instruction, and executes the main processing of the weight ratio. Then, the processing of S2014, S2015 identical to that of the third embodiment is executed, and thereafter the combination processing is ended.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the main processing (S2013) of the duty ratio main processing according to the fourth embodiment. In this combination main process, first, the process of S2021 identical to that of the third embodiment is executed, and then, after the process of S2023 identical to that of the third embodiment (that is, the process related to the bonus ratio) is executed. Next, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the item ratio are individually cleared to 0 (S2041). Then, the same processing of S2024 as the third embodiment is executed, and the main processing of the winning ratio using the out-of-use area 203y is ended, and the processing returns to the winning ratio processing and uses the in-use area 203x. Run.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the register 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio using the out-of-use area 203y, the value is changed by the processing related to the accessory ratio, and the value is left as it is in the corresponding register 200. However, it is premised that even if the MPU 201 executes game processing that performs main control of a game using the use area in the use area 203x, the game processing is not affected at all. In this case, the MPU 201 is originally provided in the MPU 201 at the stage of transition from processing for performing main control of the game using the in-use area 203x to processing for the bonus ratio for using the out-of-use area 203y. Of the registers 200, after the register 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio is evacuated and the processing relating to the accessory ratio is executed, the processing relating to the accessory ratio using the out-of-use area 203y There is no problem even if the saved register 200 is not restored at the stage of transition to the game processing that performs main control of the game using the area 203x. However, in this case, since the value of the register 200 changes before and after the processing related to the feature ratio, it is impossible for an external person to judge whether or not there is really a problem with this.

  Therefore, as in the present embodiment, first, in the part ratio process, from the game processing that performs the main control of the game using the in-use area within the use area 203x to the process regarding the bonus ratio using the out-of-use area 203y Prior to reading out the subroutine program that executes the main processing in the CALL step, ie, all the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the proportion of the work to be performed in the main processing of the combination are individually executed once. Clear to And, in the part ratio main processing, after executing the processing concerning the character item ratio, the game processing which performs the main control of the game which uses the use area internal area 203x from the processing concerning the character object ratio which uses the non-use area area 203y In the transition to the step, all registers 200 used in the processing related to the item ratio (that is, the same register 200 as the register 200 cleared to 0 before executing the ratio main processing) are individually set to 0. clear. Thereby, the step of shifting from the game processing which performs the main control of the game using the in-use area 203x to the process related to the property ratio using the out-of-use area 203y (the step of reading out the main process). Transitioning from processing relating to the property ratio using the non-use area 203 y to gaming processing performing main control of the game using the in-use area 203 x (step of returning from main ratio processing to main ratio processing) Thus, the contents of the register 200 can be made identical at first glance. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the game processing that performs the main control of the game is not affected by the processing related to the feature ratio executed between the two. Note that the register 200 not used in the processing related to the character ratio does not change in content before and after the processing related to the character ratio and continues to be held, so even if this unused register 200 is not cleared to 0, It becomes the same at both stages.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment, in the processing of S2031 and S2041, the case where the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the character item ratio are individually cleared to 0 has been described, but it is not necessary to necessarily clear to 0. For example, even if the same predetermined value is stored in the processes of S2031 and S2041, the above effect can be obtained. However, immediately after the power is turned on and the reset input to the MPU 201 is released (at a stage where software initialization is not performed), S2031 and S2041 are performed in view of the fact that all the registers are initialized to 0. In the processing of the above, it is desirable to individually clear (initialize) the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the item ratio to zero. Also, by individually clearing the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the item ratio to 0, it can be grasped at first glance that the registers 200 are cleared to 0.

  In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments can achieve the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a fifth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, instead of the duty ratio display device 400 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment or the fourth embodiment, four seven-segment displays (the lower right of the seven-segment portion A base display device 401 (see FIG. 38A) is provided which includes dot segments 401a, 401b, 401c, and 401d provided on the side. The base value of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the base display device 401 as one of the information related to the item ratio.

  The base value is the number (percentage) of the balls paid out (raised) for 100 balls at normal times except when the jackpot, the high probability (certain variation), and the time reduction are performed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the number of out balls guided from the game area to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls shot into the game area, in other words, the number of balls used in the game). The base value for the 60000 spheres is measured and stored each time the total number of outs is 60000.

  Then, in the base display device 401, the base value (hereinafter referred to as "real-time base value") measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60000, and the total number of outs in the last time (closest) In addition to the base value measured when 60000 reached (hereinafter referred to as “previous base value”), and when the total number of outs reached 60000 before the previous one (previous time) Base value (hereinafter referred to as “previous base value”) and the base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60000 before (previous time) one time before (previous time) The term “rotation base value” is switched and displayed every predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment). By displaying base values (previous base value, last-previous base value, last-previous base value) for multiple past times in addition to the real-time base value, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been a fraud. In addition, it is possible to predict, to some extent, the time when the fraud has occurred.

  In the fifth embodiment, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power on. Is turned on for a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment). In the base display device 401, if a part of the segments is not lit due to a failure such as a break, the base value etc. can not be displayed correctly, and there is a possibility that an erroneous judgment may be made in judging the presence or absence of fraud. By lighting all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 for a predetermined period each time the power is turned on, it can be confirmed whether all the segments can be normally lit, and the base display device Whether or not the display of 401 is normally performed can be easily determined.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is a novelty of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of completely new launch of the pachinko machine 10 in a manufacturing plant, or when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to another hole with a used table. When starting up, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of out reaches a predetermined number (300 in the present embodiment) is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display. . In the new launch of the pachinko machine 10, there are cases where balls are put in each winning hole and a prize ball is paid out in a shipping inspection or the like for quality confirmation of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time greatly differs from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly launched, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches the predetermined number (300 in the present embodiment) at first is the normal base value display. By displaying in different special display modes, it can be shown that the displayed base value is not a normal base value. In addition, by the display being performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fourth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fourth embodiments. I omit explanation.

  FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment in that, in the third embodiment, the duty ratio display device 400 is connected to the main control device 110; In the embodiment, the base display device 401 is connected to the main control device 110. The base display device 401 is for displaying the base value of the pachinko machine 10 as described above.

  The base value of the pachinko machine 10 may be switched and displayed for each predetermined period together with the character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 in the duty ratio display device 400 in the third embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, the inspection terminal 207 a is not necessarily provided, and the configuration relating to the item ratio to the inspection device 300 may not be output. Further, when the information on the item ratio is not output to the inspection apparatus 300, the second reading memory 264 may be omitted.

  Here, the details of the base display device 401 will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 38A is a schematic view schematically showing the base display device 401. As shown in FIG. In the base display device 401, four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d are arranged side by side in a horizontal row, and are disposed on a main substrate constituting the main control device 110. That is, when looking at the back side of the pachinko machine 10, it is assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen, and four-digit numbers or alphabets can be confirmed. The display screen of the base display device 401 may be assembled so that it can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  Each of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d has a dot segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment part in addition to the 7-segment part. The base display device 401 uses the two left seven-segment displays 401a and 401b as identification segments among the four seven-segment displays 401a to 401d and the two right seven-segment displays 401c and 401d as a ratio segment Do. The identification segment is used to indicate identification information for identifying the content to be displayed in the ratio segment. The ratio segment is used to display the ratio of the content specified by the identification information indicated by the identification segment.

  FIG. 38B is a schematic view schematically showing display contents in the base display device 401. As shown in FIG. As described above, in the base display device 401, the real-time base value measured in real time during the period until the total number of out reaches 60000 and the total number of out in the last time (most recently) reaches 60000 The last base value measured to the last and the last second base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60000 before the last time (previous time), and one before the last time (prev. And the base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60000 is switched every 5 seconds and displayed.

  When displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, “bL.” Is displayed on the identification segment, and the real-time base value being measured is displayed on the ratio segment in two digits. By displaying “bL.” In the identification segment, it is possible to make a person who sees that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the real-time base value.

  In the base display device 401, when displaying the previous base value, “b1.” Is displayed on the identification segment, and the previous base value is displayed on the ratio segment in two digits. By displaying “b1.” In the identification segment, it is possible to allow a person who saw that the number displayed in the ratio segment to be the last base value to be recognized.

  In the base display device 401, when the base value is displayed twice before, “b2.” Is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying “b2.” In the identification segment, it is possible to make a person who sees that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the base value of the previous two times.

  In the base display device 401, when the base value is displayed twice before the last, “b3.” Is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value is displayed in the second digit in the ratio segment. By displaying “b3.” In the identification segment, it is possible to allow a person who sees that the number displayed in the ratio segment to have a base value.

  As described above, the base display device 401 also displays base values (previous base value, last-previous base value, last-previous base value) for a plurality of past times in addition to the real-time base value. Here, as described above, the real time base value is a base value measured in real time during a period until the total number of outs reaches 60000. Here, generally, in the hall, about one thousand to twenty thousand balls are hit per day to one pachinko machine 10 to play a game. That is, the previous base value measured for 60000 spheres, the last-previous base value, and the last-previous base value indicate base values over several days of about 3 to 6 days. Assuming that the real-time base value is not displayed on the base display device 401, it takes about 3 to 6 days before the measurement of the base value for 60000 spheres is performed. It may be a base value of 3 to 6 days ago. Therefore, if there is any wrongdoing after the previous measurement of the base value, the base value for the next 60000 spheres is measured and displayed on the base display device 401 for 3 to 6 days. There is a risk that fraud can not be found. On the other hand, by displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, it is possible to show the current base value as a preliminary value, so that in the case of any fraudulent activity, the real-time base value is immediately You can discover the possibility that there was an action.

  On the other hand, as described above, the real-time base value is a base value measured in real time with the total number of outs being less than 60000. The base value is, as described above, the number (percentage) of balls that are paid out (raised) for 100 balls at normal times, so the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes in any way The real-time base value may be fluctuated due to the light (for example, the normal state happened to last for a long time, the big hit state happened to happen frequently, the definite change happened to happen for a long time, etc.). Therefore, when only the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there is a fraudulent act.

  On the other hand, since the previous base value measured for 60000 spheres, the last-previous base value, and the last-previous base value show base values over several days of about 3 to 6 days, The last base value, the last-previous base value, and the last-previous base value can be averaged regardless of what gaming state the pachinko machine 10 has followed for the corresponding several days. Therefore, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also the base value measured for 60000 spheres such as the previous base value on the base display device 401, it is possible to judge the presence or absence of the fraud more accurately. it can.

  On the other hand, when only the previous base value is displayed as the base value measured for 60000 balls, it is assumed that the player who happened to be accustomed to the pachinko machine 10 played during the period when the previous base value was measured. Then, the base value is generally lowered. Therefore, even when only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there is a fraud. On the other hand, each base value can be displayed by displaying not only the previous base value but also a plurality of base values such as the last-previous base value and the last-previous base value as the base values measured for 60000 spheres. , It can be determined whether or not there has been a change in the base value based on the familiarity of the player who played the game. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine the presence or absence of the wrongdoing.

  In the present embodiment, in the base display device 401, the real time base value, the previous base value, the last-previous base value, and the last-previous base value are switched every 5 seconds and displayed, for example, the number of 7-segment displays The mode in which the real-time base value and the previous base value are simultaneously displayed and the mode in which the base value and base point are displayed simultaneously may be switched and displayed at predetermined intervals. In addition, the real time base value, the previous base value, the last second base value, and the last second each base value may be displayed on the base display device 401 simultaneously.

  Further, in the present embodiment, three values of the last base value, the last-previous base value, and the last-previous base value are displayed as the base values measured for 60000 spheres to be displayed on the base display device 401. However, in addition to the last base value, the last second base value, and the last second base value, the second base value and the last second base value may be displayed. It is also possible to further display the base value before each other, which was measured when the total number of outs reached 60000 before one (previously). That is, any two or more base values may be displayed as the base values measured for 60000 spheres to be displayed on the base display device 401.

  Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. The base display device 401 is connected to a base display device control circuit 402 provided in the main controller 110 and connected to the input / output port 205. The base display device control circuit 402 drives and controls each of the 7-segment displays 401 a to 401 d of the base display device 401 based on the drive and control signals from the MPU 201 to make various types as shown in FIG. It is what displays.

  In the process for displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the process is performed using the out-of-use area 203y of the RAM 203. That is, the information necessary for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is stored in the outside work area 203y1 of the out-of-use area 203y. Here, with reference to FIG. 39, details of information necessary for causing the base display device 401 to display the base value, which are stored in the external work area 203y1, will be described. First, FIG. 39A is a schematic view schematically showing information necessary for displaying a base value, which is stored in the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG.

  The information necessary for displaying the base value stored in the outside work area 203y1 includes the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, and the last two base value data 203n, base value data 203o, the new start flag 203p, and the display type counter 203q are prepared at least.

  Among them, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real time base value data 203l, the last base value data 203m, the last second base value data 203n, the last second base value data 203o, and the new start flag 203p Even when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated, the information is maintained without being initialized (cleared). Thereby, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated at the time of power on, the measurement of the real-time base value performed before the operation is continued is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401 It can be done. In addition, the base display device 401 can display the previous base value, the last-previous base value, and the last-previous base value held before the operation of the RAM erase switch 122 is performed.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the RAM all erase switch (not shown) is provided in the substrate box 100 in which the main substrate is accommodated, and the power is turned on while the RAM all erase switch is operated. RAM 203 includes total out number counter 203j, low probability payout number counter 203k, real time base value data 203l, last base value data 203m, last second base value data 203n, last second every base value data 203o, new start flag 203p It is supposed to be initialized (cleared). Operate the RAM all-erase switch when newly launching the pachinko machine 10, such as when completely pachinko machine 10 is newly launched in a manufacturing plant, or when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to a different hole as a second-hand table While turning on the power, total out number counter 203j, low probability payout number counter 203k, real time base value data 203l, last base value data 203m, last second base value data 203n, last every second base value data 203o, new The start-up flag 203p can be initialized, and from there, measurement of the base value can be newly started. In addition, even when moving used pachinko machine 10 to a second hall as a second-hand table, this information can be initialized (cleared), so that an illegal act is performed in the previous hall and the base value Even if is changed, by continuously displaying the information at the next store, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the suspicion that there was a fraud in the next store. Further, since the RAM all erase switch is provided in the unopened connected substrate box 100, it can not be operated unless the connection of the substrate box 100 is broken and opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudster from erasing the information necessary to display the base value, and to securely protect the information.

  It should be noted that a hole such as a keyhole is provided instead of the RAM all erase switch, and the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, and the real time base value data 203l are provided only when a key or the like matching the hole is inserted. The last base value data 203m, the last second base value data 203n, the last second each base value data 203o, and the new start flag 203p may be initialized. As a result, only those having a key or the like that fits the hole can delete the information necessary for displaying the base value, so that the unauthorized person can be prevented from erasing the information necessary for displaying the base value. You can securely protect these information.

  The total out number counter 203 j is a counter for counting the total number of outs, which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). The total out number counter 203 j is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch, and the ball is guided to the ball discharge path when the ball is detected in the out switch 208 f As 1 is added. Then, when the total out number counter 203j becomes 60000, the MPU 201 determines that the total out number has reached 60000, executes predetermined processing described later, and initially sets the total out number counter 203j to zero. Turn Thus, the total out number is counted again by the total out number counter 203j until the total number of out reaches 60000.

  The low probability payout counter 203 k is a counter for counting the number of prize balls paid out in the normal time except for the big hit, the high probability (probability variation), and the short time. The low probability payout counter 203 k is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch. Then, when there is a payout of balls (prize balls) when the gaming state is normal, the number of the balls paid out is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the first start-up port 64a called "heso" whose opening is always open at the normal time, the first ordinary winning port 63a which is a general winning port, and the second ordinary winning port 63b. When it is detected by the first starting opening switch 208a, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, and the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d that there is a ball entry, the number of winning balls set for the corresponding winning opening Is determined by the prize ball number table 202e (see FIGS. 6 and 9), and the number of prize balls is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, "small hitting" is provided as one mode of "disengagement", and when it becomes a "small hitting", when it is constituted so that large winning a prize opening 65a may be opened for several seconds and several seconds, gaming state Normally, when the large winning opening 65a in "small hitting" is opened, the large winning opening 65a has a ball, and if a winning ball is made, the number of winning balls is the low payout number counter 203k. May be added to In addition, when the game state is normal and the second starting opening 64b is entered and the winning balls are made, the number of winning balls may be added to the low probability payout number counter 203k.

  The addition of the number of winning balls to the low probability payout counter 203 k is performed by accumulating until the total out counter 203 j reaches 60000. That is, when the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000, the value of the low probability payout number counter 203k is the number of balls paid out at the normal time with respect to 60000 balls punched out to the game area It becomes the number.

  When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000, the low probability payout number counter 203k is initialized to zero along with the total out number counter 203j. As a result, the number of balls paid out during the normal gaming state is counted by the low probability payout counter 203k until the total number of outs reaches 60000 again.

The MPU 201 calculates a real-time base value every predetermined period (for example, every 4 milliseconds when timer interrupt processing is executed) using the following equation (1).
Real-time base value = value of low-precise payout number counter 203k / value of total-out number counter 203j × 100 (1)
The real-time base value calculated by the equation (1) is stored in the real-time base value data 203l.

  That is, the real time base value data 203l is data indicating the measured (calculated) real time base value. Also, the previous base value data 203m is data showing the previous base value, the last second base value data 203n is the data showing the last second base value, and the last second every base value data 203o is the data showing the last second base value. is there.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 39B, the configurations of the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the last-previous base value data 203n, and the last-previous base value data 203o will be described. FIG. 39B is a schematic view schematically showing a configuration of each of the base value data 2031 to 203o.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (b), each base value data 203l to 203o is composed of 8 bits (1 byte), and the seventh bit (most significant bit) on the MSB side is a valid data flag, and the rest The base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits (lower 7 bits) of. Each of the base value data 2031 to 203o means that, when the valid data flag is 1, valid base values are stored in the 0th to 6th bits. On the other hand, each of the base value data 203l to 203o means that when the valid data flag is 0, no valid base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits.

  The respective base value data 203l to 203o are all initialized to zero both the valid data flag and the base value when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch. That is, immediately after the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch, no valid data is stored for the real time base value, the previous base value, the last previous base value, and the last second previous base value.

  Thereafter, the base value calculated by the equation (1) is stored in the base value of the real time base value data 203l as the real time base value until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, while the real time base value data 203l The valid data flag of is left as 0. Then, in this case, when displaying the real time base value in the base display device 401, the identification segment blinks (or lights up) "88." and the ratio of the real time base value stored in the real time base value data 203l is used. Flashes (or lights up) on the segment.

  As described above, the RAM all-erase switch is a new startup of the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 completely starts up in a manufacturing plant or when used pachinko machine 10 is moved to a different hole as a used table. If you want to And, at the new launch of the pachinko machine 10, there are cases where balls are put in each winning hole and a prize ball is paid out in a shipping inspection or the like for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Therefore, the base value at this time greatly differs from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly launched, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of out reaches 300 is first blinked (or lighted) "88." in the identification segment. In addition, the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed in a special display mode different from the usual base value display, displaying the blinking (or lighting) in the ratio segment, the base value being displayed is normal. It can be shown that it is not the base value of (effective base value). In addition, by the display being performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state. In this special display mode, both the “88.” of the identification segment and the real-time base value of the ratio segment may be turned on or off. Also, "88." of the identification segment may be lighted, and the real-time base value of the ratio segment may blink, or conversely, "88." of the identification segment is blinked, and the real-time base value of the ratio segment is lit. May be

  When the total out number counter 203 j reaches 300, the effective data flag of the real time base value data 203 l is set to 1. As a result, the base value stored in the real time base value data 203l becomes the effective base value. Therefore, based on the fact that the valid data flag of the real time base value data 203l is 1, "bL." Is lit in the identification segment of the base display device 401, and the base value of the real time base value data 203l is displayed in the ratio segment. By doing this, it is possible to report an effective real-time base value.

  On the other hand, at this stage, the valid data flag of the previous time base value data 203m, the second last time base value data 203n, and the last second last time base value data 203o remains zero. At this time, in the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 by switching every predetermined period and displaying the base value of the previous time, the base value of the last time, and the base before the last time, display corresponding to each base value is performed on the identification segment Turn on "-". This makes it possible to indicate that no valid base value has been obtained as the previous base value, the last-previous base value, or the last-previous base.

  When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000, the base value stored in the real time base value data 203l at that time becomes the base value for the total out number 60000. Therefore, the base value data 203 n is shifted to the base value data 203 o two times before, and the previous base value data 203 m is shifted to the base value data 203 n, and then the real time base value data 203 l is converted to the previous base value data 203 m. Shift. Thus, the base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60000 is held as the previous base value.

  Here, when the data is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is "1", and the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m after the shift is Also "1". Therefore, after that, when displaying the last base value on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the last base value data 203m is displayed on the ratio segment as a valid base value.

  In addition, when shifting the previous base value data 203m to the base value data 203n before the last time, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch This corresponds to the case where the total number of outs reaches the second time to 60000 after all the initialization of the RAM 203 is performed), and the valid data flag of the base value data 203n before shift after shift becomes “1”. Therefore, after that, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401 two times before, the base value stored in the base value data 203 n two times before is displayed on the ratio segment as a valid base value.

  Furthermore, when the base value data 203n is shifted to the base value data 203o just before the previous two times, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n is “1” (the power supply operates while operating the RAM all erase switch). This is applicable when the total number of outs reaches 60000 3rd time after all initialization of RAM 203 is executed), and the valid data flag of base value data 203o after shift is “1”. It becomes ". Therefore, after this, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203o is displayed on the ratio segment as a valid base value.

  When the total out number counter 203j becomes 60000 and the real time base value data 203l is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the total out number counter 203j is initialized to 0, the real time base value data 203l is also It is initialized to 0 including the valid data flag. Then, until the total out number counter 203 j reaches 300 again, the valid data flag of the real time base value data 203 l is maintained at 0, and when the total out number counter 203 j reaches 300, the valid data of the real time base value data 203 l 1 is stored in the flag. Thereafter, 1 is held in the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l until the total out number counter 203j becomes 60000.

  Here, while the total number of outs is small, the real-time base value to be measured largely depends on the game content at that time, so even if it is displayed, it becomes a meaningless base value, which adversely affects the judgment of fraud. There is a risk of Therefore, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401 by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 0 while the total out number is 0 to 300, the identification segment is based on the real-time base While lighting "bL." Which shows a value, "-" is lighted to a ratio segment. This can indicate that the currently effective real-time base value is not obtained because the total number of outs is small. In this case, “bL.” Indicating a real-time base value may be blinked in the identification segment, and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l may be displayed in the ratio segment. As a result, it is possible to indicate that the currently effective real-time base value is not obtained because the total number of outs is small, and to notify the real-time base value at that time as a reference.

  On the other hand, after the total number of outs reaches 300, the real time base value is displayed on the base display device 401 by setting the valid data flag of the real time base value data 203l to 1, and the identification segment is real time. “BL.” Indicating the base value is lighted, while the base value stored in the real time base value data 203l is displayed as a valid base value in the ratio segment.

  Returning to FIG. 39 (a), the new launch flag 203p is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely new launch in a manufacturing plant or when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to a different hole as a second-hand table, etc. 10 is a flag indicating that a new start-up period is underway. When the new launch flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new launch period, and when it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a new launch period.

  The new start-up flag 203p is initialized to ON when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch operated when newly starting the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period. Is shown. Then, the new start flag 203p is kept on until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, and when the total out counter 203j is different from 300, the new start flag 203p is set off. Thereafter, the new start-up flag 203p is kept off.

  When the new start-up flag 203p is on, the base display device 401 blinks (or lights up) the special display mode described above, that is, “88.” in the identification segment, and sets the real-time base value data 203l in the ratio segment. The real time base value is displayed in a manner of displaying the stored real time base value in a blinking (or lit) manner. In addition, by the display being performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state.

  The display type counter 203 q is a counter for determining the type of the base value to be displayed on the base display device 401. When the display type counter 203 q is 0, the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value, and when the display type counter 203 q is 1, the base display device 401 displays the previous base value, and the display type counter 203 q When 2 is 2, the base display device 401 displays the base value twice before and when the display type counter 203 q is 3, the base display device 401 displays the base value 2 times before.

  In the display type counter 203q, when the new start flag 203p is set to off, that is, when the total number of outs becomes 300 after the new start of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the new start period is ended. Is initialized to 0. Then, the display type counter 203 q is incremented by one every five seconds, and is reset to 0 when the value of the display type counter 203 q is 3 when counting up. As a result, the base value displayed on the base display device 401 changes in the order of the real time base value, the previous base value, the last-previous base value, and the last-previous base value every 5 seconds, and displays the base value every second. After that, returning to the real time base value, the display of the real time base value, the previous base value, the last-previous base value, and the last-previous base value is repeated while switching every 5 seconds.

  Next, referring to FIG. 40, in the fifth embodiment, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when power is supplied to the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. Here, this start-up process will be described focusing on differences from the start-up process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. As described above, portions where the same processing as the start-up processing of the first embodiment is executed are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  First, in the process of S604, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S604: Yes), and in the process of S605, it is determined that the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 ( S605: No), when it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value is not normal by the processing of S607 (S607: No), after sending out the payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 (S614), the RAM 203 Of the use areas, the total out number counter 203j necessary for displaying the base value, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the last previous base value data 203n, the last two days The area excluding the base value data 203o and the new start flag 203p is cleared to 0. And (S3001), sets an initial value for RAM203 area was the clear, except for information needed to display the base value such as (S3002).

  Thereby, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated at the time of power on, the measurement of the real-time base value performed before the operation is continued is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401 It can be done. In addition, the base display device 401 can display the previous base value, the last-previous base value, and the last-previous base value held before the operation of the RAM erase switch 122 is performed. Then, even if the fraudster operates the RAM erase switch 122 in order to erase the evidence, the information necessary for displaying the base value continues to be held, so it is possible to suppress the erasure of the evidence of the fraud.

  If it is determined in the process of S604 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604), then it is determined whether the RAM all erase switch is turned on (S3003). Then, if the RAM all erase switch is not turned on (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S605.

  On the other hand, if the RAM all erase switch is turned on (S3003: Yes), a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (S3004) as in the process of S614, and then the RAM 203 The entire initialization process (S3005, S3006) is executed. In the all initialization process (S3005, S3006) of the RAM 203, the total out number counter 203j which is information necessary for displaying the base value, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the last two bases The use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 including the value data 203n, the base value data 203o immediately before and the new start flag 203p (S3005), and then an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S3006).

  As described above, the RAM all-erase switch is a new startup of the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 completely starts up in a manufacturing plant or when used pachinko machine 10 is moved to a different hole as a used table. If you do, it is supposed to be manipulated. Then, the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability paid out number counter 203k, the real time base value data 203l, the last base value data 203m, the last second base value data 203n, the last time The base value data 203o and the new start-up flag 203p can be initialized, and measurement of the base value can be newly started from there. In addition, even when moving used pachinko machine 10 to a second hall as a second-hand table, this information can be initialized (cleared), so that an illegal act is performed in the previous hall and the base value Even if is changed, by continuously displaying the information at the next store, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the suspicion that there was a fraud in the next store. Further, since the RAM all erase switch is provided in the unopened connected substrate box 100, it can not be operated unless the connection of the substrate box 100 is broken and opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudster from erasing the information necessary to display the base value, and to securely protect the information.

  When one of the processes in S609, S3002 and S3006 is executed, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are then lighted (S3007), In this state, wait processing is performed for 5 seconds (S3008). Thus, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are continuously lit for at least 5 seconds. .

  In the base display device 401, if a part of the segments is not lit due to a failure such as a break, the base value etc. can not be displayed correctly, and there is a possibility that an erroneous judgment may be made in judging the presence or absence of fraud. By lighting all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 for at least 5 seconds each time the power is turned on, it can be confirmed whether all the segments can be normally lit, and the base display Whether or not the display of the device 401 is normally performed can be easily determined.

  Further, the progress of the start-up process is waited for 5 seconds during which the lighting is performed, and the start of the normal game process is kept waiting. Thereby, when the base display device 401 is in a state in which the base value can not be correctly displayed, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game without being able to determine whether there is a cheating or not, and there was a cheating temporarily. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of any disadvantage to the player or the hall.

  In the present embodiment, while all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are lit each time the power is turned on, the game is stopped so as not to proceed for 5 seconds. However, while the lighting is being performed, normal game processing may be started to advance the game. In this case, only the display of the base value on the base display device 401 may be made to stand by while measuring the real time base value in accordance with the progress of the game. As a result, the player immediately plays the game even if processing is performed to light all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 when a momentary power failure occurs. It can resume.

  In the start-up process, after the process of S3008, the process proceeds to the process of S613.

  Next, base value processing performed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the base value processing. This base value process is the duty ratio process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 shown in the third embodiment. It is executed as one process of (S2002), and calculation (measurement) of the base value and display of the base value are performed.

  In this base value processing, first, the base value calculation processing is executed (S3101), and while the real-time base value is calculated (measured), the total number of outs becomes 60000, between the respective base value data 203l to 203o. Execute shift processing etc. The details of the base value calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, it is determined whether one second has passed since the base value display process (S3103) was performed last time (S3102), and it is determined that one second has passed since the base value display process (S3103) was performed last time If it is determined (S3102: Yes), a base value display process is executed (S3103), and a process of displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is performed. The details of the base value display process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44.

  When the process of S3103 is completed, the base value process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that one second has not elapsed since the previous execution of the base value display process (S3103) as a result of the process of S3102 (S3102: No), the base value display process (S3103) is skipped. End the base value processing. Thus, the base value display process (S3103) is executed at one second intervals, and the display of the base display device 401 is drive-controlled every one second.

  In the determination process of S3102, when the process of S3102 is executed for the first time after the main control device 110 is powered on (that is, after the start-up process shown in FIG. 40 is executed), the base in the previous time Whether one second has passed since the value display process (S3103) is not performed, and a positive determination (S3102: Yes) is made as it is, and the base value display process (S3103) is performed. As a result, after the start-up process shown in FIG. 40 is performed, the drive control process of the base display device 401 can be performed promptly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, details of the above-described base value calculation process (S3101) which is one process of the base value process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the base value calculation process.

  In the base value calculation process (S3101), first, at least the output of each switch of the first starting opening switch 208a, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, and the out switch 208f is read, and the first starting opening It is judged whether or not there is a winning to the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the presence or absence of the ball guided to the ball discharging path, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored (S3201 ). The determination of one ball winning and one ball guided to the ball discharging path is performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the outputs of the switches 208a, 208c, 208d, and 208f.

  Next, it is determined whether the out switch 208f is on (S3201), and if it is determined that the out switch 208f is on and there is a ball guided to the ball discharging path (S3201: Yes), the total out One is added to the number counter 203j (S3203). As a result, the total out number, which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of struck balls), is counted by the total out number counter 203 j.

  After the process of S3203, or when it is determined that the out switch 208f is not on and there is no ball guided to the ball discharge path by the process of S3201 (S3201: No), then the gaming state is a big hit However, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state and not in the short time state, that is, whether the gaming state is normal (S3204). If it is determined that the gaming state is not a jackpot, is a low probability state, and is not a time saving state, that is, the gaming state is normal (S3204: Yes), the processing of S3205 is executed.

  That is, in the process of S3205, a prize determined to have a prize among the first starting port 64a, the first ordinary prize port 63a, and the second ordinary prize port 63b based on the prize detection information stored in the process of S3201. If there is a mouth, the number of winning balls in the number corresponding to the winning opening where the winning is made (that is, the number defined in the winning balls number table 202e) is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out at the normal time except when the jackpot is high, when the probability is high (probable variation), and when the time is short is counted by the low probability payout number counter 203k.

  After the processing of S3205, or when it is determined that the gaming state is a big hit, a high probability (probability), or a short time by the processing of S3204, that is, the gaming state is not normal (S3204: Then, the real-time base value is calculated by the above-mentioned equation (1), and the calculated real-time base value is stored as a base value of the real-time base value data 203l (S3206). By this process, measurement of the base value is performed in real time.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the total out number counter 203j is 60000, that is, whether the total number of out has reached 60000 (S3207). As a result, if the total number of outs has not reached 60000 (S3207: No), the processing of S3208 to S3210 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S3211. On the other hand, if the total number of outs has reached 60000 (S3207: Yes), the processing of S3208 to S3210 is executed, and the process shifts to the processing of S3211.

  In the process of S3208, first, the base value data 203n is shifted to the base value data 203o, and the previous base value data 203m is shifted to the base value data 203n, and then the real time base value data 203l is shifted to the previous time. Shift to the base value data 203 m (S3208). Thus, the real-time base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60000 is held as the previous base value, and thereafter, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 as the previous base value. Also, each base value displayed so far as the previous base value and the last second base value is displayed on the base display device 401 as the last second base value and the last second previous value.

  Each base value may be stored in a first in first out (FIFO) ring buffer. In this case, the address (ring buffer pointer) storing the real-time base value may be updated in the process of S3208. However, when storing the base value in the FIFO method ring buffer, if the ring buffer pointer is broken once due to noise or other influence, the base value may be stored in the RAM 203 correctly and displayed again. is there. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the area of the RAM 203 storing the real-time base value, the previous base value, the last-previous base value, and the last-previous base value is fixed, and every time the total number of outs becomes 60000. By shifting the data between them, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problem that may occur when the base value is stored in the FIFO ring buffer.

  In the process of S3208, these shift processes are executed by one LDIR instruction. The LDIR instruction enables block transfer of data only by setting the start address (HL) of the data to be transferred, the start address (DE) of the transfer destination, and the number of transfer bytes (BC). That is, data is transferred from (HL) to (DE), (HL) and (DE) are added together by one, and (BC) is subtracted by one. And this is repeated until (BC) becomes 0. Therefore, the base value data 203o is stored in the address (AA) (the AA is one address of the RAM 203), the base value data 203n is stored in the address (AA + 1), and the previous base value data 203m is stored in the address (AA + 2). Store the real-time base value data 203l in the address (AA + 3), set the start address (HL) of the data to be transferred as (AA), and set the transfer destination address as (AA + 1), The shift process of S3208 can be easily realized by setting the number of transfer bytes to 3 bytes and executing one LDIR instruction.

  In the subsequent processing of S3209, the base value of the real-time base value data 203l and the valid data flag are initialized to 0 (S3209). As a result, the base value is newly measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60000 again, while the effective data flag of the real time base value data 203l is as long as the total number of outs reaches 300. It is kept as 0. While the total number of outs is small, the real-time base value to be measured largely depends on the game content at that time, so even if it is displayed, it becomes a meaningless base value, which may adversely affect the judgment of fraud. is there. Therefore, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401 by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 0 while the total out number is 0 to 300, the identification segment is based on the real-time base While lighting "bL." Which shows a value, "-" is lighted to a ratio segment. This can indicate that the currently effective real-time base value is not obtained because the total number of outs is small.

  In the subsequent processing of S3210, the total out number counter 203j is initialized to 0 (S3210). Thus, the total out number is counted again by the total out number counter 203j until the total number of out reaches 60000.

  In the process of S3211, it is determined whether the value of the total out number counter 203j is 300, that is, whether the total number of out has reached 300 (S3211). As a result, when the total out number has not reached 300 (S3211: No), the processing of S3212 to S3215 is skipped, and the base value calculation processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the total number of outs has reached 300 (S3211: Yes), the processing of S3212 to S3215 is executed, and then this base value calculation processing is ended.

  In the process of S3212, it is determined whether the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3212). As a result, when the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up period by turning on the power while operating the RAM all erase switch. . Then, since the total number of outs has reached 300 as a result of the previous processing of S3211, it is the timing to end the new start-up period, so the new start-up flag 203p is set to OFF (S3213). Then, the display type counter 203 q is initialized to zero (S 3214). As a result, thereafter, on the base display device 401, the real time base value, the previous base value, the last-previous base value, and the last-previous base value are switched and displayed every 5 seconds.

  After the processing of S3214, or when it is determined that the new start flag 203p is off by the processing of S3212 (S3212: No), then 1 is set to the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l. Ru. As a result, after the total number of outs reaches 300, by setting the effective data flag of the real time base value data 203l to 1, when displaying the real time base value on the base display device 401, the identification segment is “BL.” Indicating the real time base value is lighted, while the base value stored in the real time base value data 203l is displayed as a valid base value in the ratio segment.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 43 and 44, it is a process of base value processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, and is a detail of the above-mentioned base value display process (S3103) executed at one second intervals. Will be explained. 43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the base value calculation process (S3103).

  First, referring to FIG. 43, when the base value calculation process (S3103) is started, it is determined whether the new start flag 203p is on (S3301). When the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3301: Yes), the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch, which means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up period. Is displayed on the identification segment of the base display device 401 in a blinking (or lit) manner, and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is displayed on the ratio segment in a blinking (or lit) manner. The control signal is sent to (S3302). Then, the base value display process is ended.

  As described above, in the new launch of the pachinko machine 10, there are cases where balls are put in each winning hole and a prize ball is paid out in a shipping inspection or the like for quality confirmation of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time greatly differs from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, the display of the base display device 401 blinks (or lights up) "88." in the identification segment and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l. Indicating that the displayed base value is not a normal base value (valid base value) by displaying it in a special display mode different from the normal base value display, in which the ratio segment is displayed blinking (or lit). Can. In addition, by the display being performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state.

  On the other hand, if the new launch flag 203p is off as a result of the process of S3302 (S3301: No), it is then determined whether 5 seconds have elapsed since updating or initializing the display type counter 203q (S3303). As a result, if 5 seconds have elapsed (S3303: Yes), the display type counter 203q is updated (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305 shown in FIG. On the other hand, if 5 seconds have not elapsed as a result of the process of S3303 (S3303: No), the process of S3304 is skipped, and the process shifts to the process of S3305 shown in FIG.

  In the update of the display type counter 203 q in S 3304, when the display type counter 203 q is other than 3, 1 is added to the display type counter 203 q. When the display type counter 203 q is 3, the display type counter 203 q is initialized to 0. By updating the display type counter 203 q every 5 seconds, the types of base values displayed on the base display device 401 are: real time base value, last base value, last second base value, last second last base value, real time base value , Last time base value, ... in order of 5 seconds.

  Referring to FIG. 44, in the process of S3305, the value of the display type counter 203q is determined (S3305). When the display type counter 203 q is 0 (S 3305: “0”), it is a period during which the real time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 1 (S3306). If the valid data flag is 1 (S3306: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is "b. Is sent to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the real time base value data 203l is lit and displayed on the ratio segment (S3307). As described above, when the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured for the total out number of 300 or more, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 1 as the base value is valid. Set to Therefore, the real-time base value measured as a valid base value can be displayed on the base display device 401 and can be displayed.

  On the other hand, when the effective data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 0 as a result of the processing of S3306 (S3306: No), “bL.” Is lit on the identification segment of the base display device 401, and “ratio” is A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to turn on and display "-" (S3308).

  As described above, when the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured when the total number of outs is less than 300, the valid data of the real-time base value data 203l is regarded as not being valid. The flag is set to 0. This can indicate that the currently effective real-time base value is not obtained because the total number of outs is small.

  When the display type counter 203 q is 1 as a result of the process of S3305 (S3305: “1”), it is a period during which the base display device 401 displays the previous base value. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 1 (S3309), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3309: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is "b1. Is displayed, and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the previous base value data 203m is lit and displayed in the ratio segment (S3310). Thereby, when a valid base value is stored in the previous base value data 203m, the valid previous base value can be displayed on the base display device 401 and can be displayed.

  When the total number of outs reaches 60000 and data is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the effective data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is "1", and the previous shift after the shift The valid data flag of the base value data 203m is also "1". Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly launched and the total number of outs first reaches 60000, when the base display device 401 displays the previous base value, it is stored in the previous base value data 203 m. The base value will be displayed in the ratio segment as a valid base value.

  On the other hand, when the effective data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 0 as a result of the processing of S3309 (S3309: No), “b1.” Is lit on the identification segment of the base display device 401 and the ratio segment is displayed A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to light up and display "-" (S3311). As a result, when a valid base value is not obtained as the previous base value, it can be shown that "-" displayed in the ratio segment indicates that the valid previous base value is not obtained.

  As a result of the process of S3305, when the display type counter 203q is 2 (S3305: "2"), it is a period during which the base display device 401 displays the base value two times before. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the base value data 203 n is 1 last time (S 3312), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S 3312: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is “b2. Is displayed, and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the base value data 203n is lit and displayed in the ratio segment before the previous display (S3313). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the base value data 203 n, the valid previous base value can be displayed on the base display device 401 and displayed.

  In addition, when shifting the previous base value data 203m to the base value data 203n before the last time, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch This corresponds to the case where the total number of outs reaches the second time to 60000 after all the initialization of the RAM 203 is performed), and the valid data flag of the base value data 203n before shift after shift becomes “1”. Therefore, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before, the base value stored in the base value data 203 n two times before is displayed on the ratio segment as a valid base value.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3312, when the effective data flag of the base value data 203n before 2 is 0 (S3312: No), “b2.” Is lit and displayed on the identification segment of the base display device 401 and A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to light up and display "-" (S3313). As a result, when a valid base value is not obtained as the base value for the last two times, "-" displayed on the ratio segment can indicate that a valid last time base value is not obtained.

  As a result of the process of S3305, when the display type counter 203q is 3 (S3305: "3"), it is a period during which the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the valid data flag of the base value data 203o is 1 each time before (S3315), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3315: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is selected. The control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that "b3." Is lit and the base value of the base value data 203o is lit and displayed in the ratio segment each time before (S3316). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the base value data 203 o, the valid base value can be displayed on the base display device 401 and displayed.

  When the base value data 203n is shifted to the base value data 203o just before the previous two times, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n is “1” (the power supply operates while operating the RAM all erase switch). This is applicable when the total number of outs reaches 60000 3rd time after all initialization of RAM 203 is executed), and the valid data flag of base value data 203o after shift is “1”. It becomes ". Therefore, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before, the base value stored in the base value data 203 o is displayed on the ratio segment as a valid base value. Become.

  On the other hand, if the effective data flag of the base value data 203o is 0 after the process of S3315 (S3315: No), “b2.” Is lit and displayed on the identification segment of the base display device 401, A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to light up and display “−−” in the ratio segment (S3317). As a result, if an effective base value is not obtained as the base value for the base value, the "-" displayed in the ratio segment indicates that the base value for the effective source value is not obtained. Can be shown.

  When one of the processes in S3307, S3308, S3310, S3311, S3313, S3314, S3316, and S3371 ends, the base value display process ends, as shown in FIG.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the base display device 401 measures the real time base value measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60000 (hereinafter referred to as “real time Base value), the last base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60000 in the last time (closest), and the total number of outs reached 60000s one before (previous time) before the last time And the base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60000 pieces one before (preceding) the previous two times, every predetermined period Switched to and displayed. By displaying base values (previous base value, last-previous base value, last-previous base value) for multiple past times in addition to the real-time base value, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been a fraud. In addition, it is possible to predict, to some extent, the time when the fraud has occurred.

  In the fifth embodiment, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power on. For a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment). As a result, it can be confirmed whether all the segments can be lit normally, and it can be easily judged whether or not the display of the base display device 401 is normally performed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is a novelty of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of completely new launch of the pachinko machine 10 in a manufacturing plant, or when moving a used pachinko machine 10 to another hole with a used table. When starting up, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of out reaches a predetermined number (300 in the present embodiment) is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display. . In the new launch of the pachinko machine 10, there are cases where balls are put in each winning hole and a prize ball is paid out in a shipping inspection or the like for quality confirmation of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time greatly differs from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly launched, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches the predetermined number (300 in the present embodiment) at first is the normal base value display. By displaying in different special display modes, it can be shown that the displayed base value is not a normal base value. In addition, by the display being performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state.

  In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments can achieve the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 58, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fifth embodiments, the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol are preset by the main control unit 110, and the jackpot probability and / or It was made to be unable to change the hit probability of 2 designs. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment has the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol in a plurality of stages (in the present embodiment, the set values “1” to “6”) 6) can be changed. And, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment changes the setting value (hereinafter referred to as "probability setting value") of the jackpot probability and / or the hitting probability of the second symbol (hereinafter referred to as "setting change mode") When the probability setting value is confirmed (hereinafter referred to as “setting confirmation mode”), the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to be able to display a history of errors generated in the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as “error history”) in the base display device 401.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fifth embodiments. I omit explanation.

  FIG. 45 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the base display device 401 is disposed on the main substrate constituting the main controller 110, and as shown in FIG. 45, the base display when the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is viewed. It is assembled so that the display screen of the device 401 can be seen. While a base value is displayed on the base display device 401 at normal times, probability setting values are displayed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. The base display device 401 is also configured to be able to display an error history.

  In addition, on the main board constituting the main control unit 110, the setting key 501 used when changing the set probability setting value or checking the set probability setting value, and the base display device 401 An error display button 502 used to display an error history is provided. The setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are provided to project from the hole provided in the substrate box 100 beyond the main substrate, and can be operated by a person or the like in the hall without opening the substrate box 100.

  Here, the setting key 501 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 (a) is a front view of the setting key 501 showing the case where the setting key 501 is in the off state, and FIG. 46 (b) is a setting key 501 showing the case where the setting key 501 is in the on state. It is a front view of. By inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole provided to the setting key 501, the setting key 501 is located between two positions, the off side indicated by "OFF" and the on side indicated by "ON". It is configured to be rotatable. The setting key 501 is turned off when positioned on the off side, and turned on when positioned on the warm side.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine according to the state of the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door opening switch (not shown). Determine the launch mode of the machine 10. The door opening switch is a switch for detecting that the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened).

  FIG. 47 shows the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 and the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door open switch when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to start up in each start-up mode. It is the figure which showed each state of (not shown).

  The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with four modes: a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value.

  The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting check mode, and information on occurrence of power-off is not stored in the RAM 203 or data stored in the RAM 203 is broken. , And holds the data stored in the RAM 203, and executes various start-up processes to restart the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power is turned off.

  Then, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 and with the setting key 501 in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. Also, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 while the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode.

  On the other hand, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 while turning on the setting key 501, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode on the condition that the door open switch is on. . When the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode on the condition that the door open switch is on.

  As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned off, the person in charge of the hall or the like changes the state of the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select either the RAM clear mode or the normal mode, which is a start-up mode not related to the probability setting value.

  On the other hand, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting key 501 is turned on after the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened, the person concerned with the hall or the like turns on the RAM erase switch 122 Depending on whether the setting mode is the setting change mode related to the probability setting value or the setting confirmation mode can be selected as the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, it is possible to select the startup mode not related to the probability setting value and the startup mode related to the probability setting value. When the start-up mode not related to the probability setting value is selected, whether to set the start-up mode to the RAM clear mode or the normal mode can be selected according to whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the start-up mode related to the probability setting value, it is possible to select either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

  Here, when the probability setting value is changed, since the jackpot probability in the game and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol are changed, if the game state before the power-off is continued to continue the game, the pachinko machine 10 There is a possibility that it may become impossible to exhibit predetermined game performance. Therefore, when changing the probability setting value in the setting change mode, the pachinko machine 10 erases (clears) the data stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, since the setting confirmation mode is a startup mode for only confirming the probability setting value, the data stored in the RAM 203 is held (not cleared) so that the gaming state before power off can be taken over and the game can be continued. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when launching the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in which the data of the RAM 203 is cleared, the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened, and then the setting key 501 is turned on to erase the RAM. When turning on the switch 122 and turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 and opening the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode in which the data in the RAM 203 is not cleared, the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened. The power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is off while the key 501 is on.

  As described above, when activating the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode or the setting change mode for clearing data stored in the RAM 203, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pushing the RAM erase switch 122 (while turning on). In other words, the hall personnel or the like can easily understand what kind of operation is necessary as the operation to the pachinko machine 10 necessary for the start-up mode to be started from now, if the meaning of each start-up mode is understood.

  Further, in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key is managed by the hole. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from checking the probability setting value and searching for the pachinko machine 10 having the high probability of hitting and / or hitting the probability or changing the probability setting value to the high probability. Further, since the RAM erase switch 122 is normally provided at a position where the player does not touch easily, it is possible to suppress the player from changing the probability setting value to a high probability arbitrarily.

  Further, the number of switches to be operated simultaneously is two even when activated in the setting operation mode, and since they can be sufficiently operated with both hands, operability is good. As described above, by using the on / off state of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501, the person in charge of the hall can easily and easily select the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is activated, the door opening switch is on, that is, the inner frame 12 is opened. The condition is that.

  This is because, in order to change and check the probability setting value, it is necessary for a person in charge of the hall etc. to visually recognize the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 This is because 12 needs to be open. Therefore, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 12 even though the setting key 501 is on, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not activated, and the setting key 501 is turned on. As in the case of the off state, if the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the normal mode, and if the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the RAM clear mode. As a result, even though the inner frame 12 is closed with the setting key 501 turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and starts up in the setting change mode or the setting check mode, and a game is played on the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to suppress not being started. Also, in order to open the inner frame 12, a dedicated key managed by the hall side is required. Therefore, the player opens the inner frame 12 without permission, checks the probability setting value, searches for the pachinko machine 10 with a high probability of winning and / or hitting probability, and changes the probability setting value to high probability without permission. It is possible to suppress

  When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the door open switch must be on, that is, the inner frame 12 must be open. It does not have to be. That is, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 while turning on the setting key 501, the pachinko machine 10 changes the setting mode regardless of whether the door open switch is on or not. You may start it with In addition, when the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode regardless of whether the door opening switch is on. You may launch it.

  Now, the pachinko machine 10 prepares, as one of the start-up modes, a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode for changing or confirming the probability setting value, but in the present embodiment, changing and confirming the probability setting value The setting confirmation mode is enabled only when the pachinko machine 10 starts up (when the power is turned on), and confirmation of the probability setting value can not be performed while the game is in progress. This is due to the following reason.

  That is, the character ratio such as the display of the base value by the base display device 401, the display relating to the character ratio, etc., and the display of values representing gaming performance, gaming state, etc. make it possible to detect fraudulentity early. Because, in principle, during the game must be displayed. Therefore, while the player is playing a game, at least the probability setting value can not be displayed.

  If it is possible to display the probability setting value other than when the pachinko machine 10 is started by setting the setting key 501 to be in the on state, it may be possible that the player is playing a game. For example, it is conceivable to stop the game. However, while the main control device 110 can stop the change time as the game is stopped, the third symbol display device 81 may continue to perform change effects, and the main control device 110, Misalignment may occur between the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

  When the setting key 501 is turned on so that the probability setting value can be displayed other than when the pachinko machine 10 starts up, it is in the middle of a game being played by the player. Even if it is possible to continue the game as it is and to make it possible to confirm the probability setting value on the base display device 401, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 in order to confirm the display on the base display device 401. Because of this, it is practically difficult for the player to continue playing.

  In addition, after the setting key 501 is turned on, it is possible to display the probability setting value on the base display device 401 after waiting for all the fluctuation effects to end including the jackpot and the reserved amount. However, some of the fluctuation effects include those with long fluctuation times, and some of them are continued for about 5 minutes. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also set long in the normal game state, and it takes a lot of time until all of these reservations are digested, so it is difficult to wait until the probability setting value is displayed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to change or check the probability setting value, the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off, the setting key 501 is turned on, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Thereby, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401 in a state where a game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10, and the probability setting value can be surely changed or confirmed by a person in charge of holes or the like. In addition, once the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the state before power-off is backed up to the RAM 203, and startup processing is performed without clearing the backed-up state. Even if the set value is confirmed, the game can be resumed from the state before the power was turned off.

  In addition, by limiting the change or confirmation of the probability setting value at the time of launching the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress the player from confirming or changing the probability setting value without permission during normal times.

  FIG. 48A shows the roles of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 in the setting change mode. FIG. 48B is a diagram showing the role of the setting key 501 in the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated. Further, when the setting key 501 is turned off in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is decided as the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, “1” to “6” can be set as the probability setting value, and for each probability setting value (“1” to “6”), the jackpot random number value and / or the second The hit random number value of the symbol is stored in advance in the ROM 202. The jackpot probability of the probability setting value and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol is determined by the number of jackpot random number values determined for each probability setting value and / or the number of hit random numbers of the second symbol. In the pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability setting value (closer to 1), the lower the probability of winning a jackpot and / or the second symbol, and the larger the probability setting value (closer to 6), a jackpot probability and / or Alternatively, for each probability setting value, a jackpot random number value and / or a random number value of the second symbol is determined such that the probability of hitting the second symbol is high.

  In addition, the jackpot random number value and / or the jackpot random number value of the second symbol is fixed, and the range and / or random number of the random numbers generated to perform the jackpot lottery for each probability setting value (“1” to “6”) Alternatively, the range of random numbers to be generated to perform the lottery of the second symbol may be stored in advance in the RAM 203. The range of the jackpot random number determined for each probability setting value and / or the range of the jackpot random number of the second symbol determines the jackpot probability in the probability setting value and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol.

  In the setting change mode, every time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is incremented by one. However, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is “6”, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated to “1”. Ru. That is, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 loops while adding one by one in the range of “1” to “6”.

  Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is decided as the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10. Then, after the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the pachinko machine 10 performs game control thereafter with the determined probability setting value, and displays the base value on the base display device 401.

  In the setting confirmation mode, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), when the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting confirmation mode is ended, and instead of the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401, the base value Display

  Next, display contents of probability setting values to be displayed on the base display device 401 in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a schematic view schematically showing various examples of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and FIG. 49 (a) is an example thereof.

  In the example shown in FIG. 49A, in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401 are extinguished. Further, of the seven-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display 401, all the segments of the seven-segment display 401c on the left side are extinguished, and only the seven-segment display 401d on the right side is used. Display the probability setting value (1 to 6).

  As described in the fifth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes characters (bL., B1... Etc. for identifying the type of the base value displayed in the ratio segment. In the example shown in FIG. 49A, in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, all the segments of the identification segment are turned off. As a result, since the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability setting value is displayed, the display can be displayed on the base display device 401 at first glance. It can be made to grasp whether the information being executed is a base value or a probability setting value. Moreover, when displaying a base value on the base display apparatus 401, the base value is displayed on a ratio segment by two digits. That is, when the base value is, for example, "6", the ratio segment is displayed as "06". On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (a), in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment. Since all segments of the segment display 401c are turned off, it is seen that all segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment are turned off even if the identification segment is broken and can not be turned on. Therefore, it can be made clear to the person in charge of the hall or the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value.

  FIG. 49B is a schematic view showing another example of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (b), in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401, only the segment of the middle bar is lit, Turn off the other segments. That is, "-" is displayed on the identification segment. Also, in the 7-segment display 401c on the left side among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, only the segment of the middle horizontal bar is turned on, and the other segments are turned off. That is, "-" is displayed on the corresponding segment. Then, the probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment.

  Also in this case, the display state of the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. It can be made to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. In the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and "-" is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and can not be lighted, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value by looking at the display of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment. It can be made to be able to be clearly understood to the person in charge of the hall.

  FIG. 49 (c-1) is a schematic view showing another example of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49 (c-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram showing another example of contents. In this example, the display contents are changed also in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, as in FIG. 49 (a), the identification segment turns off all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b that make up the identification segment. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, “7” indicating the setting change mode or “C” indicating the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment. The probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed on the right 7-segment display 401d.

  Also in this case, the display state of the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. It can be made to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability setting value.

  Moreover, when displaying a base value on the base display apparatus 401, the base value is displayed on a ratio segment by two digits. That is, when the base value is, for example, "6", the ratio segment is displayed as "06". On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 49 (c-1) and 49 (c-2), in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting is performed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment. The value is displayed, and “H” is displayed in the setting change mode and “C” is displayed in the setting confirmation mode on the seven-segment display 401 c on the left side. As a result, even if the identification segment is broken and can not be lit, the base display device 401 is displayed with “H” or “C” different from the numbers on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment. It is possible for a person in charge of the hall or the like to clearly understand that the information displayed on the is a probability setting value.

  In addition, by displaying different display contents on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is clearly shown whether the present mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. be able to.

  FIG. 49 (d-1) is a schematic view showing another example of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49 (d-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram showing another example of contents. Also in this example, the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, as in FIGS. 49 (c-1) and (c-2). Specifically, as in FIG. 49 (b), in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b that make up the identification segment, only the segment in the middle horizontal bar is turned on, and the other segments are turned off. That is, "-" is displayed on the identification segment. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d that make up the ratio segment are in the setting change mode in the 7-segment display 401c on the left, as in FIGS. 49 (c-1) and (c-2). “H” indicating “H” or “C” indicating the setting confirmation mode is displayed, and probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed on the seven-segment display 401 d on the right side.

  Also in this case, the display state of the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. It can be made to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. In addition, even if the identification segment is broken and can not be turned on, “H” or “C” different from the numbers is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment, so that the base display device 401 is displayed. It is possible for a person in a hall or the like to clearly understand that the displayed information is the probability setting value. In addition, by displaying different display contents on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is clearly shown whether the present mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. be able to.

  FIG. 49 (e-1) is a schematic view showing another example of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49 (e-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram showing another example of contents. Also in this example, the display contents are changed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but in the point that the display contents are changed in the identification segment, as shown in FIGS. 49 (c-1) and (c-2). This is different from the example and the example of FIG. 49 (d-1) and (d-2). Specifically, in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment, "SH." Is displayed in the setting change mode, and "SC." Is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side are extinguished, and the probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side.

  As described above, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, characters (bL., B1... Etc.) for identifying the type of the base value displayed in the ratio segment are displayed on the identification segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 49A, "SH." Indicating the setting change mode is displayed in the setting change mode, and "SC." Indicating the setting confirmation mode is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. . As described above, when the base value is displayed as the display content displayed on the identification segment and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode have different display contents, it is possible to clearly differentiate between the two. Therefore, at first glance, it can be understood whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. Further, by displaying different display contents on the identification segment in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to clearly indicate whether it is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at present.

  Further, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment, while in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment display on the right side of the ratio segment The probability setting value is displayed using only 401d, and all segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left are turned off, so even if the identification segment is broken and can not be lit, the 7 on the left of the ratio segment When all the segments in the segment display 401c are turned off, it is clear to the person in charge of the hall that the information displayed on the base display 401 is not the base value but the probability setting value. It can be made to grasp.

  Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. The error display button 502 is a button for displaying an error history on the base display device 401. As described above, the base display device 401 can display an error history that is a history of errors that occur in the pachinko machine 10. The display of the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 only while the error display button 502 is pressed. That is, the base value continues to be displayed on the base display device 401 unless the error display button 502 is pressed.

  The impact is applied to the pachinko machine 10 or the magnet is brought close, the flow direction of the ball is changed, the ball is made to win in various winning openings, and the prize ball is intentionally obtained or the jackpot lottery is performed. There may be an act, or an illegal act of passing a ball to the through gate 67 and intentionally making a lottery for a regular symbol. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to detect an impact or detect the approach of a magnet, and when these are detected, the game is stopped as a serious error. At this time, the base display device 401 continues to display the base value instead of displaying the error history.

  Assuming that the error type is displayed on the base display device 401 when a serious error is detected, the base display device 401 performs the fraudulent action so that the base value or the like is changed. In order to hide the base value displayed on the screen, the pachinko machine 10 is intentionally shocked or a magnet is brought close to cause a serious error to cause the base display device 401 to display the error type and the base value is not displayed. It can be considered to be

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, even if a serious error is detected, by continuing to display the base value on the base display device 401, a person who has made a fraudulent act such as changing the base value or the like. It is possible to hide the display of the base value after the cheating, and to surely detect the cheating against the base value.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 10, when the error display button 502 is pressed, an error history is displayed on the base display device 401 only while the pressing operation is performed. Based on the displayed error history, a person in charge of holes and the like can grasp what kind of error the error occurred in the pachinko machine 10 is. When the pressing operation of the error display button 502 is released, the base display device 401 displays the base value again.

  The error history may display only the type of error that has occurred closest to the time. In addition, error types up to a plurality of times (for example, four times) may be displayed retroactively from the error, including an error that has occurred closest to time. In the case of displaying the error types for a maximum of a plurality of times, the base display device 401 is made to display the generated time in order from the closest to the current time, for each predetermined time. In the case where an error does not occur in the pachinko machine 10 (or in the case where no error record remains), if the error display button 502 is pressed, the error occurs while the pressing operation is being performed. A display indicating that there is no recording may be displayed on the base display device 401, or the base value may be continuously displayed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, while the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 while the error display button 502 is pressed, the error display is performed when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. When the button 502 is pressed once, an error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the error display button 502 is pressed once while the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the base display device 401 is displayed. It may be configured to re-display the base value.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 50, display contents in the case of displaying the error history on the base display device 401 will be described. FIG. 50 is a schematic view schematically showing various examples of display contents in the case where the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and FIG. 50 (a) is an example thereof.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50A, when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401 are extinguished. Further, among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, the left-side 7-segment display 401c displays "E" indicating that an error history is to be displayed, and the right-side 7-segment display The error type is displayed numerically using only the device 401d. For example, in the case of a shock detection error, “1” is displayed as an error type, and in the case of a magnet detection error, “2” is displayed as an error type.

  As described in the fifth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes characters (bL., B1... Etc. for identifying the type of the base value displayed in the ratio segment. In the example shown in FIG. 49A, in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, all the segments of the identification segment are turned off. As a result, since the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the error history is displayed, it is displayed on the base display device 401 at first glance. It is possible to make it possible to grasp whether the information in question is a base value or an error history. Moreover, when displaying a base value on the base display apparatus 401, the base value is displayed on a ratio segment by two digits. That is, when the base value is, for example, "6", the ratio segment is displayed as "06". On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (a), when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the probability setting value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment. Since “E” indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history even if the identification segment is broken and can not be lit. It can be made to be able to be clearly understood to the person in charge of the hall etc.

  Further, even if the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49 (a), 49 (c-1), and (c-2), the error history is based When displaying on the display device 401, “E” indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side. Therefore, when displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 and displaying the error history In such a case, the display state can be clearly differentiated, and at first glance, it can be determined whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value or an error history. it can.

  On the other hand, the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49 (b), 49 (d-1), (d-2), 49 (e-1), and (e-). In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case of displaying the probability setting value and the case of displaying the error history, and it is displayed on the base display device 401 at first glance It can be made to grasp whether the information in question is a probability setting value or an error history. In addition, when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, “E” indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side, so the identification segment is broken and can not be lit. Also, the information displayed on the base display device 401 makes it possible for a person in a hall or the like to clearly grasp that the information is an error history.

  FIG. 50 (b) is a schematic view showing another example of the display content in the case where the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (b), when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401, only the segment of the middle bar is lit And turn off the other segments. That is, "-" is displayed on the identification segment. Further, among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, the left-side 7-segment display 401c displays "E" indicating that an error history is to be displayed, and the right-side 7-segment display The error type is displayed numerically in the same manner as in FIG.

  Also by this, since the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the error history is displayed, the display on the base display device 401 can be performed at first glance It can be made to grasp whether the information being executed is a base value or an error history. Also, when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, the base history is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and the display of the error history is shown on the 7-segment display 401c on the left. Since "E" is displayed, even if the identification segment is broken and can not be turned on, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is displayed by looking at the display of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment. It can be made clear to the person in charge of the hall etc. that it is a probability setting value.

  Further, even if the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49 (b), FIG. 49 (d-1) and (d-2), the error history is based. When displaying on the display device 401, “E” indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side. Therefore, when displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 and displaying the error history In such a case, the display state can be clearly differentiated, and at first glance, it can be determined whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value or an error history. it can.

  On the other hand, the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49 (a), 49 (c-1), (c-2), 49 (e-1), (e-). In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case of displaying the probability setting value and the case of displaying the error history, and it is displayed on the base display device 401 at first glance It can be made to grasp whether the information in question is a probability setting value or an error history. In addition, when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, “E” indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side, so the identification segment is broken and can not be lit. Also, the information displayed on the base display device 401 makes it possible for a person in a hall or the like to clearly grasp that the information is an error history.

  FIG. 50 (c-1) is a schematic view showing an example of display contents in the case of displaying an error type which has occurred closest to time as an error history, and FIG. 50 (c-2) is an error history It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content in the case of displaying the error classification which arose in the near second in time temporally as. In the example of FIG. 50 (c-1) and (c-2), among the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment, "E" indicating the display of the error history in the 7-segment display 401a on the left side. Is displayed, and a numerical value is displayed on the right of the seven-segment display 401b to indicate what error type the error type to be displayed relates to an error that has occurred in time. That is, when the identification segment is displayed as "E1.", It indicates that the error type of the error that has occurred closest to the time is displayed, and when the identification segment is displayed as "E2." Indicates that the error type of the second closest error is displayed. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side are turned off, and the error type is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side.

  As described above, as display contents to be displayed in the identification segment, each of the display contents clearly differs from each other in the display contents of the base value, the probability setting value, and the error history. It can be differentiated. Therefore, at first glance, it can be understood whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value, a probability setting value or an error history. In addition, in the identification segment, by displaying a numerical value indicating what time the error type to be displayed relates to an error that occurred in time, the displayed error type is close to the time in time It can clearly indicate whether it is about an error that has occurred.

  Further, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, while displaying the base value in two digits on the ratio segment, while displaying the error history on the base display device 401, the 7 segments on the right side of the ratio segment Only the display 401d is used to display the error type, and all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left are turned off, so even if the identification segment is broken and can not be lit, the left side of the ratio segment Allowing a person in a hall or the like to clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is not at least a base value by seeing that all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c are turned off it can. Then, from the situation such as when the pachinko machine 10 is not started up or the error display button 502 is pressed, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history to the person concerned with holes etc. Can be easily grasped.

  Next, referring to FIG. 51, in the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, the base display device 401 displays the probability setting value in the setting change mode (hereinafter referred to as "setting change display"). A display mode to be shown and a display mode to show that display of probability setting value in the setting confirmation mode (hereinafter referred to as “display in setting confirmation”) is performed will be described.

  First, FIG. 51 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. As shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 37a are provided as described above in the description of the first embodiment, and depending on the lighting state of the plurality of LEDs 37a, the variable display is performed, the symbol according to the lottery result is displayed after the variable display, Show. Further, the LED 37a includes seven round number notification LEDs 37a1 (first round number notification LED to seventh round number notification LED) for notifying of the maximum round number in the big hit when the big hit occurs.

  The pachinko machine 10 uses the round number notification LED 37a1 to turn on the round number notification LED 37a1 with a lighting pattern different from the notification of the maximum round number, thereby performing display during setting change or confirming the setting. Inform that the display is being performed.

  51B shows the lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2 and the lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15 in the round number notification LED 37a1, and the setting is being changed. It is the figure which showed the lighting pattern in the case of alerting | reporting that it is display, and the lighting pattern in the case of alerting | reporting that it is display during setting confirmation.

  The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 for notifying that the maximum round number is 2 is “off” for the first round number notification LED, “off” for the second round number notification LED, and the third round number notification LED Is "OFF", the fourth round number notification LED is "OFF", the fifth round number notification LED is "ON", the sixth round number notification LED is "ON", and the seventh round number notification LED is "ON" .

  The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 for notifying that the maximum round number is 15 is that the first round number notification LED is "on", the second round number notification LED is "on", and the third round number notification LED Is "on", the fourth round number notification LED is "on", the fifth round number notification LED is "off", the sixth round number notification LED is "off", and the seventh round number notification LED is "off" .

  The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 for notifying that the setting is being changed is that the first round number notification LED is "on", the second round number notification LED is "off", and the third round number notification LED is "ON", the fourth round number notification LED is "ON", the fifth round number notification LED is "ON", the sixth round number notification LED is "OFF", and the seventh round number notification LED is "ON".

  The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 for notifying that the setting is being confirmed is that the first round number notification LED is "ON", the second round number notification LED is "OFF", and the third round number notification LED is "ON", the fourth round number notification LED is "OFF", the fifth round number notification LED is "ON", the sixth round number notification LED is "OFF", and the seventh round number notification LED is "ON".

  In the present embodiment, the number-of-rounds notification LED 37a1 is used to notify not only the maximum rounds at the time of a big hit but also the setting change display or setting confirmation by a lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern used in the notification. Although the case of notifying that the display is performed has been described, an LED for notifying a jackpot symbol, an LED for notifying a winning symbol, an LED other than the round number notification LED 37a1, or the entire LED 37a is essential It is also possible to notify that the setting change display or the setting confirmation display is being performed using a lighting pattern which is not used in the notification. As a result, without changing the hardware configuration of the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display device 37 can be notified of the setting change display or the setting confirmation display only by software control.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110; The impact detection sensor 503 and the magnetic sensor 504 are connected to the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111. Further, the point that an error detection signal is output from the payout control device 111 to the main control device 110 is also different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment.

  The setting key 501 outputs a signal indicating to the main controller 110 whether it is in the off state or in the on state. Main controller 110 grasps the state of setting key 501 in the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, and is output from RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with RAM erase switch 122. The contents of the RAM erase signal SG2 and the signal output from the door open switch are grasped, and the start-up mode is determined based on the conditions shown in FIG.

  The error display button 502 outputs a signal indicating the presence or absence of the pressing operation to the main control device 110. The main control device 110 determines the presence / absence of pressing operation of the error display button 502 based on the signal output from the error display button 502, and displays the error history on the base display device 401 while the pressing operation is performed.

  The impact detection sensor 503 is a sensor for detecting that an impact is applied to the pachinko machine 10. The magnetic sensor 504 is a sensor for detecting that the magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10.

  When the impact detection sensor 503 detects that an impact is applied to the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 applies an impact to the pachinko machine 10 by an unauthorized person, and the flow-down direction of the ball is illegally changed. To notify the main control unit 110 of the occurrence of the error as well as instructing the launch control unit 112 to stop the firing of the ball as the occurrence of a serious error. Output an error detection signal.

  Further, when the magnetic sensor 504 detects that the magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 causes the magnet to be brought close to the pachinko machine 10 by an unauthorized person, and the flowing direction of the ball is illegally changed. To notify the main control unit 110 of the occurrence of the error as well as instructing the launch control unit 112 to stop the firing of the ball as the occurrence of a serious error. Output an error detection signal of

  When the main control device 110 receives an error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 stops the progress of the game. As a result, when there is a possibility that a serious error has occurred, the game in the pachinko machine 10 can be stopped. In addition, main controller 110, error type (impact detection error or magnet detection error) notified by an error detection signal received from payout control device 111, error data 203t of RAM 203 described later (see FIG. 53). Store in). When the error display button 502 is pressed, an error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

  FIG. 53 is a schematic view schematically showing data stored in the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. At least the base value data 203r, the character ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t are stored in the outside work area 203y1.

  The base value data 203r is data necessary for calculating a base value and displaying the calculated base value on the base display device 401. For example, the total out number counter shown in FIG. 39 (a) 203j, a low probability payout counter 203k, real time base value data 203l, last base value data 203m, last second base value data 203n, last second only base value data 203o, new start flag 203p and the like.

  The character ratio data 203s is data necessary to calculate the character ratio and to display the calculated character ratio on the base display device 401. For example, the counter 1 263a shown in FIG. , The first counter 263b, the first counter 263c, the second counter 263d, the large winning opening counter 263e, the out counter 263f, the character ratio data 264a, the data corresponding to the continuous character ratio data 264b or similar data .

  The error data 203 t is data indicating an error type of an error that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When an error detection signal is received from the payout control device 111, an error type indicated by the error detection signal is stored as error data 203t. When the error display button 502 is pressed, an error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

  Here, when the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is only the error type that has occurred closest to the time, only the latest error type is always stored in the error data 203t. Specifically, when the main control device 110 receives an error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 overwrites the error data 203t with the error type indicated by the error detection signal. As a result, only the latest error type is always stored in the base display device 401, and as the error history displayed on the base display device 401, only the error type that has occurred closest to the time is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is to display error types up to a plurality of times (for example, 4 times) retroactively from the error including an error that has occurred closest to the time. The error data 203t is stored a plurality of times in order of occurrence from the closest to the current time.

  For example, the error data 203t is the error type that occurred closest to the time, so that four error types are stored in the error data 203t in order from the closest to the current time in the error data 203t. Third error type storing the first error type data to be stored, second error type data storing an error type occurring second closest in time, and an error type occurring third closest in time It has data and 4th error classification data which store error classification which arose near the 4th in time temporally. Then, when the main control device 110 receives an error detection signal from the payout control device 111, it shifts the third error type data to the fourth error type data, shifts the second error type data to the third error type data, and The first error type data is shifted to the second error type data, and the error type indicated by the received error detection signal is stored as first error type data. As a result, the error data 203t stores error types for four times in order from the closest to the current time in the error data 203t, and the base display device 401 includes an error that has occurred closest to the time. A maximum of two or more (for example, four) error types are displayed from the error. Also, in this case, if the address of each error type data is assigned so that shift processing of each error type data can be performed with one LDIR instruction, the shift processing can be performed with only one LDIR instruction. .

  In the case where the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is to display error types up to a plurality of times (for example, 4 times) retroactively from the error including an error that has occurred closest to the time. The error data 203t may be configured by a ring buffer of the first in first out (FIFO) method, and the error types for a plurality of times may be stored. In this case, when receiving an error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 may update the address (ring buffer pointer) storing the error type.

  Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is launched in the RAM clear mode, at least the base value data 203r, the character ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t are held without being erased. Do. As a result, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the base value data 203r, the character ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t can not be erased, so these are displayed on the base display device 401. Can. Therefore, even if the fraudster turns on the RAM erase switch 122 in an attempt to conceal the fraudulent activity, it can be suppressed that the evidence is concealed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode, and the data of the RAM 203 is also erased when the probability setting value is changed, but the base value data 203r and the error data 203t are erased. Keep it without holding it. This makes it possible to prevent the evidence from being concealed even if the fraudster changes the probability setting in an attempt to conceal the fraud. On the other hand, the character ratio data 203 s is deleted in the data deletion of the RAM 203 performed after the change of the probability setting value. This is because when the probability setting value is changed, the symbol ratio also changes. Therefore, if the symbol ratio data 203s based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the role ratio based on the probability setting value after the change This is because the object ratio can not be calculated correctly. On the other hand, since the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, the base value data 203r is held, and information necessary for calculating the past base value and base value is held. In this way, it is possible to discover in the past the cheating done in the past without being concealed.

  As described above, in the data deletion of the RAM 203 after the probability setting value is changed, a part of the data related to the display of the base display device 401 is kept without being deleted and the remaining data By erasing the data of (1), the data can be held or erased according to the actual conditions of each data.

  In addition, in the outside work area 203y1, the ratio of the prize to the area to be divided into the area to be erased by erasing the data of the RAM 203 after the probability setting value has been changed and the area to be held without erasing The base value data 203r and the error data 203t may be stored in an area for storing the data 203s and holding the data without erasing. As a result, the data including the character ratio data 203s stored in the area to be erased can be easily erased by erasing the data of the RAM 203 after the change of the probability setting value has been made, and The data including the base value data 203r and the error data 203t stored in the area to be held without being held securely by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the probability setting value is changed. it can.

  Next, referring to FIG. 54, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is powered on will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on.

  In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process associated with power on is executed (S4001). For example, the access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer.

  Next, internal function register setting processing is executed (S4002). In this embodiment, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58) for main control of the game is executed triggered by a timer interrupt (hereinafter referred to as "4 millisecond timer interrupt") generated every 4 milliseconds, and the base The base display control process (see FIG. 57) for controlling the display content to be displayed on the display device 401 is executed triggered by a timer interrupt (hereinafter referred to as “two millisecond timer interrupt”) generated every two milliseconds. In the process of S4002, for example, these 4 millisecond timer interrupts and 2 millisecond timer interrupts are permitted. In addition, when random number values necessary for performing a big hit lottery or a win lottery are generated by a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in main controller 110, the range of random number values to be generated in the process of S4002. Set the maximum value).

  In particular, by permitting the 2 millisecond timer interrupt in this internal function register setting process, the 2 millisecond timer interrupt is generated every 2 milliseconds and the base display control process is executed. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

  In the process of S4002, it is not necessary to permit the 4 millisecond timer interrupt or to set the range (maximum value) of the random value. In the process of S4002, when the 4-millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted or / and the range of the random number value (maximum value) is not set, the other processing described later executed in the step of shifting from the startup process to the main process is performed. In the raising process (S4013), permission of 4 millisecond timer interruption not performed in the process of S4002 or / and setting of a range (maximum value) of random numbers may be performed.

  Next, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4003), and if it is turned on (S4003: Yes), whether the setting key 501 is on and the door open switch is on or not (S4004). If an affirmative determination is made in the process of S4004 (S4004: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the setting key 501 is on, and the door open switch is on, as shown in FIG. The startup mode is set as the setting change mode, and the setting change process is executed (S4005).

  Here, the details of the setting change processing (S4005) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4005). The setting change process (S4005) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for accepting and confirming the change of the probability setting value from the person in charge of the hall or the like.

  In the setting change process (S4005), first, the start of display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4101). With the start setting of the display of the probability setting value, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is started by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is any one of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

  Note that the probability setting value displayed here may be fixed to a specific value without fail. That is, when the startup mode is the setting change mode, the display may be always started on the base display device 401 with a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, “1” which is the minimum value of the probability setting values (“1” to “6”), or “3” or an intermediate value of the probability setting values. It may be 4 "or" 6 "which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. In this way, regardless of the probability setting value set before the power is turned off, Hall personnel and the like can change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value.

  On the other hand, when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, the base display device 401 may start to display the probability setting value set before the power is turned off. Thus, a person in charge of holes and the like can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value set before the power is turned off.

  In addition, when the startup mode becomes the setting change mode, the probability setting value is displayed as “3” on the base display device 401 if the probability setting value is set to 3 or more before the power is turned off. If the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is less than 3, even if the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is displayed as it is. Good. For example, when the probability setting value set before power-off is high, such as "5" or "6", there are many cases where it is desirable to reduce the probability setting value slightly (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value starts to be displayed with the probability setting value set before the power is turned off, the following problem occurs. That is, the update of the probability setting value is incremented by one each time the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on. When the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on when the probability setting value is "6", the probability setting value is It is done by returning to 1 '. Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability setting value from “6” to “5”, it is necessary to make the probability setting value make one round while repeating the turning on of the RAM erase switch 122. On the other hand, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, the probability setting value is set to "3" to start the display while setting the probability while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Values can be updated.

  Next, it is judged whether the probability setting value is in the range of "1" to "6" (S4102), and if it is not within the predetermined range, that is, if it is an abnormal probability setting value (S4102) (No), change the probability setting value to the initial value (S4103), and shift to the processing of S4104. The initial value may be “1” which is the minimum value of the probability setting values (“1” to “6”), or “3” or “4” which is an intermediate value of the probability setting values. It may be “6” which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of “1” to “6” as a result of the process of S4102 (S4102: Yes), the process of S4103 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4104. .

  In the process of S4104, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4104). In the process of S4104, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state (edge detection), it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state. This is because, as described later, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up without the RAM erase switch 122 being turned on, the probability setting value is broken and within the normal range (range of “1” to “6”) If this is not the case, this setting change process is executed, but at this time, the setting key 501 is normally in the off state. If it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state, the probability setting value is broken and the normal range ("1"). Even if the setting change process is executed, if the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, it is immediately positively determined in the process of S4104, and the probability setting is performed as described later. The value is fixed and the setting change process ends. Therefore, it becomes impossible for a person in charge of holes etc. to change the probability setting value. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4104 that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off. If the related party etc. does not make setting key 501 from the off state temporarily to the on state, and then it does not return to the off state, a positive determination is not made in the process of S4104. A change is possible.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up without the RAM erase switch 122 being turned on, setting is made even if the probability setting value is broken and not within the normal range (range of “1” to “6”). When the change process is not performed (for example, a case where the hall personnel are urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is applicable), the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state It may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off by detecting the presence of the key.

  If it is determined as a result of the process of S4104 that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4104: No), it is then determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4105). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4105: No), the process returns to the process of S4102, and if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4105: Yes), the probability setting value Are updated (S4106), and the process returns to S4102. As described above, when the probability setting values until then are “1” to “5”, 1 is added to the probability setting values, and the probability setting is performed as described above. When the value is “6”, this is performed by returning the probability setting value to “1”. The probability setting value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

  S4102 → S4103 → S4104: No → S4105 (and S4106) → S4102 loop processing continues to be executed until it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on by the processing in S4104 (S4104: Yes). Then, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on by the process of S4104 (S4104: Yes), the probability setting value for using the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 in a future game is set. It fixes as (S4107). Then, the end of the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change process is ended. In the processing of S4108, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control by the base display control processing (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability setting value. The display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started.

  Referring back to FIG. 54, the description of the start-up process is continued. When the setting change process of S4005 ends, next, a setting change RAM clear process is executed (S4006). In this setting change RAM clear process, data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value stored in the internal work area 203x1) among the data stored in the RAM 203, and data for role ratio 203s While the base value data 203r and the error data 203t are held without being erased. The game is newly started using the newly set probability setting value by deleting data (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value stored in the internal work area 203x1) used for controlling the game Can.

  Further, as described above, when the probability setting value is changed, the symbol ratio also changes, so when the symbol ratio data 203s based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the probability setting value after the variation is changed The feature ratio based on can not be calculated correctly. In the setting change RAM clearing process, by deleting the character ratio data 203s, it is possible to correctly calculate the character ratio based on the changed probability setting value.

  On the other hand, since the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, in setting change RAM clear processing, in order to hold the base value data 203r and calculate the past base value and base value By keeping necessary information, it is possible to discover in the past the fraudulent acts conducted in the past without being concealed. Also, by holding the error data 203t in the setting change RAM clearing process, even if the unauthorized person who has caused the error starts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history is displayed. It can not be erased, and it is possible to suppress the concealment of fraudulent acts.

  After the processing of S4006, other start-up processing is executed (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in the process of S4004 (S4004: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is off or the door open switch is off. If the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is off, as shown in FIG. 47, the startup mode is set to the RAM clear mode, and the normal RAM clear processing is executed (S4007). If the RAM open switch 122 is on and the door open switch is off even if the setting key 501 is on (that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed), the startup mode is set. The normal RAM clear process is executed as the RAM clear mode, not the change mode (S4007). As a result, even though the inner frame 12 is closed with the setting key 501 turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and starts up in the setting change mode, thereby preventing the pachinko machine 10 from starting a game. it can.

  In the normal RAM clear process (S4007), among the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value stored in the internal work area 203x1) is erased (cleared) The base value data 203r, the character ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t are held without being erased. A game can be newly started by deleting data (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value stored in the internal work area 203x1) used for control of the game.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to erase the data in the RAM 203 by holding the base value data 203r, the character ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t without erasing them. However, these can be displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, even if the fraudster turns on the RAM erase switch 122 in an attempt to conceal the fraudulent activity, the fraudulent activity can be found from the base value, the feature ratio, the error history, etc. displayed on the base display device 401. .

  After the processing of S4007, other start-up processing is executed (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off as a result of the process of S4003 (S4003: No), then it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008). If not (S4008: No), there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, so also in this case, the processing proceeds to S4007 and normal RAM clear processing is executed (S4007) .

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated, and it is determined whether the calculated RAM determination value is normal or not, that is, the calculated RAM determination value is saved at the time of power-off. It is determined whether it matches with the RAM determination value (S4009). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is also used to calculate the checksum value.

  If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S4009: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power supply cutoff, the data of the backed up RAM 203 is destroyed. In this case, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is within the normal range (range of “1” to “6”) (S4010). Then, if the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4010: Yes), the process proceeds to S4007 and normal RAM clear processing is executed. Note that, needless to say, the probability setting value is kept without being deleted in the normal RAM clearing process and the setting change RAM clearing process.

  On the other hand, if the probability setting value is not within the normal range, for example, “7” (S4010: No), the process proceeds to S4005 and executes the setting change process shown in FIG. Have the parties concerned set the probability setting value again. At this time, the third symbol display device 81 may display a prompt to change the probability setting value, or the voice output device 226 may output a notification sound or a voice notifying that. Further, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hole computer 600 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. As a result, it is possible to notify a person in charge of holes and the like that it is necessary to set the probability setting value again.

  As a result of the process of S4009, if the calculated RAM determination value is normal (S4009: Yes), it is then determined whether the setting key 501 is on and the door open switch is on (S4011). If an affirmative determination is made in the process of S4011 (S4011: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the setting key 501 is on, and the door open switch is on, as shown in FIG. The startup mode is set to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting confirmation processing is executed (S4012).

  Here, the details of the setting confirmation process (S4012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (S4012). The setting confirmation process (S4012) is a process that is executed when the startup mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401.

  In the setting confirmation process (S4012), first, the start of display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4201). With the start setting of the display of the probability setting value, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is started by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is any one of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2).

  Next, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4202). In the process of S4202, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state, it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state. Note that by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

  As a result of the process of S4202, if the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4202: No), S4202 is repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the setting key 501 is in the off state. During this time, the display of the probability setting value is continuously performed on the base display device 401. Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off (S4202: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4203), and the setting confirmation process is ended. In the processing of S4203, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control by the base display control processing (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability setting value. The display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started.

  The setting confirmation process (S4012) is performed after it is determined whether the RAM determination value (checksum) is normal. This is because, in the case where the RAM determination value is abnormal, it is considered that the RAM clear process should be performed before the probability setting value is confirmed. However, when the pachinko machine 10 is launched in the setting accuracy mode, the setting confirmation process may be executed before the determination as to whether or not the RAM determination value (checksum) is normal. .

  Referring back to FIG. 54, the description of the start-up process is continued. When the setting confirmation process of S4012 ends, the other start-up process is executed (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  When a negative determination is made in the process of S4011 (S4011: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is off, and the setting key 501 is off or the door open switch is off. If the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is off, as shown in FIG. 47, the startup mode is set to the normal mode, the setting confirmation process of S4012 is skipped, and the other standing of S4013 is made. Move up to main processing after executing the up processing. Also, if the RAM clear switch 122 is off and the door open switch is off even if the setting key 501 is on (that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed), the startup mode is set. The confirmation mode is not the normal mode, the setting confirmation process of S4012 is skipped, and the other start-up processes of S4013 are executed, and then the process proceeds to the main process. As a result, even though the inner frame 12 is closed with the setting key 501 turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and starts up in the setting confirmation mode, thereby preventing the pachinko machine 10 from starting a game. it can.

  Next, base display control processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the base display control process is a process of controlling the display content to be displayed on the base display device 401, and is executed triggered by a 2 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 2 milliseconds.

  In the base display control process, first, various setting processes for performing display control of the base display device 401 are executed in the base display device control circuit 402 (S4301). Next, it is determined whether the setting change of the probability setting value in the setting change mode is in progress (S4302), and if it is determined that the setting change is in progress (S4302: Yes), the probability setting value in the setting change The setting change segment data to be included is set as segment data (S4303), the segment data is output to the base display device control circuit 402 (S4309), and the base display control processing is terminated. Thereby, in the base display device 401, the probability setting value is displayed in one of the display modes shown in FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1). Ru.

  If it is determined that the setting change is not in progress as a result of the process of S4302 (S4302: No), it is then determined whether the setting confirmation of the probability setting value in the setting confirmation mode is in progress (S4304). As a result, if it is determined that setting confirmation is in progress (S4304: Yes), setting confirmation segment data including the probability setting value during setting confirmation is set as segment data (S4305), and the segment data is used as a base display device control circuit. It outputs to 402 (S4309), and ends this base display control processing. Thereby, in the base display device 401, the probability setting value is displayed in one of the display modes shown in FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2) and (e-2). Ru.

  If it is determined that the setting confirmation is not in progress as a result of the process of S4304 (S4304: No), it is then determined whether an error history is being displayed based on the fact that the error display button 502 is pressed ((S4304) S4306). As a result, if it is determined that the error history is being displayed (S4306: Yes), the error history segment data including the error type is set as segment data (S4307), and the segment data is output to the base display control circuit 402. Then (S4309), the base display control process ends. As a result, in the base display device 401, the error history is displayed in one of the display modes shown in FIGS. 50 (a), (b), (c-1) and (c-2).

  If it is determined that the error history is not displayed as a result of the processing of S4306 (S4306: No), normal game segment data including the base value or the character ratio is set as segment data (S4308), and that segment data is displayed as a base It outputs to the device control circuit 402 (S4309), and ends this base display control processing. As a result, in normal times, the base value or the character ratio is displayed on the base display device 401.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process that performs main control of the game, and is executed triggered by a 4 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4 milliseconds.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within a normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4401). Every time the timer interrupt processing is executed, by determining whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, even if the probability setting value is destroyed for some reason, it is discovered early can do.

  As a result of the processing of S4401, if the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4401: Yes), the normal game processing that performs the main control of the game is executed (S4402), and then the calculation of the bonus ratio and the base A ratio processing (base processing) is performed to carry out processing such as calculation of values, and management of information relating to the character product ratio and the base value (S4403), and the timer interrupt processing is ended.

  In the game process (S4402), for example, the processes of S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the first embodiment are executed. That is, the main control of the game includes the lottery of the big hit, the setting of the variable display, the opening and closing control of the big winning opening (large opening) 65a at the time of big hit, the winning lottery of the second symbol display device 83, etc. . Note that the MPU 201 uses the in-use area 203x (the internal work area 203x1 and the internal stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203 while performing the processing of S4402. On the other hand, the MPU 201 uses the out-of-use area 203y (outside work area 203y1 and outside stack area 203y2) in the RAM 203 while executing the processing of S4403.

  At this time, in the processing of S4403, as described in the third embodiment, from the game processing which performs the main control of the game using the in-use area area 203x, the bonus ratio and the base for using the out-of-use area 203y When shifting to processing regarding values, among the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201, the registers 200 used in processing regarding the item ratio are individually saved to the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, while performing ratio processing and After execution of the processing related to the base processing, the processing related to the property ratio using the non-use area 203 y is shifted to the game processing for performing main control of the game using the in-use area 203 x (return), The registers 200 evacuated to the work area 203y1 may be restored individually.

  In addition, as described in the fourth embodiment, while executing processing using the use area inner area 203x, the processing to execute processing concerning the item ratio or the base value using the use area outside area 203y is a CALL instruction. At the stage of reading, the register 200 used in the processing relating to the item ratio or the base value may be individually cleared to 0, and the processing for executing the processing relating to the item ratio or the base value may be read by the CALL instruction. . Then, at the stage of ending the process using the out-of-use area 203y read by the CALL instruction and returning to the process using the in-use area 203x, the individual registers 200 used in the process related to the character ratio It may be possible to return to the duty ratio processing (base processing) after clearing to 0.

  On the other hand, if the probability setting value is not within the predetermined range as a result of the process of S4401 (S4401: No), the process does not proceed to the game process (S4402), sets a notification command (S4404), and displays the notification command. It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In response to the notification command, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a notification sound or voice prompting the hall attendant or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability setting value from the voice output device 226. The display control device 114 outputs a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a request for calling a person concerned with a hall. Further, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hole computer 600 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. As a result, the hall personnel or the like restarts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, and performs processing of changing the probability setting value.

  Further, following the processing of S4404, a ball emission stop instruction is issued to the payout control device 111 (S4405). This stops the firing of the ball. After the processing of S4405, the timer interrupt processing ends. And while the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4401: No), even if the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 milliseconds, the game process (S4402) is not executed, so the game is not Completely stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of any disadvantage for the player by continuously playing the game in the state of the abnormal probability setting value.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when powering on the pachinko machine 10 is started, regardless of the probability setting value, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on. It is possible to select the mode and the start-up mode related to the probability setting value. When the start-up mode not related to the probability setting value is selected, whether to set the start-up mode to the RAM clear mode or the normal mode can be selected according to whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the start-up mode related to the probability setting value, it is possible to select either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. In this way, the hall personnel can easily understand what kind of operation is necessary as the operation to the pachinko machine 10 necessary for the start-up mode to be started, if the meaning of each start-up mode is understood. .

  Besides, the above-described effects can be obtained by the configuration mentioned in the description of the sixth embodiment. Further, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fifth embodiments can achieve the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122, and it is detected that the setting key 501 is turned off. It has been described that the probability setting value is determined when it is determined. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is launched in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the setting change switch (not shown). The probability setting value is determined by turning on the RAM erase switch 122.

  Here, the setting change switch is a switch for updating the probability setting value by being operated in the setting change mode, and like the error display button 502, the main substrate is opened from the hole provided in the substrate box 100. It is provided so as to protrude further and can be operated by a person in the hall or the like without opening the substrate box 100. The setting change switch normally outputs an off signal, and outputs an on signal when pressed down.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to sixth embodiments. I omit explanation.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing setting change processing (S4005) executed in the startup processing (see FIG. 54) by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. The setting change process (S4005) is a process that is executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode as in the sixth embodiment, and accepts and fixes the change of the probability setting value from the person in charge of the hall or the like. It is a process for

  In the setting change process according to the seventh embodiment, first, the processes of S4101 to S4103 similar to those of the sixth embodiment are executed, and then it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4111). As a result, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4111: No), it is then determined whether the setting change switch is turned on (S4112).

  As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch is not turned on (S4112: No), the processing returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the setting change switch is turned on (S4112: Yes), the sixth embodiment The probability setting value is updated (S4106) in the same manner as in S4106 (see FIG. 55), and the process returns to S4102. The probability setting value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

  The loop processing of S4102 → S4103 → S4111: No → S4112 (and S4106) → S4102 continues to be executed until it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by the processing of S4111 (S4111: Yes). Then, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by the process of S4111 (S4111: Yes), the probability setting value used in the game from here on will be the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 It fixes as (S4107). Once the probability setting value is determined, the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared) as described above in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, by making the person in charge of hall or the like turn on the RAM erase switch 122 to determine the probability setting value, it is possible to make the person in charge of hole or the like strongly recognize that the data of the RAM 203 is to be erased thereafter.

  After the process of S4107, it is then determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned on (S4113). In the process of S4113, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off, or the setting key 501. It may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the switch is in the off state.

  As a result of the process of S4113, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4113: No), the process of S4113 is repeatedly executed. When it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off as a result of the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), the end of display of the probability setting value in the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change process is performed. Finish. In the processing of S4108, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control by the base display control processing (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability setting value. The display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the seventh embodiment can achieve the above-described effects. Further, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to sixth embodiments can achieve the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eighth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the probability setting value can be updated by the pachinko machine 10 being activated in the setting change mode, and the probability setting value can be confirmed by the activation in the setting confirmation mode. Explained. Also, according to the case where the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is selected from the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode according to the operation state of the RAM erase switch 122 and setting key 501 at the time of power on. explained.

  Here, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the problem is what mode to start up when the power is turned on again. The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment solves the problem. In the eighth embodiment, an abnormality in the RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as "RAM abnormality"), the fact that the setting change processing has been performed, and the fact that the setting confirmation processing has been performed are all made via the external output terminal 503. Output to the computer 600. Hall personnel etc. can grasp RAM abnormality which arose in the pachinko machine 10, the fact that the setting change process or the setting confirmation was performed, etc. through the hole computer 600.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth and eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to seventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to seventh embodiments. I omit explanation.

  FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment in that an external output terminal 503 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The external output terminal 503 is configured to be connectable to the hall computer 600. The external output terminal 503 is provided protruding from the hole provided in the substrate box 100 from the main substrate, and the external output terminal 503 is connected to a connector (not shown) of a wire connected to the hole computer 600. The signal and data output from the main controller 110 are relayed to the hall computer 600 with respect to the hall computer 600.

  FIG. 61 is a schematic view schematically showing data stored in an internal work area 203x1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. In this work area 203x1, probability setting value data 203x11, change probability setting value data 203c12, setting changing flag 203x13, setting confirming flag 203x14, RAM abnormality flag 203x15, and RAM erasing switch flag 203x16 are stored. At least stored.

  The probability setting value data 203x11 is data indicating a probability setting value set (fixed) in the pachinko machine 10. Also in this embodiment, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, “1” to “6” can be set as the probability setting value, and each probability setting value (“1” to “6”) On the other hand, the jackpot random number value and / or the jackpot random number value of the second symbol is stored in advance in the ROM 202. The jackpot probability of the probability setting value and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol is determined by the number of jackpot random number values determined for each probability setting value and / or the number of hit random numbers of the second symbol. In the pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability setting value (closer to 1), the lower the probability of winning a jackpot and / or the second symbol, and the larger the probability setting value (closer to 6), a jackpot probability and / or Alternatively, for each probability setting value, a jackpot random number value and / or a random number value of the second symbol is determined such that the probability of hitting the second symbol is high.

  In the setting change process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, which is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is launched in the setting change mode, the probability setting value determined by the hall personnel etc. is the probability setting value data 203x11 Stored in The pachinko machine 10 sets the jackpot random number value corresponding to the probability setting value indicated by the probability setting value data 203x11 and / or the second random symbol value of the second symbol based on the ROM 202, and the jackpot lottery or the second lottery symbol lottery Run.

  In addition, the jackpot random number value and / or the jackpot random number value of the second symbol is fixed, and the range and / or random number of the random numbers generated to perform the jackpot lottery for each probability setting value (“1” to “6”) Alternatively, the range of random numbers to be generated to perform the lottery of the second symbol may be stored in advance in the RAM 203. The range of the jackpot random number determined for each probability setting value and / or the range of the jackpot random number of the second symbol determines the jackpot probability in the probability setting value and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is a range of random numbers generated for performing a big hit lottery corresponding to the probability setting value indicated by the probability setting value data 203x11 and / or of random numbers generated for performing a lottery for the second symbol. A range is set to generate a random number for performing a jackpot lottery and / or a random number for performing a lottery for the second symbol.

  The probability setting value data for update 203 x 12 is updated by a person in charge of the hall or the like before the probability setting value is determined in the setting change process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode. It is data indicating a set value. That is, while the above-mentioned probability setting value data 203x11 is data indicating the decided probability setting value, the updating probability setting value data 203x12 is updated by the person in charge of the hall or the like before the decision in the setting change processing. Data indicating the probability setting value.

  Specifically, when execution of the setting change process is started, first, probability setting value data 203x11 is stored as update probability setting value data 203x12. That is, the probability setting values so far are set in the updating probability setting value data 203x12, and starting from the probability setting values so far, the hall participants etc. are made to update the probability setting values. Then, whenever the RAM erase switch 122 which also serves as a switch for updating the probability setting value is turned on, the updating probability setting value data 203x12 is incremented by one, and the updating probability setting value data 203x12 is "6". When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on at this time, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated to "1". Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is stored as the probability setting value data 203x11, and the probability setting value updated by the person in charge of the hall or the like is used in the future game It is decided as a probability setting value.

  Here, in the setting change process, instead of updating the probability setting value using the probability setting value data 203x11, the probability setting value is updated using the updating probability setting value data 203x12 for the following reason. . That is, when the probability setting value is updated using the probability setting value data 203x11, if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the setting change process, the probability setting value which has been used for the game is erased by the update. It will be done. Therefore, even if it tries turning on the power again, starting up the pachinko machine 10, and trying to change the probability setting value again, it can be done because the probability setting value used in the previous game is lost. It disappears. In this case, although it is possible to resume the setting change process from the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value data 203x11 before the power failure, that is, the probability setting value in the middle of setting change, it is assumed that the probability setting value not confirmed is saved. There is a risk of giving an illusion of

  In addition, depending on the relationship between the timing when the hall personnel or the like turns on the RAM erase switch 122 and the timing when the power is turned off, an event occurs in which the probability setting value data 203x11 is not updated even though the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. obtain. In that case, a difference occurs between the probability setting value that the hall official thought that he or she updated and the probability setting value stored by the pachinko machine 10, so that there is a possibility that the hall official etc. may feel distrust.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the probability setting value is updated in the setting change process, the probability setting value is updated by changing the probability setting value using the updating probability setting value data 203x12. The probability setting value used so far can be added to 203x11. As a result, even if the power is turned off during the setting change process, the probability setting value used in the previous game remaining as the probability setting value data 203x11 is updated for the setting change process to be executed again. By storing the probability setting value data 203 x 12, the probability setting value can be updated again from the beginning. Therefore, the person in charge of the hall can reassertly update the probability setting author.

  The setting change in progress flag 203x13 is a flag indicating whether the setting change process is being performed. The setting change in progress flag 203x13 indicates that the setting change process is being performed when it is on, and indicates that the setting change process is not being performed when it is off. The setting change in progress flag 203x13 is normally set to off. Then, when the execution of the setting change process is started, the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is set to on. When the probability setting value updated in the setting change process is determined and the execution of the setting change process ends, the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is turned off.

  Now, if the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is on in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, the setting change process is being executed when the power is turned off last time. It indicates that the power has been turned off while updating the probability setting value by the setting change process. Therefore, in this case, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

  Here, referring to FIG. 62, a start-up mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram for describing a start-up mode set corresponding to each start-up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during setting change or setting confirmation.

  As shown in FIG. 62, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the start-up operation for starting in the normal mode, that is, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off with the setting key 501 off. When the start-up operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change processing is executed from the beginning (from one) and executed again, instead of starting up in the normal mode.

  After the power was turned off during the setting change, the start operation for starting in the RAM clear mode, that is, the start operation of turning on the RAM erase switch 122 and turning on the power with the setting key 501 turned off In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed from the beginning (from one) and not in the RAM clear mode.

  After the power is turned off during the setting change, the start-up operation for starting in the setting change mode, that is, the start-up operation of turning on the setting key 501 and turning on the RAM erase switch 122 to turn on the power In the case of the start operation, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode as the start-up operation. In this case, too, the setting change process is executed from the beginning (starting from scratch).

  After the power is turned off during the setting change, start-up operation to start in the setting confirmation mode, that is, start-up operation to turn on the power with the setting key 501 turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed from the beginning (starting from the beginning) instead of the setting confirmation mode.

  As described above, in the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change, the startup operation is not only the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode but also other startup operations. Even in the case of the raising operation, the setting change mode is performed in which the setting change process is executed from the beginning. As a result, when the power is turned off during the setting change, the probability setting value can be changed from the beginning to the person in charge of the hall or the like when the power is turned on after that. Therefore, it is possible to make a person in charge of hall or the like reliably change the probability setting value and fix the change. Therefore, even when the power is turned off during the setting change, the person in charge of the hall can surely update and confirm the probability setting value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be relieved. A change in probability settings for 10 can be made.

  Also, by re-doing the setting change process from the beginning (from scratch), it is possible to continue updating from the probability setting value during updating at the time the power is turned off during the setting change, and not to restart the updating of the probability setting value. It is possible to redo the updating of the probability setting value from the beginning using the probability setting value (probability setting value data 203x11) used in the previous games. Therefore, the person in charge of the hall can reassertly update the probability setting author.

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. The setting confirmation in progress flag 203x14 is a flag indicating whether the setting confirmation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is being executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting confirmation mode as the start-up mode. is there. The setting confirmation in progress flag 203x14 indicates that the setting confirmation process is being executed when the flag is on, and indicates that the setting confirmation process is not being executed when the flag is off. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 is normally set to off. When execution of the setting confirmation process is started, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to ON, and when the setting confirmation process is finished, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned off.

  By the way, when the setting confirmation in progress flag 203x14 is on in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time. It indicates that the power has been turned off during confirmation of the probability setting value by the setting confirmation processing. Therefore, in this case, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

  Here, referring to FIG. 62 again, the start-up mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the start-up operation for starting in the normal mode, that is, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off with the setting key 501 off. When the start-up operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation process is executed from the beginning (from above) and executed again instead of the normal mode. As a result, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed even if a person in charge of hall or the like starts up by the operation in the normal mode. As a result, the person in charge of the hall can confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being turned off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be launched with confidence.

  After the power was turned off during the setting check, the start operation to start in the RAM clear mode, that is, the start operation to turn on the RAM erase switch 122 and turn on the power with the setting key 501 turned off In the case of the hall operator's startup operation, the pachinko machine 10 is launched in the RAM clear mode. The fact that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on indicates that Hall personnel or the like at least clearly want to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the person concerned with the hall and the like.

  After power is turned off during setting confirmation, start-up operation to start in setting change mode, that is, start-up operation to turn on the setting key 501, turn on the RAM erase switch 122, and turn on the power Also in the case of the setting operation, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode as in the case of the start-up operation. Also in this case, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on clearly indicates that the person in charge of the hall or the like clearly wants to change the probability setting value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the intention of the person concerned with holes and the like.

  After the power is turned off during the setting change, start-up operation to start in the setting confirmation mode, that is, start-up operation to turn on the power with the setting key 501 turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off Also in the case of the setting operation, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting confirmation mode as in the start-up operation. Also in this case, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on clearly indicates that Hall personnel or the like clearly desire to check the probability setting value again. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation process is executed from the beginning (starting from the top), it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the person concerned with the hall.

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is a flag for indicating that the RAM 203 has an abnormality such as destruction of data stored in the RAM 203. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 indicates that the RAM 203 has an abnormality when it is on, and indicates that there is no abnormality in the RAM 203 if it is off.

  The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is normally set to off. Then, in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, the RAM 203 does not have generation information of the power-off which should be stored at the time of the previous power failure. If the determination value (checksum) is not normal or the probability setting value is not within the normal range (“1” to “6”), it is determined that the RAM 203 is abnormal and the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on.

  When the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on, notification of the RAM abnormality is given to urge to restart in the setting change mode, and to that effect the hole computer 600 is notified via the external output terminal 503, and the main The MPU 201 of the control device 110 is in an infinite loop state. As a result, the hall personnel or the like are allowed to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, to surely reset the probability setting value, clear the RAM 203, and the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally. It can be directed as follows.

  The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is a flag indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 in the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. In the present embodiment, the RAM erase switch 122 is used when determining the start-up mode when starting up the pachinko machine 10, and when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is It is also used when updating. That is, every time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability setting value is updated.

  At this time, when the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is changed from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, and the probability setting value is updated. The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is used to determine whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is changed from the off state to the on state. That is, when the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on. Then, after the determination is made, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is stored in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

  Here, after the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is first temporarily determined whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 has been switched from the off state to the on state. Set to “On”. This is because, at the stage where it is first determined whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 has been switched from the off state to the on state, the RAM erase switch is still operated as a startup operation for launching the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. While it is possible that the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned off at this time, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. There is a possibility that the probability setting value may be updated by erroneously determining that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on for updating the probability setting value. As a result, the Hall personnel and others are distrusted by the fact that the probability setting value has been updated despite the fact that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on for updating the probability setting value.

  On the other hand, after the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to “1” before determining whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is switched from the off state to the on state first. By setting it to “on”, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a start-up operation for starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode at the time of this first determination, it is set as a probability It can be erroneously determined that the ON operation of the RAM erase switch 122 for updating the value has been made, and updating of the probability setting value can be suppressed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 63, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is powered on will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on.

  In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process associated with power on is executed (S4201). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer.

  Next, internal function register setting processing is executed (S4202). Also in this embodiment, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, a 2 millisecond timer interrupt that generates a base display control process (see FIG. 57) for controlling the display content to be displayed on the base display device 401 every 2 milliseconds. Execute as a trigger. In the processing of S4202, for example, the 2 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In addition, when random number values required to perform a big hit lottery or a win lottery are generated by a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in main controller 110, the range of random number values to be generated in the process of S4202 Set the maximum value). Further, in the process of S4202, access to the RAM 203 is permitted. Further, in the process of S4202, the main control device 110 performs various settings for transmitting and receiving signals by serial communication with the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113.

  In particular, by permitting the 2 millisecond timer interrupt in this internal function register setting process, the 2 millisecond timer interrupt is generated every 2 milliseconds and the base display control process is executed. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

  In the process of S4202, it is not necessary to set the range (maximum value) of random numbers. In the process of S4202, when setting of the range (maximum value) of the random number value is not performed, in (S4221) of the other start-up process described later executed at the stage of shifting from the start-up process to the main process, The setting of the range (maximum value) of random numbers not performed in the process of S4202 may be performed.

  Next, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S4203). As a result, if the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4203: Yes), this means that the processing at the previous power-off is normally completed, so next, the RAM determination value is calculated and calculated. It is determined whether the determined RAM determination value is normal, that is, whether the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off (S4204). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is excluded from the calculation of the checksum value. However, the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the checksum value.

  If it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at the time of power interruption (S4204: Yes), the RAM determination value is normal and at least for calculation of the RAM determination value. Since it can be determined that the present data (information) is normally held, it is next determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4205). Here, to determine whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range, the processing related to the power-off was normally performed when the power was turned off last time, but the probability setting value is at that stage. It is because it may be broken and out of the normal range. The process of S4205 is performed to reliably detect such an abnormality of the probability setting value.

  Then, if the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4205: Yes), it is then determined whether the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is on (S4206). If the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is on (S4206: Yes), the setting change process is being executed when the power is turned off last time, that is, the power supply is updated while the probability setting value is being updated by the setting change process. Indicates that was cut off. Therefore, in this case, the process shifts to the process of S4213 and executes the setting change process (S4213).

  As a result, the start-up mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is not only the start-up operation for starting up the setting change mode but also other start-up operations. Even in the case of the operation, it is possible to set a setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed from the beginning. Therefore, when the power is turned off during the setting change, when the power is turned on after that, it is possible to make the person concerned with holes etc. change the probability setting value from scratch. Therefore, it is possible to make a person in charge of hall or the like reliably change the probability setting value and fix the change. Therefore, even when the power is turned off during the setting change, the person in charge of the hall can surely update and confirm the probability setting value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be relieved. A change in probability settings for 10 can be made.

  Also, by re-doing the setting change process from the beginning (from scratch), it is possible to continue updating from the probability setting value during updating at the time the power is turned off during the setting change, and not to restart the updating of the probability setting value. It is possible to redo the updating of the probability setting value from the beginning using the probability setting value (probability setting value data 203x11) used in the previous games. Therefore, the person in charge of the hall can reassertly update the probability setting author. The details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is on as a result of the process of S4206 (S4206: No), it means that the setting change process was not being executed when the power was turned off last time, so next, Hall As a process of confirming the start-up operation performed when a person in charge etc. powers on the pachinko machine 10, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4207). In the process of S4207, since the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted and the timer interrupt process described later is not executed, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is selected in the switch state read process of the timer interrupt process. Rather than making a decision using the read one, the I / O port 205 is directly accessed to read the state of the RAM erase switch 122.

  As a result of the process of S4207, if the RAM erase switch 122 is off (S4207: No), it is then determined whether the setting key 501 is in the on state to further check the start-up operation ( S4208). In the present embodiment, only the case where it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on will be described. However, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the setting key 501 is in the on state and the door is opened. It may be determined whether the switch is on.

  As a result of the processing of S4208, when the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4208: N0), since the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the off state, the person in charge of the hall starts in the normal mode. It means having operated. Then, it is determined whether the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on (S4209). As a result, when the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on (S4209: Yes), the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time, that is, the confirmation of the probability setting value by the setting confirmation process Indicates that the power was turned off. In this case, as shown in FIG. 62, the setting confirmation process is executed from the head (S4210). By the setting confirmation process, the probability setting value currently set is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability setting value can be confirmed.

  As described above, even when the person in charge of the hall performs the start-up operation for starting in the normal mode as the start-up operation, the setting confirmation process is started from the head instead of starting the pachinko machine 10 in the normal mode ( Start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode to execute again from scratch. As a result, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed even if a person in charge of hall or the like starts up by the operation in the normal mode. As a result, the person in charge of the hall can confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being turned off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be launched with confidence. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is off as a result of the process of S4209 (S4209: No), it means that the setting confirmation process was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. . Also, the process of S4209 is executed when the setting changing flag 203x13 is determined to be off in the process of S4206 (S4206: No), that is, when the power is turned off last time, the setting changing process is performed. It is not even running.

  Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode is set to the normal mode indicated by the person in charge of hall or the like by the start-up operation, the setting confirmation process of S4210 and the process of S4211 described later are skipped and other start-up processes are performed. After (S4214), the process proceeds to the main process. As another start-up process, 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In the present embodiment, as in the sixth or seventh embodiment, timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) for main control of the game is executed triggered by a 4 ms timer interrupt generated every 4 ms. . By permitting the 4 millisecond timer interrupt in the process of S4214, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 milliseconds.

  Further, in the main processing of this embodiment, only the update processing of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the update processing of the variation type counter CS1 (S702 and S703 in FIG. 17) are executed during the loop. Perform infinite loop processing. The power failure monitoring process executed in the main process in the first embodiment etc. (monitoring whether or not there is power failure occurrence information, processing for executing a process related to power failure when there is power failure occurrence information, FIG. 17 The processes of S701 and S704 to S707) are executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the on state as a result of the process of S4208 (S4208: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the on state. Means that the start-up operation has been performed in the setting confirmation mode. Here, the process of S4208 is executed when the setting changing flag 203x13 is determined to be off in the process of S4206 (S4206: No), that is, when the power is turned off last time. Is not running. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, the pachinko machine 10 is operated in the setting confirmation mode in which the hall personnel etc. started and operated. In order to start up, the process proceeds to the process of S4210, and the setting confirmation process is executed (S4210). By the setting confirmation process, the probability setting value currently set is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability setting value can be confirmed. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the setting confirmation process (S4210) is ended, the external output process is executed (S4211). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed or that the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. As a result, the person concerned with holes can grasp that the setting confirmation process is executed by the pachinko machine 10 and the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, when the probability setting value is displayed illegally, it can be grasped quickly. After the external output process is executed, the other start-up process is executed (S4221), and the process shifts to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the process of S4207, which is a process for confirming the start-up operation performed when the Hall official or the like turns on the pachinko machine 10, S4207: Yes) In order to further confirm the start-up operation, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is in the on state (S4212). In the present embodiment, only the case where it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on will be described. However, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the setting key 501 is in the on state and the door is opened. It may be determined whether the switch is on.

  If the setting key 501 is in the on state as a result of the process of S4212 (S4212: Yes), the person in charge of the hall stands in the setting change mode because the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is in the on state. It means that the operation was raised. When the start-up operation is performed in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 62, whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, regardless of whether the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on or not. Regardless of the type, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set as the setting change mode.

  Therefore, when the setting key 501 is in the on state as a result of the processing of S4212 (S4212: Yes), the setting change processing is executed (S4213). When the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 by the setting change processing, and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by a person in charge of the hall, etc., the probability setting value is updated and the setting key 501 is turned off. The updated probability setting value is determined as the probability setting value to be used for the future game, and the RAM clear process is performed. Thus, after changing the probability setting value, the gaming machine can be newly started with the probability setting value after the change. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, even if the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the person concerned with the hall is that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Etc clearly show the intention to change the probability setting value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the intention of the person concerned with holes and the like.

  When the setting change process (S4213) is ended, the external output process is executed (S4214). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting change process has been performed or that the probability setting value has been changed is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. As a result, it is possible for the person in charge of hall and the like to grasp that the setting change processing is executed in the pachinko machine 10 and the probability setting value is changed. Therefore, when the probability setting value is illegally changed, it can be grasped quickly. After the external output process is executed, the other start-up process is executed (S4221), and the process shifts to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the process of S4212 (S4212: No), then it is determined whether or not the RAM is abnormal by referring to the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on. (S4215). Here, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on by the process of S4207 (S4207: Yes), it is determined that the setting key 501 is off by the process of S4212 (S4212: No), and the process of S4215 is If it is executed, since the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is always off, it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal in the process of S4215 (S4215: No).

  Further, in this case, since it is determined that the setting changing flag 203x13 is off in the process of S4206 (S4206: No), the setting changing process is not being executed when the power is turned off last time. is there. Therefore, the process of S4207 determines that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4207: Yes), the process of S4212 determines that the setting key 501 is off (S4212: No), and the process of S4215 determines that the RAM is abnormal. If it is not determined (S4215: No), it means that the person in charge of the hall has started up in the RAM clear mode, and the setting change process was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. As shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode regardless of whether the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time. Therefore, the RAM clear process is executed (S4216).

  In the RAM clear process, among the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for controlling the game (predetermined data except the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the internal work area 203x1) is erased (cleared), The combination ratio data 203s, the base value data 203r, the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) stored in the outside work area 203y are held without being deleted. A game can be newly started by deleting data (predetermined data except probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the internal work area 203x1) used for control of the game. Further, since the probability setting value data 203x11 is held even if the RAM clear processing is executed, the game can be continued with the probability setting value decided before the RAM clear processing is executed.

  Here, as described above, even if the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time, there is no abnormality in the RAM, and the start operation for starting in the RAM clear mode is performed. In the case of the hall operator, the pachinko machine 10 is launched in the RAM clear mode as the startup operation of the hall personnel. The fact that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on indicates that Hall personnel or the like at least clearly want to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the person concerned with the hall and the like.

  When the RAM clear process of S4216 is completed, the other start-up process is executed (S4221), and the process shifts to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 by the process of S4203 (S4203: No), the RAM determination value calculated by the process of S4204 is the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off. If they do not match and it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal (S4204: No), it is determined in the process of S4205 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4205: No) When it corresponds, it can be judged that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203, so the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on (S4217), and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to confirm the start-up operation of the person concerned It is judged whether or not (S4218). Also in the process of S4218, as in the process of S4207, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input / output port 205.

  If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on as a result of the process of S4218 (S4218: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described process of S4212, and whether or not the setting key 501 is in the on state It judges (S4212). As a result, when the setting key 501 is in the on state (S 4212: Yes), it means that the person concerned with the hall, etc. has started up in the setting change mode. Then, in this case (S 4212: Yes), in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in accordance with the start-up operation of the hall official or the like, the process proceeds to S 4213 and the above-mentioned setting change processing is executed.

  Here, even if the RAM abnormality occurs, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the RAM can be cleared after setting the probability setting value again. Therefore, the game can be newly started with the newly set normal probability setting value. Note that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned off by this RAM clear. Therefore, after that, the main control device 110 can control the game without executing the processing related to the RAM abnormality.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off as a result of the process of S4218 (S4218: No), and if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on as a result of the process of S4218, the process of S4212 is performed. If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the processing (S4218: Yes, S4212: No), among the RAM abnormalities, the person concerned with the hall, etc. is in the normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting confirmation mode. It means that the start-up operation was performed in one of the start-up modes.

  In this case, the process proceeds to the above-described processing of S4215, and it is always determined that the RAM is determined to be abnormal in the processing of S4215 (S4215: Yes), and the processing proceeds to the processing of S4219. In the process of S4219, a RAM abnormality setting process is performed (S4219). In the RAM abnormality setting process, a process for notifying of the RAM abnormality is executed. For example, an audio lamp is provided to notify that the power is turned off once and the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode by audio output from the audio output device 226 and / or display on the third symbol display device 81. The command is transmitted to the control device 113.

  Then, the external output processing for notifying the hall computer 600 of the RAM abnormality via the external output terminal 503 is executed (S4220), and the other start-up processing is executed (S4221) to shift to the main processing. Do. Since the hall computer 600 is notified that the RAM is abnormal, a person concerned with a hall or the like can surely grasp that the RAM abnormality has occurred even if the notification from the pachinko machine 10 is not noticed.

  Here, although the details will be described later, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on due to the occurrence of the RAM abnormality, in the timer interrupt process, the main control regarding the game is not executed except the random number updating process and the power failure monitoring process. I assume. That is, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 shifts to the main processing and thereafter the main control regarding the game is not executed even in the timer interrupt processing, it enters an infinite loop state. Then, after having the hall personnel etc. understand the RAM abnormality by the RAM abnormality setting processing of S4219 and the external output processing of S4220, the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode, and the probability setting value is surely made. By resetting and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, the pachinko machine 10 can be operated normally.

  As described above, it is necessary for a person in charge of hall or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality. Then, in order to start up in the setting change mode, a dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required. Therefore, the elimination of the RAM abnormality necessarily involves a hall (store manager) who manages the dedicated key. Therefore, the hole side can suppress that the RAM abnormality is eliminated without knowing that the RAM abnormality is present.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the details of the setting change process (S4213) which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 63) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4213). The setting change process (S4213) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for accepting and confirming the change of the probability setting value from the person in charge of the hall or the like.

  In this setting change process, first, a 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted (S4301). By permitting the 4 millisecond timer interrupt, a timer interrupt process (FIG. 66) described later is executed triggered by the generation of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt. Although details will be described later, when the power failure monitoring process is executed in the timer interrupt process and the power is turned off during the setting change process, the state at that time is held in the RAM 203 by the power failure monitoring process. As it is, it is configured to stand by in an infinite loop until the power is completely turned off.

  Next, the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is set to ON (S4302), and initialization required at the start of the setting change is performed (S4303). In the process of S4303, for example, an initial value is set to the RAM area used in the main setting change process. Note that clearing (off setting) of the RAM anomaly flag 203x15 accompanying execution of the setting change process at the time of RAM anomaly may be performed in the process of S4303, or may be performed in RAM clearing process (S4313) described later. Good. As described above, when the RAM is abnormal, the person concerned with holes is urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. When the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is reset and the RAM 203 is cleared, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be operated normally. Therefore, it is possible to indicate that the RAM abnormality has been eliminated by clearing (off setting) the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 along with the execution of the setting change processing.

  Next, the probability setting value data 203x11 indicating the probability setting value used so far is read and stored as the update probability setting value data 203x12 (S4303). The update of the probability setting value is performed not using the probability setting value data 203x11, but using the update probability setting value data 203x12. The update probability setting value data 203x12 is displayed on the base display device 401. The display mode at this time may be any of FIGS. 49 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

  Next, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is set to ON (S4305). The ON setting to the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 may be executed in the process of S4303. Either during the time after the setting change process is executed until the process of S4309 (the process of determining whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on) is executed for the first time, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned on. It only needs to be set.

  Next, it is judged whether the probability setting value stored in the update probability setting value data 203x12 is within the normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4306), and it is not within the normal range, ie, abnormal. If it is the probability setting value (S4306: No), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is changed to the initial value (S4307), and the process proceeds to S4308. The initial value may be “1” which is the minimum value of the probability setting values (“1” to “6”), or “3” or “4” which is an intermediate value of the probability setting values. It may be “6” which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. As a result, even if the probability setting value data 203x11 is destroyed due to the RAM abnormality or the updating probability setting value data 203x12 is destroyed during the updating of the probability setting value, the update probability setting value data 203x12 By storing the probability setting values in the normal range as, it is possible to update the probability setting values in the normal range.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability setting value stored in the update probability setting value data 203x12 is within the range of “1” to “6” as a result of the process of S4306 (S4306: Yes), the process of S4307. And skip to the processing of S4308.

  In the process of S4308, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4308). In the process of S4308, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state (edge detection), it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

  This is because, as described above, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode, the setting key 501 is activated by the start-up operation in the off state when the power is turned off during the setting change processing. This is because the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the setting change process from scratch (from scratch). If it is determined in the process of S4308 that the level of the setting key 501 is in the off state and it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off, the pachinko machine is started by the start-up operation in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode. When 10 is started and execution of setting change processing is started as described above, since the setting key 501 is off from the beginning, an affirmative determination is made in the processing of S4308 immediately, and the probability setting value can not be updated. As described later, there arises a problem that the probability setting value is determined.

  On the other hand, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state (detection of an edge) in the process of S4308, the setting key 501 is turned off. By determining, it can be avoided that it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off, unless the setting key 501 is turned on once and then turned off. Therefore, after the power is turned off during the setting change process, if the setting change process is executed by activating the pachinko machine 10 by the start operation in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode, the setting key 501 is temporarily turned on. Since the probability setting value can be determined for the first time by setting the state and then turning off, it is possible to avoid the problem that the probability setting value is determined without updating the probability setting value.

  If it is determined as a result of the process of S4308 that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4308: No), it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4309). In the process of S4309, when the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is changed from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, and the probability setting value is updated.

  As described above, the RAM erase switch 122 is used to determine the startup mode when launching the pachinko machine 10, and updates the probability setting value when the pachinko machine 10 is launched in the setting change mode. It is also used when That is, every time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability setting value is updated. Therefore, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on as a result of the process of S4309 (S4309: Yes), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated (S4310), and the process returns to the process of S4306. Specifically, in the process of S4010, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is added by 1 and updated, and when the update probability setting value data 203x12 is "6", the update probability setting value data 203x12 is "1". Update to

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the process of S4309 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4309: No), the process of S4310 is skipped and the process returns to the process of S4306.

  As described above, in the process of S4309, when the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is changed from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Specifically, a RAM erase switch flag 203x16 indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 for probability setting and an output of the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 read by timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 66) described later. When the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on. Then, after the determination is made, in the process of S4309, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is stored in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

  Here, as described above, after the execution of the setting change process is started, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to “ON” before the process of S4309 is first performed by the process of S4305 and the like. This may be the start operation of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode while the RAM erase switch 122 may still be turned on at the stage of executing the process of S4309 first, If the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, so the on operation of the RAM erase switch 122 for updating the probability setting value is performed. There is a possibility that the probability setting value may be updated by erroneously determining that there is a problem. As a result, the Hall personnel and others are distrusted by the fact that the probability setting value has been updated despite the fact that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on for updating the probability setting value.

  On the other hand, after execution of the setting change process is started, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to “on” before the process of S4309 is performed first, so that the pachinko machine is made at the time of this first determination. Even if the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a start-up operation to start up 10 in the setting change mode, it is erroneously considered that the RAM erase switch 122 is operated to update the probability setting value. It can be determined that the probability setting value is updated.

  The loop processing of S4306 to S4310 continues to be executed until it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on by the processing of S4308 (S4308: Yes). If it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4308: Yes), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is stored as the probability setting value data 203x11 (S4311). As a result, the probability setting value updated by the person in charge of the hall or the like is determined as the probability setting value to be used in the future game.

  Next, the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is inhibited (S4312), and the execution of the timer interrupt process is stopped. Then, the RAM clear process is executed (S4313), and the setting change process is ended.

  In the processing of S4313, among the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the internal work area 203x1) is erased (cleared), and While deleting the character ratio data 203s stored in the external work area 203y, the base value data 203r, the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) are held without deletion. A game can be newly started by deleting data (predetermined data except probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the internal work area 203x1) used for control of the game. Further, since the probability setting value data 203x11 is held, it is possible to play a game with the determined probability setting value.

  Further, the setting change-in-progress flag 203x13 is set to off by the RAM clear processing. Therefore, if the power is not turned off while the setting change process is being performed, the setting changing flag 203x13 is set to OFF, while if the power is turned off while the setting changing process is being performed, the setting changing flag 203x13 is turned on. It will remain. Therefore, in the start-up process shown in FIG. 63, if the setting change-in-progress flag 203x13 is on, it can be determined that the setting change process is being executed when the power is turned off last time.

  Also, when the probability setting value is changed, the symbol ratio also changes, so if the symbol ratio data 203s based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the symbol based on the probability setting value after the change The ratio can not be calculated correctly. In the setting change RAM clearing process, by deleting the character ratio data 203s, it is possible to correctly calculate the character ratio based on the changed probability setting value.

  On the other hand, since the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, in setting change RAM clear processing, in order to hold the base value data 203r and calculate the past base value and base value By keeping necessary information, it is possible to discover in the past the fraudulent acts conducted in the past without being concealed. Also, by holding the error data 203t in the setting change RAM clearing process, even if the unauthorized person who has caused the error starts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history is displayed. It can not be erased, and it is possible to suppress the concealment of fraudulent acts.

  When the setting change process is ended, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is ended, and the display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the setting confirmation process (S4210) which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 63) will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (S4215). The setting confirmation process (S4215) is a process executed when the startup mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for causing the base display device 401 to display the probability setting value currently set.

  In this setting confirmation process, first, as in the process of S4301 of the setting change process, a 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted (S4401). By permitting the 4 millisecond timer interrupt, a timer interrupt process (FIG. 66) described later is executed triggered by the generation of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt. Although details will be described later, when the power failure monitoring process is executed in the timer interrupt process and the power is turned off during the setting change process, the state at that time is held in the RAM 203 by the power failure monitoring process. As it is, it is configured to stand by in an infinite loop until the power is completely turned off.

  Next, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to ON (S4402), for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), or (e-2). In the display mode, when the display of the probability setting value indicated by the probability setting value data 203x11 is started on the base display device 401, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off (S4403). In the process of S4403, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state (detection of an edge), it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

  This is because, as described above, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode, in which the setting key 501 is turned on by the start-up operation in the off state, when the power is turned off during execution of the setting confirmation process. Is because it is configured to execute the setting confirmation process from scratch (from scratch). If it is determined in the process of S4403 that the level of the setting key 501 is in the off state and it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 is started by the start-up operation in the normal mode. When execution of the setting confirmation process is started as described above, since the setting key 501 is off from the beginning, an affirmative determination is made in the process of S4403 immediately, and confirmation of the probability setting value ends in an instant The problem arises.

  On the other hand, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (detection of an edge) in the process of S4403, the setting key 501 is turned off. By determining, it can be avoided that it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off, unless the setting key 501 is turned on once and then turned off. Therefore, after the power is turned off during execution of the setting confirmation process, if the setting confirmation process is executed by starting up the pachinko machine 10 by the start-up operation in the normal mode, the setting key 501 is once turned on. Since the confirmation of the probability setting value can be ended for the first time by putting it in the OFF state, it is possible to avoid the problem that the confirmation of the probability setting value ends in an instant.

  As a result of the process of S4403, if the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4403: No), S4403 is repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the setting key 501 is in the off state. During this time, the display of the probability setting value is continuously performed on the base display device 401. When the setting key 501 is turned off (S4403: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is ended, and the display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started. The flag 203x14 is cleared off (S4404). Thus, if the power is not turned off during the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to OFF, while if the power is turned off during the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is It will remain on. Therefore, in the start-up process shown in FIG. 63, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on, it can be determined that the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time.

  Then, the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is inhibited (S4405), the execution of the timer interrupt process is stopped, and the setting confirmation process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process that performs main control of the game, and is executed triggered by a 4 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4 milliseconds.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, a process of updating random numbers used for a big hit lottery and a second game lottery is executed (S4501), and then a power failure monitoring process is executed (S4502). In the power failure monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not there is power failure occurrence information, and when there is power failure occurrence information, processing to execute processing related to power failure (processing corresponding to S701 and S704 to S707 in FIG. 17) To do).

  Next, with reference to the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on and the RAM abnormality is generated (S4503). As a result, when it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is off and the RAM abnormality does not occur (S4503: No), the processing of S4504 to S4515 is executed as the normal game processing.

  That is, the test shooting test information setting processing for setting the test shooting test information is executed (S4504), and then the payout control unit 111, the audio lamp control unit 113, the solenoid 209, the base display control circuit 402 connected to the input / output port 205 Port output processing to output the output signal set in the previous timer interrupt processing to the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, the external output terminal 503, etc. Execute (S4505).

  Next, the states of various sensors, switches 208, etc. are read (S4506). The state of the RAM erase switch 122 is also read by the process of S4506. Then, subtraction processing of various timers used for control of the game is executed (S4507), and then processing of detecting cheating by impact or magnet based on an error signal from the payout control device 111 is executed ( S4508).

  Next, the launch control processing for controlling the launch of the ball by the sphere launch unit 112a is executed (S4509), and then the payout control device 111 is notified of the number of the balls dispensed by the payout control device 111. A payout command reception process to be received more is executed (S4510), and then a payout command transmission process is issued to instruct the payout control device 111 to pay out the ball (S4511).

  Next, execute special pattern / electric charge control processing related to the variable display of the first symbol (the third symbol, special symbol) and the jackpot (S4512), and then, move the second symbol (normal symbol) to the variable display or the common drawing The general power control process is executed (S4513). Then, display LED data setting processing for the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, etc. is executed (S4514), and output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. The external signal setting process for setting the external signal to be performed is executed (S4515), and the timer interruption process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on and the RAM abnormality has occurred as a result of the processing of S4503 (S4503: Yes), the processing of S4504 to S4515, which is a normal game processing, is skipped , And ends the timer interrupt processing as it is.

  As described above, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on by detecting the occurrence of the RAM abnormality by the start-up processing of FIG. 63, in the timer interrupt processing, excluding the random number update processing and the power failure monitoring processing Control is not executed. As a result, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 shifts to the main processing and thereafter enters the infinite loop state because the main control regarding the game is not executed even in the timer interrupt processing. Then, after having the hall personnel etc. understand the RAM abnormality by the RAM abnormality setting process of S4219 of startup processing or the external output process of S4220, the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode, and the probability setting is made. By resetting the value reliably and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 10 operate normally.

  As described above, it is necessary for a person in charge of hall or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality. Then, in order to start up in the setting change mode, a dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required. Therefore, the elimination of the RAM abnormality necessarily involves a hall (store manager) who manages the dedicated key. Therefore, the hole side can suppress that the RAM abnormality is eliminated without knowing that the RAM abnormality is present.

  On the other hand, in the timer interrupt process, even if the RAM abnormality occurs, the random number update process and the power failure monitoring process are executed. By executing the random number update process, it is possible to continue generating random numbers while the power is on. Further, by executing the power failure monitoring process, even when the RAM abnormality occurs, the occurrence of the power failure can be monitored, and when the power failure occurs, the process corresponding thereto can be reliably executed. In particular, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in a situation where the RAM abnormality is detected, the setting change process is executed in the start-up process. If the power is turned off while this setting change process is being executed, the flag 203x13 is kept on while the setting change flag 203x13 is kept ON, so when the pachinko machine 10 is started next time, It is possible to redo the setting change process from the head regardless of what kind of start-up operation.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the eighth embodiment can obtain the above-described effects. Further, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to seventh embodiments can achieve the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

The Ninth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75, a pachinko machine 10 according to a ninth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the setting key 501 is provided on the front side (that is, the back side of the pachinko machine 10) of the main control device 110 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 The jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol is configured to be changeable to a plurality of stages (for example, six stages of setting values “1” to “6”).

  When the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 is provided so as to be exposed in the direction of the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the locking of the inner frame 12 is released by a person concerned with holes. When the inner frame 12 is rotated relative to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 is configured to be exposed in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 as the inner frame 12 rotates. With such a configuration, when a person in charge of hall wants to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to immediately insert the setting change key into the setting key 501 by rotating the inner frame 12 The setting change work of the pachinko machine 10 can be performed quickly.

  In addition, the hall is provided with an island installation that incorporates an automatic ball feeder and the like in a closed predetermined space, and the outer frame of the pachinko machine is attached to both sides in the long side direction of the island installation. A plurality of pachinko machines can be installed on the And the person in charge of the hall releases the lock between the inner frame and / or the front frame and the outer frame of each pachinko machine installed on the island facility outside the business hours of the hall, and the outer frame (island facility) On the other hand, open the inner frame and / or front frame and perform the setting change operation and maintenance operation of each pachinko machine.

  However, since the setting key 501 is configured to be exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, for example, in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is installed on one long side of the island facility of the hole, the pachinko machine 10 is installed. The inner frame of another pachinko machine installed on the other long side (that is, the back side of the pachinko machine 10) that is not the long side being opened is opened for some reason (for example, fraud etc.) Then, the setting key 501 provided so as to be exposed on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 can be operated directly. As a result, even if the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is not opened, the pachinko machine on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is opened, so that the setting key 501 of the pachinko machine 10 is directly operated. When the setting key 501 is improperly operated, the setting content is changed, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. In addition, for example, fraudulent acts such as unauthorized exchange of the main control device 110 by cutting the sealing unit 100c connecting the box base 100a of the substrate box 100 and the box cover 100b are performed, and an unexpected disadvantage is caused to the hole. May cause it.

  Here, as in the slot machine, a structure is also conceivable in which the entire rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is covered with a housing structure to prevent tampering with the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. Unlike gaming machines, pachinko machines, etc., it is necessary to replenish the balls from the upper side of the island facilities, and it is necessary to discharge the out balls, and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is enclosed If covered by the structure, a complicated structure for supplying and discharging balls is required, and there is a possibility that the manufacturing cost is increased due to the housing structure and the supplying and discharging structure.

  In addition, in the island equipment, in consideration of the wiring connection with the card sand device disposed adjacent to the left side of the pachinko machine 10 and the connection wiring with the power supply, the back surface structure of the pachinko machine 10, in particular, the pachinko machine 10 back surface It is desirable that the structure on the left side is configured to be open to a certain extent, and is easily wired and connected to the above-described device or the like.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, a protective cover member 140 for covering the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. In such a situation, the protective cover member 140 is configured such that the setting key 501 is not exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. By configuring in this manner, in a situation where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting cover 501 can not be operated directly from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 by the protective cover member 140. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as the setting key 501 being tampered with.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the sealing unit 100c provided on the left side (right side in a front view of the pachinko machine 10) of the substrate box 100 housing the main controller 110 is covered by the protective cover member 140. By making it impossible to directly contact the sealing unit 100c, it is difficult to make frauds such as cutting off the sealing unit 100c and replacing the main control device 110, and there is a disadvantage in the hole based on the fraud. This can be prevented from occurring.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to eighth embodiments. The illustration and the explanation are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 67, the rear face configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment in that the outer frame 11 is formed by combining a wooden plate and an aluminum plate, and the outer frame 11 is a point at which the protective cover member 140 is attached. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment.

  The outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment has an upper plate 11a made of a wooden plate as an upper side, and a lower plate 11b similarly made of a wooden plate as a lower side, and is more rigid than the wooden plate. The left side plate 11c which is formed of a high aluminum plate material is a left side, and the left side plate 11d which is also formed of an aluminum plate material is a right side plate.

  By forming the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 by plate members made of aluminum, the outer frame is formed even when the thickness of the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d is thinner than that of the conventional wooden plate Since the rigidity of the whole 11 can be maintained, the design space of the pachinko machine 10 in the lateral direction can be secured, and the design freedom of the pachinko machine 10 can be enhanced.

  Further, the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d are formed in a U shape in an upper view cross section, and face the inner side of the pachinko machine 10 on the side of the pachinko machine 10 and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in the side portion. It is comprised by the front surface part extendedly formed, and the rear surface part extendedly formed toward the inner side of the pachinko machine 10 in the pachinko machine 10 back side of a side part.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 (that is, the pachinko machine 10) is formed by driving a nail into an island facility (not shown) from the inner wall side of the upper plate 11a and the lower plate 11b of the outer frame 11. Are configured to be fixed to the island equipment.

  The protective cover member 140 is fixed to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 by a fixing screw 11g (see FIG. 69) described later, and the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 and a sealing unit 100c (see FIG. 72) described later. It is configured to cover together.

  The base display device 401 and the error display button 502 of the main control device 110 are not covered by the protective cover member 140, and are exposed toward the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The base display device 401 and the error display button 502 do not change the setting contents of the pachinko machine 10, but are devices used to display the state of the pachinko machine 10, and it is difficult for fraudulent acts to be performed. Therefore, the need for covering by the protective cover member 140 is scarce. By configuring in this manner, the protective cover member 140 can be formed with the minimum necessary size, and the manufacturing cost required for the protective cover member 140 can be reduced.

  Here, the details of the protective cover member 140 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (a) is a left front perspective view from the left front of the protective cover member 140 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 68 (b) is a view from the rear right of the protective cover member 140 in the ninth embodiment. It is a right back perspective view.

  The protective cover member 140 is formed of a resin (e.g., polycarbonate resin) having transparency as a whole, and is provided with a cover attachment portion 150 attached to the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11, and the cover attachment portion 150. A standing portion 160 extending in the back surface direction (back side) of the pachinko machine 10, and a tip end side of the rising portion 160 (that is, the back side (back side) of the pachinko machine 10) The cover portion 170 is formed to extend in the left direction of the pachinko machine 10 (i.e., in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  The cover mounting portion 150 has a mounting surface 151 in surface contact with a portion of the inner wall surface of the side surface of the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11, and an upper mounting hole 152 and a lower mounting hole 153 formed in the mounting surface 151. It is comprised by the curved part 154 formed in the shape contact | abutted along the inner wall shape of 11 d of right side plates.

  The upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 are formed in the mounting surface 151 in such a manner that the fixing screws 11 g (see FIG. 69) to be described later can be incorporated. The upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 can be attached to an upper cover mounting hole 11e and a lower cover mounting hole 11f (see FIG. 69) which are formed in the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 and described later. It is provided.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71, an attachment aspect of the protective cover member 140 to the outer frame 11 will be described. FIG. 69 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10 (excluding the front frame 14) in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a left front perspective view for explaining a method of attaching the protective cover member 140 to the outer frame 11 in the ninth embodiment. Further, FIG. 71 is a front view of the outer frame 11 and the protective cover member 140 attached to the outer frame 11 in the ninth embodiment. For the convenience of description, FIG. 69 shows the front frame 14 removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 removed from the outer frame 11 in FIGS. 70 and 71. The illustrated state is illustrated, and the description thereof is also omitted.

  First, as shown in FIG. 69, the cover attachment hole, which is a through hole for attaching the protective cover member 140, slightly below the central portion of the side surface of the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10 11e and a cover lower mounting hole 11f are formed by drilling, and fixing screws 11g are respectively screwed in.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70, the upper cover mounting hole 11e and the lower cover mounting hole 11f are formed at positions corresponding to the upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 of the protective cover member 140, respectively. Specifically, an upper cover mounting hole 11 e is formed by drilling at a position corresponding to the upper mounting hole 152, and a lower cover mounting hole 11 f is formed by drilling at a position corresponding to the lower mounting hole 153. Then, with the (outside) attachment surface 151 of the protective cover member 140 and the curved portion 154 in contact with the side wall of the right side plate 11d and the inner wall side of the rear side, the outside of the right side plate 11d (right ) By screwing each fixing screw 11g into the cover upper mounting hole 11e and the upper mounting hole 152 and screwing it into the cover lower mounting hole 11f and the lower mounting hole 153, the outer frame 11 The protective cover member 140 is fixed to the right side plate 11d).

  Here, the curved portion 154 of the protective cover member 140 is formed in contact with the inner wall shapes of the side surface portion and the rear surface portion of the right side plate 11 d. Further, the rear surface portion of the right side plate 11d is made of aluminum. Therefore, in the state where the inner frame 12 is closed to the outer frame 11, the inner wall of the side surface portion and the rear surface portion of the right side plate 11 d abuts on the curved portion 154 and the right side plate 11 d and the protective cover member 140 There is no gap (space). Thus, in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the fixing screw 11g encased in the upper mounting hole 152 and the cover upper mounting hole 11e from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower mounting By making it impossible to directly operate the fixing screw 11g encased in the hole 153 and the cover lower mounting hole 11f, the protective cover member 140 can not be detached from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 Can.

  In addition, a card sand device (not shown) is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 10 on an island facility, and normally, no gap is generated between the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11 and the card sand device. Is configured. Therefore, the protection cover member 140 can not be attached or detached from the side of the pachinko machine 10 by configuring so that the fixing screw 11g can not be directly operated from the right side of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, it is difficult to remove the protective cover member 140 from the back side or the side of the pachinko machine 10, and the setting key 501 is covered with the protective cover member 140 when the inner frame 12 is closed. It can be made inoperable.

  Further, the curved portion 154 is formed in a thin plate shape, and is configured to be elastically deformable based on the elastic force of the resin material that constitutes the entire protective cover member 140. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the protective cover member 140, the protective cover member 140 is slightly bent in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10 by the curved portion 154. With such a configuration, for example, even when the main control device 110 (see FIG. 69) contacts the protective cover member 140 due to the momentum at the time of closing when the inner frame 12 is closed, an impact is applied, The bending of the curved portion 154 due to the elastic force to absorb the impact can prevent the protective cover member 140 from being damaged.

  Here, referring back to FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b), the configuration of the protective cover member 140 will be described. In addition to the cover attachment portion 150, the protective cover member 140 is provided with an upright portion 160 extending from the cover attachment portion 150 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. The distal end side of the upright portion 160 (ie, A cover portion 170 extends in a cantilevered manner from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 toward the left side of the pachinko machine 10 in a front view. The rising portion 160 is provided with a rising cover wall 161, a rising upper cover portion 162, a rising lower cover portion 163, a rising inner rib 164, and a rising outer rib 165. Further, the cover portion 170 is provided with a cover plate 171, a cover-side protrusion 172, a key cover portion 173, and a cover outer rib 174.

  From here, the configuration of the rising portion 160 will be described in detail. The upright cover wall 161 extends continuously from the curved portion 154 of the cover attachment portion 150 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device covered with the right side surface (left side surface in back view) of the main control device 110 by the rising cover wall 161 and provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (both shown in FIG. 72) described later It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from the right side in the front view (the left side in the back view) of the 110.

  The upright upper cover portion 162 is composed of an upper inner cover portion 162a and an upper outer cover portion 162b. The upper inner cover portion 162a extends horizontally from the entire upper portion of the upright cover wall 161 and a portion of the upper portion of the cover plate 171 toward the inner side of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction in which the main control device 110 is disposed). It is formed. Further, the upper outer cover portion 162 b is formed to extend horizontally from the entire upper portion of the upright cover wall 161 toward the outer side of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main control device 110 is not disposed).

  Thus, by forming the rising upper cover portion 162 so that the upper inner cover portion 162a and the upper outer cover portion 162b are flush, the upper right side (upper left side in a rear view) of the main control device 110 is It is possible to prevent a fraudulent action from the front right upper side (back side upper left side) of the main control device 110 which is covered and provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (both refer to FIG. 72) described later. When the wire is transmitted from the outside of the upright cover wall 161 upward, for example, when the cheating by the wire is performed from the left side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 by the upper outer cover portion 162b, for example, By hitting the upper outer cover portion 162b, it is possible to prevent the intrusion of the wire.

  The upright lower cover portion 163 is composed of a lower inner cover portion 163a (see FIG. 68A) and a lower outer cover portion 163b (see FIG. 68B). The lower inner cover portion 163a extends in the horizontal direction from the entire lower part of the upright cover wall 161 and the entire lower part of the cover plate 171 toward the inner side of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main control device 110 is disposed). It is formed. The lower outer cover portion 163b extends horizontally from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main control device 110 is not disposed).

  The lower inner cover portion 163a is formed to have a larger area than the upper inner cover portion 162a. The main control unit 110 is located at the lower side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 67), and the main control unit 110 is accessed from the lower side of the pachinko machine 10 from the upper side. Because it is easy, a person who cheats the main control device 110 often cheats by invading a wire or the like from the lower side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent action, the area of the lower inner cover portion 163a is formed wide, and the lower inner cover portion 163a allows the main main device 110 to have the main in the lower right side (the lower left side in back view). The gap between the control device 110 and the protective cover member 140 is configured to be as small as possible.

  As described above, by forming the rising lower cover portion 163 so that the lower inner cover portion 163a and the lower outer cover portion 163b are flush with each other, the front lower right side (lower left side in back surface view) of the main control device 110 It is possible to prevent a fraudulent action from the front right side lower side (back side view left side lower side) of the main control device 110 which is covered and provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (both refer to FIG. 72) described later. Also, for example, in the case where the lower outer cover portion 163b causes a wire fraud, when the wire is transmitted downward from the outside of the upright cover wall 161, the lower outer cover portion 163b and the lower outer cover portion 163b The collision can prevent the intrusion of the wire.

  The rising inner rib 164 (see FIG. 68 (a)) is formed in a rib shape in which the amount of protrusion gradually increases toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the middle step portion of the standing cover wall 161 on the inner side of the pachinko machine 10. There is. The upstanding inner rib 164 functions as a reinforcing rib of the upstanding cover wall 161 to prevent the upstanding cover wall 161 from being damaged, and in particular, other parts disposed on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, main control The degree of reinforcement of the upright cover wall 161 is configured to be increased by gradually increasing the amount of protrusion of the upright inner rib 164 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in a range not contacting the device 110).

  The rising outer rib 165 (see FIG. 68B) is formed in a rib shape in which the amount of projection gradually decreases toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 at the outer middle portion of the pachinko machine 10 of the standing cover wall 161. It is formed at a position where it is paired inside / outside with the upright inner rib 164 described above. Similar to the rising inner rib 164, the rising outer rib 165 functions as a reinforcing rib of the rising cover wall 161 to prevent the rising cover wall 161 from being broken.

  Further, the standing outer rib 165 is formed to be equivalent to the amount of protrusion of the upper outer cover portion 162 b and the lower outer cover portion 163 b described above, and the pachinko machine 10 attached with the protective cover member 140 is installed in the island facility In this case, the standing outside rib 165 is configured not to be an obstacle at the time of installation of the pachinko machine 10, such as being caught on the island facility.

  From here, the configuration of the cover unit 170 will be described in detail. The cover plate 171 has the plate surface of the cover plate 171 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 from the upright portion 160 (the upright cover wall 161, the upright upper cover portion 162, the upright lower cover portion 163 and the upright inner rib 164) described above. Each direction is extended to a position which is equal to or more than the setting unit 100 d (see FIG. 72) of the main control device 110 and is less than the base display device 401 (error display button 502).

  On the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of this cover plate 171 (that is, the side facing the main controller 110. The same applies hereinafter), at a position corresponding to the setting unit 100d (see FIG. 72) of the main controller 110 described later. The cover-side protrusion 172 is formed in a rectangular shape so as to protrude toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a part of the cover plate 171 surrounded by the cover-side protrusion 172 is configured as a key cover portion 173.

  The cover-side protrusion 172 is formed to enter a space formed by a setting-side wall 100e of the setting portion 100d and the case-side protrusion 100g, which will be described later, and a protrusion amount to abut the setting bottom surface 100f. It is formed by

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71, the protective cover member 140 attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 is installed so that the plate surface of the cover plate 171 of the cover portion 170 described later faces the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Be done. The cover plate 171 also includes a setting unit 100d (see FIG. 74) provided on the substrate box 100 of the main controller 110 (hereinafter referred to as "the substrate box 100 of the main controller 110", simply "main controller 110) and a key surrounded by the cover-side protrusion 172 and a cover-side protrusion 172 formed in a square shape on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 at a position corresponding to “abbreviated as 110”. A cover portion 173 is provided. Therefore, the key cover portion 173 of the protective cover member 140 and the setting portion 100 d of the main control device 110 are configured to face each other.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the configurations of the setting unit 100d in the main control device 110 of the ninth embodiment and the cover side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 and the key cover portion 173 will be described. 72 is a front view of substrate box 100 of main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of pachinko machine 10 taken along line AA in FIG. 67, and FIG. 4 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the main control unit 110 and the protective cover member 140 in the B area of FIG. Note that for convenience of explanation, illustration of parts not related to the present invention is omitted in FIG. 72, and a state in which the front frame 14 is removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 is shown in FIG. The explanation is also omitted.

  First, as shown in FIG. 72, in the main control device 110 of the ninth embodiment, the main control device 110 is housed in a substrate box 100 in which a box base 100a (see FIG. 74) and a box cover 100b are combined. A setting key 501 is provided on the main substrate of the control device 110. The setting key 501 is used to change the set probability setting value or to check the set probability setting value.

  In the box cover 100b, a setting unit 100d is provided at a position corresponding to the setting key 501. The setting unit 100d is a projection on the cover side from the outermost surface side of the box cover 100b (that is, the backside of the pachinko machine 10). The cover 172 is recessed by an amount of projection 172 so that the entire cover-side projection 172 can be accommodated. As a part which comprises this setting part 100d, the setting part side wall 100e, the setting part bottom face 100f, and the case side protrusion 100g are provided.

  The setting portion side wall 100 e is formed extending from the outermost surface side of the box cover 100 b toward the main substrate side (not shown), and as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the extension length of the setting portion side wall 100 e The length (the amount of depression of the setting portion 100d) is formed to be equal to the amount of projection of the cover-side protrusion 172.

  The setting unit bottom surface 100f is formed extending from the setting unit side wall 100e, has a key hole (not shown) that exposes the key hole portion of the setting key 501, and is formed to close a portion other than the key hole. . With this configuration, the main control device 110 can be operated on the setting key 501 while being accommodated in the closed space formed by the box base 100a (see FIG. 74) and the box cover 100b.

  The case-side protrusion 100g is formed so as to project from the setting bottom surface 100f toward the protective cover member 140 side (the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10) so as to have the same amount of protrusion as the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140. ing. Further, the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 is formed to be accommodated in the space formed by the setting portion side wall 100 e and the case-side protrusion 100 g.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, a space where the cover side protrusion 172 is formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case side protrusion 100g. And the cover-side protrusion 172 is in contact with the bottom surface 100f of the setting portion 100d while the case-side protrusion 100g is in contact with the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140. . With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the portion where the setting key 501 is disposed is sealed by the key cover portion 173 of the protective cover member 140 and the case-side projection 100g of the setting portion 100d. By making the access to the setting unit 100d difficult by the side projection 172, the security of the setting key 501 is enhanced, and there is no room for a wire or the like to enter, so it is possible to prevent an unfair action on the setting key 501.

  In addition, the case-side protrusion 100g of the main controller 110 and the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140, and the setting portion bottom face 100f of the main controller 110 and the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 respectively abut. Because the configuration is made, if the setting change key is kept inserted into the setting key 501, the inner frame 12 can not be locked to the outer frame 11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hall personnel from forgetting to collect the key for setting change.

  Referring back to FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b), the description will be continued. A cover outer rib 174 is formed in a square rib shape and a cross rib shape on the back surface side (that is, the side not facing the main controller 110) of the cover plate 171 on the pachinko machine 10 side. The cover outer rib 174 functions as a reinforcing rib of the cover plate 171 to prevent the cover plate 171 from being damaged.

  In addition, when the wire is transmitted upward or downward of the cover plate 171 by the cover outer rib 174, for example, when the cheating by the wire is performed from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the wire is covered. By hitting the outer rib 174, it is possible to prevent the intrusion of the wire.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the setting change operation of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a left front perspective view showing the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 developed (opened) with respect to the outer frame 11 to which the protective cover member 140 in the ninth embodiment is attached. For convenience of explanation, illustration of parts not related to the present invention is omitted or simplified in FIG. 75, and the description thereof is also omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 75, when the locking of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 with respect to the outer frame 11 is unlocked by a person concerned with the hall outside the business hours of the hall, etc. The frame 14 pivots with respect to the outer frame 11, and the back surface side of the inner frame 12 is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. At this time, the protective cover member 140 remains fixed to the outer frame 11, and the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 installed on the back surface of the inner frame 12 rotates the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. With the movement, it is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and it becomes ready to be operated by the person in charge of the hall.

  Therefore, the person in charge of the hole can immediately carry out the setting change work of the pachinko machine 10 simply by unlocking and rotating the inner frame 12 without performing the complicated work such as removing the protective cover member 140. . Moreover, when performing the setting change operation, it can be performed while visually recognizing the base display device 401, and the setting change operation can be easily performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 that covers the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 is configured to prevent the setting key 501 from being exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, when the locking of the inner frame 12 is unlocked and the setting change operation is performed, the back surface side of the inner frame 12 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with the protective cover member 140 remaining on the outer frame 11 Configured to

  With such a configuration, in a situation where the inner frame 12 is closed to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 is operated directly from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with a simple configuration by the protective cover member 140. In addition, it is possible to prevent unauthorized operation such as the setting key 501 being tampered with. In addition, since the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved without using a casing structure such as a slot machine, the increase in the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 due to the use of the casing structure and the like is suppressed. be able to.

  When the inner frame 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 installed on the back surface of the inner frame 12 is pachinko as the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 rotate. It is exposed on the front side of the machine 10 and can be operated immediately by the person in charge of the hall. Therefore, the person in charge of the hole can perform the setting change work of the pachinko machine 10 without performing the complicated work such as removing the protective cover member 140. Moreover, when performing the setting change operation, it can be performed while visually recognizing the base display device 401, and the setting change operation can be easily performed.

  In addition, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the cover side projection 172 is configured to enter the space formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case side projection 100g, and When the side projection 100g abuts on the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140, the cover side projection 172 abuts on the bottom surface 100f of the setting portion 100d. With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the portion where the setting key 501 is disposed is sealed by the key cover portion 173 of the protective cover member 140 and the case-side projection 100g of the setting portion 100d. By making the access to the setting unit 100d difficult by the side projection 172, the security of the setting key 501 is enhanced, and there is no room for a wire or the like to enter, so it is possible to prevent an unfair action on the setting key 501.

  Further, the case-side protrusion 100g of the main controller 110 and the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140, and the setting portion bottom face 100f of the main controller 110 and the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 respectively abut. Since the inner frame 12 can not be locked to the outer frame 11 if the setting change key is still inserted into the setting key 501 because the configuration is made, the setting by the person in charge of the hall It is possible to prevent the recovery of the key for change.

  Further, in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner wall of the right side plate 11d abuts on the curved portion 154, and a gap does not occur between the right side plate 11d and the protective cover member 140. It becomes a state. Thus, in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the fixing screw 11g encased in the upper mounting hole 152 and the cover upper mounting hole 11e from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower mounting By making it impossible to directly operate the fixing screw 11g encased in the hole 153 and the cover lower mounting hole 11f, the protective cover member 140 can not be detached from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 Can.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is installed adjacent to a card sand device on the island facility, and is usually configured such that no gap is generated between the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11 and the card sand device. . Therefore, the protection cover member 140 can not be attached or detached from the side of the pachinko machine 10 by configuring so that the fixing screw 11g can not be directly operated from the right side of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, the curved portion 154 is formed in a thin plate shape, and is configured to be elastically deformable based on the elastic force of the resin material that constitutes the entire protective cover member 140. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the protective cover member 140, the protective cover member 140 is slightly bent in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10 by the curved portion 154. With such a configuration, for example, even when the main control device 110 contacts the protective cover member 140 and the impact is applied by the momentum at the time of closing the inner frame 12, the bending portion 154 is elastic. By bending by force and absorbing the impact, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being damaged.

  Furthermore, when the cheating by the wire is performed from the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, for example, by the upper outer cover portion 162b, the lower outer cover portion 163b, and the cover outer rib 174, the wire rises up the cover wall 161 or the cover plate 171. When the wire is transmitted upward or downward from the outside, the wire collides with the upper outer cover portion 162b, the lower outer cover portion 163b, or the cover outer rib 174 to prevent the wire from entering.

  Further, the area of the lower inner cover portion 163a is formed wide, and the lower inner cover portion 163a allows the main controller 110 and the protective cover member 140 in the lower right side (the lower left side in back view) of the main controller 110 to be viewed from the front. The gap is configured to be as small as possible. With such a configuration, the lower right side (lower side left side) of the main controller 110 is covered, and the lower right side of the main controller 110 provided with the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c (back side view) Cheating from the lower left) can be prevented.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the ninth embodiment provides the above-described effects. Further, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to eighth embodiments can achieve the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Tenth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78, a pachinko machine 10 according to a tenth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the sixth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door open switch 208g for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 (in the tenth embodiment, the inner frame The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 has been determined in accordance with the state of replacing the open switch 208g1).

  That is, when the power is turned on, the detection mode of the setting key 501 and the RAM erase switch 122 is detected, and the detection mode of the door open switch 208g is detected, and the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is detected according to the detection result. It was configured to be changed.

  However, when the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined based on the detection result of the door opening switch 208g, if the door opening switch 208g can not detect ON (that is, the opening of the inner frame 12) due to a failure etc. It becomes impossible to start the startup mode (that is, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode) set based on the detection of the release switch 208g. Therefore, due to the erroneous detection of the door opening switch 208g, the setting change etc. which are important gaming elements of the pachinko machine 10 can not be performed, and there is a possibility that the sales form assumed by the hall can not be executed.

  Further, in the start-up process at power-on, a process for detecting the door open switch 208g is required, and the control required at power-on becomes complicated, and the processing load on the main control device 110 increases. There is a fear.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while adopting the protective cover member 140 in the ninth embodiment, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 which is the door opening switch 208g. Regardless of the detection result, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the two detection states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501.

  By this configuration, while the inner cover 12 is opened, the protective cover member 140 prevents the tampering with the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed. Regardless of the reliability, setting changes and the like that are important gaming elements of the pachinko machine 10 can be performed. Therefore, after the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 is improved, the sales form assumed by the hole can be reliably executed.

  In addition, since the process for detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 becomes unnecessary in the start-up process at the time of power supply start-up, the process for the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 is reduced. Can.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to ninth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to ninth embodiments. The illustration and the explanation are omitted.

  First, referring to FIG. 76, start-up modes of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 76 shows the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, and the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in order to start up in each start-up mode. It is the figure which showed each information of and.

  Like the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment includes four modes: a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode. ing. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value.

  The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting check mode, and information on occurrence of power-off is not stored in the RAM 203 or data stored in the RAM 203 is broken. , And holds the data stored in the RAM 203, and executes various start-up processes to restart the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power is turned off.

  Then, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 and with the setting key 501 in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. Also, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 while the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode.

  On the other hand, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 while the setting key 501 is turned on, the detection result of the door open switch 208 does not matter (that is, even if it is on detection) The pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode even if the detection is off). When the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off, the detection result of the inner frame open switch 208g1 does not matter (that is, even if it is on detection) The pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode even if the detection is off).

  As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned off regardless of whether or not the inner frame 12 is unlocked, the person concerned with the hall, etc., can use the RAM erase switch. Depending on whether or not 122 is turned on, it is possible to select as the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, the RAM clear mode which is the start-up mode not related to the probability setting value or the normal mode.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, if the setting key 501 is turned on regardless of whether the inner frame 12 is unlocked or not, the person concerned with the hall, etc. can remove the RAM erase switch 122 Depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to select either the setting change mode related to the probability setting value or the setting confirmation mode as the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or turned on, it relates to the start-up mode unrelated to the probability setting value and the probability setting value. You can select one of the startup modes. When the start-up mode not related to the probability setting value is selected, whether to set the start-up mode to the RAM clear mode or the normal mode can be selected according to whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the start-up mode related to the probability setting value, it is possible to select either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

  Here, since the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is configured to be able to change the setting or confirm the setting regardless of the opening of the inner frame 12, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed. Although there is a concern that an unauthorized operation to the setting key 501 may cause an illegal operation, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment employs the protective cover member 140 of the ninth embodiment. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 can not directly contact the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act at the time of closing the inner frame 12 while making it possible to change the setting without performing processing such as detecting the opening of the inner frame 12.

  In other words, by providing the protective cover member 140, when the setting key 501 is operated, it means that the inner frame 12 is opened. Therefore, even if the detection of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not performed in the process, it can be recognized that the inner frame 12 is open.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 77, an inner frame open switch 208g1 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 of the tenth embodiment. The inner frame opening switch 208g1 is for detecting whether or not the inner frame 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and a projecting piece (not shown) which protrudes to the upper back surface side of the inner frame 12 And an elastic body (not shown) that applies an elastic force such as a spring to the projecting piece, and a detection sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the projecting piece. When the inner frame 12 is closed, the projecting piece of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is pressed against the upper portion of the outer frame 11, and is embedded in the inner frame 12 because the force by the cylinder lock 20 is stronger than the elastic force of the elastic body. On the other hand, when the special key is inserted into the cylinder lock 20 and turned in the first direction (for example, clockwise), the inner frame 12 is released from the outer frame 11 and the elastic force of the elastic body is released when the inner frame 12 is opened. The projection piece is configured to be protruded to the outer frame 11 side by this. When the protrusion of the projecting piece is detected by the detection sensor, it is determined that the inner frame open switch 208g1 is on, and an inner frame open signal is output.

  The detection result of the inner frame open switch 208g1 (that is, the presence or absence of the inner frame open signal) is input to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via the input / output port 205. In this case, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not determined to be on and does not output an inner frame open signal to the MPU 201. On the other hand, when the inner frame 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is turned on, and outputs an inner frame open signal to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 specifies that the inner frame 12 is in the open state when the inner frame open signal is input from the inner frame open switch 208g1, and the inner frame 12 is closed when the inner frame open signal is not input. Identify the condition.

  Next, referring to FIG. 78, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on.

  In the start-up process of the tenth embodiment, first, an initial value setting process associated with power on is executed (S4401). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer.

  Next, internal function register setting processing is executed (S4402). In the tenth embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the base display control process (see FIG. 57) for controlling the display content to be displayed on the base display device 401 is triggered by a 2 millisecond timer interrupt generated every 2 milliseconds. Run. In the processing of S4402, for example, the 2 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In addition, when random number values necessary for performing a big hit lottery or a win lottery are generated by a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in main controller 110, the range of random number values to be generated in the process of S4402. Set the maximum value). Also, in the process of S4402, access to the RAM 203 is permitted. Further, in the processing of S4402, the main control device 110 performs various settings for transmitting and receiving signals by serial communication with the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113.

  In particular, by permitting the 2 millisecond timer interrupt in this internal function register setting process, the 2 millisecond timer interrupt is generated every 2 milliseconds and the base display control process is executed. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

  In the process of S4402, it is not necessary to set the range (maximum value) of random numbers. In the process of S4402, when setting of the range (maximum value) of the random number is not performed, in (S4421) of the other start-up process described later executed at the stage of transition from the start-up process to the main process, The setting of the range (maximum value) of the random value not performed in the process of S4402 may be performed.

  Next, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S4403). As a result, if the power failure occurrence information is stored (S4403: Yes), this means that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown has ended normally, so the RAM decision value is then calculated and calculated. It is determined whether the determined RAM determination value is normal, that is, whether the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off (S4404). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. In the tenth embodiment, the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is excluded from the calculation of the checksum value, but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the checksum value.

  If it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at the time of power interruption (S4404: Yes), the RAM determination value is normal and at least for calculation of the RAM determination value. Since it can be determined that the data (information) present is normally held, it is then determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4405). Here, to determine whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range, the processing related to the power-off was normally performed when the power was turned off last time, but the probability setting value is at that stage. It is because it may be broken and out of the normal range. The process of S4405 is performed to reliably detect such an abnormality of the probability setting value.

  Then, if the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4405: Yes), it is then determined whether the setting change in progress flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is on (S4406). If the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is on (S4406: Yes), the setting change process is being executed when the power is turned off last time, that is, the power supply is updated while the probability setting value is being updated by the setting change process. Indicates that was cut off. Therefore, in this case, the process shifts to the processing of S4413 and the setting change processing is executed (S4413).

  As a result, the start-up mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is not only the start-up operation for starting up the setting change mode but also other start-up operations. Even in the case of the operation, it is possible to set a setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed from the beginning. Therefore, when the power is turned off during the setting change, when the power is turned on after that, it is possible to make the person concerned with holes etc. change the probability setting value from scratch. Therefore, it is possible to make a person in charge of hall or the like reliably change the probability setting value and fix the change. Therefore, even when the power is turned off during the setting change, the person in charge of the hall can surely update and confirm the probability setting value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be relieved. A change in probability settings for 10 can be made.

  Also, by re-doing the setting change process from the beginning (from scratch), it is possible to continue updating from the probability setting value during updating at the time the power is turned off during the setting change, and not to restart the updating of the probability setting value. It is possible to redo the updating of the probability setting value from the beginning using the probability setting value (probability setting value data 203x11) used in the previous games. Therefore, the person in charge of the hall can reassertly update the probability setting author.

  On the other hand, if the setting change in progress flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off as a result of the process of S4406 (S4406: No), it means that the setting change process was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. Therefore, it is then determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on as processing for confirming the start-up operation performed when the hall personnel etc. turn on the power to the pachinko machine 10 (S4407). In the process of S4407, since the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted and the timer interrupt process is not executed, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read in the switch state read process of the timer interrupt process. Instead of making a decision using an object, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input / output port 205.

  As a result of the process of S4407, if the RAM erase switch 122 is off (S4407: No), it is then determined whether the setting key 501 is in the on state to further check the start-up operation ( S4408). In the tenth embodiment, the detection of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not performed in S4408. Therefore, since the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not necessary in the process of turning on the power supply, the process for the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. .

  As a result of the processing of S4408, when the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4408: N0), since the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the off state, the person in charge of the hall starts in the normal mode. It means having operated. Then, it is determined whether the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is on (S4409). As a result, when the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on (S4409: Yes), the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time, that is, the confirmation of the probability setting value by the setting confirmation process Indicates that the power was turned off. In this case, as shown in FIG. 62, the setting confirmation process is executed from the head (S4410). By the setting confirmation process, the probability setting value currently set is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability setting value can be confirmed.

  As described above, even when the person in charge of the hall performs the start-up operation for starting in the normal mode as the start-up operation, the setting confirmation process is started from the head instead of starting the pachinko machine 10 in the normal mode ( Start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode to execute again from scratch. As a result, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed even if a person in charge of hall or the like starts up by the operation in the normal mode. As a result, the person in charge of the hall can confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being turned off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be launched with confidence.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is off as a result of the process of S4409 (S4409: No), the setting confirmation process is not being executed when the power is turned off last time. It means that Also, the process of S4409 is executed when it is determined that the setting changing flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off in the process of S4406 (S4406: No), that is, when the power is turned off last time. Even if the setting change process is not in progress.

  Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode is set to the normal mode indicated by a person in charge of hall or the like by the start-up operation, the setting confirmation process of S4410 and the process of S4411 described later are skipped and other start-up processes are performed. After (S4414), the process proceeds to the main processing. As another start-up process, 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In the tenth embodiment, similarly to the eighth embodiment, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58) for performing main control of the game is executed triggered by a 4 millisecond timer interrupt generated every 4 milliseconds. By permitting the 4 millisecond timer interrupt in the process of S4414, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 milliseconds.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the on state as a result of the process of S4408 (S4408: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the on state. Means that the start-up operation has been performed in the setting confirmation mode. Here, the process of S4408 is executed when it is determined that the setting changing flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off in the process of S4406 (S4406: No), that is, the previous time the power was turned off. When the setting change process is not in progress. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, the pachinko machine 10 is operated in the setting confirmation mode in which the hall personnel etc. started and operated. In order to start up, the process proceeds to the process of S4410, and the setting confirmation process is executed (S4410). By the setting confirmation process, the probability setting value currently set is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability setting value can be confirmed.

  When the setting confirmation process (S4410) is ended, the external output process is executed (S4411). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed or that the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. As a result, the person concerned with holes can grasp that the setting confirmation process is executed by the pachinko machine 10 and the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, when the probability setting value is displayed illegally, it can be grasped quickly. After the external output process is executed, the other start-up process is executed (S 4421), and the process shifts to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the process of S4407, which is a process for confirming the start-up operation performed when the hall official etc. powers on the pachinko machine 10 S4407: Yes) In order to further confirm the start-up operation, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is in the on state (S4412). In the tenth embodiment, the detection of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not performed in this S4412. Therefore, since the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not necessary in the process of turning on the power supply, the process for the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. .

  When the setting key 501 is in the on state as a result of the process of S4412 (S4412: Yes), the person in charge of the hall stands in the setting change mode because the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is in the on state. It means that the operation was raised. When the start-up operation is performed in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 62, the setting confirmation process is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is turned on, that is, when the power is turned off last time. The startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set as the setting change mode regardless of whether or not it is being executed.

  Therefore, when the setting key 501 is in the on state as a result of the process of S4412 (S4412: Yes), the setting change process is executed (S4413). When the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 by the setting change processing, and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by a person in charge of the hall, etc., the probability setting value is updated and the setting key 501 is turned off. The updated probability setting value is determined as the probability setting value to be used for the future game, and the RAM clear process is performed. Thus, after changing the probability setting value, the gaming machine can be newly started with the probability setting value after the change.

  Here, even if the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the person concerned with the hall is that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Etc clearly show the intention to change the probability setting value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the intention of the person concerned with holes and the like.

  When the setting change process (S4413) is ended, the external output process is executed (S4414). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting change process has been performed or that the probability setting value has been changed is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. As a result, it is possible for the person in charge of hall and the like to grasp that the setting change processing is executed in the pachinko machine 10 and the probability setting value is changed. Therefore, when the probability setting value is illegally changed, it can be grasped quickly. After the external output process is executed, the other start-up process is executed (S 4421), and the process shifts to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the processing of S4412 (S4412: No), then it is determined whether the RAM is abnormal by referring to whether or not the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is on. It is determined whether or not it is (S4415). Here, the process of S4407 determines that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4407: Yes), the process of S4412 determines that the setting key 501 is off (S4412: No), and the process of S4415 If it is executed, since the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is always off, it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal in the process of S4415 (S4415: No).

  Further, in this case, since it is determined that the setting change in progress flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off in the process of S4406 (S4406: No), the setting change process is being executed when the power is turned off last time. It is not the case. Therefore, the process of S4407 determines that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4407: Yes), the process of S4412 determines that the setting key 501 is off (S4412: No), and the process of S4415 determines that the RAM is abnormal. If it is not determined (S4415: No), it means that the person concerned with the hall has started up in the RAM clear mode, and the setting change process was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time. Therefore, the RAM clear process is executed (S4416).

  In this RAM clear process, among the data stored in the RAM 203, predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 (see FIG. 61) stored in the data used for controlling the game (the internal work area 203x1 (see FIG. 61)) While deleting (clearing) the data), the character ratio data 203s stored in the outside work area 203y1 (see FIG. 53), the base value data 203r, and the error data 203t (both FIG. 53) Hold without erasing. A game can be newly started by deleting data (predetermined data except probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the internal work area 203x1) used for control of the game. Further, since the probability setting value data 203x11 is held even if the RAM clear processing is executed, the game can be continued with the probability setting value decided before the RAM clear processing is executed.

  Here, as described above, even if the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time, there is no abnormality in the RAM, and the start operation for starting in the RAM clear mode is performed. In the case of the hall operator, the pachinko machine 10 is launched in the RAM clear mode as the startup operation of the hall personnel. The fact that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on indicates that Hall personnel or the like at least clearly want to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the person concerned with the hall and the like.

  When the RAM clear process of S4416 is completed, the other start-up process is executed (S4421), and the process shifts to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 by the process of S4403 (S4403: No), the RAM determination value calculated by the process of S4404 is the RAM determination value stored at the time of the power-off. If they do not match, it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal (S4404: No), or if it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range by the process of S4405 (S4405: No) If any of them is applicable, it can be determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203, so the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is turned on (S4417), and on that, to confirm the start-up operation of the person concerned with halls etc. It is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4418). Also in the process of S4418, as in the process of S4407, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input / output port 205.

  If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on as a result of the process of S4418 (S4418: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described process of S4412, and further, whether or not the setting key 501 is on. It judges (S4412). As a result, when the setting key 501 is in the on state (S4412: Yes), it means that the person concerned with the hall, etc. has started up in the setting change mode. Then, in this case (S4412: Yes), in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in accordance with the start-up operation of a person in charge of hall or the like, the process proceeds to S4413 and the above-mentioned setting change processing is executed.

  Here, even if the RAM abnormality occurs, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the RAM can be cleared after setting the probability setting value again. Therefore, the game can be newly started with the newly set normal probability setting value. Note that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is turned off by this RAM clear. Therefore, after that, the main control device 110 can control the game without executing the processing related to the RAM abnormality.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off as a result of the processing of S4418 (S4418: No), or if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on as a result of the processing of S4418, S4412 If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4418: Yes or S4412: No) as a result of the process, Hall related persons etc. are in the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, the setting among the RAM abnormalities. It means that the start-up operation was performed in any start-up mode in the confirmation mode.

  In this case, the process proceeds to S4415 described above, and it is determined that the RAM is determined to be abnormal in S4415 (S4415: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4419. In the process of S4419, a RAM abnormality setting process is performed (S4419). In the RAM abnormality setting process, a process for notifying of the RAM abnormality is executed. For example, an audio lamp is provided to notify that the power is turned off once and the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode by audio output from the audio output device 226 and / or display on the third symbol display device 81. The command is transmitted to the control device 113.

  Then, the external output processing for notifying the hall computer 600 of the RAM abnormality through the external output terminal 503 is executed (S4420), and the other start-up processing is executed (S4421) to shift to the main processing. Do. Since the hall computer 600 is notified that the RAM is abnormal, a person concerned with a hall or the like can surely grasp that the RAM abnormality has occurred even if the notification from the pachinko machine 10 is not noticed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while adopting the protective cover member 140 in the ninth embodiment, the inside which is the door opening switch 208g Regardless of the detection result of the frame opening switch 208g1, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the two detection states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501. By this configuration, while the inner cover 12 is opened, the protective cover member 140 prevents the tampering with the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed. Regardless of the reliability, setting changes and the like that are important gaming elements of the pachinko machine 10 can be performed. Therefore, after the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 is improved, the sales form assumed by the hole can be reliably executed.

  In addition, since the process for detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 becomes unnecessary in the start-up process at the time of power supply start-up, the process for the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 is reduced. Can.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the tenth embodiment provides the above-described effects. Further, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to ninth embodiments can achieve the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Eleventh Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 79 to FIG. 81, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eleventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the tenth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is selected according to the state of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1. The launch mode was determined.

  On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, when the front frame opening switch 208g2 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14 is provided and the inner frame opening switch 208g1 detects the opening of the inner frame 12 (that is, on detection), In addition, when the front frame open switch 208g2 detects the closing of the front frame 14 (that is, the OFF detection), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is activated. On the other hand, when the inner frame open switch 208g1 detects closing of the inner frame 12 (that is, detects OFF), or when the inner frame open switch 208g1 detects open of the inner frame 12, the front surface When the frame opening switch 208g2 detects the opening of the front frame 14 (that is, detects the on state), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not started up, and the normal mode is started up.

  In the prior art, when it is easily shifted to a state where setting change or setting confirmation of the pachinko machine 10 can be performed, since there is no room for unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation, it is not possible to remove the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode as much as possible. It is desirable to apply multistep security measures to the pachinko machine 10 so as not to shift.

  On the other hand, when a person in charge of a hole or the like performs maintenance work on the pachinko machine 10, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are released from the outer frame 11, and the maintenance work is performed on the hole having the authority of setting change and setting confirmation. It is generally performed by an employee of a hall who is not the person in charge and who does not have the authority to change settings or confirm settings.

  At this point, if maintenance operations by employees in halls who do not have the authority to change settings or to confirm settings can enter into the setting change mode or the settings confirmation mode, the employees may pass through inside with an outside fraudulent person The information on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 may be leaked to the above-mentioned fraudulent person.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, at the time of maintenance work in which both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, the configuration change or the like can be performed by configuring so that setting change or setting confirmation can not be performed. By making it difficult for no employee to make setting changes and the like, the security performance for the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to tenth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to tenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to tenth embodiments. The illustration and the explanation are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 79, start-up modes when the power of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 79 shows the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, and the RAM erase switch 122 at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 10 for starting-up in the start-up mode with respect to each start-up mode. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing information on each of an inner frame open switch 208g1 and a front frame open switch 208g2.

  In the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, four modes of a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode are prepared as in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment ing. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value.

  The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting check mode, and information on occurrence of power-off is not stored in the RAM 203 or data stored in the RAM 203 is broken. , And holds the data stored in the RAM 203, and executes various start-up processes to restart the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power is turned off.

  Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 and with the setting key 501 in the off state, the detection mode of the inner frame open switch 208g1 and the front frame open switch 208g2 is Regardless, the pachinko machine 10 stands up in the normal mode. If the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 while the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 is detected regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame open switch 208g1 and the front frame open switch 208g2. Starts up in RAM clear mode.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, even when the setting key 501 is turned on, the normal mode may also be set based on the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 or the front frame opening switch 208g2. is there.

  Specifically, even when the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 are both on when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not on or the front frame open switch 208g2 is off. If the front frame open switch 208g2 is turned on even if the inner frame open switch 208g1 is turned off or the inner frame open switch 208g1 is turned on, the normal mode starts up, not the setting change mode. Is configured as.

  Also, even when the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not on, or the front frame open switch 208g2 is If the front frame open switch 208g2 is on even if the inner frame open switch 208g1 is off or the inner frame open switch 208g1 is on unless the switch is off, the normal mode is not set confirmation mode. Is configured to stand up.

  Conventionally, when a person in charge of a hall or the like performs maintenance work for the pachinko machine 10, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened from the outer frame 11, and the person in charge of setting change or setting confirmation is not. It is common for employees in halls who do not have the authority to confirm settings. That is, during maintenance work of the pachinko machine 10, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned on.

  At this point, if maintenance operations by employees in halls who do not have the authority to change settings or to confirm settings can enter into the setting change mode or the settings confirmation mode, the employees may pass through inside with an outside fraudulent person The information on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 may be leaked to the above-mentioned fraudulent person.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, at the time of maintenance work in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both open, that is, when the inner frame open switch 208g1 and the front frame open switch 208g2 are both on. , Configuration change or setting confirmation can not be performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to improve the security performance with respect to the pachinko machine 10 by configuring it so that it is difficult for an employee who does not have the authority to change settings to perform setting change or setting confirmation.

  Next, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is turned on and the front frame open switch 208g2 is turned off. The pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode on condition that there is a certain condition. When the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is off, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off. The pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode on the condition that

  As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the person in charge of the hall or the like changes the setting key 501 to the off state and then turns on the RAM erase switch 122 according to whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select either the RAM clear mode or the normal mode, which is a start-up mode not related to the probability setting value.

  On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned on on the condition that only the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on, the person concerned with holes, etc. Depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to select either the setting change mode related to the probability setting value or the setting confirmation mode as the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, first, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, it is possible to select the startup mode not related to the probability setting value and the startup mode related to the probability setting value. When the start-up mode not related to the probability setting value is selected, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame open switch 208g1 and the front frame open switch 208g2. While it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode, the RAM is selected on the condition that only the inner frame open switch 208g1 is on when the start-up mode related to the probability setting value is set. Depending on whether or not the erase switch 122 is turned on, it is possible to select whether to set the startup mode to the setting change mode or to the setting confirmation mode.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in addition to the inner frame opening switch 208g1, a front frame opening switch 208g2 is connected as the door opening switch 208g to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 of the eleventh embodiment. The front frame opening switch 208g2 is for detecting whether or not the front frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 12, and a front projecting piece (not shown) that protrudes to the upper rear side of the front frame 14 And a front elastic body (not shown) that applies an elastic force such as a spring to the front projecting piece, and a front detection sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the front projecting piece. When the front frame 14 is closed, the front projecting piece of the front frame open switch 208g2 is pressed against the upper portion of the inner frame 12 and is pushed into the front frame 14 because the force by the cylinder lock 20 is stronger than the elastic force of the front elastic body On the other hand, when the special key is inserted into the cylinder lock 20 and turned in a second direction (for example, counterclockwise) different from the first direction, the front frame 14 is released from the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 At the time of opening, the front projection piece projects toward the inner frame 12 by the elastic force of the front elastic body. Then, when the protrusion of the front protrusion is detected by the front detection sensor, it is determined that the front frame open switch 208g2 is on, and a front frame open signal is output.

  The detection result of the front frame open switch 208g2 (that is, the presence or absence of the front frame open signal) is input to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via the input / output port 205. In this case, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the front frame open switch 208g2 is not determined to be on and does not output a front frame open signal to the MPU 201. On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 12, the front frame open switch 208g2 is turned on, and outputs a front frame open signal to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 specifies that the front frame 14 is in the open state when the front frame open signal is input from the front frame open switch 208 g 2, and the front frame 14 is closed when the front frame open signal is not input. Identify the condition.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. The start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on.

  The start-up process of the eleventh embodiment differs from the start-up process of the tenth embodiment in that when the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is On the condition that it is on and that the front frame open switch 208g2 is off, the setting confirmation process (S4410) is executed, the RAM erase switch 122 is on, and the setting key 501 is on. In some cases, the setting change process (S4413) is executed on the condition that the inner frame open switch 208g1 is on and the front frame open switch 208g2 is off, and the inner frame open switch 208g1 and In the confirmation process of the front frame open switch 208g2, if the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not on, or Even if the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on, if the front frame opening switch 208g2 is not off (that is, if it is on), the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode is not started, and starting in the normal mode is there.

  In the start-up process of the eleventh embodiment, it is determined that the setting key 501 is not on in the determination of the setting key 501 in S4408 (S4408: No) and the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on. If it is determined that the power is not on (SS4409: No), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 both off, so the process shifts to S4421 to start up in the normal mode. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S4408, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4408: Yes), or even if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off (S4408: No) ) If it is determined that the flag 203x14 is in the setting confirmation (S4409: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set with the setting key 501 turned on. Since it has been turned on, the process proceeds to S4451 in order to confirm whether or not the setting confirmation process (S4410) can be performed, ie, whether it is not a maintenance operation time or not.

  In the process of S4451, it is determined whether the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4451). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4451: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the open state, then the front frame opening switch 208g2 It is determined whether it is off (S4452). If it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off as a result of the determination (S4452: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the person in charge Accordingly, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is considered to be turned on, the process proceeds to S4410, and the setting confirmation process (S4410) is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4451 that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not turned on (S4451: No), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, the outer frame 11 is checked. Since the inner frame 12 is closed and there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the setting confirmation process (S4410) is not executed, and the process is shifted to S4421, Launch in mode.

  When it is determined in the process of S4452 that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is not turned off (S4452: No), that is, it is determined that the inner frame 12 is open and the front frame 14 is open. In this case, the probability of the maintenance operation of the pachinko machine 10 is high, so the setting confirmation process (S4410) is not performed, and the process proceeds to S4421 and is started in the normal mode.

  Next, in the process of S4406, if it is determined that the setting change in progress flag 203x13 is on (S4406: Yes), or if it is determined that the setting key 501 is on in the process of S4412, the RAM erase switch 122 is on. Since the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the setting key 501 in the on state and the setting key 501 in the on state, whether or not the setting change process (S4413) can be executed, ie, it is not a maintenance operation time or not The processing moves to S4453 in order to confirm whether or not.

  In the process of S4453, as in the process of S4451, it is determined whether the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4453). If it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4453: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the open state, then the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned on. It is determined whether it is off (S4454). If it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off as a result of the determination (S4454: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the person in charge Accordingly, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is considered to be turned on, and the process proceeds to S4413 to execute setting change processing (S4413).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4453 that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not turned on (S4453: No), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, the outer frame 11 is checked. Since the inner frame 12 is closed and there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the process is shifted to S4421 without executing the setting change process (S4413). Launch in mode.

  When it is determined in the process of S4454 that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is not turned off (S4454: No), that is, it is determined that the inner frame 12 is open and the front frame 14 is open. In the case where the pachinko machine 10 is to be maintained, the setting change process (S4413) is not executed, and the process proceeds to S4421 and is started in the normal mode.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, only the inner frame 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, that is, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on and the front frame In the situation where the opening switch 208g2 is turned off, the setting change or the setting confirmation operation can be performed, while the maintenance operation in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both open, ie, the inner frame opening switch When both 208 g 1 and the front frame opening switch 208 g 2 are on, the setting change or the setting confirmation can not be performed. Therefore, at the time of maintenance work in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both open, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not started but is started in the normal mode. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to improve the security performance with respect to the pachinko machine 10 by configuring it so that it is difficult for an employee who does not have the authority to change settings to perform setting change or setting confirmation.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the eleventh embodiment can obtain the above-described effects. Further, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to tenth embodiments can achieve the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Twelfth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twelfth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110 are covered by the protective cover member 140 attached to the outer frame 11. The setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c can not be operated directly.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is extended on the left side in the front view (that is, on the right side in back view) to the part covering the connector attaching portion 100h of the main controller 110 It is extended and formed in the front view lower side to the site | part which covers the sealing part 111a of the control apparatus 111. As shown in FIG. That is, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, the connector attachment portion 100h of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111 are covered by the protective cover member 140. .

  With such a configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, a connector used for communication of control signals to each control device 111, 113, etc. in addition to the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 and the sealing unit 100c. It is possible to prevent direct operation from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the part related to the game specification, such as the fitting portion 100h, the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111 that manages payout balls and prize balls. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to eleventh embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the same configuration and process as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to eleventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to eleventh embodiments. The illustration and the explanation are omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, the configuration of the protective cover member 140 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 82 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment. In FIG. 82, the front frame 14 is removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are removed from the outer frame 11 in FIG. Are shown and their explanations are also omitted.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment in that the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 includes the connector attachment portion 100h of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. The point that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with the sealing portion 111a, and the rising cover wall 161 and the rising lower cover portion 163 of the protective cover member 140 are the right side of the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111 And the positions of the cover lower mounting hole 11f of the right side plate 11d and the lower mounting hole 153 of the cover mounting portion 150 are slightly lower than the ninth embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the standing cover wall 161 of the protective cover member 140 of the twelfth embodiment is continuously pachinko from the curved portion 154 of the cover attachment portion 150 which is formed to be longer downward than the ninth embodiment. It is formed extending toward the rear side of the machine 10 (see FIG. 83). The upright cover wall 161 covers the right side surface (left side surface) of the main controller 110 in a front view and the right side surface (left side surface in a rear surface) of the payout control device 111 in front view. Therefore, directly from the front view right side (back side view left side) of the pachinko machine 10 provided with the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 and the sealing unit 100c and the sealing unit 111a of the payout control device 111. Since it can not contact the said site | part, the fraudulent act from the front view right side of the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented.

  The upright lower cover (not shown) of the twelfth embodiment is composed of a lower inner cover (not shown) and a lower outer cover (not shown). The lower inner cover portion is horizontal from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 and the entire lower portion of the cover plate 171 toward the inner side of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 are disposed). It is formed extending in the direction. Further, the lower outer cover portion is horizontally extended from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 toward the outer side of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are not disposed) There is.

  The lower inner cover portion (not shown) is formed to have a larger area than the upper inner cover portion (not shown) as in the ninth embodiment. This is because the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111, in particular, the disposition position of the payout control unit 111 is closer to the lower side of the pachinko machine 10, the main control from the lower side of the pachinko machine 10 Since it is easy to access the device 110 or the payout control device 111, a person who cheats the main control device 110 or the payout control device 111 often infiltrates a wire or the like from the lower side of the back of the pachinko machine 10 Cheat. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent action, the area of the lower inner cover portion is formed wide, and the lower inner cover portion 163a enables the payout control in the lower right side (the lower left side in the back view) The gap between the device 111 and the protective cover member 140 is configured to be as small as possible.

  Thus, by forming the lower inner cover portion (not shown), the main control unit 110 and the payout control device 111, in particular, the lower portion in the front view right side (the lower portion in the rear view) are covered. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from the bottom right side (bottom left side in back view) of the payout control device 111 provided with the sealing unit 111a, or the main control device 110 provided with the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c. .

  Next, the cover plate 171 according to the twelfth embodiment includes the rising portion 160 (the standing cover wall 161, the standing upper cover portion 162, the standing lower cover portion 163 and the standing inner rib 164 (see FIG. 68)). The plate surface is directed to the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and covers the setting portion 100d of the main control unit 110 and extends to a position covering the connector attachment portion 100h of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 82). Further, the surface of the cover plate 171 covers the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115. As described above, by covering the devices 501, 100c, 122, and 111a that may affect the game specifications with the protective cover member 140, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. The cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is formed so as not to cover the base display device 401 and the error display button 502. Note that since the cover plate 171 is transparent, the visibility of the back surface and the like does not decrease, so the base display device 401 and / or the error display button 502 may be covered from the viewpoint of the security of the main control device 110 as a whole. .

  A cover outer rib 174 formed on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 is formed to project from a portion corresponding to the setting key 501 or a portion corresponding to the RAM erase switch 122. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to form a hole or the like in the cover plate 171, and the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  The upper side projection (not shown) of the cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is formed in a rib shape in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower side projection of the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94 (shown) ) May be projected in the shape of a rib in the direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. Then, the lower side surface of the upper side projection and the upper side surface of the lower side projection are in contact with each other, whereby the upper side protrusion of the protective cover member 140 is protruded even in a state where the protective cover member 140 is attached to the outer frame 11 And the lower side projection of the back pack 92 do not interfere with each other, and the back pack 92 provided on the inner frame 12 can be closed, and the upper side surface of the lower side projection and the lower side surface of the upper side projection abut Thus, the gap between the back pack 92 and the protective cover member 140 can be eliminated, and the main controller 110 can not be contacted from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 using a wire or the like. Therefore, the fraud from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented. In addition, since the back pack 92 is attached to the inner frame 12 in the form of fixed beams fixed at one end and the other end of the back pack 92, the back pack 92 is attached to the outer frame 11 in a cantilevered manner. Even when an impact is applied to the protective cover member 140 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the rigidity of the protective cover member 140 is compensated by the back pack 92 attached to the inner frame 12 in the form of fixed beams at both ends. can do. Therefore, even when an impact or the like is given from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the protective cover member 140 can be prevented from being damaged.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is extended on the left side in front view (that is, the right side in back surface view) to the part covering the connector attachment portion 100 h of the main controller 110. At the same time, it extends downward in a front view to a portion covering the sealing portion 111 a of the payout control device 111. That is, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, the connector attachment portion 100h of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111 are covered by the protective cover member 140. . With such a configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, a connector used for communication of control signals to each control device 111, 113, etc. in addition to the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 and the sealing unit 100c. It is possible to prevent direct operation from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the part related to the game specification, such as the fitting portion 100h, the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111 that manages payout balls and prize balls. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration using one member.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, each embodiment adds the part or plural parts of the configuration which the other embodiments have to each other, or by replacing it with the part or plural parts of the configuration of the embodiment. The embodiment may be modified. Moreover, the numerical value mentioned by the said embodiment is an example, and it is naturally possible to employ | adopt another numerical value.

<Modification 1>
In the above embodiments, the case of calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, recording, and outputting to the inspection device 300 has been described, but instead of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or Information indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 10 in addition to the item ratio and the continuous character ratio, for example, the base value, the number of balls sucked into 100 balls thrown in (= 100-base value), the jackpot and The average number of outs or the like up to the point may be calculated, recorded, and output to the inspection apparatus 300.

<Modification 2>
In each of the above embodiments, the first reading memory 263 is provided with a counter to count the number of balls won for each winning opening, but the counter provided in the first reading memory 263 for each winning opening The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted. And, in the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the character ratio, the number of balls paid out by the prize for each winning opening counted by the first reading memory 263 is used to The object ratio and the continuous character ratio may be calculated and accumulated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. In the second embodiment, when it is time to calculate the character ratio, when it is time to calculate the character ratio, the winnings for each winning opening counted by the first reading memory 263 are obtained. The number of balls paid out may be accumulated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. In this case, when the number of balls winning in 0.5 seconds for each winning opening is stored in the buffer 262, the CPU 261 corresponds to the number of balls winning in each winning opening. The number of balls paid out by winning in the 0.5 seconds is calculated by multiplying the number of winning balls in the winning opening, and the calculated number of balls paid out is provided in the first reading memory 263. The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening by adding to the counter of the winning opening. In addition, when it is detected that there is a winning at one winning opening, the MPU 201 writes information indicating the winning opening at which the winning has occurred to the buffer 262, and in the CPU 261, the winning at the buffer 262 When the information indicating the mouth is written, the number of balls paid out by the winning of the winning opening is added to the counter of the corresponding winning opening obtained in the first reading memory 263, so that for each winning opening, The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted. Further, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls paid out by winning in the winning opening for every 0.5 seconds (or every predetermined time), and stores the number in the buffer 262. When the CPU 261 writes to the buffer 262, the number of balls paid out by the winning of the winning opening in 0.5 seconds is written in the buffer 262 for each winning opening, The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening by adding to the counter of the corresponding winning opening obtained in the reading memory 263. In addition, when it is detected that a prize has been won at one prize winning opening, the MPU 201 stores the number of balls paid out by the prize in an area corresponding to the prize opening in the buffer 262 where the prize was found. When the CPU 261 writes to the buffer 262, the counter 262 of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the winning opening in which the number of balls paid out is stored is paid out to the buffer 262. The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening by adding the number of balls. As described above, even if the number of balls paid out for winning is counted for each winning opening by the counter provided in the first reading memory 263, the payout for each winning opening counted is paid out. Since the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be calculated from the number of balls, it is possible to detect the fraudulent behavior by analyzing the calculated character ratio and the continuous character ratio. When the number of balls paid out by winning is stored in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201, the winning ball number table 202e may not be transmitted to the role ratio management chip 207, and the buffer 262 From the number of balls paid out by the winning of the winning opening stored in each of the winning opening, it is possible to calculate the bonus ratio and the continuous winning ratio. Further, the number of balls paid out by winning may be transmitted to the inspection device 300, which is counted for each winning opening, in order to calculate the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the inspection device 300. . In this case, even if the contents of the winning ball number table 202e are not transmitted to the inspection device 300 with respect to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can calculate the gate ratio and the continuous character ratio.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment described above, the character ratio data 264a and the continuous character ratio data 264b are recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. However, only the character ratio data 264a is recorded. The second reading memory 264 may be recorded and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300, or only the continuous character ratio data 264b may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. You may The inspection apparatus 300 can analyze the fraudulent activity by analyzing the character ratio or the continuous character ratio transmitted from the character ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 4>
Although the above embodiments have described the case where the first reading memory 263 is configured of a volatile memory, the first reading memory 263 is configured of a non-volatile memory (for example, a flash memory, FeRAM, MRAM, ReRAM, etc.) It may be done. Also, the backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the first reading memory 263 even while the power is off. In this case, the initialization of the first reading memory 263 may not be executed in the process of S711 (refer to FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 when power is supplied to the item ratio management chip 207. Thus, while the power is turned off, the counters 263a to 263f and the data 263g to 263j stored in the first reading memory 263 can be held. Therefore, when the power to the item ratio management chip 207 is turned off, the second reading memory 264 immediately before the power is turned off without executing the character ratio calculating process or the prize information storing process. The ratio of prizes etc. is calculated without leaking the winnings to each winning opening that was determined to be turned off from the timing (trigger) when the recording was performed, and the total number of winnings is the second reading It can be recorded to the memory 264. Therefore, in this case, the capacitor 267 may be unnecessary.

<Modification 5>
In each of the above embodiments, when the inspection apparatus 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the case where the inspection result output process is executed to output the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been described. In addition, information stored in the first reading memory 263 may also be output. Since the information stored in the first reading memory 263 has not yet reached the timing (trigger) to be recorded in the second reading memory 264, the part ratio and the consecutive part ratio recorded in the second reading memory 264 The information may not be used for the calculation, or may not be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Therefore, by transmitting the information stored in the first reading memory 263 to the inspection apparatus 300, the inspection apparatus 300 can be analyzed using the latest information.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the symbol ratio and the continuous symbol ratio calculated by the symbol ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. However, by transmitting the information stored in the first reading memory 263 to the inspection device 300 as well, although it is information of a short period, the feature ratio and continuous feature such as the total number of balls winning in each winning opening Raw information before calculating the ratio can be grasped by the inspection apparatus 300. Therefore, analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

  Note that, as a modification of the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated by the character ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300, the winning balls number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Thereby, the inspection apparatus 300 calculates the latest feature ratio and the continuous product ratio from the total number of balls obtained for each winning opening transmitted from the first reading memory 263 using the winning ball number table 202e. Can be analyzed. In addition, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated here were awarded to each winning opening in a short period before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated symbol ratio and continuous symbol ratio do not necessarily become accurate values, but can be used for analysis of the inspection device 300 as a reference value. .

  In addition, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the CPU 261 calculates the character ratio and the continuous character ratio based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, and the calculated character The ratio and the continuous character ratio may be output to the inspection apparatus 300 together with the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, the inspection apparatus 300 can easily analyze fraudulent behavior using the character ratio and the continuous character ratio output from the character ratio management chip 207. In this case, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be output to the inspection apparatus 300 as well. This enables the inspection apparatus 300 to perform deep analysis using the information related to the latest winning combination. Also in this case, the winning balls number table 202e may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Thereby, the inspection apparatus 300 can perform a deeper analysis while referring to the number-of-balls table 202e.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiments, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided with the volatile first reading memory 263 and the non-volatile second reading memory 264, and the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. The information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first reading memory 263 while being accumulated until the indicated timing (trigger) is reached, and in the case where the timing is reached, the first reading memory Based on the information stored in H.263, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or are accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 before the timing. The case where various information is recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the item ratio management chip 207, a non-volatile memory provided with at least a first reading area that plays the role of the first reading memory 263 and a second reading area that plays the role of the second reading memory 264. And temporarily accumulates the information set for the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202 f set in the trigger setting area 265 b is reached. And at the time of the timing, based on the information temporarily stored in the first reading area, calculate the feature ratio and the continuous feature ratio and record it in the second reading area, or Various information accumulated and stored in the first reading area before the timing may be recorded in the second reading area. Thereby, since the number of parts of the memory can be reduced, an increase in cost of the item ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

<Modification 7>
In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 201 counts, for each winning opening, the number of balls winning for each winning opening in 0.5 seconds, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path. The number of balls counted for each winning opening, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and information on the gaming state at that time are stored in the buffer 262 of the prize ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. In addition to being set, each time the setting is performed in the buffer 262, the number of balls that have won for each winning opening set in the buffer 262, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and the gaming state The case where information is accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 has been described. On the other hand, in the timer interruption process executed every two milliseconds in the MPU 201 based on the outputs of the various switches, the winning of the first starting port 64a was detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a. In this case, the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, and when the winning of the second start port 64b is detected by the output of the second start port switch 208b, the start 2 buffer 262b is turned on. When the winning of the first ordinary winning opening 63a is detected by the output, the first buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, If the normal 2 buffer 262d is turned on and the winning of the special winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the special winning opening switch 208e, the special winning opening buffer 262e is turned on. When the ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the out switch 208f, the out buffer 262f is turned on, and the corresponding jackpot buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h according to the playing state at that time. During the error, the buffer 262i may be turned on, and an interrupt signal may be sent to the feature ratio management chip 207. Then, in the item ratio management chip 207, in the setting information reception process executed in response to the interrupt signal, when the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, the start 1 counter 263a is counted up by 1 and the start 2 buffer 262b is started. If it is turned on, the start 2 counter 263b is incremented by one, and if the common buffer 26c is turned on, the common counter 263c is incremented by one, and if the common buffer 262d is turned on, the common counter 2 26b is turned on. The counter 263d is incremented by one, and when the large winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, the large winning opening counter 263e is incremented by one, and when the out buffer 262f is turned on, the out counter 263f is incremented by one. If the jackpot buffer 262g is on, the jackpot is The jackpot information is additionally stored in the data 263g along with the current time, and if the open buffer 262h is on, the open door information is added to the open data 263h along with the current time If the in-error buffer 262i is on, the in-error information is added to the in-error data 263i along with the time of that time and stored, and the time when the setting information reception process is executed is a midnight time zone In this case, the overtime information may be added to the overtime data 263 j along with the current time to be stored. Thus, the processing load of the MPU 201 is increased because it is not necessary to count the number of balls that have won in each winning opening in 0.5 seconds or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in the MPU 201. Can be suppressed. Therefore, much of the processing capability of the MPU 201 can be allocated to main control of the game to be originally performed by the MPU 201.

<Modification 8>
Also, in this case, the first start opening switch 208a, the second start opening switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the special winning opening switch 208e, the out switch 208f, the role ratio management It may be input directly to the chip 207. Then, in the item ratio management chip 207, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the special winning opening switch 208e, the out switch 208f Of each output, the first start opening 64a, the second start opening 64b, the first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, the presence or absence of winning to the special winning opening 65a, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path If there is a winning, the counter 263a to 264e of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the starting opening having the winning is incremented by 1 and the ball guided to the ball discharge path is In this case, the out counter 263 f may be configured to count up by one. As a result, when there is a winning on the winning opening or when the ball is guided to the ball discharging path, the situation can be immediately reflected on the feature ratio management chip 207. Further, the door opening switch 208g is directly input to the item ratio management chip 207, and based on the output of the door opening switch 208g, the presence or absence of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is judged by the item ratio management chip 207. If there is an opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, the door ratio is stored so as to be added to the open data 263h together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. The management chip 207 may be configured. Thus, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the situation can be immediately reflected on the feature ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 9>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the number-of-balls winning to each winning opening before the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b in the item ratio management chip 207 is It counts by each counter 263a-264e of the reading memory 263, and counts the number of balls discharged to the ball discharge path by the timing (trigger) by the out counter 263f of the first reading memory 263. In the first reading memory 263, the first buffer 262a, the first buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, and the special winning opening buffer 262e are set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. , Each value of out-buffer 262f (ie, the number of balls for each winning opening won within 0.5 seconds, and 0.5 seconds) The number of balls which are guided to the ball discharge passage) in between, together with the time at that indicated by RTC266, may be stored sequentially. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the symbol ratio and the continuous symbol ratio are calculated from the respective values stored in the first reading memory 263. It is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of balls that have won in each winning opening before that timing is calculated for each winning, and it is discharged to the ball discharge path before that timing. The total number of balls may be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also by this, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, it is judged whether there is a possibility that the illegal activity has been performed from the character ratio or the continuous character ratio in the inspection device 300. can do. And, in this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, each winning opening winning a prize for 0.5 seconds. The number of spheres per hour, and the number of spheres guided to the sphere drainage path in 0.5 seconds, and the time associated with the number of spheres (ie, the number of spheres is the first reading memory , And may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information such as how many balls are winning at which winning opening at which winning opening every extremely short time of 0.5 seconds, and how much sphere is at every time very short time of 0.5 seconds The inspection apparatus 300 can grasp detailed information such as whether the ball has been guided to the ball discharge path (that is, has been ejected to the game area). Therefore, analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

  Note that, as a modification of the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated by the character ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300, the winning balls number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Thus, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of balls won for each winning opening from the number of balls winning to each winning opening for every 0.5 seconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263, It is possible to calculate and analyze the latest feature ratio and the continuous feature ratio using the winning number table 202e. In addition, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated here were awarded to each winning opening in a short period before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated symbol ratio and continuous symbol ratio do not necessarily become accurate values, but can be used for analysis of the inspection device 300 as a reference value. .

<Modification 10>
Also, in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls for each winning opening won for 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 0.5 seconds, When the time associated with the number of spheres (that is, the time when the number of spheres is stored in the first reading memory 263) is stored, it is indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. The information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 when the timing (trigger) is reached. Then, in the inspection apparatus 300, the number of balls for each winning opening winning in 0.5 seconds recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the ball discharging path in 0.5 seconds. It transmits the number of guided balls and the time associated with the number of balls, and transmits the number-of-balls table 202e set in the number-of-balls data setting area 265a to the inspection apparatus 300 together You may In this way, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of balls won for each winning opening for every predetermined section from the number of balls winning for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds, and then the winning balls number table By calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio of each predetermined section using 202e, it is possible to analyze the possibility of fraud from the change of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio suspected of fraudulent activity, the number of balls for each winning opening winning in 0.5 seconds in the inspection device 300, and 0. 0. Detailed information related to the game, such as the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path and the time associated with the number of balls in 5 seconds, has been input. It is possible to carefully investigate the causes of changes in the item ratio and the continuous character ratio.

<Modification 11>
Also, without providing the first reading memory 263, the start buffer 262a, the start 2 buffer 262b, the start 1 buffer 262c, the end 2 buffer 262d, the special winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer which are set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. Each value of 262 f (ie, the number of balls for each winning opening won in 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds) is indicated by RTC 266. It may be directly recorded to the second reading memory 264 one after another according to the current time. In this case, the game state of the second reading memory 264, together with the time indicated by the RTC 266, is also the information on the gaming state set in the big hit buffer 262g, open buffer 262h, and error buffer 262i every 0.5 seconds. The data 264d may be recorded, and when the setting from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 is performed in the late-night time zone, the time-out information is combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266 and the gaming state data 264d It may be recorded in As a result, since the first reading memory 263 can be made unnecessary, the cost increase of the item ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

<Modification 12>
Further, in the timer interruption process executed every two milliseconds in the MPU 201 based on the outputs of the various switches, when the winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a. When the first start buffer 262a is turned on, and when the winning of the second start port 64b is detected by the output of the second start port switch 208b, the start 2 buffer 262b is turned on, and the output of the first ordinary winning port switch 208c When the winning of the first normal winning opening 63a is detected, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second normal winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second normal winning opening switch 208d, the normal 2 is closed. The buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the large winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the large winning opening switch 208e, the large winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, When the ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the out switch 208f, the first reading memory 263 is set by the MPU 201 every two milliseconds when the out buffer 262f is turned on. Each value of the start 1 buffer 262a, the start 2 buffer 262b, the normal 1 buffer 262c, the normal 2 buffer 262d, the large winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer 262f (that is, information indicating presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening) And information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds may be sequentially stored in combination with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202 f set in the trigger setting area 265 b comes, based on each value stored in the first reading memory 263, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus product The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of balls that have won in each winning opening before that timing is calculated for each winning and discharged to the ball discharge path before that timing. The total number of the played spheres may be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also by this, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, it is judged whether there is a possibility that the illegal activity has been performed from the character ratio or the continuous character ratio in the inspection device 300. can do. Then, in this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, ie, presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening The information indicating the information and the information indicating the presence or absence of the sphere guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263) It may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 together with the time). As a result, information such as which winning opening to which winning opening at a very short time interval of 2 milliseconds, and at which time it was guided to the ball discharge path at a very short time interval of 2 milliseconds (ie, the game Detailed information such as whether or not it has been launched to the area can be grasped by the inspection apparatus 300. Therefore, analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

<Modification 13>
Further, in the timer interruption process executed every two milliseconds in the MPU 201 based on the outputs of the various switches, when the winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a. When the first start buffer 262a is turned on, and when the winning of the second start port 64b is detected by the output of the second start port switch 208b, the start 2 buffer 262b is turned on, and the output of the first ordinary winning port switch 208c When the winning of the first normal winning opening 63a is detected, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second normal winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second normal winning opening switch 208d, the normal 2 is closed. The buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the large winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the large winning opening switch 208e, the large winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, When the ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the output switch 208f, when the out buffer 262f is turned on, each buffer 262a corresponding to each winning opening is stored in the first reading memory 263. When there is a buffer turned on among -262e, there is information indicating the winning opening where the winning was made, and when the out buffer 262f is turned on, there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path. Information indicating that may be sequentially stored as the current time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202 f set in the trigger setting area 265 b comes, based on each information stored in the first reading memory 263, the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus product The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of balls that have won in each winning opening before that timing is calculated for each winning and discharged to the ball discharge path before that timing. The total number of the played spheres may be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also by this, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, it is judged whether there is a possibility that the illegal activity has been performed from the character ratio or the continuous character ratio in the inspection device 300. can do. Then, in this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, ie, presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening The information indicating the information and the information indicating the presence or absence of the sphere guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263) It may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 together with the time). In this way, the inspection apparatus 300 can grasp information such as which prize opening to which prize has been won, and detailed information such as when the ball was guided to the ball discharging path (that is, what was ejected to the game area). It will be. Therefore, analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

  Note that, as a modification of the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated by the character ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300, the winning balls number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Thus, the inspection apparatus 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the information indicating the presence or absence of the balls winning to each winning opening every 2 milliseconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263. Then, using the winning balls number table 202e, it is possible to calculate and analyze the latest feature ratio and the continuous feature ratio. In addition, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated here were awarded to each winning opening in a short period before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated symbol ratio and continuous symbol ratio do not necessarily become accurate values, but can be used for analysis of the inspection device 300 as a reference value. .

<Modification 14>
Further, the first reading memory 263 corresponds to information indicating presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening, information indicating presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharging path for 2 milliseconds, and the information thereof. When storing the added time (that is, the time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263), the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b When it does, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, in the inspection apparatus 300, information indicating presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening recorded in the second reading memory 264, and presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharging path for 2 milliseconds. And the time associated with the information may be transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. In this way, in the inspection apparatus 300, the total number of balls for each winning opening is calculated for each predetermined section from the information indicating the presence or absence of the balls winning to each winning opening every 2 milliseconds. By calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio of each predetermined section using the number table 202e, it is possible to analyze the possibility of fraud from the change of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio suspected of fraudulent activity, the inspection device 300 displays information indicating the presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening, and ball for 2 milliseconds. Detailed information related to the game, such as information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the discharge path and the time associated with the information, has been input. It is possible to carefully investigate the cause of the change in the product ratio.

<Modification 15>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 includes information indicating the winning opening that has a prize, information indicating that there is a ball guided to the ball discharging path, and the time associated with the information (that is, In the case of storing the time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the first The information stored in the reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the inspection device 300 has the information indicating the winning opening with a winning, which is recorded in the second reading memory 264, the information indicating that there is a ball guided to the ball discharging path, It is also possible to transmit the winning balls number table 202e set in the winning balls number data setting area 265a to the inspection apparatus 300 by transmitting the time associated with the information. Thus, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of balls for each winning opening from the information indicating the winning opening that has won, and then uses the winning balls number table 202e to calculate the total number of balls for each winning opening. By calculating the feature ratio and the continuous symbol ratio of the predetermined section, it is possible to analyze the possibility of fraud from the change of the feature ratio and the continuous symbol ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio suspected to be fraudulent, the inspection device 300 has information indicating a winning opening with a winning and a ball guided to a ball discharge path. Since detailed information relating to the game, such as information indicating that the game has been made and the time associated with the information, has been input, the cause of the change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio based on this information You can explore carefully.

<Modification 16>
The first reading memory 263 is not provided, and the first buffer 262a, the first buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, the special winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer 262f set by the MPU 201 every two milliseconds. Of each value (ie, information indicating presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening and information indicating presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharging path for 2 milliseconds) are indicated by RTC 266 at that time At the same time, it may be directly recorded in the second reading memory 264 one by one. In this case, the game state data of the second reading memory 264, together with the time indicated by the RTC 266, is also information related to the game state set in the large hit buffer 262g, open buffer 262h and error buffer 262i every 2 ms. Alternatively, if the setting from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 is performed in the late-night time zone, the time-overtime information is combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266 to be stored in the gaming state data 264 d. You may make it record. As a result, since the first reading memory 263 can be made unnecessary, the cost increase of the item ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

<Modification 17>
In each of the above embodiments, an area in which information is recorded in the second reading memory 264 (for example, in the first embodiment, the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c and the gaming state data 264d In the second embodiment, the checksum value in the area where the shot number is recorded 264c, the gaming state data 264d and the winning counter data 264e is calculated and stored in the second reading memory 264 Alternatively, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection apparatus 300, the checksum value may also be transmitted. Then, when the inspection device 300 receives the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, a check sum value is calculated from the received information, and compared with the check sum value transmitted from the role ratio management chip 207. If they match, the analysis may be performed by judging that the received information is the correct information. Thereby, it can be suppressed that analysis is performed by the inspection apparatus 300 based on erroneous information.

<Modification 18>
In each of the above embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt signal is generated, and the CPU 261 executes inspection result output processing based on the interrupt signal to manage the item ratio Although the case where the information recorded in the chip 207 is output to the inspection apparatus 300 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and based on a command transmitted from the inspection apparatus 300 connected to the inspection terminal 207a. Alternatively, the information recorded in the role ratio management chip 207 may be output to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, when the inspection apparatus 300 becomes ready to receive the information transmitted from the item ratio management chip 207, if the command is transmitted to the item ratio management chip 207, the inspection apparatus 300 The information transmitted from the object ratio management chip 207 can be reliably received.

<Modification 19>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a when the character ratio calculation process (the first embodiment) or the winning information storage process (the second embodiment) is executed in the CPU 261. When the inclusion signal is generated, the execution of the inspection result output processing corresponding to the interruption signal is made to stand by while the combination ratio calculation processing or the prize information storage processing is executed, and the combination ratio calculation processing or the prize information The execution of the inspection result output may be started after the storage processing is completed. As a result, inspection result output processing is executed during execution of the character item ratio calculation processing or the winning information storage processing, and strange information is transmitted to the inspection device 300 because it is in the middle of writing to the second reading memory 264. Can be prevented from occurring.

<Modification 20>
In each of the above embodiments, the case where winning information and the like are transmitted in one direction from the MPU 201 to the item ratio management chip 207 in the main control device 110 has been described, but the information output from the item ratio management chip 207 by the MPU 201 is described. And some processing may be performed based on the information. For example, when the operation of the prize ratio management chip 207 is stopped, or when some kind of error occurs in the processing in the prize ratio management chip 207, the information is transmitted from the prize ratio management chip 207 to the MPU 201. , Based on the information, the MPU 201 notifies that by display on the first symbol display device 37, lighting / blinking of a lamp, output by voice, display on the third symbol display device 81, etc. You may control. As a result, the person in the hall can know the abnormality of the item ratio management chip 207, and can take some action. Further, the MPU 201 is based on the information indicating that the operation of the item ratio management chip 207 has been stopped, or the information indicating that an error has occurred in the processing of the item ratio management chip 207. The combination ratio management chip 207 may be reset. Thereby, the abnormality of the item ratio management chip 207 can be automatically resolved, and the item ratio management chip 207 can be operated again.

<Modification 21>
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the character ratio calculated by the character ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201 and the character ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine. The MPU 201 may control the apparatus 10 to perform the first predetermined notification. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the continuous part ratio calculated by the part ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201 and the continuous part ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio The MPU 201 may control the pachinko machine 10 to perform the second predetermined notification. Also, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the character ratio or the continuous character ratio is appropriately calculated from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, and transmitted to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 may perform the above comparison and notification based on the character ratio and the continuous character ratio received from the character ratio management chip 207. As the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a predetermined color, or a predetermined number may be displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. In addition, as a first predetermined notification or a second predetermined notification, a command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 so that a predetermined lamp is lit or blinked in a predetermined method, or a predetermined sound is output. A command may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 so that a predetermined symbol or character may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display control device from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command. Further commands may be sent to 114. In addition, as the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, the hall computer 600 provided in the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed has a first predetermined prize ratio as the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification. Information indicating that the continuous character ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio may be transmitted. By these notifications, it is possible to directly convey from the pachinko machine 10 an abnormality in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 to the person in charge of the hall. Therefore, it is possible to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the pachinko machine 10 may have been tampered with. In addition, such notification can be used to prevent fraud.

<Modification 22>
In each of the above embodiments, the item ratio management chip 207 determines whether the calculated item ratio or the continuous item ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio or the second predetermined ratio, and The determination result may be output to the MPU 201. Then, based on the determination result received from the item ratio management chip 207, the MPU 201 may perform control to perform the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification. In addition, the item ratio management chip 207 itself may execute control to perform the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the above determination result. For example, when the LEDs for performing these notifications are connected to the item ratio management chip 207 and the item ratio management chip 207 performs the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification, the drive control of these LEDs is performed. You may In addition, the item ratio management chip 207 may directly control the first symbol display device 37 to display the LED 37a in a predetermined color or display a predetermined number on the 7-segment display 37b. Also, a command for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification is directly transmitted from the item ratio management chip 207 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the command in the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. It may be controlled to perform lighting / blinking of a predetermined lamp, output of a predetermined sound, or predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81 based on the above. Also, information indicating that the item ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio directly from the item ratio management chip 207 to the hall computer 600, or the continuous combination ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio. Information indicating high may be transmitted. Also by this, it is possible to transmit the abnormality of the character ratio or the continuous character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 directly to the person in charge of the hall from the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the pachinko machine 10 may have been tampered with. In addition, such notification can be used to prevent fraud.

<Modification 23>
In the second embodiment, when the character ratio management chip 207 transmits the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection apparatus 300, the winning balls set in the winning balls number data setting area 265a are also obtained. The case where the information of the number table 202e is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 has been described. On the other hand, in the item ratio management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is sent to the MPU 201 based on the inspection device 300 being output to the inspection terminal 207a or based on the control signal from the inspection device 300. The item ratio management chip 207 may transmit the prize ball number table 202 e transmitted by the MPU 201 in response to the request. Further, the inspection apparatus 300 directly outputs a signal requesting transmission of the award ball number table 202e to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 receives the request signal and transmits the award ball number table 202e directly to the inspection apparatus 300. You may do it. In addition, after connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be turned on, and the prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the inspection device 300 in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201. You may do it. As a result, the item ratio management chip 207 can dispense with the winning balls number data setting area 265a, and the number of registers can be reduced.

<Modification 24>
Further, in the main control device 110, the winning balls number table 202e may not be transmitted to the inspection device 300, and the setting of the winning balls number for the inspection device 300 may be performed manually. As a result, the main control device 110 does not have to perform control to transmit the winning balls number table 202e, and therefore, complication of the program of the MPU 201 and the program of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

<Modification 25>
In the first embodiment, the case of not transmitting the winning balls number table 202e to the inspection device 300 has been described, but even in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the winning balls number table 202e is transmitted to the inspection devices 300 as well. Good. As a result, the inspection apparatus 300 can analyze the presence or absence of the possibility of fraudulent acts due to changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, while also referring to the winning number table 202e.

<Modification 26>
In each of the above embodiments, even if an output register (buffer) for temporarily storing information transmitted from the second reading memory 264 to the inspection apparatus 300 is provided between the second reading memory 264 and the inspection terminal 207a. Good. As a result, even when the reading speed of the information read from the second reading memory 264 is different from the transmission speed for transmitting the information to the feature ratio management chip 207, the output register can be used. (2) Information can be easily transmitted from the reading memory 264 to the inspection apparatus 300.

<Modification 27>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when it is detected that the power is turned off, the information on the feature ratio etc. is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. explained. On the other hand, by configuring the first reading memory 263 as a non-volatile memory or supplying a backup voltage to the first reading memory 263 or the like, the first reading memory 263 is stored even while the power is off. It is possible to configure, and when the power is supplied, information on the feature ratio etc. may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. Also in this case, it is possible to calculate the character ratio and the continuous character ratio without leaking with respect to the number of prize balls which are recorded in the second reading memory 264 and thereafter paid out before the power is turned off. . In addition, since the recording to the second reading memory 264 is performed when the power is turned on, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the power is completely cut off during the recording to the second reading memory 264.

<Modification 28>
In each of the above embodiments, when it is detected that the power is turned off, the information related to the role ratio etc. is automatically generated based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 under the control of the CPU 261. The case of recording to the reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the trigger information data 202 f, “power off” or “power off” as timing (trigger) to record information on the symbol ratio etc. in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. It may be possible to define "power supply". Then, when the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power off", when it is detected that the power is turned off, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. , Information about the feature ratio etc. in the second reading memory 264, and the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power supply", the first reading when power is supplied Based on the information stored in the memory 263, information relating to the character ratio may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, according to the setting of the trigger information data 202f in the MPU 201, the recording of the information on the role ratio etc. based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is turned off in the second reading memory 264. Or when the power is supplied. If "power supply" can be defined as the trigger information data 202f, the first reading memory 263 may be configured as a non-volatile memory, or the backup voltage may be supplied to the first reading memory 263 to perform the first operation. The reading memory 263 may be configured to be storable even while the power is off.

<Modification 29>
In each of the above-described embodiments, “the number of firings is set as the timing (trigger) at which the information on the symbol ratio etc. is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 in the trigger information data 202 f. The case has been described where information indicating one of “time” and “game time” is defined. On the other hand, the "power supply time" may be defined in the trigger information data 202f. When information indicating “power supply time” is defined in the trigger information data 202 f, information indicating “predetermined time” at which information on the symbol ratio etc. is to be recorded in the second reading memory 264 is also defined. May be For example, when the trigger information data 202 f defines information indicating “power supply time” and information indicating “four hours as“ predetermined time ”, the item ratio management chip 207 stores the trigger setting area 265 b in the trigger setting area 265 b. When the trigger information data 202 f is set, the time indicated by the RTC 266 is acquired, and the acquired time is stored in the memory as “power supply time measurement start time”, and thereafter, the time indicated by the RTC 266 and It is judged whether four hours have passed since the power was supplied from the difference with the "power supply time measurement start time", and stored in the first reading memory 263 in the prize ratio management chip 207 when four hours have passed. Based on the obtained information, information on the feature ratio etc. may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the time when the recording is performed is acquired from the RTC 266, and the time is stored in the memory as a new “power supply time measurement start time”, and then the time indicated by the RTC 266 and “power supply time measurement” From the difference between the start time and the start time, it may be determined whether four hours have passed. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the prize ratio by the power supply time, even in a situation where little game is played in the pachinko machine 10, it is ensured that the power supply time has passed and the predetermined time has elapsed. The item ratio and the continuous character ratio can be calculated. Therefore, it is possible to make the inspection device 300 analyze the presence or absence of the fraudulent action surely by the combination ratio of the combination and the combination ratio of the combination regularly calculated.

<Modification 30>
In the second embodiment, the information recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 indicating the total number of balls winning in each winning opening for each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f. Has been described together with the winning balls number table 202e to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, when information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening for each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the inspection device 300, based on the information for each timing. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio at each timing may be calculated, and information indicating the calculated character ratio and the continuous character ratio may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 together. Alternatively, instead of the information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening stored in the second reading memory 264 when transmitting to the inspection device 300, the bonus ratio and the continuous role based on the information The item ratio may be calculated, and the calculated symbol ratio and the continuous symbol ratio may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, in the inspection device 300, it is not necessary to calculate the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, and analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. In addition, when calculating the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio in the inspection device 300, the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio may be calculated based on the prize ball number table incorrectly or incorrectly set. However, if the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated in the character ratio management chip 207, the number of winning balls in the winning ball number data setting area 265a set by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 at power on. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the winning balls number table 202e is tampered with illegally, and the feature ratio and the continuous feature ratio can be accurately calculated.

<Modification 31>
In addition, the second reading memory 264 is not limited to the second embodiment, and information indicating the character ratio or the continuous character ratio is not stored, and the information necessary to calculate at least one of them is [2] When stored in the reading memory 264, when transmitting to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 calculates the bonus ratio and the continuous ratio from the information stored in the second reading memory 264. The calculated character ratio and continuous character ratio may be output to the inspection apparatus 300 in combination with the information stored in the second reading memory 264 or in place of the information. As a result, in the inspection device 300, it is not necessary to calculate the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, and analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. In addition, when calculating the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio in the inspection device 300, the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio may be calculated based on the prize ball number table incorrectly or incorrectly set. However, if the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated in the character ratio management chip 207, the number of winning balls in the winning ball number data setting area 265a set by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 at power on. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the winning balls number table 202e is tampered with illegally, and the feature ratio and the continuous feature ratio can be accurately calculated. In addition, if the calculated bonus product ratio and the continuous product ratio are output to the inspection device 300 in combination with the information stored in the second reading memory 264, in the inspection device 300, the bonus product ratio and the continuous product ratio When it is determined that there is a suspicious point, the cause can be searched based on the information stored in the second reading memory 264. Further, in the inspection apparatus 300, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated from the information stored in the second reading memory 264, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio output from the character ratio management chip 207 By determining whether or not they match, it is possible to determine whether any cheating has occurred.

<Modification 32>
In each of the above embodiments, the out switch 208 f for detecting a ball guided to the ball discharge path is provided, and the number of balls fired to the game area is counted by counting the number of times the ball is detected by the out switch 208 f. Although the case of counting is described, various methods may be used as a method of counting the number of balls fired to the game area. For example, an out port switch is provided to detect a ball passing through the out port 66, the number of balls passing through the out port 66 detected by the out port switch, and the first start detected by the first start port switch 208a. The number of balls passing through the opening 64a, the number of balls passing through the second starting opening 64b detected by the second starting opening switch 208b, and the first ordinary winning opening 63a detected by the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c The number of balls that passed through, the number of balls that passed through the second normal winning opening 63b detected by the second normal winning opening switch 208d, and the ball that passed through the large winning opening 65a detected by the large winning opening switch 208e The number of balls fired to the game area may be calculated by summing up with the number of. In addition, a supply ball detection switch for detecting the ball supplied to the ball emission unit 112a, and a far ball which is emitted by the ball emission unit 112a and detects the ball ejected from the ball guiding passage as a far ball without reaching the game area A detection switch is provided, and it is incremented by one each time a ball is detected by the supply ball detection switch, and is released to the game area by a counter which counts down by one each time a ball is detected by the far ball detection switch. The number of may be counted. Also, instead of the supply ball detection switch, a launch ball detection switch is provided which detects the sphere fired by the ball launch unit 112a, and is counted up by 1 each time a sphere is detected by the launch ball detection switch. The number of balls fired to the game area may be counted by a counter that counts down by one each time a ball is detected by the switch. In addition, the game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip portion of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch detects the ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area and detects the game ball The ball fired to the game area may be counted by providing a counter that counts up each time a ball is detected by the switch.

<Modification 33>
In each of the above embodiments, the item ratio management chip 207 is provided with a CPU 261, and information related to the item ratio and the continuous item ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the software executed by the CPU 261, The case of transmission to 300 has been described. On the other hand, some or all functions of the item ratio management chip 207 may be configured by wired logic. By configuring in wired logic, it is possible to perform high-speed management of information on the property ratio.

<Modification 34>
In the above-described embodiments, the case where the item ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, the information about the item ratio is recorded by the item ratio management chip 207, and the information is transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. On the other hand, a non-volatile memory is connected to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 records information on the character ratio in the non-volatile memory, and the MPU 201 transmits the information recorded in the non-volatile memory to the inspection apparatus 300 It may be controlled to As a result, the information on the bonus ratio is used by the MPU 201 itself using the information on the ball winning at each winning opening detected by the MPU 201 and the information on the ball guided to the ball discharge path without transferring to another chip. As it can be managed, it is less susceptible to noise, and information on the feature ratio can be managed more accurately.

<Modification 35>
Further, the item ratio management chip 207 may be provided separately from the main controller 110, and the item ratio management chip 207 and the main controller 110 may be connected. In this case, the property ratio management chip 207 may be housed in the same substrate box 100 as the main controller 110, or may be housed in a substrate box different from the substrate box 100 in which the main controller 110 is housed. Good. When the item ratio management chip 207 is stored in a substrate box different from the main control device 110, the item ratio management chip 207 may be stored in a substrate box dedicated to the item ratio management chip 207, or other control The property ratio management chip 207 may be accommodated in any one of the substrate boxes 101 to 104 in which the apparatus and the like are accommodated.

<Modification 36>
Further, the item ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the payout control device 111, or the character ratio management chip 207 may be provided to the payout control device 111. Then, the item ratio management chip 207 may record information related to the item ratio based on the signal from the payout control device 111 and transmit the information to the inspection apparatus 300. In this case, the main control unit 110 instructs the payout control unit 111 to obtain information on winnings for each winning opening (for example, for a predetermined winning time for each winning opening (for example, 0.5 seconds)) Information indicating the number may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the feature ratio management chip 207. In addition, in the winning ball command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, in conjunction with the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out) The information to be shown is included, and based on the award ball command, the number of award balls indicated by the award ball command is set in the area corresponding to the winning opening in which the prize is won, and is set in the buffer 262. By adding the number of winning balls to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the first reading memory 263, with the counter, the number of balls paid out by the winning to the corresponding winning opening for each winning opening The number may be counted. Furthermore, in place of the item ratio management chip 207, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 may realize the function of the item ratio management chip 207. Also by these means, the item ratio management chip 207 or the payout control device 111 can record information on the item ratio and transmit it to the inspection apparatus 300. In these cases, in the main controller 110, when the power is turned on, the information on the number-of-balls table 202e and the information on the trigger information data 202f are stored in the main controller 110 by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201. May be transmitted to the payout control device 111 by a command. As a result, using the information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the payout control device 111 can manage the role ratio and the like.

<Modification 37>
Further, the item ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the sound lamp control device 113, or the object ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the sound lamp control device 113. Then, the item ratio management chip 207 may record information related to the item ratio based on the signal from the audio lamp control device 113 and transmit the information to the inspection apparatus 300. In this case, main controller 110 causes sound lamp control device 113 to receive information on winnings for each winning opening (for example, balls for which winning has been made for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning opening). (Information indicating the number of items) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the feature ratio management chip 207. Furthermore, in place of the item ratio management chip 207, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 may realize the function of the object ratio management chip 207. Also by these means, it is possible to record information on the item ratio with the item ratio management chip 207 or the audio lamp control device 113 and transmit the information to the inspection apparatus 300. Also, by displaying the calculated symbol ratio, the continuous symbol ratio, etc. on the third symbol display device 81 by managing the symbol ratio with the symbol ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113, the display is performed. A command may be sent to the controller 114. By displaying on the third symbol display device 81, the person in charge of the hall can easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are strange, or the illegal person can be prevented from performing the unlawful act. it can. Further, when the character ratio or the continuous character ratio calculated by the character ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which an illegal act is suspected), In order for the voice lamp control device 113 to perform control to output an alarm sound or to turn on / off the lamp display device 227 in a predetermined manner, or to display a predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81, A command may be sent to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible for a person in charge of hall to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the wrongdoing is suspected, and to suppress the wrongdoer from performing the wrongdoing. In these cases, in the main controller 110, when the power is turned on, the information on the number-of-balls table 202e and the information on the trigger information data 202f are main controller due to the start-up process executed by the MPU 201. It may be transmitted by command to the audio lamp control device 113 from 110. As a result, using the information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, the character ratio can be managed on the audio lamp control unit 113 side.

<Modification 38>
Also, the item ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the display control device 114, or the item ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the display control device 114. Then, the item ratio management chip 207 may record information related to the item ratio based on the signal from the display control device 114 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. In this case, the main control unit 110 sends information on winnings for each winning opening (for example, 0.5 seconds for each winning opening) to the display control 114 via the sound lamp control unit 113. Information indicating the number of winning balls in between may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the feature ratio management chip 207. Furthermore, instead of the item ratio management chip 207, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may realize the function of the item ratio management chip 207. Also by these means, the item ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 can record the information on the item ratio and transmit it to the inspection apparatus 300. Also, display control is performed to control the third symbol display device 81 to display the calculated symbol ratio, the continuous symbol ratio, and the like by managing the symbol ratio with the symbol ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114. Device 114 may do this. By displaying on the third symbol display device 81, the person in charge of the hall can easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are strange, or the illegal person can be prevented from performing the unlawful act. it can. In addition, when the character ratio or continuous character ratio calculated by the character ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which fraudulent behavior is suspected), the predetermined display is performed using the third symbol The display control device 114 may perform control for causing the display device 81 to display. As a result, it is possible for a person in charge of hall to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the wrongdoing is suspected, and to suppress the wrongdoer from performing the wrongdoing. In these cases, in the main controller 110, when the power is turned on, the information on the number-of-balls table 202e and the information on the trigger information data 202f are main controller due to the start-up process executed by the MPU 201. The command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 from 110 through the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, by using the information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, it is possible to manage the role ratio and the like on the display control device 114 side.

<Modification 39>
In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 110 is provided on the substrate, or connected to the item ratio management chip 207, or the character ratio management chip 207 is mounted, or the item ratio management chip 207 A display device provided with a plurality of 7-segment displays is provided on a substrate provided with a control device that realizes a function, and the display device relates to a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, a character ratio or a continuous character ratio. Information or information indicating game performance (for example, a base value or the like) may be displayed. The display device may be configured by a liquid crystal display provided with a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, instead of the 7-segment display. The display device is connected to a substrate on which the main control device 110 is provided, or connected to the character ratio management chip 207, or mounted with the character ratio management chip 207, or the function of the character ratio management chip 207 Is not provided on the substrate provided with the control device realized, but is connected to the substrate provided with the main control device 110 or the character ratio management chip 207, or the character ratio management chip 207 is mounted Alternatively, it may be connected to a substrate provided with a control device that realizes the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The display device may be assembled so that the display screen of the display device can be seen when the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is viewed, or the display screen of the display device can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 It may be assembled as follows.

<Modification 40>
The information on the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device may be, for example, information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning for each winning opening, or to all winning openings. The total number of balls paid out by the prize, and the total number of balls paid out by the prize to the prize opening (in the present embodiment, the second starting opening 64b and the big prize opening 65a in this embodiment) The information may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning in a winning opening (in the present embodiment, the large winning opening 65a in this embodiment) in which objects are operated continuously. In addition, information indicating the total number of balls fired in the game area (the number of fired balls) may be included in the information on the feature ratio or the continuous feature ratio displayed on the display device. The display device is configured of a liquid crystal display provided with a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, etc. Information related to the item ratio or the continuous role ratio may be displayed.

<Modification 41>
The information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device, or the information indicating the game performance was recorded in the second reading memory 264 most recent. At the timing (trigger), it may be the information itself recorded in the second reading memory 264 or the information generated from the information. In addition, at the timing (trigger) at which the recording is performed to the plurality of second reading memories 264 including the latest one, the data itself recorded in the second reading memory 264 or the timing is recorded in the second reading memory 264 at each timing. Information generated from the information may be displayed on the display device as a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or information indicating game performance. In addition, at the timing (trigger) at which recording is performed to a plurality of second reading memories 264 including the latest, information recorded in the second reading memory 264 or all timings (triggers) recorded in the second reading memory 264 From the information in), take an average value of information related to the character ratio, continuous character ratio, character ratio or continuous character ratio, or information indicating gaming performance, and display the average value on the display device May be Furthermore, not only the information stored in the second reading memory 264 but also the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is reflected to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. Related information or information indicating game performance may be generated and displayed on the display device.

  Thereby, by looking at the display device, there is a possibility that the fraudulent action has been taken from the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the gaming performance. Can be judged. Note that this display device may simultaneously display any of the character ratio, continuous characters, information relating to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, and information indicating the gaming performance, or one by one. You may Further, any one of the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, and the information indicating the gaming performance may be alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals. When alternately displayed, information indicating what is displayed may be displayed together. Also, if the character ratio or continuous character ratio displayed on the display device or other information exceeds a predetermined ratio (for example, if the character ratio exceeds 70%, the continuous character ratio is about May be displayed in a color different from normal, or may be displayed in a blinking manner. In the display device, a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) may be used after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, or until the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 completes the start-up process. Information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or information indicating the gaming performance, as long as the predetermined processing may be completed, such as a period. May be displayed. Thereby, the person in charge of the hall confirms the information related to the symbol ratio and the continuous symbol ratio displayed on the display when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the symbol ratio and the continuous symbol ratio. This makes it easy to check if there has been any fraudulent activity. In addition, in the display device, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, information relating to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or the game performance is shown. Information may be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there is any injustice by confirming the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the display when the person in charge of the hall turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 . It should be noted that if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be turned off, the information related to the character ratio to the display device, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the gaming performance The display may be a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined time such as 10 seconds, or a period until the processing related to power off by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is completed (for example, until the processing of S705 is ended) , And may be limited to the period until the predetermined processing ends. In addition, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, information related to the symbol ratio to the display device, the continuous symbol ratio, the character ratio or the continuous symbol ratio, or information indicating the gaming performance is displayed. Power from a backup power source, a secondary battery, a large capacity capacitor, or the like. In addition, the display device may be housed in the substrate box. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of displaying an incorrect value on the display device.

<Modification 42>
In addition, the display device is provided with a button for displaying information relating to a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, a character ratio or a continuous character ratio, or information indicating game performance, and the button is operated. In this case, the display device may display an item ratio, a continuous character ratio, information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or information indicating gaming performance. In this way, only when the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or other information is confirmed, by operating the button, information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio Alternatively, since information indicating game performance can be displayed on the display device, wasteful consumption of power consumption can be suppressed in the display device. In addition, the button operation is effective only when the game is in non-execution state in the pachinko machine 10, information related to the character ratio and continuous character ratio, character ratio and continuous character ratio on the display device, Alternatively, information indicating game performance may be displayed. The judgment that the game is not executed in the pachinko machine 10 is, for example, when detection of the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208 f is not detected for a predetermined time or more, or the operation handle 51 is rotated. If not, if it is determined that the ball is not fired by the ball firing unit 112a, it may be performed if the ball guided to the game area is not detected. Thereby, while playing a game, it is possible to prevent the fraudster from trying to do something illegal by looking at the information displayed on the display device.

<Modification 43>
Also, the operation of the button may be effective only when it is operated in combination with another button. In this way, an unauthorized person who does not know the combination of button operations to be activated displays information relating to a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, a character ratio or a continuous character ratio, or information indicating game performance. It can not be easily displayed on the device. In addition, the power for the pachinko machine 10 is operated while operating a button for displaying information relating to the character ratio, continuous character ratio, character ratio or continuous character ratio on the display device, or information indicating the gaming performance. Only when the player inserts a character, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance may be displayed on the display device. As a result, when the person in charge of the hall turns on the power to the pachinko machine 10, by operating the button in combination, the ratio of the symbol and the ratio of the continuous symbol displayed on the display device, the ratio of the symbol and the ratio of the continuous symbol are displayed. By confirming the information related to the item ratio or the information indicating the gaming performance, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been any fraudulent act during the business the day before or outside the business hours at night. In addition, the power source of the pachinko machine 10 is operated while operating a button for displaying information relating to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio or the continuous character ratio on the display device, or the information indicating the gaming performance. Only when the player is turned off, information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance may be displayed on the display device. As a result, when the person in charge of the hall turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10, by operating the button in combination, the ratio of the symbol and the ratio of the continuous symbol displayed on the display device, the ratio of the symbol and the ratio of the continuous symbol are displayed. By confirming the information related to the item ratio or the information indicating the gaming performance, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there is any wrongdoing before today's business or today's business. The display of the character ratio to the display device by the operation of the button, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the gaming performance is ended based on the lapse of a predetermined period. Or may end when the button is operated again. In addition, only when the button is being operated continuously, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance is displayed. It is also good.

<Modification 44>
In addition, the pachinko machine is operated when the button is operated, and the display device displays information relating to a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, a character ratio or a continuous character ratio, or information indicating game performance. The ten game modes may be set to the check mode, and the main control of the game in the main controller 110 may be temporarily stopped. As a result, with the progress of the game, the character ratio displayed on the display device, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the gaming performance changes. It is possible to suppress that it is difficult to confirm the feature ratio and the like. In this case, the main control device 110 sets the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the check mode to temporarily stop the main control of the game, the voice lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114), A command to notify transition to the check mode may be transmitted. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 receive a command for notifying transition to the check mode, for example, a predetermined image (for example, a black screen corresponding to the check mode in the third symbol display device 81) Or displaying the fluctuation effect under execution at a high speed during the check mode, the sound output from the audio output device 226 is also a predetermined sound corresponding to the check mode, or a sound corresponding to the high speed fluctuation. It may be controlled to output the Thus, it is possible to indicate to the player that the pachinko machine 10 is in the check mode. Further, the main control device 110 cancels the check mode as the gaming mode of the pachinko machine 10 and resumes the main control of the game, the check mode is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114). A command may be sent to notify that it is released. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are returned to those before the transition to the check mode. Can.

<Modification 45>
Further, in the variations described so far, when the button operation is performed, the display apparatus provided on the substrate such as the main control unit 110, etc., the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. Although the case where related information or information indicating game performance is displayed has been described, in addition to or in place of this, when a button operation is performed, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, the lamp display device 227 or the like may display information relating to a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, a character ratio or a continuous character ratio, or information indicating game performance, or voice output The device 226 may output a notification sound indicating a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, or game performance. Also in this case, the above-described modification may be applied as appropriate in connection with the button operation.

<Modification 46>
In each of the above embodiments, the case where information related to the item ratio is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 when the inspection apparatus 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a has been described, but instead, it has been described above When the button operation is performed, information related to the item ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. Also in this case, the modification described above may be applied as appropriate in relation to the button operation.

<Modification 47>
In the above embodiments, the information managed by the item ratio management chip 207 is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. However, based on the information managed by the item ratio management chip 207, the main control device Display various information such as character ratio and continuous character ratio on a display device provided on a substrate such as 110, or for the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, the lamp display device 227, etc. By displaying information relating to the item ratio and the continuous character ratio or information indicating the gaming performance, or by outputting from the voice output device 226 any notification sound concerning the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the gaming performance, When configured to perform some kind of notification, transmission to the inspection apparatus 300 may not necessarily be performed.

<Modification 48>
In each of the above embodiments, when the large capacity capacitor 267 or the secondary battery is connected to the item ratio management chip 207 and the power supply to the main control device 110 is stopped due to a power failure, the item ratio management chip 207 In the above, the case where the process associated with the power-off is performed using the power stored in the capacitor 267 has been described. On the other hand, instead of the capacitor 267 or the secondary battery, the backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the feature ratio management chip 207. Thus, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 can be held even while the power is turned off. In addition, when the fraudster tries to set the illegal information in the buffer 262 in the late-night time zone, the overtime information is stored in the overtime data 263j of the first reading memory 263, and thereafter the second reading The overtime information can be recorded in the gaming state data 264 d of the memory 264.

<Modification 49>
In the above embodiment, when it is determined by the process of S 724 (see FIG. 19) whether transmission of the interrupt signal after setting of the buffer 262 has been performed by the MPU 201 in the late-night time zone, the time indicated by the RTC 266 is The MPU 201 may set an image described in the case of determining whether or not it is from midnight to 6 o'clock in the early morning, and a threshold of time used for determination of this midnight time zone. For example, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores the midnight time zone determination time data defining the threshold value of the time, and in the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is supplied, the number-of-balls table 202e The midnight time zone determination time data stored in the ROM 202 may be set in the midnight time zone determination time setting area provided in the setting register 265 together with the trigger information data 202 f. Then, in the process of S 724, it may be determined whether transmission of the interrupt signal after setting of the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is performed in the time zone indicated by the midnight time zone determination time data. Thus, the determination of the midnight time zone can be variably set by the ROM 202.

<Modification 50>
In each of the above embodiments, when the item ratio management chip 207 is powered on, the power on information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. At the timing, the power on information may be recorded in the game state data 264 d of the second reading memory 264 together with the time. Further, when power is supplied to the item ratio management chip 207, the power-on information may be recorded directly in the game state data 264d, together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. Thereby, information on the time when the power is turned on is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Therefore, when there is a possibility of fraud due to changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, it is also possible to investigate the cause multilaterally along with the time when the power is turned on.

<Modification 51>
In each of the above embodiments, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is turned off, the power-off information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. The power-off information may be recorded in the game state data 264 d of the second reading memory 264 at a predetermined timing along with the time. In this case, the first reading memory 263 may be a non-volatile memory or may be supplied with a backup voltage. In addition, when the power to the item ratio management chip 207 is turned off, the power-off information may be recorded directly in the game state data 264 d in combination with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. In this case, the first reading memory 263 is not necessarily configured by a non-volatile memory or supplied with a backup voltage. Thereby, information on the time when the power is turned off is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Therefore, when there is a possibility of fraud due to changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, it is also possible to investigate the cause multilaterally along with the time when the power is turned off.

<Modification 52>
In the above embodiment, when the processing of S704 to S707 is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 17) of the MPU 201 after the power supplied to the main control device 110 is cut off, after the processing of S704, S705. Before the process of (1) is performed, the same process as the process of S155 and S156 illustrated in FIG. 11 may be performed. That is, in the process at the time of power-off, after the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited (S704), the values of the first counter 203d, the second counter 203e, the first counter 203f, the second counter 203g, and the special winning opening counter 203h of the RAM 203 Is the winning information, the value of the out counter 203i is the out information, and it is set in the feature ratio management chip 207 together with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at that time, and an interrupt signal is sent to the feature ratio management chip 207 You may As a result, the number of balls awarded to each winning opening immediately before the power is turned off and the balls guided to the ball discharge path, which are not counted in the feature ratio management chip 207, are turned off. It can be counted by the item ratio management chip 207 before the game. Therefore, it is possible to record the number of balls that have won a prize at each winning opening immediately before the power is turned off and the balls guided to the ball discharge path with the feature ratio management chip 207 without leakage.

<Modification 53>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the item ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is "gaming time", the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is detected. Although the case of calculating the game time by counting the time played has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, an out port switch for detecting a ball that has passed through the out port 66 is provided, and the out port switch, the first start port switch 208a, the second start port switch 208b, the first ordinary winning port switch 208c, and the second ordinary winning port When passage of a ball to each winning opening or out is detected by any of the switch 208d and the large winning opening switch 208e, the game time is calculated by counting the detected time. It is also good. In addition, based on the output of the touch sensor 51a provided on the operation handle 51, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time when it is determined that the player is touching the operation handle 51. The game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the player 51 is rotated by the player, or the time during which the player touches the operation handle 51 and rotates the operation handle 51 is accumulated. You may calculate game time. Further, the ball control unit 112 may be driven by the discharge control device 112, and the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the ball is being released. In addition, the game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip portion of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch counts the time during which the ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area continues to be detected. By doing, you may calculate game time.

<Modification 54>
In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol are preset by the main control unit 110 so that the jackpot probability etc. can not be changed by the hall personnel or the like. However, instead of this, the jackpot may be configured to be able to change the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol into a plurality of stages (e.g., six stages) by a person in charge of holes or the like. In this way, it is possible to give the player the fun of selecting a stand by making the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol different for each stand with respect to the same model of pachinko machine on the hall side. .

<Modification 55>
The change of the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol may be performed, for example, as follows. First, the jackpot random number value in the corresponding level (stage) and the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol can be changed in each of a plurality of stages (hereinafter described as six stages (levels 1 to 6) here) And / or the random number value of the second symbol is stored in advance in the ROM 202. The number of jackpot random number values determined for each level and / or the number of jackpot random number values for the second symbol determines the jackpot probability for the level and / or the jackpot probability for the second symbol.

<Modification 56>
The main board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol. The keyhole may be normally covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94 or may be revealed by opening the back pack 92. In addition, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for a keyhole, and the keyhole may be exposed from the opening. The keyhole is configured to be pivotable between the two positions of the "probability setting off" side and the "probability setting on" side by a dedicated key, and when it is on the "probability setting off" side, the keyhole is On the other hand, the exclusive key can be removed and inserted. When the keyhole is set to the “probability setting on” position by the dedicated key, the pachinko machine 10 can change the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the keyhole is turned from the “probability setting off” to the “probability setting on” position by a dedicated key and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be activated in the probability setting mode in which the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol can be changed. As a result, it is possible to safely change the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol according to the activation of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall. If the keyhole is turned from "probability setting off" to "probability setting on" by a dedicated key while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol of It is possible not to change the hit probability. This makes it possible to prevent the fraudster from changing the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol fraudulently during business.

<Modification 57>
In the pachinko machine 10, a pressing type probability setting button for changing the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol is provided on the main substrate. This probability setting button, like the keyhole, is usually covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94 and appears by opening the back pack 92. However, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the probability setting button, and the probability setting button may be exposed from the opening. When the pachinko machine 10 enters the probability setting mode, the levels (steps) of the previous jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability are displayed, for example, on a display device provided on the main substrate. Then, when the probability setting button is pressed, the level of the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased by one and displayed on the display device. Further, when the level before the probability setting button is pressed is “6”, when the probability setting button is pressed, the level “1” is displayed on the display device. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability setting mode, the level displayed on the display device is a predetermined level (in place of the level of the previous jackpot probability and / or the second symbol) For example, it may be level "1".

<Modification 58>
The jackpot value of the level displayed on the display device or the second one when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the display device displays the jackpot probability to be set and / or the level of the winning probability of the second symbol The hit value of the symbol is set, and the pachinko machine 10 is activated. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 operates with the jackpot probability of the set level and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol. Also, when the jackpot probability to be set and / or the level of the jackpot probability of the second symbol is displayed, the display when the keyhole into which the dedicated key is inserted is turned to the “probability setting OFF” position The jackpot value of the level displayed on the device or the hit value of the second symbol may be set, and the pachinko machine 10 may be activated. Also by this, the pachinko machine 10 operates with the jackpot probability of the set level and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol.

<Modification 59>
Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a display device for displaying information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the pachinko machine 10 sets the probability When activated in the mode, the level of the jackpot probability to be set and / or the hit probability of the second symbol may be displayed on the display device. Thereby, by suppressing an increase in the number of display devices mounted on the pachinko machine 10, the cost increase can be reduced. Further, by using the display device as one unit and suppressing an increase in the number of parts, the arrangement (layout) of each part can be easily performed.

<Modification 60>
By the way, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is configured to be able to change the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, according to the change, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio naturally change. Therefore, whether the change in the character ratio or continuous character ratio managed in the character ratio management chip 207 is due to a change in the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol's probability of winning or is due to some fraud There is a risk of getting lost.

  Therefore, when the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol is changed, all the information stored in the second reading memory 264 or the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be erased. . In this way, it is possible to eliminate the influence that the character ratio or the continuous character ratio has changed due to the change of the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol. Also, in this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection apparatus 300. May be Thereby, it is possible to grasp at the inspection stage that the information etc. recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been erased due to the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol being changed, and whether or not there was fraud It can be used as a reference for judgment. In this case, the date and time when the change is made may be stored together. Further, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hitting probability has been changed may include information indicating the level after the change or may include information of the level before the change. Based on these date and time and level, it can be determined more reliably whether there is an injustice or not.

<Modification 61>
On the other hand, even when the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol are changed, all the information stored in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are stored. You may Thereby, before the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol is changed, it is possible to analyze whether there is a fraud. Also, in this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection apparatus 300. May be Thereby, it is possible to easily judge whether or not the influence of the change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio is due to the change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. The information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol has been changed may include the date and time when the change was made. Also, it may include information indicating the level after change, or may include information at the level before change. Based on these date and time and levels, it is possible to more reliably analyze the causes of changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio.

<Modification 62>
In addition, even when the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol are changed, all the information stored in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are stored. If the display device provided to display information related to the character ratio or continuous character ratio, or the character ratio or continuous character ratio, the jackpot probability and / or the hit of the second symbol Based on the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and / or the first reading memory 263 after the probability is changed, the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the character ratio or the continuous character ratio Relevant information may be displayed. Therefore, with regard to the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio or the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on this display device, it is accompanied by the change of the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol's hit probability. Thus, it is possible to eliminate the influence of changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, and it is possible to easily find fraud after changing the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second pattern. Further, in this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol has been changed may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 together with the date and time when the change was made. Based on this information, after the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol is changed, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is easily determined, and based on that, the feature ratio and the continuous feature It is possible to display information related to the ratio, or the character ratio or the continuous character ratio.

<Modification 63>
In addition, even when the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol are changed, all the information stored in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are stored. In this case, the information may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 by dividing into the jackpot probability and / or the level (step) of the jackpot probability of the second symbol. As a result, for each level of the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio when the level is set are determined from the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 be able to. Therefore, analysis is performed by clearly switching the changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio accompanying the change of the jackpot probability and / or the second character's winning probability and the changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio accompanying the fraud. it can.

<Modification 64>
When the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol is changed, only one or more pieces of information recorded immediately before in the second reading memory 264 may be stored, and the others may be erased. Further, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be kept saved. In addition, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 may be deleted, and only the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be stored. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the influence of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio before the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol's probability of hitting the character or the continuous character ratio, while the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability Before the probability of hitting the second symbol is changed, it is possible to make it possible to analyze whether or not there is a possibility that fraud has been conducted. In this case, even if information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264 and output to the connected inspection apparatus 300 Good. As a result, it is possible to easily judge whether or not the influence of a change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio is due to a change in the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol's probability of being hit and recorded in the second reading memory 264 It can be grasped at the inspection stage that some of the information etc. has been erased by the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second pattern being changed, and it can be used as a reference for judgment as to whether or not there was fraud. it can. The information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol has been changed may be stored together with the date and time when the change was made. Also, it may include information indicating the level after change, or may include information at the level before change. Based on these date and time and levels, it is possible to more reliably analyze the causes of changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio.

<Modification 65>
In the above embodiments, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 can not be erased from the outside, thereby preventing the fraudster from erasing the evidence of the fraudulent act. . On the other hand, there is a second-hand market in the pachinko machine market, and it is often sold from one store to another and installed at other stores. In this case, even if a fraudulent act is performed at the first store and the character ratio changes, the information remains in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264. There was a possibility that the suspicion might have arisen that there was a wrongdoing in another store. Therefore, in preparation for such a case, when sold from one store to another store, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is erased, or the information to be resold is stored. It may be made to be able to make it record on the 2nd reading memory 264. If the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is deleted, it is suppressed that the record of the fraudulent activity performed in the previous one store is taken over in the next other store it can. In addition, if the information to be resold is recorded in the second reading memory 264, the information related to the item ratio in the first store and the information related to the item ratio in the next other store are clearly cut off The analysis can be performed, and it is also possible to discover the fraudulent activity performed in the previous store from the information related to the feature ratio in the previous store.

<Modification 66>
The deletion of the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 or the recording of the resold information in the second reading memory 264 is limited to a part of the maker of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. It should be limited to This makes it possible to suppress the easy deletion or falsification of the record of fraud. Further, deletion of information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 or recording of resold information in the second reading memory 264 may be performed by the following method. . For example, the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, and a dedicated command is input from the inspection device 300 to the feature ratio management chip 207, and the like is recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264, etc. A program may be executed to delete the stored information or record the resold information in the second reading memory 264. By setting this command as a secret special command other than some of the members, it is possible to suppress that the fraudster can easily erase or falsify the record of the wrongdoing. In addition, the main board is provided with a hole such as a keyhole, and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is erased or resold only when a key or the like that fits the hole is inserted. A program for recording the information to the second reading memory 264 may be executed. As a result, only those having a key or the like that fits the hole can erase the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, or delete the resold information into the second reading memory 264. Since the recording can be performed, it is possible to suppress that the fraudster can easily delete or falsify the record of the fraudulent activity. In addition, a switch is provided in the substrate box 100 in which the main substrate is stored, and deletion of information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 or resale is performed only when the switch is operated. A program may be implemented to record the stored information into the second reading memory 264. Thus, the switch can not be operated unless the substrate box 100 is opened, and deletion of the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 or deletion of the resold information into the second reading memory 264 I can not record. As described above, in the substrate box 100, the box base and the box cover are unopenably connected (joined by caulking), and the connection portion between the box base and the box cover extends over the box base and the box cover. Seals are attached. Therefore, since the fraudster can not easily open the substrate box, it is possible to prevent the fraudster from easily erasing or faking the record of the fraudulent act. In addition, if the substrate box is opened and the switch is operated, it is possible to easily determine that the cheating has taken place since the opened evidence remains.

<Modification 67>
In the third to seventh embodiments, as the process of using the non-use area 203 y in the RAM 203, the process relating to the character ratio and the base value has been exemplified, but the process is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be various processing except. For example, it may be processing of determining fraudulent activity. In this process of determining the injustice, for example, it is determined whether or not the magnet is approaching or vibrating, or an unnatural entering ball to the winning opening (a entering ball detected despite the state where the big winning opening 65a is closed). A process may be performed to notify when there is an illegal activity. Further, as the process of using the non-use area 203y, a plurality of processes with different functions (objectives) (for example, "process related to feature ratio" and "process for determining fraudulent activity") may be included.

<Modification 68>
In the third to seventh embodiments, the load (LD) instruction is used to save the contents of the register 200 to the external work area 203y1 of the out-of-use area 203y using the load (LD) instruction. The same operation and effect can be obtained by using the store (ST) instruction instead and saving to the outside work area 203y1 of the out-of-use area 203y.

<Modification 69>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, in addition to the real-time base values, three base values (previous base value, last-previous base value, last-previous base value) counted in the past every predetermined period are displayed on the base display device Although the case of displaying in 401 has been described, at least two base values (for example, the last base value and the last second base value) counted for each predetermined period in the past may be displayed together with the real time base value. The four or more base values counted for each predetermined period in the past may be displayed together with the real time base value.

<Modification 70>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the base values measured in a plurality of periods and the base values being measured in real time are displayed on the base display device 401, but instead of the base values, Alternatively, in addition to the base value, the symbol ratio, the continuous symbol ratio, the information related to the symbol ratio or the continuous symbol ratio, and / or the information indicating the other game performances are each measured in a plurality of periods. And those measured in real time may be displayed on the display device.

<Modification 71>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the case where the MPU 201 executes the base value processing (FIG. 41) to display various base values on the base display device 401 has been described. A chip is provided, or a management chip for managing the base value is provided separately from the main controller 110, and the management chip executes processing equivalent to the base value processing to calculate the real time base value while the real time base value is calculated. It is also possible to display the last base value, the last second base value, and the last second base value on the base display device 401. In this case, the management chip may directly control the display of the base display device 401, or the management chip may control the display of the base display device 401 by the MPU 201 via the MPU 201. Also, the base display device 401 may be directly connected to the management chip.

<Modification 72>
The various counters 203j, 203k, 203q, the base value data 2031 to 203o, and the flag 203p shown in FIG. 39A may be stored in the RAM in the management chip. In this case, when the power is turned on while the RAM all erase switch is turned on, the MPU 201 transmits a signal to that effect to the management chip in the start-up process, and the management chip receives the signal. The various counters 203j, 203k, and 203q, the base value data 2031 to 203o, the flag 203p, and the like may be initialized.

<Modification 73>
In addition, when the power is turned on, the management chip may control the base display device 401 to turn on all the segments of the four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d. In this case, the control may be performed immediately after the management chip rises in response to power on, or when the power is turned on, the MPU 201 performs initialization signal to the management chip in the start-up process. , And the control chip may execute the control in the process executed by the management chip in response to the initialization signal.

<Modification 74>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when the previous base value, the last-previous base value, and the second-previous base are displayed on the base display device 401, if there is no effective base value as the base value, the comparison segment is displayed. "-" Is displayed to indicate that there is no valid base value. On the other hand, when there is no effective base value as the previous base value, the last-previous base value, or the last-before-second base, only the real-time base value may be displayed on the base display device 401. This can indicate that there is no valid base value for the previous base value, the last-previous base value, and the last-previous base value. In addition, it is possible to suppress that the previous base value without the effective base value, the last second base value, and the last second base value continue to be displayed in vain. On the other hand, in this case, the real time base value and the previous base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and "-" may be displayed in the comparison segment for the previous base value. This can also indicate that there is no valid base value in the last base value, the last base time value, and the last base time value. Further, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also the last base value, it is possible to suggest that the last base value or the like is also displayed on the base display device 401 after the effective base value is obtained.

<Modification 75>
Also, when there is a valid base value in the previous base value and there is no valid base value as the last two times base value, the only real time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401 You may Also, if there is a valid base value for the last base value and the last base value, and there is no base value valid for the last base, the base display device displays only the real time base value, the last base value and the last base value. It may be displayed on 401. This can indicate that there is no valid base value for base values that are not displayed. In addition, it is possible to suppress continuous display of useless ones that do not have a valid base value.

<Modification 76>
On the other hand, if there is a valid base value in the previous base value and there is no valid base value in the last two times base value, the last real time base value, the last base value and the last second time base value It may be displayed in 401, and "-" may be displayed in the comparison segment as to the base value before the previous time. Also, if there is a valid base value for the last base value and the last base value and there is no valid base value for the last base, the real time base value, the last base value, and the last base value and the last base value The base value and the base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and "-" may be displayed in the comparison segment as to the base value. This can also indicate a type of base value without a valid base value. Further, by displaying one base value of a type having no valid base value, it is possible to suggest that the base value of the type is displayed on the base display device 401 after the valid base value is obtained.

<Modification 77>
In the fifth embodiment, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are set immediately after the power is switched on. Although the case where the period (in the present embodiment, 5 seconds) is turned on has been described, all the segments may be blinked for a predetermined period instead of being turned on. By blinking all the segments, not only can all segments be turned on normally, but also it can be checked whether all segments can be turned off normally, and whether or not the display on the base display device 401 is normally performed. It can be easily determined.

<Modification 78>
In the case of newly launching the pachinko machine 10, for example, when completely launching the pachinko machine 10 in a manufacturing plant, or when moving to a different hole with the used pachinko machine 10 as a second-hand table After the power is turned on while the erase switch is operated, all segments (dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are only for the total number of outs to reach 300 after the power is turned on. ) May be lighted or blinked for a predetermined period (five seconds in the present embodiment). Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the display on the base display device 401 is normally performed at least when the pachinko machine 10 is newly launched. Further, while the lighting is performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up state.

<Modification 79>
Further, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are maintained for a predetermined period (this embodiment). In this case, it may be lighted or blinked for 5 seconds.

<Modification 80>
In the fifth embodiment, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 have a predetermined period (this embodiment). In the above, the case where the control to turn on (or blink) for 5 seconds is performed at a predetermined point (S3007) of the start-up process (see FIG. 40) has been described. It may be performed at any place in For example, the execution of the start-up process may be started and the control may be performed first, or the control may be performed after the initial setting (S601). Alternatively, the control may be performed after the setting of the interrupt permission (S613). In addition, the control may be performed at a place other than the start-up process. For example, in the main process (see FIG. 17) executed after the start-up process ends, the control may be executed before the loop process (S701 to S703) is executed. Further, in the timer interrupt process, for example, in the base value process (see FIG. 41) which is one process of the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process or the base value process is executed for the first time after the power is turned on. It may be determined whether or not it has been executed, and the control may be executed if it is executed for the first time after the power is turned on. That is, after the power is turned on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are turned on (or blink) for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). If possible, this control may be performed at any timing.

<Modification 81>
In the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 completely starts up in a manufacturing plant or when used pachinko machine 10 is moved to a separate hall with a used table. Until the total number of outs reaches 300, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are kept for a predetermined period (every time the power is turned on). In the embodiment, it is turned on for 5 seconds, and then the display of the base display device 401 is made to blink (or turn on) "88." in the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is In the case of displaying in a special display mode different from the usual base value display, in which the display is blinked (or lit), In this case, every time the power is turned on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are lit for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). It is good also as non-execution. In this case, since the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 in the special display mode during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, it can be shown that the displayed base value is not the normal base value. In addition, by the display being performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state.

<Modification 82>
Further, in the fifth embodiment or the modification, as the special display mode displayed on the base display device 401 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period, “88.” blinks (or lights up) in the identification segment. While the mode of displaying the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l blinking (or lighting) on the ratio segment has been described, it is not necessary to be this mode, and the mode of displaying the normal base value The display of the base display device 401 may be performed in a different manner. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up period, “bL.”, “B1.”, “B2.”, “B3.” Are switched and displayed at intervals of 5 seconds while blinking identification segments. The display of the base display device 401 may be performed in a mode in which "-" is displayed in the comparison segment. Thereby, while this display is being performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly launched state. Further, in this aspect, while “bL.” Is displayed in a blinking manner, the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l may be displayed in a blinking or blinking manner in the ratio segment. Thereby, the real time base value at that time can be indicated for reference.

<Modification 83>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, although the probability setting value can be changed in six stages of “1” to “6”, the jackpot probability and / or the collision probability of the second symbol can be changed, but the probability setting value The number of steps that can be changed is not limited to six, and may be changed to any number of steps.

<Modification 84>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments described above, the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol are changed by changing the probability setting value, but when the pachinko machine 10 includes a so-called small jackpot Instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability and / or the jackpot probability of the second symbol, the jackpot probability may be changed. Here, the small hit is a kind of dislodging, when the ball enters the big winning opening 65a opened by the small hit and the ball is paid out, the number of the paid-out balls is also calculated the base value Used for That is, since the base value also changes when the winning probability for small wins is changed, if base value data 203r based on the pre-change probability setting value remains, the base value based on the post-change probability setting value Can not be calculated correctly. Therefore, in this case, the base value data 203r may also be erased among the data of the RAM 203 which is activated in the setting change mode and is performed when the probability setting value is changed. . Thus, the base value based on the changed probability setting value can be calculated correctly.

<Modification 85>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, the case is described where it is confirmed each time the timer interrupt processing is executed whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (range of “1” to “6”). However, this confirmation may be performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth to twelfth embodiments. In addition, this confirmation is performed each time a predetermined trigger comes, such as every time when fluctuation effects are started, every predetermined time (for example, every hour, every time the clock provided in the internal becomes 00 minutes), etc. You may

<Modification 86>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range (range of “1” to “6”) in the timer interrupt processing is confirmed, and the probability setting value is within the normal range. In the case where it is not inside, the case where the game is stopped and the notification to urge the hall personnel etc. to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability setting value has been described, but after the game is stopped The setting change process may be executed to force a person in charge of the hole or the like to change the probability setting value. In this case, a notification sound for prompting a change of the probability setting value may be output, or a notification may be given to the third symbol display device 81 to call a person concerned with a hall. Further, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hole computer 600 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. As a result, the probability setting value can be reset within the normal range by a person in charge of holes and the like.

<Modification 87>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is confirmed whether the RAM determination value is normal or not in the start-up process, and the RAM determination value is normal. If not, it is further confirmed whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, the setting change processing is executed to cause the hall personnel etc. to change the probability setting value. The case was explained. Instead of executing this setting change process, in the voice output device 226 or the third symbol display device 81, a notification prompting the hall official or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability setting value And / or from an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110, to notify hall computer 600 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, and enters an infinite loop. You may do so. As a result, it is possible to change the probability setting value by re-launching the pachinko machine 10 for a person concerned with holes or the like.

<Modification 88>
In addition, when it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range in the start-up process, probability setting of a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") from the range of "1" to "6" It may be forcibly set as a value. If it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, in the timer interrupt process), the probability setting value should not be forcibly set to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent the player from incurring any disadvantage by suddenly changing the jackpot probability and / or the probability of hitting the second symbol during the game.

<Modification 89>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be removed from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before making a determination as to whether the RAM determination value is normal or not (S4009 in FIG. 54), it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if not within the normal range, Perform setting change processing to have the hall personnel etc. change the probability setting value, or urge the hall personnel etc. to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, or it is normal as the probability setting value Specific probability setting values within the range may be forcedly set.

<Modification 90>
Although the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described in the eighth embodiment, the probability setting value may be included from the calculation of the RAM determination value.

<Modified Example 91>
In the fifth embodiment, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power on are selected. Although the case of lighting for a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) has been described, in the sixth to twelfth embodiments, the base display device 401 is provided immediately after the power is turned on whenever the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. All segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d may be lighted or blinked for a predetermined period. However, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on until the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode It may be troublesome to turn on or blink for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, lighting or blinking of all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d may not be performed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, after the setting change processing or the setting commission confirmation processing is executed, lighting or blinking of all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d is performed. May be performed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d are temporarily lighted or blinked for a predetermined period. When the operation is performed, the lighting or blinking may be ended.

<Modification 92>
In the fifth to twelfth embodiments, the identification display segment including the base display device 401 with two 7-segment displays 401a and 401b and the ratio segment including the two 7-segment displays 401c and 401d. Although the case has been described, the identification segment may be configured with one or more seven-segment displays, or the ratio segment may be configured with two or more seven-segment displays.

<Modification 93>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, using the round number notification LED, the LED for notifying the big hit symbol, the LED for notifying the hit symbol, etc. prepared for the first symbol display device 37, or in the entire LED 37a, Although it has been described that the base display device 401 notifies that the setting change display or the setting confirmation display is being performed using the lighting pattern which is not used in the original notification, the first symbol display device Using the round number notification LED, the LED notifying the big hit symbol, the LED notifying the hit symbol, or the like prepared in 37, or using the lighting pattern which is not used in the notification of the entire LED 37a, The base display device 401 may notify that the error history is being displayed.

<Modification 94>
In addition, the first symbol display device 37 is provided with one LED for notifying that setting display and setting confirmation display are being performed on the base display device 401, for example, by lighting the LED The base display device 401 notifies that the setting change display is being performed, and blinks the LED, thereby notifying the base display device 401 that the setting confirmation display is performed. May be In addition, the first symbol display device 37 has an LED for notifying that the setting change display is being performed by the base display device 401, and the setting confirmation display is being performed by the base display device 401. By providing a total of two LEDs with an LED for informing the user and lighting the corresponding LED, thereby informing that the setting display in progress or the setting informing display is being performed on the base display device 401 You may In addition, the first symbol display device 37 is provided with an LED for notifying that an error history is being displayed on the base display device 401, and the LED is turned on to cause an error in the base display device 401. It may be notified that history display is being performed.

<Modification 95>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the probability setting value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all the segments of the 7-segment display 401a, 401b of the identification segment are turned off, or the identification segment is displayed. Although the case where fixed characters are displayed on each of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b in a display mode different from the case where the base display device 401 displays the base value has been described, the probability setting is described. When displaying the value or the error history on the base display device 401, the identification segment may be displayed in any display mode as long as the display mode is different from the case where the base display device 401 displays the base value. For example, a predetermined segment of each 7-segment display 401a, 401b may be displayed in a blinking manner, or each segment of each 7-segment display 401a, 401b may be sequentially displayed or randomly displayed in a blinking manner. In addition, in the identification segment, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed. Also in this case, the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability setting value or the error history is displayed.

<Modification 96>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when displaying the probability setting value or the error history on the base display device 401, all segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment are turned off, or "-" is displayed. However, when displaying the probability setting value or the error history on the base display device 401, the base display device 401 is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment. The display may be performed in any display mode as long as the display mode is different from the case where the base value is displayed on the display unit. For example, a predetermined segment of the 7-segment display 401c may be blinked and displayed, or each segment of the 7-segment display 401c may be lit and blinked sequentially or randomly. Moreover, in the 7-segment display 401c, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed. Also in this case, the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability setting value is displayed.

<Modification 97>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, an example shown in FIG. 50 is exemplified as a display mode in the case of displaying the error history on the base display device 401, and a display mode in the case of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401. The display mode different from the display mode has been described. On the other hand, as a display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, a display mode similar to the display mode shown in FIG. 49 (a) or (b) may be used. In this case, the display mode in the case of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 may be the same as the display mode in the case of displaying the error history on the base display device 401. The probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 when a person in charge of hall or the like starts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The error history is displayed on the base display device 401 when a person in charge of a hall or the like presses the error display button 502. That is, even if the display mode in the case of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 and the display mode in the case of displaying the error history on the base display device 401 are the same display mode, the person concerned with holes etc. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value or an error history based on the operation.

<Modification 98>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 or turning on the setting change switch. Although the case has been described, this may be performed by the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 can be turned from the on state to the setting change position provided in the opposite direction to the off side, and automatically turned on when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position. The setting key 501 is biased to return. Then, every time the setting key 501 is turned from the on state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. Also in this case, the probability setting value can be easily changed.

<Modification 99>
In the sixth and twelfth embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122. The probability setting value may be updated by providing the same setting change switch as above and turning on the setting change switch. Thus, the roles of the RAM erase switch and the setting change switch can be clearly divided, so that the operator can clearly understand the role of each switch.

<Modification 100>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is obtained by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 122. In the above, the case where the switch is determined is described, but it may be possible to operate this by operating a switch provided separately, for example, a setting determination switch. The setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for determining the probability setting value by being operated in the setting change mode, and similarly to the error display button 502, the main substrate is provided from the hole provided in the substrate box 100. It may be provided to be more protruded, and may be operated by a person in charge of a hole or the like without opening the substrate box 100. Also in this case, it is possible to easily determine the probability setting value.

<Modified Example 101>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, when a person in charge of hall or the like starts up in one of the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode in the RAM abnormality, the main controller 110 is operated. In the process of S4215 of the start-up process executed by the MPU 201, it is always determined that it is determined that the RAM is abnormal (S4215: Yes), the process proceeds to S4219, and notification by RAM abnormality setting process S4219) The output (S4220) to the hall computer 600 and the execution of the infinite loop state have been described. On the other hand, in this case, after the notification by the RAM abnormality setting process and the output to the hall computer 600 (S4220) are executed (S4219), the process may shift to the process of S4213 to execute the setting change process. As a result, the probability setting value is surely reset, and by clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally. Further, in this case, since the setting change processing is automatically executed, it is not necessary to restart the pachinko machine 10 again, and it is possible to save the time and effort of the person concerned with the hall and the like.

<Modification 102>
Among the data stored in the RAM 203 in the processing of S4313 of the setting change processing in the eighth to twelfth embodiments, the data used for controlling the game (excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the internal work area 203x1) The predetermined data) is erased (cleared), and the character ratio data 203s stored in the outside work area 203y is erased while the base value data 203r and the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) Although the case of holding without erasing has been described, data used for controlling the game among the data stored in the RAM 203 (stored in the work area 203 x 1 in the same manner as the processing of S 4216 in the start-up process) While deleting (clearing) predetermined data except probability set value data 203x11, the outside work area A character object ratio data 203s stored in y1, the base value data 203 r, (see FIG. 53) the error data 203t and may be held without being erased. That is, the RAM clear after the setting change process and the RAM clear executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode may be the same process.

<Modification 103>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, the start-up mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is only the start-up operation for starting the start-up operation in the setting change mode. However, even in the case of other start-up operations, the case has been described in which the setting change mode is entered, in which the setting change process is executed from the beginning. On the other hand, the setting change process is started only if the start-up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is the start-up operation for starting in the setting change mode. Start up as setting change mode to be executed again, start up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during setting change, other start up modes (normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting confirmation mode) In the case of the start-up operation corresponding to, the MPU 201 may be in an infinite loop state. In this case, the person concerned with the hall, etc. is temporarily turned off, and a notification urging to start again in the setting change mode is issued, or a signal notifying that is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600. You may As a result, it is possible to cause a person in charge of hall or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and reliably reset the probability setting value.

<Modification 104>
Also, if the start-up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is the start-up operation for starting in the setting change mode or the setting check mode (that is, the setting key 501). When the power is turned on, the setting change process is started from the beginning and started as the setting change mode, and the start operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is If it is a start-up operation corresponding to other start-up modes (normal mode, RAM clear mode) (that is, if the setting key 501 is turned off), the MPU 201 is in an infinite loop state. It is also good. In this case, the person concerned with the hall, etc. is temporarily turned off, and a notification urging to start again in the setting change mode is issued, or a signal notifying that is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600. You may As a result, it is possible to have the person in charge of hall or the like restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode after turning on the setting key 501 and reliably reset the probability setting value. . On the other hand, when the start-up operation is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting key 501 is in the on state, and a person in charge of the hall is ready to smoothly update and confirm the probability setting value. There is. Therefore, in this case, the probability setting value can be reliably determined by activating in the setting change mode.

<Modification 105>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the start-up operation for starting in the normal mode, that is, the power is maintained while the setting key 501 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is off. When the start-up operation is performed, the setting change mode is executed in which the setting change process is executed redonely (from one) and executed instead of the normal mode, and the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up is described. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value which was in the middle of updating before the power was turned off last time. In addition, the setting change process that is being executed before the power is turned off may be ignored, and the probability setting value in the middle of updating may be erased, and the pachinko machine 10 may be launched in the normal mode.

<Modification 106>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the start operation for starting in the RAM clear mode, that is, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on with the setting key 501 turned off. In the case of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in which the setting change processing is executed from the beginning (from the top) and executed instead of the RAM clear mode when the start operation of turning on the power is performed. explained. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value which was in the middle of updating before the power was turned off last time. Also, wait until the setting key 501 is turned on, and when the setting key 501 is turned on, wait for the setting key 501 to be turned off, and when the setting key 501 is turned off, stand in the normal mode as it is. It may be raised, or RAM clear may be executed. Also, the setting change process executed before the power is turned off may be ignored, and the probability setting value in the middle of updating may be erased to start the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode. After that, it waits until the setting key 501 is turned on, and when the setting key 501 is turned on, it waits for the setting key 501 to be turned off, and when the setting key 501 is turned off, the game can be executed. It may be It waits until the setting key 501 is turned on, and when the setting key 501 is turned on, the setting change mode which was being executed at the previous power-off by further waiting for the setting key 501 to be turned off is added. It is possible to give hall personnel etc. a feeling that the cancellation of.

<Modification 107>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting change, a start-up operation for starting in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When the start-up operation of turning on the power is performed, the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode has been described as the start-up operation, but wait until the setting key 501 is turned on. When the setting key 501 is turned off, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the normal mode may be started as it is. As a result, it is possible to give hall personnel or the like a feeling that the release of the setting change mode performed at the time of the previous power-off has been cancelled.

<Modification 108>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the start operation for starting in the setting confirmation mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned off. When the startup operation of turning on the power is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed from the beginning (from the top) and not in the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value that was in the middle of updating before the power was turned off last time. In this case, after the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting confirmation process may be executed continuously or the setting confirmation process may be ignored. Further, the setting change process may be ignored, which is performed in the setting confirmation mode and performed before the power is turned off, and the probability setting value in the middle of updating may be deleted.

<Modification 109>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the start-up operation for starting in the normal mode, that is, the power is maintained while the setting key 501 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is off. In the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation process is executed over from the beginning (from one) and executed instead of starting in the normal mode when the start-up operation of inserting The pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the normal mode, ignoring the setting confirmation process that was being performed before the power was turned off.

<Modification 110>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the start operation for starting in the RAM clear mode, that is, turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned off In the case of performing the start-up operation of turning on the power, the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode as described by the hall personnel has been described. However, the setting is not performed in the RAM clear mode. The pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the setting confirmation mode in which the confirmation process is executed from the beginning (starting from the top). In this case, the process waits until the setting key 501 is turned on, and when the setting key 501 is turned on, it waits for the setting key 501 to be turned off and when the setting key 501 is turned off, the RAM is not cleared. Or RAM clear may be executed.

<Modified Example 111>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the start-up operation for starting in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Even when the startup operation of turning on the power is performed, the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode is described as the startup operation, but the setting change mode is ignored and the setting confirmation mode is started May be In addition, after starting in the setting confirmation mode, it may be made to shift to the setting change mode in response to a predetermined operation.

<Modification 112>
In the eleventh embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, at least opening of the inner frame 12 is an essential condition, and additionally, the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 The start-up mode has been set according to the detection mode. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the hole can be selected to allow the opening of the inner frame 12 as the condition for the setting change or the setting confirmation.

  The island facilities of the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is to be installed include "both islands" where the pachinko machine 10 can be installed on both sides of the island facility, and "wall island" where the pachinko machine 10 can be installed only on one side of the island facility, There are various island facilities such as “pillar island” configured to surround the pillar of the hall with “wall island” or “single island” in which one or two pachinko machines 10 can be installed, Depending on island facilities, setting change and setting confirmation may be performed with the inner frame 12 locked. Therefore, depending on the sales form of the hall (island equipment), the inner frame 12 is not necessarily opened to perform setting change or setting confirmation, but setting change or setting confirmation work is performed on the condition that the door opening switch 208g is opened. In such a configuration, the inner frame 12 has to be opened once, and the operation becomes complicated.

  Therefore, if dip switches etc. are provided at parts where employees etc. can not operate (for example, in the main controller 110) etc., and start up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, open the inner frame 12 as an essential condition It may be configured such that a manager of the hall can perform such a decision. With such a configuration, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved while taking into consideration the work efficiency according to each environment of the hall.

<Modification 113>
In the eleventh embodiment, the front frame 14 may be configured so that the employee can not close it freely during maintenance work in which both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened. Specifically, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both opened, the front frame 14 can not be closed to the inner frame 12 unless a dedicated key is inserted by a manager of the hole or the like. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent an employee who does not have the authority to change settings, etc. from arbitrarily closing the front frame 14 at the time of maintenance work, and to disable setting changes or settings confirmation. The security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 114>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper side surface of the lower side projection 92 a of the back pack 92 is in contact with the upper side projection 171 a of the protective cover member 140 and the lower side surface. On the other hand, the upper side surface, the upper side protrusion 171a, and the lower side surface of the lower side protrusion 92a may be engaged with each other. In this case, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the engagement is easily released, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion 92a and the upper side protrusion 171a are engaged with the lower side surface. It is suitable. By configuring in this manner, the security performance on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved without causing a hindrance at the time of maintenance work of the inner frame 12.

<Modification 115>
In the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is attached to the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11 in a cantilever shape. On the other hand, the protective cover member 140 may be attached in a support beam shape at both ends from the right side plate 11 d to the left side plate 11 c. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to improve the security performance of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 with a simple configuration while enhancing the rigidity of the protective cover member 140. In addition, depending on the protective cover member 140, since it does not cover the upper surface or the lower surface of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, it does not interfere with the supply and discharge of the balls, so the pachinko machine 10 adopts the protective cover member 140 in the existing island facility. It is possible to attach the

<Modification 116>
In the ninth embodiment, the cover side protrusion 172 is fixedly formed at the predetermined position of the cover plate 171. On the other hand, the cover side projection 172 may be configured to be separable and attachable from the cover plate 171, and the position of the cover side projection 172 may be changed and adjusted in the cover plate 171. Conventionally, the common pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to change the board of the game board 13 or the like. Here, if the game board 13 attached to the outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the position of the setting unit 100d of the main control device 110 attached to the game board 13 after the replacement may also be changed. is there. In such a case, when the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 does not fit into the setting portion 100 d of the main control device 110, the inner frame 12 may not be able to close. On the other hand, when the game board 13 is replaced and the position of the setting portion 100d of the main control device 110 is changed by configuring the cover side projection 172 so as to be separable and attachable from the cover plate 171. Even in this case, since the cover side projection 172 can be fitted into the setting portion 100d, the cover side projection 172 of the protective cover member 140 and the main control device 110 can be improved while improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to lock the inner frame 12 without interference with the setting unit 100d, and to prevent interference in the conventional distribution form of the pachinko machine 10 as well.

<Modification 117>
In the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is attached to the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11. On the other hand, the protective cover member 140 may be attached to the left side plate 11c, the upper plate 11a, and the lower plate 11b in a cantilever manner. Also in this case, it is preferable to attach the mounting surface 151 of the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 from the inner wall surface of each of the plates 11a to 11c.

<Modification 118>
In the ninth embodiment, the mounting surface 151 of the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 is mounted in contact with the inner wall surface of the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11. On the other hand, the attachment surface 151 may be attached to the outer wall surface of the right side plate 11d, or the cover attachment portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 may be attached so as to be fitted (inserted) inside the right side plate 11d. .

<Modification 119>
In the twelfth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is configured to cover the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111. On the other hand, the protective cover member 140 covers the whole of the control devices 110 and 111, and in addition to the control devices 110 and 111, other control devices (for example, It may be configured to cover part or all of the launch control device 112 and the power supply device 115). By covering many control devices with the protective cover member 140, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration.

<Modification 120>
In the eleventh embodiment, only when the inner frame 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, configuration change or setting confirmation can be performed. In other situations (for example, when the inner frame 12 is not opened, or when the front frame 14 is also opened even if the inner frame 12 is opened), setting change or setting confirmation can not be performed. It was configured. On the other hand, even if the inner frame 12 is not opened, the setting change or the setting confirmation may be performed when the front frame 14 is opened.

<Modification 121>
In the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 122 is mounted on the power supply device 115. On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 122 may be configured to be mounted on the main control unit 110 or the payout control unit 111.

<Modification 122>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper side surface of the lower side projection of the back pack 92 is in contact with the upper side projection and the lower side surface of the protective cover member 140. On the other hand, the upper side surface of the lower side projection of the back pack 92 is engaged with the upper side projection and the lower side surface of the protective cover member 140, and the engagement is released when the cylinder lock 20 is operated. You may

<Modification 123>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper side surface of the lower side projection of the back pack 92 is in contact with the upper side projection and the lower side surface of the protective cover member 140. On the other hand, the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 may be configured to abut or engage with the outermost surface of the main controller 110 or the payout control device 111.

<Modification 124>
In the ninth embodiment, the cover-side protrusion 172 is formed in a wall shape surrounding the setting key 501 in the setting unit 100 d. On the other hand, the cover-side protrusion 172 may be configured by a protrusion that fits in the entire setting portion 100d.

<Modification 125>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper side surface of the lower side projection of the back pack 92 is in contact with the upper side projection and the lower side surface of the protective cover member 140. On the other hand, the back pack 92 is extended to a portion of the dispensing control device 111, and the dispensing control device 111 is mounted on the back side of the back pack 92. Then, a part of the extended back pack 92 may be positioned in the space between the inner frame 12 and the protective cover member 140. With this configuration, even when the back pack 92 is to be opened to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is locked, the opening is interfered by the protective cover member 140. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is locked, it is possible to prevent the sound lamp control device 113 or the like disposed on the inside of the pachinko machine 10 of the back pack 92 from being tampered with.

<Modification 126>
In the ninth to twelfth embodiments, the protective cover member 140 is formed of one member. On the other hand, two or more protective cover members may be attached to the outer frame 11 so as to cover part or all of the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

<Modification 127>
In the above embodiments, the setting key 501 is configured to be able to change the jackpot probability and the like. On the other hand, the number of prize balls (for example, change from 3 to 5) to be paid out when the player wins a prize winning opening by the setting key 501, or the driving of a movable role supporting a prize winning for the winning opening. Time (3 seconds → change to 5 seconds) or drive width (eg change to 20 mm → 30 mm), or a member that influences the flow-down mode of the ball (eg Settings related to the player's level of advantage, such as tilt mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees) or tilt mode for the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees) It may be configured.

<Modification 128>
In the above embodiments, the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the direction of the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured so as to face the lateral direction (left direction or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. May be

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, and the voice lamp control unit 113 instructs the display control unit 114 to display. The command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing output of each sound and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By making these into one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the case where the fluctuation start flag is set to ON whenever it receives a stop type command has been described. When the stop type command is received after the change start flag is set, the change start flag may be set to on. Thereby, when there is no reception of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command is received, it is possible to suppress the execution of a strange fluctuation effect.

  Also, the fluctuation start flag may be set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, a display for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command based on the fact that the variation start flag is turned on. A variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. In this way, without waiting for reception of the stop type command in the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute the fluctuation effect based on the display fluctuation pattern command. Can. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing when the stop type command is received, It may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 236 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame for ending the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 236 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), a V interrupt signal is generated every display of an image of one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the demonstration effect may be to stop and display the third symbol including the main symbol not having the numbers “0” to “9”. Further, the third symbol including the main symbol with numbers or the main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the continuous notice effect may be executed in the third symbol display device 81 where the fluctuation effect is performed, or the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided, and the third symbol is displayed. The continuous notice effect may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device in addition to the change effect performed by the display device 81. In this case, control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, an award winning feature may be provided in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various effects, and the bonus item may be combined with the fluctuation effect and actuated in a predetermined mode to perform continuous advance notice effect. In addition, the continuous announcement effect may be executed by causing the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 to output the sound for the continuous advance announcement effect by the control of the audio lamp control device 113, and the electric decoration portion of the pachinko machine 10 Continuous advance notice effects may be performed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the change effects.

  Thereby, every time when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the prize is operated in a predetermined mode Alternatively, the player can be made to have a feeling of jackpot expectation by outputting a voice from the voice output device 226 or lighting or blinking the lighting units 29 to 33. In addition, the player usually pays attention to the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed and continues playing the game, but the display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 The continuous advance notice effect is performed by the action of the special effects, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33, so that the effect different from the normal is performed for the player. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effects can be easily and easily continued by simple control such as display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, activation of characters, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33. An advance notice can be made.

  In addition, if the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice lamp control device 113, so The main control unit 110 causes the main control unit 110 to perform a determination of acceptance or rejection at the start of the change, causes the voice lamp control unit 113 to perform continuous advance notice effects, and causes the display control unit 114 to perform change effects. In the case of performing the advance presentation, each control device can share each processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so it is possible to suppress the performance required for the MPU of each control device.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the character in the predetermined mode, the voice from the voice output device 226 Continuous advance notice effects may be performed by combining at least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and interlockingly controlling them. As a result, it is possible to execute a more diverse continuous notice effect. In addition, execution method of continuous announcement production (the indication with the 3rd symbol display 81, the indication with the 4th symbol display, the action of the special feature, the voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the electric decoration 29-33) Or, by changing the combination of them, prepare a plurality of continuous notice effect modes to be selected according to the gaming state (15R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, 15R normal big hit, disengagement) after the continuous advance notice effect is over It is also good.

  In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous advance notice effect other than the change effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the continuous advance effect is performed when the change effect is ended. As a stop symbol to be displayed, it may be performed by displaying a so-called "chance" which is a combination of predetermined symbols. In this case, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice command is received in the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27C) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on. The other stop symbol determination flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command processes after the stop identification command process, so the chance eye is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command. Set as a symbol. Therefore, the chance eye can be confirmed and displayed at the time of the change stop. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as the stop symbol for each of the fluctuation effects, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

  In the above embodiment, when there is a winning (start winning) to the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b, the main control unit 110 is the voice lamp control device 113 the number of holding balls added "1" In the case of transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the buffer for the counter with the start winning are included as they are for the ball number command to be notified to The types of counters included in the ball number command may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired along with the start winning, information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified Alternatively, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command different from the hold ball number command to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of these values. Another command may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired along with the start winning, or voice other information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command. The value of each counter acquired along with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. When the value of each counter acquired along with the start winning is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 as another command, the value of each counter to be notified of the command corresponds to a variation effect corresponding to any number of holding times. Information indicating whether it is such may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the information on the number of holding times included in the command, each of the areas included in the command in any of the first to fourth areas of prefetch information corresponding to the number of holding times. The value of the counter can be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 may store the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 themselves indicated by the holding ball number command in the RAM 223 when the holding ball number command is received. , When a ball holding ball number command (or a command for which the value of each counter is indicated) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether the jackpot or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, out A part or all of the outlier type etc. in the case of is determined, and the result of these determinations is replaced with the value of each counter indicated by the command or combined with part or all of the value of the counter You may store in RAM223.

  In each of the above embodiments, regardless of which of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b the ball has won, the main control unit 110 uses the one holding ball number counter 203a to hold the number of holding balls. The case of counting has been described. On the other hand, in the holding ball number counter for the first starting opening corresponding to the first starting opening 64a, the holding sphere number counter for the second starting opening corresponding to the second starting opening 64b, and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It is possible to prepare and count the number of holding balls accompanying the starting winning to the first starting opening 64a and the number of holding balls for the starting winning to the second starting opening 64b separately.

  Moreover, although the said each embodiment demonstrated the case where the largest holding ball number which can be held is set to "4" irrespective of which of the 1st starting opening 64a and the 2nd starting opening 64b a ball has won. The maximum number of holding balls that can be held with the starting winning to the first starting opening 64a and the maximum number of holding balls that can be holding with the starting winning to the second starting opening 64b are separately defined and managed It is also good. For example, the maximum number of holding balls that can be held with the starting winning to the first starting opening 64a is "4", and the maximum number of holding balls that can be holding with the starting winning to the second starting opening 64b is "4" As a certain point, the number of holding balls held with the start winning to the first starting opening 64a is "4", and the number of holding balls held with the starting winning to the second starting opening 64b In a situation where the value is “2”, even if the first start opening 64a has more start-up winnings, the start-up winning is not held, but is held if there is a start-up winning at the second start opening 64b. May be Thereby, the player can be made to recognize the first start opening 64a and the second start opening 64b as separate ones, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, for example, the change effect based on the start winning to the second start opening 64b may be performed preferentially to the change effect based on the start to the first start opening 64a. Alternatively, the change effect based on the start winning to the first start opening 64a may be performed preferentially to the change effect based on the start to the second start opening 64b. As a result, the player can be made to pay more attention to the starting opening on which the change effect is given priority.

  In the embodiment described above, the case where the game board 13 is provided with the first start opening 64a and the second start opening 64b and the two start openings as the start openings for starting the lottery of the big hit when entering the ball However, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the number of starting openings may be one, or three or more. In addition, when there are two or more starting openings, a corresponding holding ball number counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting opening, and for each starting opening, the holding balls reserved with the winning of the corresponding starting opening The number may be counted. Also, for each starting opening, the maximum number of holding balls that can be held with the starting winning combination to the corresponding starting opening may be set.

  In addition, when there are two or more starting openings, the ball holding ball number command that the main control unit 110 transmits to the voice lamp control unit 113 to notify that the holding has been performed along with the winning of the starting opening will be any It may include information indicating whether or not the hold has been made by the winning opening of the. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started may also include information indicating which of the starting ports is the fluctuation effect reserved by the start opening. By this, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each starting opening, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the holding ball number counter for the starting opening indicated in the reserved ball number command If the number of holding balls is set to and the variation pattern command is received, the number of holding balls can be counted for each starting opening by decreasing the number of holding balls counter for the starting opening indicated in the changing pattern command by one.

  In addition, when a plurality of starting openings are disposed in the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 may be notified of the counter value acquired along with the winning on each starting opening (start winning). In this case, the command for the main controller 110 to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired along with the start winning combination is acquired along with the starting winning combination to any starting opening. It may include information indicating whether there is any. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating which fluctuation is accompanied by the start winning to any of the starting openings. . Furthermore, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a preread information storage area is prepared for each starting opening, and each counter value transmitted from the main control unit 110 in association with the starting winning combination to the corresponding starting opening It may be stored in the prefetch information storage area. Thus, every time the variation pattern command is received, the shift process is performed on the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the starting opening that has detected the start winning combination that has triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. it can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the fluctuation effect on hold for each starting opening can be held also in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, if the probability of becoming a big hit, the classification probability of a big hit type, the distribution probability of a bad type, etc. differ depending on the starting opening that has started winning, whether or not it will be a big win for each fluctuation effect in the prefetch processing A jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, an outclassification in the case of an outlier, and the like can be correctly determined on the basis of which starting opening the starting winning combination is made. In addition, when the fluctuation effect based on the starting winning to the starting opening of 1 is performed prior to the fluctuation directing based on the starting winning to the other starting opening, the fluctuation based on the starting winning to the starting opening of 1 The prefetching process can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the effect, and the number of holdings of the fluctuation effect that will be a big hit most recently can be determined correctly.

  Further, when a plurality of starting ports are provided, the voice lamp control device 113 continuously notifies when the value of each counter acquired based on the starting winning to the starting port is received from the main control device 110 by a command. If the start of the effect is determined, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed over all the fluctuation effects (held balls) held at that time regardless of the starting opening where the starting winning combination was made. In addition, in pachinko machines that are provided with a plurality of starting openings, and that perform changing effects for winning in one starting opening prior to changing effects for winning in other starting openings, the priority is given to them. The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined based only on the pre-read result of the counter value acquired for the winning of the starting opening at which the change effect is performed. Thereby, with respect to the fluctuation effect corresponding to the winning to the starting opening with low priority, the presence or absence of the setting of the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not determined, and the continuous advance notice effect is not started for this fluctuation effect. Temporarily, when the advance notice production is started for the fluctuation production corresponding to the winning to the starting opening with low priority, and when the fluctuation production is continuously suspended at the starting opening with high priority, the continuous announcement producing ends easily There is a risk that a situation may occur. On the other hand, in the present modification, the presence or absence of the setting of the execution of the continuous advance presentation effects is not determined with respect to the fluctuation effects corresponding to the winning to the starting opening with low priority. Since it does not start, such a situation can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the number of holding balls stored in the RAM 223 is reduced by 1 (see S1107 in FIG. 26). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variation process performed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 13).
(See S305 in FIG. 13), the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, which is subtracted according to the setting of the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation start process (S307). The ball holding ball number command is set to be transmitted from the control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the variation pattern command. It may be sent. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of holding balls held by the main control device 110. In this case, S1107 in FIG. 26 is omitted. The fluctuation pattern command may also include the value (N) of the holding ball number counter 203a after subtraction. In this case, when the variation pattern command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 may extract the number of holding balls (N) included in the variation pattern command and set the number of holding balls stored in the RAM 223.

  In the above embodiment, the winning and passing of the through gate 67 to the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b are respectively suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is four. There is no limitation, and the number of times may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the maximum number of holding balls may be set separately for the winning of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b by the starting opening, and the maximum holding number of balls at each starting opening is “4 "" May be arbitrary numbers. Moreover, the maximum number of holding balls in each starting opening does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winnings on the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b, the area divided into four or a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, color or lighting pattern) different by the number of holding balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37 It may be configured to notify the number.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are vertically scrolled on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying a design along a predetermined path such as direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols or may be displayed in various ways It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed. In this case, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed to an extent that they can not be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In the slot machine, the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out by the bonus (characters) to the total number of gaming media (coins, medals) paid out during the predetermined period is the bonus ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each combination is realized is stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of the winning balls number table 202e, and is equivalent to the prize ratio management chip or the prize ratio management chip. In the control device that executes the function, the number of winnings established during the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of winnings established during the bonus game, and the duration during the AT The number of roles played may be counted, and the feature ratio and the continuous feature ratio may be managed.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described. Note that the concepts of the various inventions shown below each have a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the concept of the other invention added to the concept of the invention or a part of the configuration of the concept of the other invention or a plurality of parts The concept of the invention may be modified and configured by exchanging with parts.

(Issue 1)
The following gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 To L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, and O1 are made to solve the following problems.

  That is, conventionally, when a game medium is fired by the firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning openings, and the gaming medium has won any of the winning openings, it is determined in advance for the winning openings that have won. There are gaming machines in which a number of gaming media are paid out to a player. Also, some of the winning openings are provided with prizes, and the actuation of the prizes affects the winning of the game medium (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-340046).

  By the way, among the wrongdoers, a character is provided by making the character of the winning opening provided with the character illegally act or guiding the game medium to win the winning opening. There are those who try to increase the number of winning prizes. However, the response to detect such fraud is insufficient.

  The present technical concept is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting a fraud.

(Means and effects 1)
<A group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having a feature activated based on a game;
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. A means for paying out the medium;
Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated in the storage means and stored Storage control means for causing
An output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. A game machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the gaming medium is fired by the firing means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings including the first winning opening having the property activated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means Ru. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out as a result of the winning of the winning opening, the ratio of the thing that is the ratio by the first winning opening (ie, the operation of the bonus) Has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent activity based on the feature ratio.

In the gaming machine A1,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the prize detecting means and the game medium fired by the launching means have won a prize in any one winning opening, the payout is made based on the prize opening on which the game medium has been prized The game machine further comprises main control means for performing main control of the game by setting the number of game media to be played out and notifying the payout means of the number-of-payouts setting means;
A game machine A2 characterized in that the storage means, the storage control means, and the output means are provided in the main control means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the winning detection means and the gaming medium fired by the firing means have won the winning opening in any of the winning openings, the payout is paid out based on the winning opening of the winning for the gaming medium The first control means for setting the number of game media and notifying the payout means of the number of payouts to the main control means for performing main control of the game, relative to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, Storage means for accumulating and storing information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the winning opening; storage control means for accumulating the information and storing the information in the storage means; And output means for outputting at least a signal based on information accumulated and stored in the storage means. Thus, the detection of the winning on the winning opening by the winning detection means, the setting of the number of payouts of the gaming medium based on the detection, and the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the set number of payouts The storage of information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening, and the output of the signal based on the information stored in the storage, are all main control It can be done in a way. Therefore, even if the fraudster tries to prevent the detection of the fraud based on the feature ratio by outputting the fraudulent information from the output means, since the above configuration is completed by the main control means, the fraudulent information Hard to enter. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the detection of the fraud based on the feature ratio by preventing the fraudulent person from outputting the fraudulent information.

In the gaming machine A2,
A game machine A3 characterized in that the main control means is housed in a substrate box in which a box pace and a box cover covering an opening of the box base are connected unopenably.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the main control means is housed in the substrate box in which the box pace and the box cover for covering the opening of the box base are unopenably connected, the fraudster illegally inputs information to the output means. Even if it tries to prevent the detection of fraud based on the feature ratio, it becomes difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the prevention of the detection of the fraud based on the feature ratio by outputting the fraudulent information by the fraudster.

In any of gaming machines A1 to 3,
External device connection means connectable to an external device;
The external device connection means includes external device connection detection means for detecting that the external device is connected,
The output means is based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means with respect to the external device, triggered by the external device connection detection means detecting that the external device is connected. A game machine A4 characterized by outputting a signal.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when an external device is connected to the external device connection means, this is detected by the external device connection means and triggered by the detection, a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means for the external device Is output by the output means. Thus, simply by connecting the external device to the external device connection means of the gaming machine, the payout is made based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means to the external device. Since a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of played game media is output from the gaming machine, there is an effect that it is possible to quickly and easily detect a fraud based on the feature ratio.

In any of gaming machines A1 to 4,
The output means is a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning on the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. A game machine A5 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to 4, the following effects are exerted. That is, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means, and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning on the corresponding winning mouth in each winning opening are output means. Output by Thus, the gaming machine may have received the signal output from the output means, even if the connected gaming machine does not have information on the number of gaming media to be paid out when there is a prize for each winning opening. There is an effect that the feature ratio can be easily analyzed based on the signal output from.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information related to the winnings detected by the winning detection means;
And J. determining means for determining that a predetermined trigger has been canceled.
The storage control means is based on the information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has been delayed. A game is characterized by storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the storage means. Machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to 5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information on the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information related to the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined that the predetermined opportunity is missed by the determination means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the is accumulated and stored in the storing means by the storage control means. Thus, by storing information on the winning combination detected by the winning combination detecting unit in the second storage unit, the winning on the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storage unit without being missed. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time the predetermined opportunity falls, all winnings are reflected, and the winnings for the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying-out means Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine A6,
A game machine A7, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exerted. That is, not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit are output by the output unit. As a result, the information on the winning on the latest winning opening stored in the second storage, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7,
The first winning opening includes a second winning opening having an accessory that operates continuously based on a game,
The storage control means may include information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the second winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Accumulate and store in storage means,
The output means is a game medium paid out based on a winning on the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, which is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number and the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the second winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means And a game machine A8 characterized by outputting.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first winning opening provided in the gaming area includes a second winning opening having a character that operates continuously based on the game, and the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the second winning opening is also stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. And information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means accumulated and stored in the storage means Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the second winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is output. As a result, the ratio of the number of game media that has received the signal output from the output means to the number of game media paid out as a result of winning on the winning opening is the ratio by the first winning opening (that is, the activation of the bonus). It is possible to analyze not only the item ratio but also the continuous item ratio which is the ratio by the second winning opening (ie, the operation of the item when the item operates continuously), the item ratio and There is an effect that fraud detection can be performed more accurately based on the continuous character ratio.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the prize detecting means and the game medium fired by the launching means have won a prize in any one winning opening, the payout is made based on the prize opening on which the game medium has been prized The game machine further comprises main control means for performing main control of the game by setting the number of game media to be played out and notifying the payout means of the number-of-payouts setting means;
The main control means has operation means for executing an operation for performing main control of the game,
At least the prize detection means, the number-of-payouts setting means, the storage control means, and the output means are realized by execution of the calculation by the calculation means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the winning detection means and the gaming medium fired by the firing means have won the winning opening in any of the winning openings, the payout is paid out based on the winning opening of the winning for the gaming medium Calculation that executes the calculation for performing the main control of the game in the main control means having the number-of-payouts setting means for setting the number of game media and notifying the pay-out means, the main control of the game being performed Means are provided. Then, the payout is made based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to at least the number of winning detection means, the number-of-payouts setting means, and the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, accumulated and stored in the storage means. The generation of the information related to the ratio of the number of game media played and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by execution of the calculation by the calculation means. Thus, the detection of winning on the winning opening by the winning detection means, the setting of the number of payouts of the gaming medium based on the detection, the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the set number of payouts (1) The storage control means stores information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning to the winning opening, and the output of the signal based on the information stored in the storage means All can be done by the computing device of the main control means. Therefore, even if the fraudster causes the output means to output the fraudulent information to prevent the fraud detection based on the feature ratio, it becomes difficult to input the fraudulent information. Therefore, the output of the fraudulent information by the fraudster has an effect that the prevention of the fraud detection based on the feature ratio can be more reliably suppressed.

<Group B>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8,
It has the main control means that performs the main control of the game,
The main control means includes operation means for executing an operation to perform main control of the game,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the prize detecting means and the game medium fired by the launching means have won a prize in any one winning opening, the payout is made based on the prize opening on which the game medium has been prized The number-of-payouts setting means for setting the number of game media to be played out and notifying the payout means is realized by execution of the calculation by the calculation means,
A game machine B1 characterized in that the storage control means and the output means are provided on a microchip different from the effect means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means for performing the main control of the game is provided with operation means for executing the operation for performing the control, and either the winning detection means or the game medium fired by the launching means is used. The number-of-payouts setting means for setting the number of gaming media to be paid out based on the winning prize openings for which the gaming media have won when it is detected by the prize detection means that a prize is won in the prize mouth of , It is realized by execution of the operation by the operation main means. On the other hand, storage control for accumulating and storing information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the storage means The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided on a microchip other than the arithmetic means. Thereby, only by providing another microchip, the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be reduced to the first winning opening, without largely rewriting the instruction (program) of the operation executed by the calculation means. There is an effect that it is possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning. Further, the computing means is provided to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load in the game, and most of the processing capability of the computing means can be applied to the main control of the game.

In the gaming machine B1,
A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the microchip is provided in the main control means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the microchip in which the storage control means and the output means and the effect means are provided is provided in the main control means. Thereby, based on the set number of payouts, information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means In the main control means, storage in the storage means and output of a signal based on the information stored in the storage means are performed. Therefore, even if the fraudster causes the output means to output fraudulent information to prevent the detection of fraud based on the feature ratio, the above configuration is completed by the main control means. Difficult to enter Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the detection of the fraud based on the feature ratio by preventing the fraudulent person from outputting the fraudulent information.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2,
A game machine B3 characterized in that the main control means and the microchip are housed together in a substrate box in which a box pace and a box cover covering an opening of the box base are connected unopenably.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the main control means and the microchip are housed in the substrate box in which the box pace and the box cover for covering the opening of the box base are connected unopenably, the unauthorized person can respond to the output means Even if an attempt is made to output fraudulent information to prevent the detection of fraud based on the feature ratio, it becomes difficult to enter fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the prevention of the detection of the fraud based on the feature ratio by outputting the fraudulent information by the fraudster.

In one of the gaming machines B1 to B3,
The main control means
The game apparatus further comprises payout information storage means for storing information on the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning on the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening;
The calculation means executes start-up processing when the main control means is powered on,
The start-up process includes, based on the storage of the payout information storage means, information indicating the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning on the corresponding prize mouth for each prize opening, A game machine B4 including a process for transmitting to the microchip.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means stores in the payout information storage means information on the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning on the corresponding winning hole at each winning opening. In the calculation means, when the main control means is powered on, the start-up process is executed, and in the start-up process, the corresponding winning opening for each winning opening is stored based on the storage of the payout information storage means. Information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize is sent to the microchip. As a result, even if information indicating the number of game media to be paid out for the winning of each winning opening different for each model of gaming machine is not stored in advance in the microchip, the microchip performs main control at the time of power on. Based on the information transmitted from the means, an accessory ratio is calculated, or a signal based on the information is output, and the accessory ratio is compared with that for the signal output from the output means There is an effect that it can be calculated.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4,
A gaming machine B5 characterized in that the microchip includes a second calculation means for performing a calculation to realize the storage control means and the output means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second computing means is provided in the microchip, and the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Storage control means for accumulating and storing related information in the storage means and output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by the operation of the second operation means . As a result, by changing the instruction (program) of the calculation of the second effect means, it is possible to flexibly cope with the function change and the specification change of the storage control means and the output means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4,
A gaming machine B6, wherein the microchip implements the storage control means and the output means by wired logic.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the microchip stores information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means by wired logic. Storage control means for accumulating and storing the information, and output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. Thus, processing such as storing or outputting information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means There is an effect that can be done at high speed.

<C group>
In any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6,
A game machine C1 characterized in that the storage means is configured to be able to hold stored information even while the power is off.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means stored in the storage means is: It is held while power is off. Thereby, regardless of the presence or absence of the power supply to the gaming machine, the gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of the gaming media paid out by the payout means for a long period of time The information related to the ratio of the numbers of can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, since the thing which received the signal output from the output means can analyze the feature ratio of the said game machine over a long period of time, it is effective in the ability to discover also the past fraud.

In the gaming machine C1,
Second storage means that can not hold information while the power is off,
Second storage control means for causing the second storage means to store information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means;
And J. determining means for determining that a predetermined trigger has been canceled.
The storage control means is based on the information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has been delayed. A game is characterized by storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the storage means. Machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information on the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The second storage means can not hold information while the power is off. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information related to the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined that the predetermined opportunity is missed by the determination means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the is accumulated in the storing means by the storage control means. Thus, by storing information on the winning combination detected by the winning combination detecting unit in the second storage unit, the winning on the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storage unit without being missed. . Then, every time the predetermined opportunity is dropped, all winnings are reflected on the basis of the information stored in the second storage means, and the winnings on the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying-out means Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to Also, the storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even while the power is turned off, and generally, a large amount of power is required for writing, it takes time for writing, and durability is achieved. Although the number of times of writing is limited from the viewpoint of quality, the number of times of writing to the storage means can be reduced by configuring as described above, and the occurrence of the above problem of the storage means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C2,
A game machine C3 characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exerted. That is, not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit are output by the output unit. As a result, the information on the winning on the latest winning opening stored in the second storage, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

<D group>
In any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
The storage control means is information related to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. A game machine D1 characterized by accumulating and storing information indicating winning combinations detected by the winning detection means in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the dispensing means by the storage control means, to the storage means Information indicating a winning opening whose winning is detected by the winning detection means is accumulated and stored. Then, a signal based on this information is output. Those that have received the signal output from the output means are based on the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the information indicating the winning opening on which the winning is detected, and the winning on the first winning opening. The number of gaming media paid out can be calculated, and the feature ratio can be analyzed from these numbers. Then, when a suspicious change is recognized in the item ratio, it is possible to deeply investigate the cause based on the information indicating the winning opening where the winning is detected. Therefore, there is an effect that the detection of the fraud based on the property ratio can be performed more reliably.

In the gaming machine D1,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information related to the winnings detected by the winning detection means;
And J. determining means for determining that a predetermined trigger has been canceled.
The storage control means pays out, by the payout means, the information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has been lost. The information is stored in the storage means as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media taken out. The gaming machine D2 to be.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information on the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has been missed, the information related to the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means is relative to the number of game media paid out by the payout means The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage by the storage control unit. Thus, by storing information on the winning combination detected by the winning combination detecting unit in the second storage unit, the winning on the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storage unit without being missed. . The information stored in the second storage means reflecting all winnings is based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying-out means every time the predetermined opportunity is dropped. The information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D2,
A game machine D3 characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit are output by the output unit. As a result, the information on the winning on the latest winning opening stored in the second storage, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3,
The output means is a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning on the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. A game machine D4 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means, and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning on the corresponding winning mouth in each winning opening are output means. Output by Thus, the gaming machine may have received the signal output from the output means, even if the connected gaming machine does not have information on the number of gaming media to be paid out when there is a prize for each winning opening. There is an effect that it is possible to calculate the feature ratio from the information on the winning combination outputted from the and analyze it.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the game medium paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of the game medium paid out by the payout means A ratio calculating means for calculating the ratio of the numbers;
The game machine D5, wherein the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is , Calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means is output by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. As a result, it is not necessary to calculate the ratio (feature ratio) when the signal output by the output means is received, which has the effect of facilitating the analysis of fraudulent activity. Also, in the case where it is intended to calculate the bonus ratio in the signal that has been received by the output means, there is a prize for the corresponding prize opening at each prize opening that is improperly or mistakenly set. Based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means, there is a possibility that the feature ratio is calculated. On the other hand, in the gaming machine D5, since the character ratio is calculated by the ratio calculating means and output, there is an effect that the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be accurately calculated.

In the gaming machine D5,
The output means is a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means A game machine D6 characterized by outputting a signal to indicate.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first signal relative to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, the signal indicating the information on the winning being detected by the prize detection means, accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the ratio calculating means. A signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the winning opening is output by the output means. In this way, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (feature ratio) output from the output means, the cause is searched from the information on the winning combination detected by the winning detection means, which is also output. Has the effect of

<E group>
In any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information related to the winnings detected by the winning detection means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been canceled;
When it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has been missed, the first number of the game media paid out by the payout means is calculated based on the information stored in the second storage means. A ratio calculating unit that calculates a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on a winning on the winning opening;
A game machine E1 characterized in that the storage control means accumulates and stores information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information on the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When it is judged by the judging means that the predetermined opportunity has been canceled, the first winning opening is awarded to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information stored in the second storage means The ratio of the number of game media paid out on the basis is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, information indicating the calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. As a result, the calculated ratio (character-item ratio) is output, and it is not necessary to calculate the ratio (character-item ratio) when the signal output by the output means is received, and analysis of fraudulent activity Has the effect of being able to In addition, when trying to calculate the character ratio by receiving the signal output by the output means, there is a prize for the corresponding prize opening at each prize opening that is improperly or incorrectly set. Although there is a possibility that the character item ratio may be calculated based on the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, the character ratio is calculated by the ratio calculation means and output, so that the character ratio and the continuous prize material are accurately calculated. There is an effect that the ratio can be calculated. Further, since the information indicating the role ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit, the amount of information stored in the storage unit can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity required for the storage unit can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E1,
A game machine E2, characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit are output by the output unit. As a result, the information on the winning on the latest winning opening stored in the second storage, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined. Also, while the information stored in the storage means is the bonus ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means, so the information regarding the winning is used This has the effect of allowing deeper analysis of the cause of the suspected fraudulent situation.

In the game machine E1 or E2,
The output means is a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning on the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. A game machine E3 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are exerted. That is, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means, and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning on the corresponding winning mouth in each winning opening are output means. Output by In this way, when there is a situation where fraudulent behavior is suspected by analyzing the character ratio, the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means is referred to when there is a winning on the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening. The reason is that you can find out the cause of the situation.

<F group>
In any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of gaming media that have won in each winning opening is counted for each winning opening after the predetermined trigger is released and the next predetermined trigger is released, and the number is counted for each winning opening. Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information indicating the number of winning game media
And J. determining means for determining that a predetermined trigger has been canceled.
The storage control means is configured to compare the number of game media paid out by the payout means with the information stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has been lost. A game machine F1 accumulated and stored in the storage means as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of gaming media that have won in each winning opening by the time the next predetermined trigger is dropped after the predetermined trigger is counted by the second storage control means for each winning opening The second storage means stores information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning opening. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has been dropped, the information stored in the second storage means and indicating the game media that has won the prize, counted for each winning opening, is paid out by the payout means. The information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media played is accumulated and stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. Thus, first, the second memory control means counts the winnings detected by the winning detection means for each winning opening, without losing the winnings to the winning openings, and the information stored in the second storage means It can be reflected. And, the game medium paid out by the payout means, the information indicating the number of the winning game media for each winning opening, stored in the second storage means, reflecting all the wins every time the predetermined opportunity is dropped. Can be accumulated and stored in the storage unit as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, since the storage means stores the total number of game media for each winning opening that has won by the time the next predetermined opportunity is released after the predetermined opportunity is dropped, the storage capacity required for the storage means is sufficient. There is an effect that the increase can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media that has won in each winning opening by the time the next predetermined trigger is released after the predetermined trigger is released, it is necessary for the second storage means. There is an effect that it can control that storage capacity increases.

In the gaming machine F1,
A game machine F2, characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exerted. That is, not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit are output by the output unit. Thus, information indicating the number of game media for which each winning opening has won, including the latest winning opening, stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the wrongdoing, including the latest winning situation.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2,
The output means is a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning on the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. A game machine F3 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means, and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning on the corresponding winning mouth in each winning opening are output means. Output by Thus, the gaming machine may have received the signal output from the output means, even if the connected gaming machine does not have information on the number of gaming media to be paid out when there is a prize for each winning opening. There is an effect that it is possible to calculate the feature ratio from the information on the winning combination outputted from the and analyze it.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F3,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the game medium paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of the game medium paid out by the payout means A ratio calculating means for calculating the ratio of the numbers;
A game machine F4 characterized in that the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is , Calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means is output by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. As a result, it is not necessary to calculate the ratio (feature ratio) when the signal output from the output means is received, which has the effect of facilitating the analysis of fraudulent activity. In addition, in the case of trying to calculate the character ratio, in the case of trying to calculate the character ratio, there is a winning to the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening that has been received the signal output from the output means. Based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means, there is a possibility that the feature ratio is calculated. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F4, since the character ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculation means, there is an effect that the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be accurately calculated.

In the gaming machine F4,
The output means is a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means A game machine F5 characterized by outputting a signal to indicate.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exerted. That is, as information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the number of game media that has won in each winning opening after the predetermined timing has passed and the next predetermined timing has been dropped A signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, calculated by the ratio calculating means; Output by By this, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (character-object ratio) output from the output means, the predetermined output which is also output is delayed until the next predetermined output is released. There is an effect that it is possible to search for the cause from the number of game media for each winning opening winning each winning opening.

<G group>
In any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of gaming media that have won in each winning opening is counted for each winning opening after the predetermined trigger is released and the next predetermined trigger is released, and the number is counted for each winning opening. Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information indicating the number of winning game media
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been canceled;
When it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has been missed, the first number of the game media paid out by the payout means is calculated based on the information stored in the second storage means. A ratio calculating unit that calculates a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on a winning on the winning opening;
A game machine G1 characterized in that the storage control means accumulates and stores information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of gaming media that have won in each winning opening by the time the next predetermined trigger is dropped after the predetermined trigger is counted by the second storage control means for each winning opening The second storage means stores information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning opening. When it is judged by the judging means that the predetermined opportunity has been canceled, the first winning opening is awarded to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information stored in the second storage means The ratio of the number of game media paid out on the basis is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, information indicating the calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. As a result, the calculated ratio (character-item ratio) is output, and it is not necessary to calculate the ratio (character-item ratio) when the signal output by the output means is received, and analysis of fraudulent activity Has the effect of being able to In addition, in the case of trying to calculate the character ratio, in the case of trying to calculate the character ratio, there is a winning to the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening that has been received the signal output from the output means. Although there is a possibility that the character item ratio may be calculated based on the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, the character ratio is calculated by the ratio calculation means and output, so that the character ratio and the continuous prize material are accurately calculated. There is an effect that the ratio can be calculated. Further, since the information indicating the role ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit, the amount of information stored in the storage unit can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity required for the storage unit can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media that has won in each winning opening before the next predetermined trigger is released after the predetermined trigger is released, it is necessary for the second storage unit. There is an effect that it can control that storage capacity increases.

In the gaming machine G1,
A game machine G2 characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exerted. That is, not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit are output by the output unit. Thus, information indicating the number of game media for which each winning opening has won, including the latest winning opening, stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the wrongdoing, including the latest winning situation. In addition, while the information stored in the storage means is the character ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is displayed on each winning opening by the time when the predetermined timing is delayed until the next predetermined timing is released. Since the information indicates the number of winning game media, the information can be used to analyze the cause of the suspected fraudulent activity more deeply.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2,
The output means is a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning on the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. A game machine G3 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exerted. That is, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means, and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning on the corresponding winning mouth in each winning opening are output means. Output by As a result, when there is a situation in which the product ratio is analyzed and there is a possibility that cheating is suspected when the signal output from the output means is received, when there is a prize for the corresponding prize opening in each prize opening With reference to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, the cause of the situation can be searched.

<H group>
In any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, and G1 to G3,
Second storage control means for storing, in the second storage means, information relating to the winning combination detected by the winning detection means after the predetermined opportunity is released until the next predetermined opportunity is released;
And J. determining means for determining that a predetermined trigger has been canceled.
The storage control means is based on the information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has been delayed. A game is characterized by storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the storage means. Machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, and G1 to G3, the following effects are exerted. . That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores, in the second storage means, information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means after the predetermined trigger is over and the next predetermined trigger is delayed. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information related to the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined that the predetermined opportunity is missed by the determination means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the is accumulated and stored in the storing means by the storage control means. Thus, by storing information on the winning combination detected by the winning combination detecting unit in the second storage unit, the winning on the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storage unit without being missed. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time the predetermined opportunity falls, all winnings are reflected, and the winnings for the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying-out means Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, since only the information related to the winning combination detected by the winning combination detection unit is stored in the second storage unit after the predetermined trigger is released and the next predetermined trigger is released, the storage capacity of the second storage unit is There is an effect that it can be kept small.

In the gaming machine H1,
A game machine H2, characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit are output by the output unit. As a result, the information on the winning on the latest winning opening stored in the second storage, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2,
A game machine H3 characterized in that the second storage means is configured to be capable of holding stored information even while the power is turned off.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the information stored in the second storage means, which is detected by the prize detection means after the predetermined opportunity is released and before the next predetermined opportunity is released, is held even while the power is turned off. Thereby, it is possible to suppress loss of information on winnings which is stored in the second storage means and is not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means when the power is turned off, and the reliability of the output signal can be reduced. There is an effect that it can be enhanced.

<Group I>
In any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3 and H1 to H3,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information related to the winnings detected by the winning detection means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been canceled;
A power-off detection unit that detects that the power is turned off;
The storage control means stores in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger is overdue and when the power-off detection means detects that the power is turned off. The gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of the gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means. A game machine I1 storing information related to the ratio of the numbers of

  According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, Play the effect of That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information on the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information related to the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined that the predetermined opportunity is missed by the determination means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the is accumulated and stored in the storing means by the storage control means. Furthermore, even when the power-off detection means detects that the power is turned off, the payout means is paid out based on the information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media is accumulated and stored in the storage by the storage control. Thus, by storing information on the winning combination detected by the winning combination detecting unit in the second storage unit, the winning on the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storage unit without being missed. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time the predetermined trigger is deducted, furthermore, even when the power is turned off before the predetermined trigger is deducted, all the winnings are reflected to pay out. Information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the means can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is turned off, it is possible to suppress the loss of information on the winnings which is stored in the second storage means and is not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means, and the gaming media paid out by the payout means There is an effect that more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of.

In the gaming machine I1,
Power supply means capable of supplying power for at least a predetermined period of time after the power is turned off;
A game machine I2 characterized in that the power supply means supplies the power to at least the storage control means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exerted. That is, at least the storage control means is supplied with power by the power supply means for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. Therefore, the storage control means uses the power to detect information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when it is detected that the power is cut off by the power-off detection means. Based on the information, the storage means reliably stores information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Has the effect of

In the gaming machine I2,
A game machine I3 characterized in that the power supply means supplies the power to the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exerted. That is, not only the storage control unit but also the second storage unit is supplied with power by the power supply unit for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. Thus, before the situation stored in the second storage means is erased, the payout means is reliably paid out by the payout means based on the information related to the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. The information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media can be stored in the storage means.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I3,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information related to the winnings detected by the winning detection means;
And J. determining means for determining that a predetermined trigger has been canceled.
The second storage unit is configured to be capable of holding stored information even while the power is turned off.
The storage control means is a winning combination detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when power is supplied and when the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has been released. Storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information relating to A game machine I4 characterized by storing the information.

  According to the gaming machine I4, one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3 is effective. In addition to the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information on the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The information stored in the second storage means is held even while the power is off. Then, based on the information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the power is supplied and when it is determined that the predetermined trigger has come by the judging means, the payout means Information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the storage is accumulated and stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit . Thus, by storing information on the winning combination detected by the winning combination detecting unit in the second storage unit, the winning on the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storage unit without being missed. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, the number of game media paid out by the payout means, reflecting all the winnings when power is supplied and each time the predetermined trigger is released. The storage means can store information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the information on the winning, which is stored in the second storage unit and is not yet reflected in the storage in the storage unit, is reflected on the information stored in the storage unit with certainty after the power supply. It is possible to prevent the loss of the information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of In addition, when it is detected that the power is turned off, if the information is stored in the storage unit based on the information stored in the second storage unit, the power is stored in the middle of the storage of the information in the storage unit. There is a possibility that the supply may be interrupted and all the information stored in the second storage means may not be stored to store the information in the storage means, or the strange information may be stored in the storage means. Since the information is stored in the storage unit based on the information stored in the second storage unit when it is supplied, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

<J group>
In any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I4,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information related to the winnings detected by the winning detection means;
And J. determining means for determining that a predetermined trigger has been canceled.
The storage control means is based on the information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has been delayed. Storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the storage means,
A game machine J1 characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes that the number of game media discharged to the game area has reached a predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine J1, one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, or I1 to I4 In addition to the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information on the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information related to the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined that the predetermined opportunity is missed by the determination means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the is accumulated and stored in the storing means by the storage control means. Thus, by storing information on the winning combination detected by the winning combination detecting unit in the second storage unit, the winning on the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storage unit without being missed. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time the predetermined opportunity falls, all winnings are reflected, and the winnings for the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying-out means Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, since the predetermined opportunity includes that the number of game media launched to the game area has reached a predetermined number, the game media paid out by the payout means while the predetermined game media was launched It is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number (feature ratio). Therefore, since many game media have won various prize winning openings and the payout ratio can be calculated, the averaged bonus ratio can be calculated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the fluctuation of the accessory ratio in a short time in the normal game, and it is possible to more easily analyze the fraud in the one receiving the signal output by the output means.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I4, J1,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information related to the winnings detected by the winning detection means;
And J. determining means for determining that a predetermined trigger has been canceled.
The storage control means is based on the information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has been delayed. Storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the storage means,
A game machine J2 characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes that the current time has reached a predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine J2, any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 In addition to the effects achieved, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information on the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information related to the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined that the predetermined opportunity is missed by the determination means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the is accumulated and stored in the storing means by the storage control means. Thus, by storing information on the winning combination detected by the winning combination detecting unit in the second storage unit, the winning on the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storage unit without being missed. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time the predetermined opportunity falls, all winnings are reflected, and the winnings for the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying-out means Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to Further, since the predetermined timing includes that the current time has reached the predetermined time, the payout means is surely paid out by the arrival of the predetermined time even under the situation where the game is not performed. It is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media (feature ratio). Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to surely analyze the presence or absence of the fraud with respect to the one that has received the signal output from the output means, by the surely calculated accessory ratio.

A game machine A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 or J2,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information related to the winnings detected by the winning detection means;
And J. determining means for determining that a predetermined trigger has been canceled.
The storage control means is based on the information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has been delayed. Storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the storage means,
A game machine J3 characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes that a cumulative time when a game has been played has reached a predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine J3, any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 or J2 In addition to the effects played by kamon, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information on the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information related to the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined that the predetermined opportunity is missed by the determination means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the is accumulated and stored in the storing means by the storage control means. Thus, by storing information on the winning combination detected by the winning combination detecting unit in the second storage unit, the winning on the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storage unit without being missed. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time the predetermined opportunity falls, all winnings are reflected, and the winnings for the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying-out means Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to Further, the predetermined trigger includes that the cumulative time in which the game has been played has reached the predetermined time. Here, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (feature ratio) is essentially that of the game ball It is calculated by conducting a test shot for 10 hours. Information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means is triggered by the fact that the game time has become a predetermined time By storing in the storage means as in the above, it is possible to calculate the feature ratio close to the original definition. Therefore, there is an effect that analysis can be performed using a feature ratio close to the original definition with respect to a signal received from the output means.

A game machine A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information related to the winnings detected by the winning detection means;
And J. determining means for determining that a predetermined trigger has been canceled.
The storage control means is based on the information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has been delayed. Storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the storage means,
A game machine J4 characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes that a cumulative time when power is supplied has reached a second predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine J4, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3. In addition to the effects played by kamon, the following effects are achieved.

  That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information on the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information related to the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined that the predetermined opportunity is missed by the determination means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the is accumulated and stored in the storing means by the storage control means. Thus, by storing information on the winning combination detected by the winning combination detecting unit in the second storage unit, the winning on the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storage unit without being missed. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time the predetermined opportunity falls, all winnings are reflected, and the winnings for the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying-out means Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, since the predetermined time includes that the cumulative time when the power is supplied has reached the second predetermined time, the time when the power is supplied is low even under the situation where the game is not performed very much. The ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means by the predetermined time of 2 being surely Can be calculated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to surely analyze the presence or absence of the fraud with respect to the one that has received the signal output from the output means, by the surely calculated accessory ratio.

A game machine A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4,
It has the main control means that performs the main control of the game,
The main control means includes operation means for executing an operation to perform main control of the game,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the prize detecting means and the game medium fired by the launching means have won a prize in any one winning opening, the payout is made based on the prize opening on which the game medium has been prized The number-of-payouts setting means for setting the number of game media to be played out and notifying the payout means is realized by execution of the calculation by the calculation means,
The storage control means and the output means are provided on a microchip different from the effect means.
The microchip is
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information related to the winnings detected by the winning detection means;
And J. determining means for determining that a predetermined trigger has been canceled.
The storage control means is based on the information on the winnings detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has been delayed. Storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the storage means,
The main control means
A predetermined trigger information storage unit that stores information indicating the predetermined trigger;
The calculation means executes start-up processing when the main control means is powered on,
The start-up process includes a process for transmitting information indicating a predetermined trigger to the microchip based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine J5, any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4. In addition to the effects played by kamon, the following effects are achieved. That is, the main control means for performing the main control of the game is provided with operation means for executing the operation for performing the control, and either the winning detection means or the game medium fired by the launching means is used. The number-of-payouts setting means for setting the number of gaming media to be paid out based on the winning prize openings for which the gaming media have won when it is detected by the prize detection means that a prize is won in the prize mouth of , It is realized by execution of the operation by the operation main means. On the other hand, storage control for accumulating and storing information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the storage means The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided on a microchip other than the arithmetic means. Thereby, only by providing another microchip, the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be reduced to the first winning opening, without largely rewriting the instruction (program) of the operation executed by the calculation means. There is an effect that it is possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning.

  Further, the computing means is provided to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load in the game, and most of the processing capability of the computing means can be applied to the main control of the game. Further, in the microchip, the second storage control unit temporarily stores information on the winning detected by the winning detection unit in the second storage unit. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information related to the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined that the predetermined opportunity is missed by the determination means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the is accumulated and stored in the storing means by the storage control means. Thus, by storing information on the winning combination detected by the winning combination detecting unit in the second storage unit, the winning on the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storage unit without being missed. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time the predetermined opportunity falls, all winnings are reflected, and the winnings for the first winning opening with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying-out means Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to

  On the other hand, in the main control means, the predetermined trigger is stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means. Then, when the main control means is powered on, the calculation means executes the start-up process, and in the start-up process, a predetermined trigger is generated based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means. The indicated information is sent to the microchip. Here, the storage of the information on the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (feature ratio) is Since there is a physical limit to the storage capacity of the storage means for storing information on the ratio, the microchip does not fix the timing of the storage, but takes into consideration the jackpot probability and probability variation rate in the gaming machine, etc. It is preferable that the Therefore, the main control unit stores the predetermined trigger in the predetermined trigger information storage unit, and transmits information indicating the predetermined trigger to the microchip each time the power is turned on. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means at a predetermined opportunity matched to the jackpot probability or probability variation rate in the machine There is an effect that information on the feature ratio can be stored in the storage means.

<K group>
A game machine A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5,
The information processing apparatus further comprises third storage control means for accumulating information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine and storing the information in the third storage means.
A game machine K1 characterized in that the output means outputs information indicating the game state of the game machine stored in the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine K1, any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5. In addition to the effects played by kamon, there are the following effects. That is, the information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine is accumulated by the third storage control means and stored in the third storage means. Information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means is output by the output means. As a result, in the case where a signal output from the output means has been received is a situation in which cheating is suspected, it is possible to analyze the gaming state of the gaming machine and search for the cause.

In the gaming machine K1,
The door frame which covers the front of the said game area is provided,
A gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame is open.

  The gaming machine K2 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the state in which the door frame covering the front of the gaming area is in the open state, the one having received the signal output from the output means There is an effect that it can be judged whether or not there is a possibility that fraudulent acts have been performed from the occurrence situation of the state where the door frame is open.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2,
The gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes an error state of the gaming machine K3.

  The gaming machine K3 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the error state of the gaming machine, those who have received the signal output from the output means are the occurrence status of the error state of the gaming machine Therefore, there is an effect that it can be determined whether there is a possibility that fraud has been committed.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3,
A gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a winning state in which a predetermined gaming value is given to the player.

  The gaming machine K4 has the following effects in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a hit state in which the predetermined gaming value is given to the player, the player who has received the signal output from the output means is There is an effect that it can be judged from the occurrence situation of the hit state of the gaming machine whether or not there is a possibility that the wrongdoing has taken place.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4,
The gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which it is detected by the prize detection means that any winning opening has been won within a predetermined time. A gaming machine K5.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects can be obtained. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which it is detected by the prize detection means that any winning opening has been won within a predetermined time. Therefore, whether or not there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has taken place on the basis of whether or not a state in which a prize has been awarded is included outside business hours such as midnight time zone, for example, when a signal output from the output means is received. It has the effect of being able to determine

<L group>
A gaming machine comprising lottery means for performing a lottery on the basis of establishment of start conditions, and providing an advantageous gaming value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having a feature activated based on a game;
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. A means for paying out the medium;
Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated in the storage means and stored Storage control means for causing
An output unit that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit;
Changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means;
And an erasing unit that erases all the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit when the probability is changed by the changing unit.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings including the first winning opening having the property operated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means Ru. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out as a result of the winning of the winning opening, the ratio of the thing that is the ratio by the first winning opening (ie, the operation of the bonus) Has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent activity based on the feature ratio. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means in the drawing of the drawing means for giving an advantageous game value to the player, the information accumulated and stored in the storing means is deleted. All will be erased by Here, when the winning probability is changed, the feature ratio also changes. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means before the probability of winning is changed remains as it is, the change in the ratio of actors that can be analyzed based on the information accumulated and stored is It becomes unclear whether it is due to a change in the probability of winning or due to fraud. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed, all the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is erased, and the influence of the change in the ratio of prizes as the probability of winning is changed. There is an effect that it is possible to exclude leaving in the storage means.

In the gaming machine L1,
A game machine L2 characterized in that the storage control means stores, in the storage means, information indicating that the change has been made when the probability is changed by the change means.

  The gaming machine L2 has the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L1. That is, when the probability of becoming a hit is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. In this way, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to the probability of winning being changed, and it can be used as a reference for the judgment of whether or not there was fraud. There is.

In the gaming machine L2,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the date and time when the change is made. Gaming machine L3 characterized in that

  The gaming machine L3 has the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L2. That is, when the probability that the change is made is changed by the change means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the date and time when the change was made. Be done. As a result, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to the probability of winning being changed, and the change is made (that is, the deletion is performed). Since the date and time can also be grasped, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there is fraud.

In the gaming machine L2 or L3,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating a probability of becoming a hit after the change. Gaming machine L4 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2 or L3, the following effects can be obtained. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of being hit after the change. Be done. This makes it possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased as the probability of winning is changed, and also to grasp the probability of being hit after the change, so that the change There is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there is a fraud while suppressing the probability of being a hit later.

In any of gaming machines L2 to L4,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating a probability of becoming a hit before the change. Gaming machine L5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L2 to L4, the following effects can be obtained. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of being hit before the change. Be done. This makes it possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased as the probability of winning is changed, and also to grasp the probability of being hit before the change, so that the change There is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there is an illegality while suppressing the probability of the previous win.

<M group>
A gaming machine comprising lottery means for performing a lottery on the basis of establishment of start conditions, and providing an advantageous gaming value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having a feature activated based on a game;
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. A means for paying out the medium;
Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated in the storage means and stored Storage control means for causing
An output unit that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit;
And changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
The gaming machine M1 characterized in that the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is kept held even when the probability is changed by the change means.

  According to the gaming machine M1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings including the first winning opening having the property activated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means Ru. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out as a result of the winning of the winning opening, the ratio of the thing that is the ratio by the first winning opening (ie, the operation of the bonus) Has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent activity based on the feature ratio. On the other hand, in the drawing of the lottery means that gives the player an advantageous game value, all the information stored in the memory means is held even if the probability of winning is changed by the changing means. to continue. As a result, although the combination ratio changes with the change in the probability of winning, it is possible to analyze whether or not the fraud has occurred before the probability of winning is changed.

In the gaming machine M1,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means causes the storage means to store information indicating that the change has been made.

  The gaming machine M2 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1. That is, when the probability of becoming a hit is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the combination ratio is changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and it is possible to refer to the judgment as to whether or not the fraud has occurred.

In the gaming machine M2,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the date and time when the change is made. Game machine M3 characterized in that

  The gaming machine M3 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2. That is, when the probability that the change is made is changed by the change means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the date and time when the change was made. Be done. As a result, since the date and time when the probability of winning becomes changed can be easily grasped, it is possible to analyze that if the feature ratio changes after that, it may be accompanied by the change of probability of winning. There is an effect that it can be easily determined.

In the gaming machine M2 or M3,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating a probability of becoming a hit after the change. Game machine M4 characterized in that

  The gaming machine M4 has the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M2 or M3. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of being hit after the change. Be done. As a result, since the probability of winning after the change can also be grasped, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not the fraud has occurred while suppressing the probability of getting hit after the change.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M4,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating a probability of becoming a hit before the change. Gaming machine M5 characterized in that

  The gaming machine M5 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M2 to M4. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of being hit before the change. Be done. As a result, since it is possible to grasp the probability of winning before the change, it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not the fraud has occurred while suppressing the probability of winning before the change.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M5,
The display device further comprises display means for displaying information relating to the role ratio based on the information stored in the storage means.
When the change of the probability is performed by the change unit, the display unit displays information related to the feature ratio only on the basis of the information stored after the change.

  The gaming machine M6 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M5. That is, on the display means, information related to the role ratio is displayed based on the information stored in the storage means. At this time, when the change of the probability by the change means is performed, the information related to the feature ratio is displayed based only on the information stored after the change. Thereby, with regard to the information relating to the item ratio displayed on the display means, it is possible to exclude the change in the item ratio accompanying the change in the probability of hitting, and it is possible to easily find the fraudulent activity after the change of the probability of hitting. effective.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M6,
A game machine M7 characterized in that the storage control means divides the information for each probability which can be set by the change by the change means, and accumulates and stores the information in the storage means.

  The gaming machine M7 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M6. That is, the information stored in the storage means is divided and stored in the storage means separately for each probability that can be set by the change by the change means. As a result, for each probability that can be set, it is possible to easily determine from the information stored in the storage means the accessory ratio when the probability is set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly switch and analyze the change in the item ratio with the change in the probability of winning and the change in the item ratio with fraud.

<N group>
A gaming machine comprising lottery means for performing a lottery on the basis of establishment of start conditions, and providing an advantageous gaming value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having a feature activated based on a game;
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. A means for paying out the medium;
Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated in the storage means and stored Storage control means for causing
An output unit that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit;
Changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means;
And an erasing unit that erases the information stored in the storage unit accumulated and stored in the storage unit except for a part of the information stored most recently when the probability is changed by the changing unit. A gaming machine N1.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings including the first winning opening having the property activated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means Ru. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out as a result of the winning of the winning opening, the ratio of the thing that is the ratio by the first winning opening (ie, the operation of the bonus) Has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent activity based on the feature ratio. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means in the drawing of the drawing means for giving an advantageous game value to the player, the information accumulated and stored in the storing means is the latest one. It is erased by the erasing means except for a part of the stored information. Here, when the winning probability is changed, the feature ratio also changes. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means before the probability of winning is changed remains as it is, the change in the ratio of actors that can be analyzed based on the information accumulated and stored is It becomes unclear whether it is due to a change in the probability of winning or due to fraud. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed, the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is erased except for the part stored most recently, thereby changing the probability of winning. Therefore, while it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the effect of changing the feature ratio remaining in the storage means, it is possible to analyze whether or not cheating may have been conducted before the probability of winning is changed. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine N1,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means.

  The gaming machine N2 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1. That is, when the probability of becoming a hit is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the feature ratio is changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and the probability of the information stored in the storage means is changed. There is an effect that it can be grasped at the analysis stage that it has been erased, and it can be used as a reference for the judgment as to whether or not the fraud has occurred.

In the gaming machine N2,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the date and time when the change is made. Game machine N3 characterized in that

  The gaming machine N3 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2. That is, when the probability that the change is made is changed by the change means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the date and time when the change was made. Be done. Thereby, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the feature ratio is changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and the probability of the information stored in the storage means is changed. Since it is possible to know at the analysis stage that the deletion has been made and also to know the date and time when the change was made (that is, the deletion was made), it is possible to judge more reliably whether or not there is an irregularity. It has the effect of

In the gaming machine N2 or N3,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating a probability of becoming a hit after the change. Game machine N4 characterized in that

  The gaming machine N4 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2 or N3. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of being hit after the change. Be done. Thereby, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the feature ratio is changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and the probability of the information stored in the storage means is changed. Since it is possible to grasp that it has been erased at the analysis stage and also understand the probability of winning after the change, it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not the fraud has occurred while also suppressing the probability of winning after the change. It has the effect that it can be done.

In any of the gaming machines N2 to N4,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating a probability of becoming a hit before the change. Game machine N5 characterized in that

  The gaming machine N5 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines N2 to N4. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of being hit before the change. Be done. Thereby, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the feature ratio is changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and the probability of the information stored in the storage means is changed. Since it is possible to grasp that it has been erased at the analysis stage, and also to know the probability of winning before the change, it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not the fraud has occurred while also suppressing the probability of winning before the change. It has the effect that it can be done.

<O group>
A gaming machine comprising lottery means for performing a lottery on the basis of establishment of start conditions, and providing an advantageous gaming value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having a feature activated based on a game;
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. A means for paying out the medium;
Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated in the storage means and stored Storage control means for causing
An output unit that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit;
Display means for displaying information relating to the role ratio based on the information stored in the storage means;
Mode switching means for switching to a mode for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means;
And a means for causing the display means to display a value indicating the probability of becoming the hit to be changed, when the mode switching means switches to the mode to be changed;
And setting means for setting, as the probability of becoming the win, the probability of becoming the win, which is displayed on the display means, when the mode of changing the probability of winning is finished. Game machine O1.

  According to the gaming machine O1, the gaming medium is fired by the firing means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings including the first winning opening having the property operated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means Ru. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out as a result of the winning of the winning opening, the ratio of the thing that is the ratio by the first winning opening (ie, the operation of the bonus) Has the effect of being able to analyze and detect fraudulent activity based on the feature ratio. In addition, since the information related to the feature ratio is displayed on the display means based on the information stored in the storage means, it is easily checked whether or not the cheating has taken place by looking at the display of the display means Has the effect of being able to On the other hand, when the mode switching means switches to a mode for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means, the display means displays a value indicating the probability of becoming a win desired to be changed. Then, when the mode for changing the probability of winning is finished, the probability of becoming a winning desired to be displayed displayed on the display means is set by the setting means as the probability of winning. Thus, the display means for displaying information related to the item ratio can be used also as the display means for displaying the probability of becoming a winning to be changed when changing the probability of winning. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of display means mounted on the game machine.

(Issue 2)
The following gaming machines P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, and U2 are made to solve the following problems.

  That is, a RAM (Random Access Memory) used in the main control means for controlling a game is divided into a first storage area used for processing to perform main control of the game and a second storage area used for other processing. There is known a gaming machine configured to protect information that is divided and used in main control of a game from being destroyed by other processing (for example, Japanese Patent No. 6154863).

  On the other hand, there is a need for more appropriate protection from other processes for information used in the process of performing main control of the game.

  The present technical concept is made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of suitably protecting information used in main control of a game.

(Means and effects 2)
<P group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
Operation means for performing an operation;
With multiple registers,
First storage means for storing read / write the first information to be used when the first process for main control of the game is executed by the computing means;
Second storage means for storing read / write second information used when the second storage means is different from the first storage means and the second means different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means When,
The second computing means is stored in the second storage means from the stage where the first means is performing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means Save means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction when moving to a step of executing the second process using information;
From the stage where the second processing is performed using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the first calculation unit stores the first processing in the first storage unit. Returning means for returning the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding register when returning to the step of executing the first process using information; A game machine P1 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine P1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first process for performing main control of the game is executed by the computing means for performing computations, the first information used for the execution of the first process can be read / written so as to be readable and writable It is stored in the storage means. Further, the second information used in the case where the second storage unit is different from the first storage unit in the storage area and the second processing different from the first processing is executed by the computing unit is readable and writable in the second storage unit. It is memorized. Then, from the stage where the computing means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of the register are saved by the save means to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction. On the other hand, from the stage where the computing means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means When returning to the step of executing the first process, the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are returned to the corresponding registers by the return means. As a result, the information stored in the register can be appropriately protected from the information used in the process of performing the main control of the game from the other processes. In addition, since the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage unit by a load instruction or a store instruction, the place to be saved is fixed to the predetermined area, as compared with the case of saving to the stack area. be able to. Therefore, while performing the second process, the register used in the first process is configured by combining the program so as to use the second storage means while clearly avoiding the predetermined area in which the contents of the register are saved. Can securely protect the contents of Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine P1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on an instruction for the arithmetic means.
A game machine P2 characterized in that the save means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the operation means, and a work area for storing information used based on the operation to the operation means, The contents of the register saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, the capacity required for the stack area can be reduced, and the capacity of the work area can be secured large.

In the gaming machine P2,
The computing means is
Stack area designating means for designating the range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specification means, memory clear is performed to clear all the information stored in the second storage means provided with at least the stack area And a game machine P3 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the computing means designates the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area designation means. On the other hand, when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, the information stored in the second storage means provided with at least the stack area is cleared by the memory clear means. Here, from the stage where the computing means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved by the saving means not in the stack area but in the work area. Therefore, the save can suppress the information from being stacked beyond the range designated in the stack area, and can therefore suppress the possibility of clearing all the information stored in the second storage unit. is there.

In any of gaming machines P1 to P3,
A game machine characterized in that the register whose content is evacuated to the predetermined area by the evacuation unit includes a register used when the arithmetic process executes the second process.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the stage in which the register including the register used when the arithmetic process executes the second process executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means by the arithmetic means Are transferred to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means when the operation means shifts to the step of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means . Thus, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the contents immediately before the second process is executed, based on the contents saved in the predetermined area.

  In the gaming machine P4, the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic processing is to execute the second processing. .

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the arithmetic processing unit executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage unit, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing performs the operation When the means moves to the step of executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the save means saves the predetermined area of the second storage means. As a result, only the necessary minimum number of registers can be saved to a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the second processing can be reliably restored.

<Q group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
Operation means for performing an operation;
With multiple registers,
First storage means for storing read / write the first information to be used when the first process for main control of the game is executed by the computing means;
Second storage means for storing read / write second information used when the second storage means is different from the first storage means and the second means different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means When,
The second computing means is stored in the second storage means from the stage where the first means is performing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means Save means for saving the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means when moving to the step of executing the second process using information;
From the stage where the second processing is performed using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the first calculation unit stores the first processing in the first storage unit. Returning means for returning the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding register when returning to the step of executing the first process using information; A game machine Q1 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, a main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first process for performing main control of the game is executed by the computing means for performing computations, the first information used for the execution of the first process can be read / written so as to be readable and writable It is stored in the storage means. Further, the second information used in the case where the second storage unit is different from the first storage unit in the storage area and the second processing different from the first processing is executed by the computing unit is readable and writable in the second storage unit. It is memorized. Then, from the stage where the computing means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of some of the plurality of registers are saved by the saving unit to a predetermined area of the second storage unit. On the other hand, from the stage where the computing means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means When returning to the step of executing the first process, the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are returned to the corresponding registers by the return means. As a result, the information stored in the register can be appropriately protected from the information used in the process of performing the main control of the game from the other processes. In addition, because only a part of the registers is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage unit, the storage capacity necessary for saving the contents of the registers can be kept low, and the capacity of the memory can be reduced. It is possible to enlarge the area for storing the information etc. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine Q1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on an instruction for the arithmetic means.
The game machine Q2 characterized in that the save means saves the contents of the part of the registers to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the operation means, and a work area for storing information used based on the operation to the operation means, The contents of some of the registers saved by the means are saved to a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, the capacity required for the stack area can be reduced, and the capacity of the work area can be secured large.

In the gaming machine Q2,
The computing means is
Stack area designating means for designating the range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specification means, memory clear is performed to clear all the information stored in the second storage means provided with at least the stack area And a game machine Q3 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the computing means designates the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area designation means. On the other hand, when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, the information stored in the second storage means provided with at least the stack area is cleared by the memory clear means. Here, from the stage where the computing means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of some of the registers are saved by the saving means not in the stack area but in the work area. Therefore, the save can suppress the information from being stacked beyond the range designated in the stack area, and can therefore suppress the possibility of clearing all the information stored in the second storage unit. is there.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3,
A game machine Q4 characterized in that the part of the registers whose contents are evacuated to the predetermined area by the evacuation means includes a register used when the arithmetic process executes the second process.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the following effects are exerted. That is, some registers including the registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing execute the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage unit by the arithmetic unit. From the current step to the step of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the save means moves to a predetermined area of the second storage means Be evacuated. Thus, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the contents immediately before the second process is executed, based on the contents saved in the predetermined area.

  In the gaming machine Q4, the part of the registers whose contents are evacuated to the predetermined area by the evacuation means is a register used when the arithmetic process executes the second process. Game machine Q5.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing execute the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage as the partial register. From the current step to the step of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the save means moves to a predetermined area of the second storage means Be evacuated. As a result, only the necessary minimum number of registers can be saved to a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the second processing can be reliably restored.

<R group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
Operation means for performing an operation;
With multiple registers,
First storage means for storing read / write the first information to be used when the first process for main control of the game is executed by the computing means;
Second storage means for storing read / write second information used when the second storage means is different from the first storage means and the second means different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means When,
The second computing means is stored in the second storage means from the stage where the first means is performing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means Save means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register when moving to a stage of executing the second process using information;
From the stage where the second processing is performed using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the first calculation unit stores the first processing in the first storage unit. Returning means for returning the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding register when returning to the step of executing the first process using information; A game machine R1 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine R1, a main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first process for performing main control of the game is executed by the computing means for performing computations, the first information used for the execution of the first process can be read / written so as to be readable and writable It is stored in the storage means. Further, the second information used in the case where the second storage unit is different from the first storage unit in the storage area and the second processing different from the first processing is executed by the computing unit is readable and writable in the second storage unit. It is memorized. Then, from the stage where the computing means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved by the save unit to a predetermined area of the second storage unit by an instruction individual to each register. On the other hand, from the stage where the computing means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means When returning to the step of executing the first process, the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are returned to the corresponding registers by the return means. As a result, the information stored in the register can be appropriately protected from the information used in the process of performing the main control of the game from the other processes. In addition, since each register is evacuated to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction, evacuation is performed to secure that the game processing that performs main control of the game is not affected by the other processing. Only necessary registers can be individually specified and saved. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine R1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on an instruction for the arithmetic means.
A game machine R2 characterized in that the save means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the operation means, and a work area for storing information used based on the operation to the operation means, The contents of the register saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, the capacity required for the stack area can be reduced, and the capacity of the work area can be secured large.

In the gaming machine R2,
The computing means is
Stack area designating means for designating the range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specification means, memory clear is performed to clear all the information stored in the second storage means provided with at least the stack area And a game machine R3 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the computing means designates the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area designation means. On the other hand, when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, the information stored in the second storage means provided with at least the stack area is cleared by the memory clear means. Here, from the stage where the computing means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved by the saving means not in the stack area but in the work area. Therefore, the save can suppress the information from being stacked beyond the range designated in the stack area, and can therefore suppress the possibility of clearing all the information stored in the second storage unit. is there.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3,
A game machine R4 characterized in that the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the save means includes a register used when the arithmetic process executes the second process.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the stage in which the register including the register used when the arithmetic process executes the second process executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means by the arithmetic means Are transferred to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means when the operation means shifts to the step of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means . Thus, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the contents immediately before the second process is executed, based on the contents saved in the predetermined area.

  In the gaming machine R4, the gaming machine characterized in that the register whose contents are evacuated to the predetermined area by the evacuation means is a register used when the arithmetic process executes the second process. .

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the arithmetic processing unit executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage unit, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing performs the operation When the means moves to the step of executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the save means saves the predetermined area of the second storage means. As a result, only the necessary minimum number of registers can be saved to a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the second processing can be reliably restored.

<S group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
Operation means for performing an operation;
With multiple registers,
First storage means for storing read / write the first information to be used when the first process for main control of the game is executed by the computing means;
A second storage unit that stores read / writeably second information used when the second processing related to the feature ratio is executed by the computing unit, the storage area being different from the first storage unit;
The second computing means is stored in the second storage means from the stage where the first means is performing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means Saving means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means when moving to a step of executing the second process using information;
From the stage where the second processing is performed using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the first calculation unit stores the first processing in the first storage unit. Returning means for returning the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding register when returning to the step of executing the first process using information; A game machine S1 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine S1, a main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first process for performing main control of the game is executed by the computing means for performing computations, the first information used for the execution of the first process can be read / written so as to be readable and writable It is stored in the storage means. Further, the second storage means is different from the first storage means in the storage area, and the second information used when the second process related to the feature ratio is executed by the computing means is read / writeably stored in the second storage means . Then, from the stage where the computing means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of the register are saved by the saving means to a predetermined area of the second storage means. On the other hand, from the stage where the computing means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means When returning to the step of executing the first process, the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are returned to the corresponding registers by the return means. As a result, the information stored in the register can be appropriately protected from the processing relating to the feature ratio with respect to the information used in the process of performing the main control of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine S1,
The game machine S2 characterized in that the save means saves the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load command or a store command.

  The gaming machine S2 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1. That is, since the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage unit by a load instruction or a store instruction, the place to be saved is fixed to the predetermined area as compared with the case of saving to the stack area. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine S1 or S2,
A game machine S3 characterized in that the save unit saves the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the second storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the following effects can be obtained. That is, because only a part of the registers is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage unit, the storage capacity necessary for saving the contents of the registers can be kept low, and the capacity of the memory can be reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to enlarge the area for storing the information etc.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3,
The game machine S4 characterized in that the save means saves the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the following effects can be obtained. That is, since each register is evacuated to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction, evacuation is performed to secure that the game processing that performs the main control of the game is not affected by the other processing. There is an effect that only the necessary registers can be individually designated and saved.

<T group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
Operation means for performing an operation;
First storage means for storing read / write the first information to be used when the first process for main control of the game is executed by the computing means;
Second storage means for storing read / write second information used when the second storage means is different from the first storage means and the second means different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means When,
And a stack pointer,
The second process is executed by a program read at a predetermined position of the first process,
The main control means
From the stage where the second processing is performed using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the first calculation unit stores the first processing in the first storage unit. A gaming machine T1 comprising stack pointer setting means for setting the stack pointer to a fixed value when returning to the step of executing the first processing using information.

  According to the gaming machine T1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first process for performing main control of the game is executed by the computing means for performing computations, the first information used for the execution of the first process can be read / written so as to be readable and writable It is stored in the storage means. Further, the second information used in the case where the second storage unit is different from the first storage unit in the storage area and the second processing different from the first processing is executed by the computing unit is readable and writable in the second storage unit. It is memorized. Here, the second process is executed by a program read out at a predetermined position of the first process. Then, from the stage where the computing means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means When returning to the stage of executing the first process, the stack pointer setting means sets the stack pointer to a fixed value. Since the second process is a program read out at a predetermined position of the first process, when execution of the second process is started, the number of pieces of information stacked in the first process is always It is constant. Therefore, a fixed value based on the number of the stacked information is re-executed simply by setting it as the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process. In the first process, the stacked information can be read reliably. Therefore, from the stage where the computing means performs the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means Since it is not necessary to save the value of the stack pointer pointing to the stack area provided in the first storage means used in the first process when moving to the stage of executing the second process, the save Storage capacity can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine T1,
The computing means is a main processing, a loop processing that is executed in the main processing, and a timer division that is executed at a predetermined position of the loop processing when a timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined time is detected. Perform the embedded process, and
A game machine T2 characterized in that the first process and the second process are processes executed in the timer interrupt process.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the main process, the loop process executed in the main process, and the timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined position of the loop process when the timer interrupt generated every predetermined time is detected , Is executed by the computing means. The first process and the second process are executed in the timer interrupt process. Thus, when the execution of the second process is started by the program read out at the predetermined position of the first process, the number of pieces of information stacked in the first process always becomes a fixed number. Therefore, a first fixed value based on the fixed number can be re-executed simply by setting it as the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process. In the processing of (1), the stacked information can be read reliably.

<U group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
Operation means for performing an operation;
With multiple registers,
First storage means for storing read / write the first information to be used when the first process for main control of the game is executed by the computing means;
Second storage means for storing read / write second information used when the second storage means is different from the first storage means and the second means different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic means When,
The second computing means is stored in the second storage means from the stage where the first means is performing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means First fixed value storage means for storing a fixed value in a predetermined register when moving to a step of executing the second process using information;
From the stage where the second processing is performed using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the first calculation unit stores the first processing in the first storage unit. A second fixed value storage unit configured to store the fixed value in the predetermined register when returning to the step of executing the first processing using information; game machine U1.

  According to the gaming machine U1, the main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when the first process for performing main control of the game is executed by the computing means for performing computations, the first information used for the execution of the first process can be read / written so as to be readable and writable It is stored in the storage means. Further, the second information used in the case where the second storage unit is different from the first storage unit in the storage area and the second processing different from the first processing is executed by the computing unit is readable and writable in the second storage unit. It is memorized. Then, from the stage where the computing means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means When moving to the stage of executing the second process, the fixed value is stored in the predetermined register by the first fixed value storage unit. On the other hand, from the stage where the computing means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means When returning to the step of executing the first processing, the fixed value is stored by the second fixed value storage unit in the predetermined register in which the fixed value is stored by the first fixed value storage unit. Thus, from the stage where the computing means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. And when the processing means performs the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the processing means performs the first processing. At the time of returning to the step of executing the first processing using the first information stored in the storage means, the contents of the register can be made identical at first glance. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the first processing for main control of the game is not affected by the second processing performed between the two. Therefore, the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine U1,
The gaming machine U2 characterized in that the fixed value is zero.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1, the following effects are exerted. That is, from the stage where the computing means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means From the time of moving to the stage of executing the second process, and the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means performs the first storage When returning to the step of performing the first process using the first information stored in the means, 0 is stored as the fixed value of the predetermined register. This makes it possible to grasp that this predetermined register is cleared to 0 at first glance.
(Issue 3)
The following gaming machines V1 to V9, W1 to W7, and X1 to X6 are made to solve the following problems.

  Conventionally, when a game medium is fired by the firing means to a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings, and the gaming medium wins any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of winning openings are obtained for the winning openings. There is a gaming machine in which gaming media are paid out to a player (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

  By the way, there are some injustices who make it difficult to win the game media to a predetermined winning opening, or conversely induce the game media to easily win the predetermined winning opening. However, the response to detect such fraud was inadequate.

The present technical concept is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting a fraud.
(Means and effects 3)
<V group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a payout means for dispensing media.
Game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine;
A gaming machine V1 comprising: confirmation display means for performing a confirmation display for confirming for a predetermined period whether or not normal display is possible in the game performance information display means.

  According to the gaming machine V1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. For the game performance display means, a confirmation display for confirming whether or not normal display is possible is performed by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period. Since it is possible to confirm whether the normal display is possible in the game performance display means by this confirmation display, it is possible to judge whether the game performance information displayed on the game performance display means is normal or not. Thus, the presence or absence of the cheating can be determined based on the gaming performance information determined to be normal, so that the cheating can be preferably found.

In the gaming machine V1,
The gaming machine V2 characterized in that the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period when the power is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the power is turned on, a confirmation display for confirming whether or not a normal display can be made on the game performance display means is performed by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period. Thereby, every time the power is turned on, it can be judged whether or not the display of the game performance display means is normal, so that the presence or absence of the cheating can be judged based on the game performance information judged to be normal more accurately There is.

In the gaming machine V1,
A game machine V3 characterized in that the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation means.

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine V1, the following effects can be achieved. That is, when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, a confirmation display for confirming whether normal display is possible on the game performance display means is performed for a predetermined period by the confirmation display means. It will be. Thus, if a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, it can be determined whether or not the display of the game performance display means is normal. Therefore, since the said judgment can be performed by performing predetermined | prescribed operation with respect to a predetermined | prescribed operation means at the time of performing the judgment, it is effective in the ability to detect a fraudulent activity suitably.

In the gaming machine V1,
It comprises a new launch specifying means for identifying that the gaming machine is in a new launch period,
A game machine V4 characterized in that the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period when it is in the new start-up period.

  According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the specifying means specifies that the gaming machine is in a new start-up period, the confirmation display for confirming whether the normal display is possible on the game performance display means is a display for confirmation It is performed for a predetermined period by means. Thereby, when at least the gaming machine is in a new start-up period, it can be determined whether or not the display of the gaming performance display means is normal. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the shipment of the gaming machine in which the display of the game performance display means can not be normally performed.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V4,
A gaming machine V5 characterized by comprising stopping means for stopping the progress of the game during the predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, during the predetermined period in which the display for confirmation is made to be displayed on the game performance information display means by the display means for confirmation, Since the progress is stopped by the stop means, the confirmation display is performed on the game performance display means, and while the game performance information is not displayed, the game proceeds without being able to determine whether or not there is a fraudulent act. Has the effect of being able to

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V4,
A game machine V6 characterized by continuing the progress of the game during the predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the gaming display is also performed during the predetermined period in which the display for confirmation is performed by the display means for confirmation by the display means for confirmation. Since the progress is continued, the confirmation display is displayed on the game performance information display means, whereby it is possible to suppress the waiting of the game.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V6,
The gaming performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment on each segment display,
The gaming machine V7, wherein the confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment displays are lit.

  According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines V1 to V6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment on each segment display. . Then, the confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment displays are lighted. This makes it possible to confirm whether all the segments can be lit normally, and to easily determine whether or not the display of the game performance information display means is normally performed.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V6,
The gaming performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment on each segment display,
The gaming machine V8, wherein the confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment displays are blinked.

  According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines V1 to V6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment on each segment display. . The confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment displays blink. This makes it possible to confirm whether all the segments can be turned on and off normally, and it is possible to easily determine whether or not the display of the game performance information display means is normally performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines V1 to V8, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is such that the number of gaming media discharged to the gaming area is 100, and the gaming state is normally paid A gaming machine V9 characterized in that it is a base value which is the number of gaming media.

  According to the gaming machine V9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines V1 to V8, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the gaming performance information display means displays, as gaming performance information, a base value which is the number of gaming media paid out during a normal gaming state, when the number of gaming media launched to the gaming area is 100 as gaming performance information. Be done. This has the effect of being able to suitably detect fraudulent activity.

<W group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a payout means for dispensing media.
Game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine;
New launch specifying means for identifying that the gaming machine is in a new launch period;
Special display mode display means for displaying the game performance information display means in a special display mode different from the normal time when the new start-up specifying means specifies that the new start-up period is specified; A game machine W1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine W1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. On the other hand, when it is specified by the new launch specifying means that the gaming machine is in the new launch period, the display of the game performance information display means is performed by the special display mode display means in a special display mode different from that at the normal time. It will be. In this way, it is possible to indicate from the game performance information display means displayed in the special display mode that it is currently in a new launch period, and indicate that it is not possible to determine the fraudulent behavior. Has the effect of

In the gaming machine W1,
The gaming performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment on each segment display,
The special display mode is a display mode in which all the segments of the plurality of segment displays are lighted or blinked.

  According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment on each segment display. . The special display mode is a display mode in which all the segments of the plurality of segment displays are lighted or blinked. As a result, all the segments of the plurality of segment displays are lighted or blinked in the game performance information display means, so that it is possible to easily show that it is currently in a new launch period.

In the gaming machine W1 or W2,
The gaming performance information display means
A plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and information is displayed on each segment display by lighting, blinking or extinguishing the individual segments,
Some segment indicators are used to display the gaming performance information, and other segment indicators are identifications for identifying the type of the gaming performance information displayed on the some segment indicators Used to display information,
The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinked in the other segment display device. .

  According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W1 or W2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment on each segment display. . Also, some segment displays are used to display gaming performance information, and other segment displays are identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information displayed on some segment displays. Is used to display the The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinked in the other segment displays. As a result, when information different from the identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information is lit or flickering displayed in another segment display of the gaming performance information display means, it is currently in a new launch period. There is an effect that it can be shown easily.

In the gaming machine W3,
The special display mode is a display mode in which game performance information indicating game performance measured in real time is lit or blinked and displayed on the part of the segment displays.

  According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which game performance information indicating game performance measured in real time is lit or blinked and displayed on some segment displays. As a result, although the regular game performance of the gaming machine can not be measured because it is in a new start-up period, information indicating the game performance measured in real time can be shown as a reference.

The gaming performance information display means
A plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and information is displayed on each segment display by lighting, blinking or extinguishing the individual segments,
Some segment indicators are used to display the gaming performance information, and other segment indicators are identifications for identifying the type of the gaming performance information displayed on the some segment indicators Used to display information,
The special display mode is a display mode in which identification information for identifying a type of the game performance information is blinked and displayed on the other segment display device.

  According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W1 or W2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment on each segment display. . Also, some segment displays are used to display gaming performance information, and other segment displays are identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information displayed on some segment displays. Is used to display the The special display mode is a display mode in which identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information is blinked on another segment display. Thereby, when the identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information is blinked and displayed on another segment display of the gaming performance information display means, it can be easily shown that it is currently in a new launch period. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine W5,
The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the game performance information is lit and displayed in the segment display unit.

  According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the game performance information is lit and displayed in some segment displays. As a result, since it is during the new launch period, it is possible to clearly indicate that the normal gaming performance of the gaming machine can not be measured.

  In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W6, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is normally paid out when the gaming state is normal with respect to the number 100 of gaming media being fired to the gaming area A gaming machine W7 characterized in that it is a base value which is the number of gaming media.

  According to the gaming machine W7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines W1 to W6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming performance information display means displays, as gaming performance information, a base value which is the number of gaming media paid out during a normal gaming state, when the number of gaming media launched to the gaming area is 100 as gaming performance information. Be done. This has the effect of being able to suitably detect fraudulent activity.

<X group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a payout means for dispensing media.
Game performance information acquisition means for acquiring game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine during the predetermined period, for each predetermined period;
Game performance information storage means for storing game performance information acquired by the game performance acquisition means for a plurality of predetermined periods;
A gaming machine X1 comprising: game performance information display means for displaying game performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine X1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Here, for each predetermined period, game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is acquired by the game performance information acquisition means for the predetermined period, and each of the game performance information is played It is stored in the performance information storage means. Then, the game performance information stored in the game performance information storage means and acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, since game performance information in a plurality of predetermined periods is indicated, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been an illegal act, and it is possible to predict to some extent the timing of the illegal act. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect the fraud.

In the gaming machine X1,
The gaming performance acquisition means acquires gaming performance information indicating the performance of the game executed on the gaming machine in real time in the middle of the predetermined period,
The gaming performance information storage means stores the gaming performance information acquired in real time,
The game characteristic information display means displays the game performance information acquired in real time together with the game performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means. A game machine X2 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine X1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming performance information acquiring unit acquires gaming performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine in real time in the middle of a predetermined period, and the gaming performance information acquired in the real time is the gaming performance information storage unit. It is memorized. Then, together with the game performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means, the game performance information acquired in real time is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, since the game performance information acquired in real time is also indicated, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been an illegal act.

In the gaming machine X1,
The gaming performance information storage unit
A first storage area for storing gaming performance information in a previous predetermined period;
At least a second storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period before the second time,
When the predetermined period has elapsed, the gaming performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and during the predetermined period acquired by the gaming performance acquiring means, the gaming machine is A gaming machine X3 storing gaming performance information indicating performance of executed gaming in the first storage area.

  According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming performance information storage means is provided with at least a first storage area for storing gaming performance information in a previous predetermined period and a second storage area for storing gaming performance information in a second predetermined period. . Then, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the gaming performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and is executed in the gaming machine for the predetermined period acquired by the gaming performance acquiring means. Game performance information indicating game performance is stored in the first storage area. Thereby, whenever predetermined time passes, the newly acquired game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage unit in place of the oldest acquired game performance information, and displayed on the game performance information display unit. Ru. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be more judged whether or not there is an illegal act based on the new game performance information.

In the gaming machine X2,
The gaming performance information storage unit
A storage area 0 for storing, by overwriting, the game performance information acquired in real time in the middle of the predetermined period by the game performance acquisition means;
A first storage area for storing gaming performance information in a previous predetermined period;
At least a second storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period before the second time,
When the predetermined period has elapsed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information stored in the zeroth storage area is transferred to the eleventh storage area. A gaming machine X4 characterized by shifting.

  According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X2, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the game performance information storage means, the game performance acquisition means stores the 0th storage area for storing the game performance information acquired in real time in the middle of the predetermined period by overwriting and the game performance information in the previous predetermined period. At least a first storage area to be stored and a second storage area for storing gaming performance information in a predetermined second predetermined period are provided. Then, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the gaming performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the gaming performance information stored in the zeroth storage area is shifted to the first storage area . Thereby, whenever predetermined time passes, the newly acquired game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage unit in place of the oldest acquired game performance information, and displayed on the game performance information display unit. Ru. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be more judged whether or not there is an illegal act based on the new game performance information. The game performance information stored in the zeroth storage area when the predetermined period has elapsed is the game performance information in the predetermined period. By shifting it to the first storage area as it is, there is an effect that it is possible to easily store the game performance information in the previous predetermined period in the first storage area.

In game machine X3 or X4,
A game machine X5 comprising shift processing means for executing shift of game performance information between storage areas in the game performance information storage means using an LDIR command.

  According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X3 or X4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the shift processing means shifts the game performance information between the storage areas in the game performance information storage means by the LDIR command. This has the effect that shift processing can be easily performed with one instruction.

  In any one of the gaming machines X1 to X5, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is such that the number of gaming media discharged to the gaming area is 100, and the gaming state is normally paid A gaming machine X6 characterized in that it is a base value which is the number of gaming media.

  According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines X1 to X5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming performance information display means displays, as gaming performance information, a base value which is the number of gaming media paid out during a normal gaming state, when the number of gaming media launched to the gaming area is 100 as gaming performance information. Be done. This has the effect of being able to suitably detect fraudulent activity.

(Issue 4)
The following gaming machines are shown: 1 to 9; 1 to 7; 1 to 5; 1 to 3; 1 to 2; 2 to 1; 2 to 1; It was made to solve the problem.

  Conventionally, when a game medium is fired by the firing means to a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings, and the gaming medium wins any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of winning openings are obtained for the winning openings. There is a gaming machine in which gaming media are paid out to a player (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

  There are those who make cheating against such games. However, measures to control such cheating have been inadequate.

  This technical thought is made in view of the above-mentioned situation, and it aims at providing a game machine which can perform control of fraudulent behavior suitably.

(Means and effects 4)
<a group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a payout means for dispensing media.
Game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine and game performance information outside information other than the game performance information;
The gaming performance information display means
First display means for displaying the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information;
Second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means;
Means for making the display of the second display means non-display when the game performance information outside information is displayed on the first display means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect a fraud from the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means. Further, by switching the display, game performance information outside information other than the game performance information is also displayed on the game performance information display means. Here, game performance information or information outside the game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and identification information indicating the display content to be displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. Be done. When the game performance information outside information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp that the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information outside information by seeing that the display of the second display means is not displayed.

In the gaming machine A1,
A predetermined determination is performed triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player,
Changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
When the probability of achieving the predetermined result is changed by the change means among a plurality of levels, the game performance information display means is switched to set the probability level as the game performance information outside information to the game performance information display And a display control means for displaying on the means.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exerted. That is, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability that the predetermined result will be obtained is changed by the changing means among the plurality of levels. Then, when the probability that the predetermined result in the predetermined determination is changed by the change means, the display of the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the level of the probability is Is displayed. When the level of probability is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is not displayed. This makes it possible to clearly grasp that the display content displayed on the first display means is the level of the probability of being changed by the change means, seeing that the display of the second display means is not displayed. There is.

In game machine a 1 or a 2,
Error detection means for detecting an error;
Error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means;
Error history display accepting means for accepting display of the history of the error type;
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display acceptance unit, the game performance information display unit is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as the game performance information outside information based on the storage of the error history storage unit. A display control means for displaying on the game performance information display means;

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. In addition, when the display of the history of the error type is accepted by the error history display acceptance means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type as the game performance information outside information is stored in the error history storage means. Is displayed on the game performance information display means. Then, when the history of the error type is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp that the display content displayed on the first display means is the history of the error type, seeing that the display of the second display means is not displayed.

In one of the gaming machines a through a 3,
The second display means includes a segment display composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing the individual segments with respect to the segment display,
A game machine according to claim 4, wherein the means for hiding the display of the second display means is for turning off all the segments of the segment display.

  According to the gaming machine 4, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, the second display means includes a segment display composed of a plurality of segments, and information is displayed by lighting, blinking or extinguishing the individual segments on the segment display. When the game performance information outside information is displayed on the first display means, all the segments of the segment display of the second display means are extinguished, and the display of the second display means is not displayed. This has the effect that the non-display can be performed with simple control.

In one of the gaming machines a through a 4,
The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits;
The gaming machine is
In the case of displaying the game performance outside information on the first display means, the level of the probability is displayed using a part of the plurality of digits, and the display of the remaining digits is the game performance. A game machine 3 comprising means for performing display in a display mode not displaying information.

  According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines 1 to 4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and when displaying information outside the gaming performance on the first display means, a portion of the plurality of digits is used for gaming performance The outside information is displayed, and the display of the remaining digits is performed in a display mode that is not displayed by the display of the game performance information. Thereby, it can be clearly determined whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the game performance outside information also by the display contents of the remaining digits in the first display means. effective.

In the gaming machine 5
In the case of displaying the game performance information on the first display means, a game machine 6 comprising means for displaying the game performance information using all of the plurality of digits.

  According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 5, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the game performance information is displayed using all of the plurality of digits. Thereby, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the game performance outside information according to the display content of the remaining digits.

In the gaming machine 5 or 6,
The means for performing the display of the remaining digits in a display mode not displaying in the display of the gaming performance information is characterized in that the display of the remaining digits is not displayed.

  According to the gaming machine 7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 5 or 6, the following effect is exerted. That is, when displaying the game performance outside information on the first display means, the game performance outside information is displayed using a part of the plurality of digits, and the display of the remaining digits is not displayed. . As a result, the remaining digits are not displayed, which makes it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or game performance out-of-game information. is there.

In the gaming machine 5 or 6,
The means for performing the display of the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the display of the gaming performance information includes fixedly displaying the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine 8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 5 or 6, the following effect is exerted. That is, when displaying game performance outside information on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. Ru. As a result, by the fixed display of the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode, it is clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or game performance outside information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

In the gaming machine 5 or 6,
The means for performing display of the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the display of the game performance information blinks the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine A 9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 5 or A 6, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the game performance non-performing information is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are blinked in a predetermined display manner. Ru. In this way, whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the game performance outside information more clearly by the remaining digits being blinked and displayed in a predetermined display mode It has the effect of being able to judge.

<a group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a payout means for dispensing media.
Game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine and game performance information outside information other than the game performance information;
The gaming performance information display means
First display means for displaying the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information;
And second display means for displaying identification information indicating display contents to be displayed on the first display means.
The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits;
The gaming machine is
In the case of displaying the game performance outside information on the first display means, the level of the probability is displayed using a part of the plurality of digits, and the display of the remaining digits is the game performance. A game machine 1 comprising means for performing a display mode that is not displayed when displaying information.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect a fraud from the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means. Further, by switching the display, game performance information outside information other than the game performance information is also displayed on the game performance information display means. Here, game performance information or information outside the game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and identification information indicating the display content to be displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. Be done. The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and in the case where the game non-performance information is displayed on the first display means, part of the plurality of digits is used for game non-performance information Is displayed, and the display of the remaining digits is performed in a display mode not displayed in the display of the game performance information. Thereby, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content to be displayed on the first display means is game performance information or information outside the game performance based on the display contents of the remaining digits in the first display means. There is.

In the gaming machine i,
In the case of displaying the game performance information on the first display means, a gaming machine 2 comprising means for displaying the game performance information using all of the plurality of digits.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the game performance information is displayed using all of the plurality of digits. Thereby, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the game performance outside information according to the display content of the remaining digits.

In the gaming machine i or i 2,
A predetermined determination is performed triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player,
Changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
When the probability of achieving the predetermined result is changed by the change means among a plurality of levels, the game performance information display means is switched to set the probability level as the game performance information outside information to the game performance information display And a display control means for displaying on the means.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability that the predetermined result will be obtained is changed by the changing means among the plurality of levels. Then, when the probability that the predetermined result in the predetermined determination is changed by the change means, the display of the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the level of the probability is Is displayed. Then, when displaying the level of probability on the first display means, the level of probability is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the display of the remaining digits is displayed in the display of gaming performance information It takes place in a display mode that does not As a result, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or the probability level according to the display contents of the remaining digits in the first display means. is there.

In any of the gaming machines i to i 3,
Error detection means for detecting an error;
Error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means;
Error history display accepting means for accepting display of the history of the error type;
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display acceptance unit, the game performance information display unit is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as the game performance information outside information based on the storage of the error history storage unit. A display control means for displaying on the game performance information display means;

  According to the gaming machine i, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines i to 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. In addition, when the display of the history of the error type is accepted by the error history display acceptance means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type as the game performance information outside information is stored in the error history storage means. Is displayed on the game performance information display means. Then, when displaying the history of the error type on the first display means, the history of the error type is displayed using a part of the plurality of digits, and the display of the remaining digits is a display of gaming performance information The display mode is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or a history of error types according to the display contents of the remaining digits in the first display means. There is.

In one of the gaming machines i to i,
A game machine which is characterized in that the means for performing the display of the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the display of the gaming performance information hides the display of the remaining digits.

  According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines 1 to 4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when displaying the game performance outside information on the first display means, the game performance outside information is displayed using a part of the plurality of digits, and the display of the remaining digits is not displayed. . As a result, the remaining digits are not displayed, which makes it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or game performance out-of-game information. is there.

In one of the gaming machines i to i,
The means for performing the display of the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the display of the gaming performance information includes fixedly displaying the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines 1 to 4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when displaying game performance outside information on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. Ru. As a result, by the fixed display of the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode, it is clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or game performance outside information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 4
The means for performing display of the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the display of the game performance information blinks the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine 7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines 1 to 4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the game performance non-performing information is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are blinked in a predetermined display manner. Ru. In this way, whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the game performance outside information more clearly by the remaining digits being blinked and displayed in a predetermined display mode It has the effect of being able to judge.

<C>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a payout means for dispensing media.
Game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine and game performance information outside information other than the game performance information;
The gaming performance information display means
First display means for displaying the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information;
Second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means;
When the game performance information outside information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. And a game machine c) comprising:

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect a fraud from the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means. Further, by switching the display, game performance information outside information other than the game performance information is also displayed on the game performance information display means. Here, game performance information or information outside the game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and identification information indicating the display content to be displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. Be done. Then, when the game performance information outside information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information by seeing the display of the second display means.

In the gaming machine 1,
A predetermined determination is performed triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player,
Changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
When the probability of achieving the predetermined result is changed by the change means among a plurality of levels, the game performance information display means is switched to set the probability level as the game performance information outside information to the game performance information display And a display control means for displaying on the means.

  According to the gaming machine c, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine c, the following effect is exerted. That is, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability that the predetermined result will be obtained is changed by the changing means among the plurality of levels. Then, when the probability that the predetermined result in the predetermined determination is changed by the change means, the display of the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the level of the probability is Is displayed. Then, when the level of probability is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. Thereby, it can be clearly understood whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the level of the probability of being changed by the change means by looking at the display of the second display means effective.

In the gaming machine c 1 or c 2,
Error detection means for detecting an error;
Error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means;
Error history display accepting means for accepting display of the history of the error type;
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display acceptance unit, the game performance information display unit is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as the game performance information outside information based on the storage of the error history storage unit. A display control means for displaying on the game performance information display means;

  According to the gaming machine c, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine c or c, the following effect is exhibited. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. In addition, when the display of the history of the error type is accepted by the error history display acceptance means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type as the game performance information outside information is stored in the error history storage means. Is displayed on the game performance information display means. Then, when the history of the error type is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the history of the error type by looking at the display of the second display means.

In any of gaming machines 1 to 3
When the game performance information outside information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. A game machine according to a fourth aspect of the present invention is a game machine characterized by fixedly displaying the display of the second display means in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine c, in addition to the effects exhibited by any one of the gaming machines c to c, the following effect is exhibited. That is, when the game performance outside information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is fixedly displayed in a predetermined display manner. As a result, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or game non-game performance information.

In any of gaming machines 1 to 3
When the game performance information outside information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the present invention, the means blinks the display of the second display means in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine c, in addition to the effects exhibited by any one of the gaming machines c to c, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game performance outside information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is blinked in a predetermined display manner. As a result, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or game non-game performance information.

<D group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a payout means for dispensing media.
Gaming performance information indicating performance of a game executed in the gaming machine;
Error detection means for detecting an error;
Error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means;
An error history display accepting unit that receives the display of the history of the error type;
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display acceptance means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is displayed based on the memory of the error history storage means. And display control means for displaying on the game machine d.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect a fraud from the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means. Further, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Then, when the display of the history of the error type is accepted by the error history display acceptance means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type is game performance information based on the storage of the error history storage means. It is displayed on the display means. As a result, the history of the error type can be displayed by one game performance information display means, and there is an effect that the cheating can be suitably found also from the history of the error type.

In the gaming machine 1
A game machine according to claim 2, wherein said display control means continues to display said game performance information on said game performance information display means when an error is detected by said error detection means.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the game performance information is continuously displayed on the game performance information display means by the display control means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to surely detect the fraud from the gaming performance information which continues to be displayed on the gaming performance information display means even if the fraudulent person intentionally causes some error.

In the game machine 1 or 2
The display control means switches the game performance information display means to display the game performance information on the game performance information display means when the display of the history by the error history display acceptance means is finished. A game machine characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the acceptance of the display of the history of the error type by the error history display acceptance means is ended, the display control means switches the game performance information display means, and the game performance information is displayed again on the game performance information display means Ru. Thus, even if the history of the error type is once displayed on the game performance information display means, the game performance information can be displayed again. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the cheating from the game performance information. It has the effect of being able to

<O group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Storage means for storing information on a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed on the game machine;
An output unit that outputs information related to game performance information based on the information stored in the storage unit;
Changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Information related to game performance information affected by the probability is deleted from the information stored in the storage unit when the probability is changed by the change unit, and the game performance information is not affected by the probability And a storage control means for holding information.

  According to the gaming machine o, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Information on a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect the fraudulent activity from the information on the game performance information outputted from the output means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability that the predetermined result will be obtained is changed by the changing means among the plurality of levels. Then, when the probability that the predetermined result is obtained in the predetermined determination is changed by the change means, the information regarding the game performance information affected by the probability is erased by the storage control means among the information stored in the storage means. The information about the game performance information which is not influenced by the probability is held. Therefore, since the information on the game performance information is stored in the storage means at the newly set probability, the information on the game performance information affected by the probability can output the game performance information with high accuracy. On the other hand, since information related to game performance information not affected by the probability is held in the storage unit, it is held in the storage unit even if the fraudster changes the probability in order to conceal the deletion of the fraudulent activity. This has the effect of being able to reliably detect fraudulent acts based on the game performance information that has been made.

In the gaming machine o 1,
Information regarding game performance information affected by the probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine o 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine o 1, the information related to gaming performance information affected by the probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage means, so the probability is changed by the change means In this case, by collectively deleting the predetermined area of the storage means, it is possible to easily delete the information on the game performance information affected by the probability.

<Farm group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Storage means for storing information on a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed on the game machine;
An output unit that outputs information related to game performance information based on the information stored in the storage unit;
A specific determination unit that determines whether the determination is a specific result if the determination is not a predetermined result;
An opening means which does not grant the predetermined gaming value when the specific judgment means judges that the judgment is the specific result, and normally opens one closed winning prize opening for a predetermined time;
Changing means for changing the probability of the specific result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
A storage control means for deleting information stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the change means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Information on a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect the fraudulent activity from the information on the game performance information outputted from the output means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, it gives the player a predetermined gaming value, and the determination is If the result is not a predetermined result, it is determined by the specific determination means whether the determination is a specific result. When it is determined by the specific determination means that the determination is a specific result, a predetermined game value is not given, and one normally closed winning opening is opened by the opening means for a predetermined time. If the game media wins in the opened winning opening, the game media is paid out by the payout means. In addition, the probability that a specific result is obtained in the predetermined determination is changed by the changing unit among the plurality of levels. Then, when the probability is changed by the change means, the information stored in the storage means is erased by the storage control means. Therefore, the information regarding the game performance information is stored in the storage means with the information regarding the game performance information at the newly set probability, so that it is possible to output the game performance information with high accuracy.

In the gaming machine 1
The gaming performance information is a base value.

  According to the gaming machine card 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine card 1, since the gaming performance information is the base value, the information on the gaming performance information is the probability that the information on the base value is newly set. Since it is stored in the storage means, it is possible to output a highly accurate base value.

<Key group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
And display means for displaying the level of the probability.
The display of the level of the probability in the display means is performed only when the power is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine key 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability that the predetermined result will be obtained is changed by the changing means among the plurality of levels. The level of probability is displayed on the display means. The display of the level of the probability in the display means is performed only when the power is turned on. As a result, the level of the probability set in the gaming machine is not displayed unless the power is turned on, so it is difficult for the player to know the level of the probability set in the gaming machine, and the fraudulent action is preferably suppressed. Has the effect of

In the gaming machine 1,
A gaming machine key 2 characterized in that the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine key 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine key 1, the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, so the door of the gaming machine is opened and the back side of the gaming machine is not exposed. , The probability level displayed on the display means can not be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to know the level of probability set in the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine 2,
A door opening detection means for detecting that the locked door of the gaming machine is unlocked and opened;
The display of the level of the probability in the display means is performed on condition that at least the door open detection means detects the opening of the door when the power is turned on. .

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the door opening detection means detects that the door of the locked gaming machine is unlocked and opened. The display of the level of the probability in the display means is performed on condition that at least the door open detection means detects the opening of the door when the power is turned on. Since the unlocking of the door is normally performed by a key managed by the hall side, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to know the level of probability set in the gaming machine.

(Issue 5)
The following game machines 1 to 3, 3 to 1, 6 to 1, 5 to 1, 5, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2, The second, the first, the second, the first, the second, the second to the third, the first to the third, the first and the second are made to solve the following problems.

  Conventionally, when a game medium is fired by the firing means to a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings, and the gaming medium wins any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of winning openings are obtained for the winning openings. There is a gaming machine in which gaming media are paid out to a player (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

  There is a demand to change the probability of winning for such a game. However, there has been insufficient response to change the probability of such a hit.

  This technical thought is made in view of the above-mentioned situation, and aims at providing a game machine which can change a probability suitably.

(Means and effects 5)
Group
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Storage means for storing information used for controlling the game and capable of holding information even while the power is turned off;
An information erase instruction means for instructing deletion of the information stored in the storage means;
A permission means for permitting change or confirmation of the level of the probability by being put into a predetermined state;
When the permission means is brought into a predetermined state, and power is turned on in a state where the information deletion instruction means instructs the deletion of the information, the change means can change the probability level. First mode start-up means for starting in mode;
A second mode enabling confirmation of the probability level when the permission means is brought into a predetermined state and the power is turned on in a state where the information deletion instruction means does not instruct deletion of the information; When the power is turned on in a state in which the information erasing instruction means has given an instruction to erase the information without the two mode startup means and the permitting means being in a predetermined state, the information stored in the storage means Third mode start-up means for starting up in the third mode to be erased;
When the power is turned on in a state where the permission means is not in the predetermined state and the information deletion instruction means does not instruct the deletion of the information, a fourth mode start up is performed in the fourth mode in which the normal start is performed. An upper means;

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability that the predetermined result will be obtained is changed by the changing means among the plurality of levels. Further, the information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information can be held even while the power is turned off. There are provided an information erasure instructing means for instructing erasure of the information stored in the storage means, and a permitting means for changing the level of the probability or permitting the probability by being put into a predetermined state. Then, when the permission means is brought into the predetermined state and the power is turned on in the state where the information deletion instruction means instructs the deletion of the information, the first mode rising means changes the probability level by the change means. It is launched in the first mode to enable. Further, when the permission means is brought into a predetermined state and the power is turned on in a state where the information deletion instruction means does not instruct the deletion of information, the second mode rising means enables confirmation of the probability level It is launched in 2 modes. If the permission means is not in the predetermined state and the power is turned on in the state where the information deletion instruction means instructs the deletion of the information, the information stored in the storage means is generated by the third mode activation means. It is launched in the third mode to erase. In addition, the fourth mode startup means performs a normal startup by the fourth mode startup means when the permission means is not in the predetermined state and the power is turned on in a state where the information deletion instruction means does not instruct the deletion of information. Launched at As a result, by combining the operation of the information erasing instruction means and the permitting means, it is possible to set the start-up mode in an easy-to-understand manner, including the mode in which the probability level can be changed and confirmed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the game machine 1,
A door opening detection means for detecting that the locked door of the gaming machine is unlocked and opened;
In the first mode start-up means, the door open detection means detects that the door is opened, the permission means is brought into a predetermined state, and the information erase instruction means instructs to erase the information. Start-up in a first mode which enables the changer to change the probability level when the power is turned on in the state;
In the second mode start-up means, the door open detection means detects that the door is open, the permission means is brought into a predetermined state, and the information deletion instruction means does not instruct deletion of the information. A game machine 2 characterized by being activated in a second mode which enables confirmation of the probability level when power is turned on in a state.

(Action effect)
According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the door open detection means detects that the door is open, the permission means is brought into a predetermined state, and the information is turned on in a state where the information deletion instruction means instructs deletion of information, The one-mode start-up means can start up in the first mode that enables the changer to change the probability level. In addition, when the door open detection means detects that the door is open, the permission means is put in a predetermined state, and the information is turned on in a state where the information deletion instruction means does not instruct deletion of information, the second The mode launch means is launched in a second mode allowing confirmation of the probability level. Thereby, since the change or confirmation of the probability level is not performed unless the door is opened, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to change or confirm the probability level.

In the game machine 1 or 2,
A gaming machine 3 characterized in that the permission means is constituted by a key, and the predetermined state is a state rotated to a predetermined position by the key.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, the permission means is constituted by a key, and the predetermined state is a state rotated to a predetermined position by the key. Therefore, when activating in the first mode or activating in the second mode, it is necessary to rotate the permission means to a predetermined position by the key. Since the key is managed by the hole side, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to change or confirm the probability level.

<Group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Confirmation means for confirming whether or not the level of the probability is normal each time a predetermined timing arrives;
And a process execution means for executing a predetermined process when the confirmation means confirms that the level of the probability is not normal.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability that the predetermined result will be obtained is changed by the changing means among the plurality of levels. Further, whether or not the level of probability is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means each time the predetermined timing arrives, and when it is confirmed that the level of probability is not normal, the predetermined process is executed by the process execution means Be done. In this way, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, it can be found early, and some action can be taken. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the gaming machine 1,
The predetermined timing is an elapse of a predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, whether or not the level of probability is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means each time a predetermined time passes. Therefore, when the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, there is an effect that it can be detected surely.

In the gaming machine 1,
A game machine 3 characterized in that the predetermined timing is the start of dynamic display of identification information that is executed triggered by establishment of the start condition.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exerted. That is, whether or not the level of probability is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means each time the dynamic display of identification information is started. Therefore, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, there is an effect that it can be surely found before the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 3,
The predetermined process includes a process for notifying that the probability level is abnormal.

  According to the gaming machine 4, in addition to the effect exhibited by any one of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, when it is confirmed that the level of probability is not normal, notification that the level of probability is abnormal is performed, so that the player or the hole side can immediately grasp the state.

In any of gaming machines 1 to 4,
The predetermined process includes a process for stopping a game.

  According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effect exhibited by any one of the gaming machines 1 to 4, the following effect is exerted. That is, when it is confirmed that the level of probability is not normal, the game is stopped, so that it is possible to suppress the disadvantage by the player playing the game at the level of the abnormal probability.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 5,
The predetermined processing includes processing for causing the changing unit to change the level of probability.

  According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines 1 to 5, the following effect is exerted. That is, since it is possible to change the level of probability by the changing means when it is confirmed that the level of probability is not normal, there is an effect that it is possible to return to the game with the level of normal probability.

<Co-group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Confirmation means for confirming whether the probability level is normal or not in the start-up process executed when the power is turned on;
And a process execution means for executing a predetermined process when the confirmation means confirms that the level of the probability is not normal.

  According to the gaming machine core 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. The probability that the predetermined result will be obtained is changed by the changing means among the plurality of levels. Then, in the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, the confirmation means confirms whether the probability level is normal or not and if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the predetermined process is performed. Is executed by the process execution means. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the level of probability has been destroyed, it can be reliably found and any action can be taken. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the gaming machine co 1,
The predetermined process includes a process for notifying that the level of probability is abnormal.

  According to the gaming machine co 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine co 1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is confirmed that the level of probability is not normal, notification that the level of probability is abnormal is performed, so that the player or the hole side can immediately grasp the state.

In the gaming machine co 1 or co 2
The predetermined process includes an infinite loop process.

  According to the gaming machine co 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine co 1 or co 2, the following effects are exerted. That is, since it is infinitely looped when it is confirmed that the level of probability is not normal, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the start processing and the game being played while the level of the probability is abnormal.

In any of gaming machines co 1 to co 3,
The predetermined process includes a process for causing the changing means to change the level of probability.

  According to the gaming machine co 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any one of the gaming machines co 1 to co 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, since it is possible to change the level of probability by the changing unit when it is confirmed that the level of probability is not normal, there is an effect that the start-up process can be completed with the level of normal probability.

In any of gaming machines co 1 to co 3,
The predetermined process includes a process for setting one of the normal levels as the level of the probability.

  According to the gaming machine co 5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any one of the gaming machines co 1 to co 3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is confirmed that the level of probability is not normal, the level of probability is set to one of the normal levels, so that the start-up process can be completed with the level of normal probability. is there.

<Support group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
And a start-up unit that executes processing by the change processing execution unit on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on,
If the processing by the change processing execution unit is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the start-up unit is not yet satisfied even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. A game processing machine 1 characterized by executing processing by the change processing execution means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the processing executed by the change processing execution means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among the plurality of levels. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. In addition, if the process by the change process execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the change means is executed by the start-up means even when the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. Processing by means is performed. As a result, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the probability level can always be changed when the power is subsequently turned on. You can make changes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the gaming machine 1,
If the processing by the change processing execution unit is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the start-up unit may not perform the predetermined condition even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. A game machine 2 characterized in that the process by the change process execution means is executed from the beginning.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the process by the change process execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the change means is executed by the start-up means even when the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. Processing by means is performed from the beginning. As a result, since the probability level can be reset from the beginning, there is an effect that the probability level can be changed with ease.

<Group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Confirmation processing execution means for executing processing enabling confirmation of the set probability level;
When the power is turned on, the processing by the change processing execution means is executed on condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the power is turned on, the second predetermined second different from the predetermined condition And a start-up means for executing the process by the confirmation process execution means on condition that a condition is established.
The start-up unit is in the process of being executed by the change processing execution unit when the power is turned off last time, and the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Even, the gaming machine 1 characterized in that the processing by the change processing execution means is executed.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the processing executed by the change processing execution means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among the plurality of levels. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by the process executed by the confirmation process execution means. Here, the process by the change process execution means is performed under the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the process by the confirmation process execution means is performed when the power is turned on. It is executed by the startup means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. Then, if the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, The raising means executes the processing by the change processing execution means. As a result, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied and the power is turned on, the probability level is always changed if the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. Can change the probability level with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the gaming machine 1,
When the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, when the power supply is turned on, the second predetermined condition is satisfied. Even, the gaming machine server 2 characterized in that the processing by the change processing execution means is executed from the beginning.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, even when the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the process is performed. By the raising means, the process by the change process execution means is executed from the beginning. As a result, since the probability level can be reset from the beginning, there is an effect that the probability level can be changed with ease.

<Group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
First storage means for storing an original probability level when the probability level is changed by processing by the change processing execution means;
And a second storage unit for storing a probability level to be changed by processing by the change processing execution unit.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the processing executed by the change processing execution means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among the plurality of levels. When the probability level is changed by processing by the change processing execution means, the original probability level is stored in the first storage means, and the probability level changed by the processing by the change processing execution means is stored in the second storage means Ru. Thereby, the original probability level is stored in the first storage unit, and the change of the probability level is performed using the second storage unit. Therefore, when the processing is stopped while the processing by the change processing execution unit is being executed, The probability level can be changed again from the original probability level stored in one storage means. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed with confidence, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the gaming machine 1,
A gaming machine 2 characterized in that the first storage means keeps storing the original probability level while the power is turned off.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, since the original probability level stored in the first storage means continues to be held even while the power is turned off, even if the power is turned off during the execution of the processing by the change processing execution means, the power It is possible to redo the change of the probability level from the original probability level stored in the first storage means after the introduction. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed with confidence, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

<Group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
And a start-up unit that executes processing by the change processing execution unit on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on,
The startup means is a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on when the processing by the change process execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. Even when the above is established, the processing by the change processing execution means is executed,
The predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is brought into the first state,
The second predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is brought into a second state different from the first state,
The change processing execution means includes detection means for detecting that the first operation means has been changed from the first state to the second state, and the detection means causes the first operation means to be subjected to the first operation. The gaming machine set 1 characterized in that the changed probability level is determined when a change from the state to the second state is detected.

  According to the gaming machine set 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the processing executed by the change processing execution means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among the plurality of levels. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. In addition, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Even in this case, the process by the change process execution means is executed by the start-up means. As a result, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the probability level is obtained even when the second predetermined condition is satisfied at the time of power on after that. Since it is possible to change the probability level with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. The predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the first state, and the second predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the second state different from the first state. It is. The change processing execution means includes detection means for detecting that the first operation means has been changed from the first state to the second state, and the detection means causes the first state of the first operation means to be changed. Once a change from is detected to a second state, a modified probability level is established. Here, even if the change processing execution means is executed when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the change processing execution means determines that the first operation means is in the second state, and the probability of being changed Instead of determining the level, the detection means determines the changed probability level triggered by the detection of the change from the first state to the second state of the first operation means. Therefore, even if the change processing execution means is executed when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the probability level can be surely changed.

In the gaming machine set 1,
A gaming machine set 2 characterized in that the first operation means is a key.

  According to the gaming machine set 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine set 1, since the first operation means is a key, the probability level can be easily obtained simply by changing the key from the first state to the second state Has the effect of being able to

<Seo group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
And a start-up unit that executes processing by the change processing execution unit on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on,
The start-up means is configured to execute a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on, when the processing by the change process execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. If it is established, an infinite loop state is established.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the processing executed by the change processing execution means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among the plurality of levels. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. In addition, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Is in an infinite loop state. As a result, it is possible to change the probability level by executing the processing by the change processing execution means in the start-up processing, so that the probability level can be changed. You can make level changes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the gaming machine 1
The gaming machine 2 is characterized in that the start-up means includes notification means for giving an instruction for satisfying the predetermined condition and turning on the power when in the infinite loop state.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the start-up means causes an infinite loop state, the notification means gives a notification for instructing to turn on the power by satisfying a predetermined condition. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the power is turned on.

<Group of tasks>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Confirmation processing execution means for executing processing enabling confirmation of the set probability level;
When the power is turned on, the processing by the change processing execution means is executed on condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the power is turned on, the second predetermined second different from the predetermined condition And a start-up means for executing the process by the confirmation process execution means on condition that a condition is established.
The startup means is
If the process by the change process execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on Execute processing by the change processing execution means,
A third predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition when the power is turned on when the process by the change process execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. When the condition is established, an infinite loop state is established.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the processing executed by the change processing execution means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among the plurality of levels. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by the process executed by the confirmation process execution means. Here, the process by the change process execution means is performed under the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the process by the confirmation process execution means is performed when the power is turned on. It is executed by the startup means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. Then, if the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, The raising means executes the processing by the change processing execution means. As a result, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied and the power is turned on, the probability level is always changed if the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. Can change the probability level with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. In addition, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the third predetermined condition in which the predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are different when the power is turned on. If is satisfied, the infinite loop state is established. As a result, it is possible to change the probability level by executing the processing by the change processing execution means in the start-up processing, so that the probability level can be changed. You can make level changes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the gaming machine 1,
The start-up means includes notification means for giving notification to turn on the power when the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the case of the infinite loop state. A game machine 2 to play.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the start-up means causes an infinite loop state, the notification means performs notification to instruct that the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition be satisfied to turn on the power. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp that the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied and the power is turned on.

<a group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
And a start-up unit that executes processing by the change processing execution unit on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on,
The predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is brought into the first state,
The change processing execution means includes detection means for detecting that the first operation means is changed from the second state to the first state, and the second state of the first operation means is changed to the first state. Changing the probability level when a change in is detected,
The gaming machine is
Storage means for storing the previous state of the first operation means;
The detection means refers to the previous state of the first operation means stored in the storage means and the state of the first operation means at that time, and the first operation means is in the second state to the first state To detect whether it has been changed to
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the storage means stores the first state as the state of the first operation means of the previous time until the detection by the detection means is performed for the first time after the power is turned on. .

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the processing executed by the change processing execution means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among the plurality of levels. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, the predetermined condition includes that the first operation means is in the first state. The change processing execution means includes detection means for detecting that the first operation means has been changed from the second state to the first state, and the detection means detects the second state of the first operation means. When a change from 1 to 1 is detected, the level of probability is changed. On the other hand, the previous state of the first operation means is stored in the storage means, and the detection means refers to the previous state of the first operation means stored in the storage means and the state of the first operation means at that time. Thus, it is detected whether the first operating means has been changed from the second state to the first state. Then, in the storage unit, the first state is stored as the previous state of the first operation unit until the detection by the detection unit is performed for the first time after the power is turned on. Thereby, when the first operation means is set to the first state in order to satisfy a predetermined condition when the power is turned on, and the first operation means is kept in the first state until detection by the detection means is performed for the first time Even in this case, since the first state is stored as the state of the previous first operation means in the storage means after the power is turned on until the detection by the detection means is performed for the first time, the first time In the detection of the detection means performed, it can be suppressed that the first operation means is detected to be changed from the second state to the first state. Therefore, even if the first operation means is set to the first state in order to establish a predetermined condition, it is possible to suppress the probability level from being erroneously changed based on it, so that it is possible to preferably change the probability It has the effect of being able to provide a machine.

In the gaming machine 1,
The storage means stores information used to control a game, and can hold information even while the power is turned off.
A gaming machine 2 characterized in that the first operation means instructs deletion of the information stored in the storage means when being brought into the first state.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the storage means stores information used for controlling the game, and can hold information even while the power is turned off, and the first operation means stores the information in the storage means when the first state is made It instructs the deletion of the stored information. Thus, since the probability level can also be changed using the first operation means instructing deletion of the information stored in the storage means, the storage means can be provided without providing a dedicated operation means for changing the probability level. There is an effect that it is possible to change the probability level by using the first operation means for instructing deletion of the information stored in.

<Group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Start-up means for executing the process by the change process execution means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on;
Storage means for storing information used for game control and capable of holding information even while the power is turned off;
When it is determined that the information stored in the storage unit is abnormal, the startup unit sets an infinite loop state;
The gaming machine is
A gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising means for executing a process of monitoring the power-off even in the infinite loop state.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the processing executed by the change processing execution means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among the plurality of levels. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, the information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information is held even while the power is turned off. Here, when it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is abnormal in the start-up means, an infinite loop state is set. As a result, since the probability level changed before the power failure is not held properly, it is possible to suppress the game from being played at the abnormal probability level. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. On the other hand, even in the infinite loop state, the process of monitoring the power-off is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from being more complicated by correctly performing the processing related to the power-off.

In the gaming machine 1,
A gaming machine 2 comprising means for executing a process of updating random numbers used for the predetermined determination even in the infinite loop state.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, even in the infinite loop state, the update process of the random number used for the predetermined determination is executed. This has the effect of being able to continue the process of updating the random numbers as long as the power is kept on.

In game machine 1 or 2,
The game machine tool 3 comprises notification means for giving an instruction for establishing the predetermined condition and turning on the power when the start-up means is in the infinite loop state.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the start-up means causes an infinite loop state, the notification means gives a notification for instructing to turn on the power by satisfying a predetermined condition. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to establish a predetermined condition and turn on the power.

<Te group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
And a start-up unit that executes processing by the change processing execution unit on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on,
The start-up means is characterized in that when it is determined that the player is in a predetermined state, the start-up means performs a process for making the control relating to the game non-execution and notifies the external device of that effect. Game machine 1

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the processing executed by the change processing execution means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among the plurality of levels. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, if it is determined in the start-up means that the player is in the predetermined state, a process for making the control relating to the game non-execution is performed, and that effect is notified to the external device. As a result, by the gaming machine being in the predetermined state, it is possible to suppress that the game is played at an abnormal probability level. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. On the other hand, since the effect is notified to the external device, there is an effect that a person in charge of hall or the like can take some action in response thereto.

In the gaming machine 1,
The predetermined state is a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. A gaming machine 2 characterized in that it is in a state of being established.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. A process for making the control related to the game non-execution is performed, and that effect is notified to the external device. Thereby, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, and the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. There is an effect that it is possible to cause the power supply to be turned on by satisfying a predetermined condition.

In the gaming machine te 1 or te 2,
Storage means for storing information used for game control and capable of holding information even while the power is turned off;
A game machine 3 characterized in that the predetermined state is a state in which information stored in the storage means is abnormal.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, the information used to control the game is stored in the storage means, and the information is held even while the power is turned off. Then, if it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is abnormal, a process for making the control relating to the game non-execution is performed, and that effect is notified to the external device. As a result, when it is determined that the information stored in the storage unit is abnormal when the processing by the change processing execution unit is being executed when the power is turned off last time, some sort of response is performed. It has the effect of being able to

<Group of group>
A game area provided with a number of winning openings,
Launching means for launching game media to the game area;
A winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings and detecting the winning of the gaming medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the gaming medium fired by the launching means has won a prize winning opening, a predetermined number of games are determined for the winning prize opening of the gaming medium. And a dispensing means for dispensing media.
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition and gives a predetermined gaming value to a player if the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Confirmation processing execution means for executing processing enabling confirmation of the set probability level;
When the power is turned on, the processing by the change processing execution means is executed on condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the power is turned on, the second predetermined second different from the predetermined condition Start-up means for executing processing by the confirmation processing execution means on condition that a condition is established;
Interrupt processing means for monitoring whether or not at least the power is turned off based on interrupts generated at predetermined time intervals;
The gaming machine 1 comprises interrupt permission means for permitting the interruption while the process by the change process execution means is performed and while the process by the confirmation process execution means is performed. .

  According to the gaming machine 1, the gaming medium is fired by the launching means to the gaming area provided with the plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of a game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the launching means has won a prize in any one winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming media for the prize opening for which the gaming medium has won is selected. Is paid out by the payout means. Further, this gaming machine performs a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and when the determination is a predetermined result, the predetermined value is given to the player, and the predetermined determination is made. In the processing executed by the change processing execution means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among the plurality of levels. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by the process executed by the confirmation process execution means. Here, the process by the change process execution means is performed under the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the process by the confirmation process execution means is performed when the power is turned on. It is executed by the startup means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. Further, based on interrupts generated at predetermined time intervals, a process of monitoring whether at least the power is turned off is performed by the interrupt processing means. Then, while the process by the change process execution means is executed, and while the process by the confirmation process execution means is executed, the interrupt is permitted by the interrupt permission means. Thus, while the process by the change process execution means is being performed, and while the process by the confirmation process execution means is being performed, it is possible to monitor whether or not the power is turned off. Such processing can be executed. Therefore, when the power is turned on again, the processing corresponding to the situation where the power is turned off is performed while the processing by the change processing execution unit is executed or while the processing by the confirmation processing execution unit is executed. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the gaming machine 1,
A gaming machine 2 comprising interrupt prohibiting means for prohibiting the interruption when the process by the change process execution means is completed or the process by the confirmation process execution means is completed.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the processing by the change processing execution means ends or the processing by the confirmation processing execution means ends, the interruption prohibition means prohibits the interruption. Therefore, in the start-up means, it is possible to suppress unnecessary execution of the interrupt process by the interrupt process means.

<Protective cover that covers the setting key when the inner frame is closed>
Conventionally, in a control device provided on the back side of a gaming machine, the contents of a game value (a probability of winning and / or a hit type, etc .; hereinafter referred to as "setting contents") given to a player according to a game result. Setting means capable of changing the setting of the game machine and setting contents of the gaming machine are divided into a plurality of steps (for example, six steps of setting values “1” to “6”) based on operating the setting means by a person concerned It is configured to be changeable.

  This setting means is provided so as to be exposed toward the back side of the gaming machine when the opening and closing body is closed with respect to the support, and the locking of the opening and closing body is released by persons involved in the hall The setting means is configured to be exposed in the front direction of the gaming machine as the support is turned when it is turned relative to the body. By configuring in this manner, when a person in charge of hall wants to change the setting contents of the gaming machine, it is possible to immediately insert the setting change key into the setting means by rotating the opening / closing member. The setting change operation of the gaming machine can be performed quickly.

  In addition, the hall is provided with an island facility that incorporates an automatic ball feeder and the like in a closed predetermined space, and the island facility can be installed by attaching the support of the gaming machine to both sides in the long side direction of the island facility. A plurality of game machines can be installed on the Then, the person concerned with the hall releases the lock between the opening and closing body of each gaming machine installed on the island facility and the support outside the business hours of the hall, and opens and closes the opening and closing body with respect to the support (island facility). Open and perform setting change work and maintenance work of each gaming machine.

  However, when the setting means is configured to be exposed on the back side of the gaming machine, for example, in a situation where the gaming machine is installed on one long side of the island facility of the hall, the length at which the gaming machine is installed If the opening / closing body of another gaming machine installed on the other long side (that is, the back side of the gaming machine) which is not the side is opened for some reason (for example, a fraud etc.), the game The setting means provided so as to be exposed on the back side of the machine can be operated directly. As a result, even when the opening / closing body of the gaming machine is not opened, the setting means of the gaming machine can be directly operated by opening the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine, and the setting means The unauthorized operation of the setting changes the setting contents, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage in the hole.

  Here, as in the slot machine, there is also conceivable a structure in which the entire back side of the gaming machine is covered with a housing structure to prevent fraudulent action from the back side of the gaming machine to setting means of the control device. Unlike the slot machine, in the case of the slot machine, it is necessary to replenish the game balls from the upper side of the island facility and to discharge the discharge balls (out balls). Therefore, if the back side of the gaming machine is covered with a housing structure, a complicated structure for supplying and discharging gaming balls is required, and the manufacturing cost is increased due to the housing structure and the replenishment and discharging structure. There is a risk of

  In addition, in the island equipment, when considering the wiring connection with the card sand device disposed adjacent to the left side of the gaming machine and the connection wiring with the power supply, the back structure of the gaming machine, in particular, the right side It is desirable that the structure on the left side in the front view is configured to be opened to some extent and is easily wired and connected to the above-described device or the like.

  The invention of the group is made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (eg, inner frame 12) supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to a support (eg, outer frame 11);
A locking device (e.g., a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support;
A gaming body (e.g., the game board 13) having a game area provided with ball entering means (e.g., the first starting opening 64a) that can be mounted on the opening / closing body and can enter game balls;
A launcher (eg, a sphere launch unit 112a) for launching game balls toward the game area;
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, holding ball storage area 203b) for acquiring lottery information based on the fact that the game ball fired by the launching means enters the ball entering means;
A determination unit (for example, variation start process (S307)) that determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit;
A gaming machine comprising gaming value giving means (for example, large opening opening / closing process (S103)) for giving a predetermined game value to a player based on the determination result derived by the determination means. ,
Setting means (for example, setting key 501) capable of setting and changing the probability that the specific determination result is derived by the determination means;
The support is
When the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening and closing body is released from the support, the setting means can be operated A gaming machine including a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140).

  According to the gaming machine 0, the opening and closing body is supported so as to open and close with respect to the support, and the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the gaming body is mounted on the opening / closing body, and a gaming area is provided in which the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball is provided in the gaming body. In addition, the game ball is launched toward the game area by the launch means, and the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the game sphere launched by the launch means entering the ball entry means. Then, the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means is determined by the determination means, and based on the determination result being derived by the determination means, the game value giving means gives a predetermined game value to the player. Be done. Here, the setting means is configured to change the probability that the specific determination result is derived by the determining means. And when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device by the protection means provided on the support, the setting means becomes difficult to operate, while when the opening / closing body is released from the support, The setting means is configured to be operable. Thereby, when the opening and closing body is opened from the support, the setting means can be easily operated, and when the opening and closing body is locked to the support, it is difficult to operate the setting means by the protection means. Can be Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening and closing body is locked to the support.

In gaming machine 0,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The protection means is
A gaming machine 1 characterized in that it is cantilevered on any one of the plates (for example, the right side plate 11d).

  According to the gaming machine 1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 0, the following effects are exerted. That is, a plurality of plates are combined to form a support, and the protection means is attached to any one of the plates in a cantilever manner. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized operation of the setting means with a simple structure, and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

  The “cantilever shape” is a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is not fixed but in a free state.

In gaming machine 0 or 1
Control means for controlling a game (for example, the main control device 110);
Storage means (for example, the substrate box 100) for storing the control means;
The setting means is
Provided in the control means,
The storage means is
A setting unit (for example, setting unit 100d) in which the setting means is located;
An exposed portion which exposes a part of the setting means from the setting portion to the outside of the storage means (for example, a portion where the key hole of the setting key 501 in the setting portion 100d is exposed);
And a recess (for example, a setting unit side wall 100e and a setting unit bottom surface 100f) for recessing the exposed portion from the outermost surface side of the storage unit to the control unit side,
The protection means is
When the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support body, the gaming machine case 2 is provided with a protrusion (for example, a cover side protrusion 172) which enters the recess.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 0 or the whistle 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the game control is performed by the control means, the control means is stored by the storage means, and the setting means is provided in the control means. Here, the setting means is located in the setting portion provided in the storage means, and a part of the setting means is exposed from the setting portion toward the outside of the storage means by the exposure portion, and the exposed portion is It is formed at a position recessed from the outermost surface side to the control means side. And when an opening-closing body is locked with respect to a support body, the protrusion part provided in the protection means is comprised so that it may entrap in a recessed part. Thereby, when the opening and closing body is locked with respect to the support, the protrusion of the protection means enters the recess of the storage means, and the setting means exposed from the storage means is covered by the protrusion. When the body is locked, it is difficult to access the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized action on the setting means with a simple structure, and it is possible to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

In the game machine 2,
The protrusion is
A game machine 3 characterized in that the setting means is formed to be closed and closed.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the setting means is closed and closed by the projecting portion. Thus, when the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support, the protrusion of the protection means enters the recess of the storage means so as to surround and close the setting means exposed from the storage means. By covering with the above, it is possible to make it difficult to access the entire setting means from the back side of the gaming machine when locking the opening / closing body. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized action on the setting means with a simple structure, and it is possible to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

In the game machine 2 or 3
The recess is
A recessed side wall (e.g., a setting portion side wall 100 e) which is formed to be recessed from the outermost surface of the storage means;
A recess bottom surface (setting portion bottom surface 100f) which extends from the side wall of the recess and constitutes the bottom surface of the recess and in which the exposed portion is formed in a part thereof;
And a recess-side protrusion (for example, a case-side protrusion 100g) which protrudes in a square shape so as to surround the exposed portion from the bottom surface of the recess toward the protection means.
The protrusion is
When the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support body, the gaming machine case 4 is characterized in that it enters a space formed by the recess side wall and the recess side protrusion.

  According to the gaming machine 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 2 or the whistle 3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the recess side wall of the recess is formed to be recessed from the outermost surface of the storage means, and similarly the recess bottom surface of the recess is extended from the recess side wall to form the bottom of the recess and an exposed portion is formed in part thereof Similarly, the recess-side protrusion of the recess is projected in a square shape so as to surround the exposed portion from the recess bottom to the protection means side. And when an opening-closing body is locked with respect to a support body, it is comprised so that a protrusion may entrap the space formed of a recessed part side wall and the recessed part side protrusion part. As a result, when the opening and closing member is closed, the setting portion is closed by the recess-side protruding portion of the storage unit, thereby making it difficult to access the setting unit, and further, the recess wall portion of the storage unit and the protection unit This makes the access to the setting means difficult. With this configuration, the security of the setting means is enhanced, and there is no room for wires and the like to enter, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an unfair action on the setting means.

In any of gaming machines 2 to 4,
The protection means is
An attachment portion (for example, a cover attachment portion 150) attached to the plate;
A standing portion (eg, standing portion 160) extending from the mounting portion to the back side of the gaming machine;
And a cover portion (for example, a cover portion 170) formed extending from the rising portion to the setting means side, and the projection portion being formed,
The standing portion is
A gaming machine comprising a bending portion (for example, a bending portion) capable of bending based on an impact when the impact is applied to the protecting means.

  According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 2 to 4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the protection means is attached to the plate by the attachment portion, the rising portion is extended from the attachment portion to the back side of the game machine, the cover portion is extended from the rising portion to the setting means, and the cover portion A protrusion is formed. And when an impact is added with respect to a protection means, it is comprised possible by the bending part provided in the standing part based on this impact. Thus, even when the storage means or the like comes in contact with the protection means by the force at the time of closing when the opening / closing body is closed, the flexible portion bends to absorb the above-mentioned impact, thereby protecting the protection means. It has the effect of being able to prevent damage.

In the gaming machine 5,
The cover portion is
A gaming machine case 6 characterized by comprising a rear protruding rib (for example, a cover outer rib 174) projecting to the back side of the gaming machine at least along the outer shape of the cover portion.

  According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the rear protruding rib of the cover portion is projected to the back side of the gaming machine at least along the outer shape of the cover portion. As a result, the rigidity of the cover portion is enhanced by the rear protruding rib, and the wire is directed from the back surface side of the cover portion to the upper or lower side of the cover portion when the fraudulent act by the wire is performed from the back surface of the gaming machine. When the wire is transmitted, the wire collides with the rear protruding rib, so that the intrusion of the wire can be prevented.

In the gaming machine 6,
The rear protruding rib is
A gaming machine 7 characterized in that it is provided on the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the rear projection rib is provided on the back side of the setting machine. Thus, by forming the rear protruding rib in the cover portion at the position corresponding to the setting means, it is possible to make it difficult to make a hole or the like in the cover portion, and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machines 5 to 7,
The standing portion is
A gaming machine comprising a side projecting rib (for example, an upper outer cover portion 162b or a lower outer cover portion 163b) projecting at least along the outer shape of the rising portion. 8

  According to the gaming machine 8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 5 to 7, the following effects are exerted. That is, the side projection rib of the rising portion is projected to the side of the gaming machine at least along the outer shape of the rising portion. As a result, the rigidity of the rising portion is enhanced by the side protruding ribs, and the wire moves from the side of the rising portion to the upper or lower side of the rising portion when the fraudulent act by the wire is performed from the side of the gaming machine. When the wire travels to the side, the wire collides with the side protruding rib, so that the intrusion of the wire can be prevented.

In gaming machines 5 to 8,
The control means
It is disposed below the central part of the gaming machine,
The rising portion and the cover portion are
An upper inner cover portion (for example, an upper inner cover portion 162a) extending from the upper portion of the rising portion and the cover portion toward the inside of the gaming machine;
A lower inner cover (for example, a lower inner cover 163a) extending from the lower part of the rising part and the lower part of the cover toward the inside of the gaming machine;
The lower inner cover portion is
A game machine 9 characterized in that the area is larger than the upper inner cover portion.

  According to the gaming machine 9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 5 to 8, the following effects are exerted. That is, the control means is disposed below the central portion of the gaming machine, the upper inner cover portion is extended from the upper portion of the rising portion and the upper portion of the cover portion toward the inside of the gaming machine, and the lower inner cover portion is And extending from an upper portion of the rising portion and the cover portion toward the inside of the gaming machine. And, the area of the lower inner cover part is formed wider than the area of the upper inner cover part.

  Conventionally, since the control means is disposed below the central portion of the gaming machine, it is easier to access the control means from the upper side of the gaming machine from the upper side when cheating is conducted Therefore, a person who cheats the control means often cheats by invading a wire or the like from the lower side of the back of the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent action, the area of the lower inner cover portion is formed wide, and the gap between the control means and the protective means can be minimized by the lower protective cover portion. There is an effect that the security performance on the side can be improved.

In any of gaming machines 0 to 9,
The protection means is
A game machine 10 characterized by being formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine 10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 0 to 9, the following effect is produced. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. This makes it possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semitransparent protective means when the opening / closing body is closed, and to promptly detect any fraud or failure with respect to the changing means. It has the effect of

<Seal group: A cover for protecting the control means is configured so as not to be removable from the back side>
Conventionally, on the back side of the gaming machine, setting means for performing various settings of the game is provided, and the player can not contact the setting means when the opening / closing body mounted with the setting means is closed. It is configured. On the other hand, the person in charge of the hall opens the opening and closing body outside the business hours of the hall and performs setting work for various maintenance work and setting means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

  However, with respect to such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that fraud may be performed on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine even when the opening / closing body is closed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the group is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can prevent an illegal act on setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (eg, inner frame 12) supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to a support (eg, outer frame 11);
A locking device (e.g., a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support;
Setting means (for example, setting key 501) mounted on the opening / closing body to perform various settings of the game;
Protection means (for example, protection cover member 140) for protecting the back side of the game machine of the setting means;
The attachment difficult means (for example, the attachment surface 151 of the protective cover member 140 is in contact with the inner wall of the right side plate 11d), the fixing screw from the outside of the right side plate 11d 11 g) and, and characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine 0, the opening and closing body is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the support, the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and various settings of the game are made by the setting means mounted on the opening and closing body. To be done. Then, the back side of the game machine of the setting means is protected by the protection means. Here, the protection means is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine by the attachment difficult means. Thus, the protection means for protecting the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means for performing various settings of the game is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine by the attachment difficult means, and the fraudulent act from the back side of the gaming machine Has the effect of being able to prevent

In gaming machine 0,
The protection means is
Attached to the support,
The attachment / detachment difficult means is
A game machine 1 characterized in that when the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be difficult or impossible to remove from the support.

  According to the gaming machine 1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 0, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the protection means is attached to the support, and the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the support by the attachment / detachment difficult means.

  Conventionally, in a hall where a gaming machine is installed, an island facility incorporating an automatic game ball feeding device and the like is provided in a closed predetermined space, and supports of the gaming machine are provided on both sides in the long side direction of the island facility. By installing, it is configured to be able to install a plurality of game machines in the island facility. Then, the person concerned with the hall releases the lock between the opening and closing body of each gaming machine installed on the island facility and the support outside the business hours of the hall, and opens and closes the opening and closing body with respect to the support (island facility). Open and perform setting change work and maintenance work of each gaming machine.

  However, when the setting means is configured to be exposed on the back side of the gaming machine, for example, in a situation where the gaming machine is installed on one long side of the island facility of the hall, the length at which the gaming machine is installed If the opening / closing body of another gaming machine installed on the other long side (that is, the back side of the gaming machine) which is not the side is opened for some reason (for example, a fraud etc.), the game The setting means provided so as to be exposed on the back side of the machine can be operated directly. As a result, even when the opening / closing body of the gaming machine is not opened, the setting means of the gaming machine can be directly operated by opening the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine, and the setting means The unauthorized operation of the setting changes the setting contents, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage in the hole.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine case 1, when the protection means is attached to the support and the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the protection means is difficult to attach or detach from the support by the attachment difficult means. It is configured not to be removable. By this, even if the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine is illegally opened, the setting means provided on the back side of the gaming machine is protected by the protection means, and when the opening and closing body is locked, the protection means There is an effect that it is possible to prevent tampering with the setting means by making it difficult to attach or detach from the rear side of the machine and making the setting means inoperable.

In gaming machine 0 or 1
The protection means is
An attachment portion (e.g., attachment surface 151) attached to the plate;
The support is
A plurality of plates (for example, the upper plate 11a, the lower plate 11b, the left side plate 11c, and the right side plate 11d) are combined and formed;
The plate is
Side parts located on the side of the gaming machine,
A front portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine on the front side of the side of the gaming machine;
And a rear portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine on the rear side of the gaming machine on the side portion;
The mounting portion is
A game machine 2 characterized in that it is attached to the inner wall side of the side portion.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 0 or the whistle 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the protection means is attached to the plate by the attachment portion of the protection means. Also, a plurality of plates are combined to form a support. Then, on the side plate located on the side surface of the gaming machine, on the front side of the gaming machine on the side portion, a front portion extended toward the inside of the gaming machine, and a gaming machine on the side portion On the rear side, a rear portion extended toward the inside of the gaming machine is provided. And a protection means is attached to the inner wall of a side part. Thus, by attaching the mounting portion of the protection means to the inner wall of the portion surrounded by the front portion, the side portion and the rear portion of the plate, the mounting portion of the protection means from the game machine front or the game machine rear side Access can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the protection means can be made difficult to attach or detach from the back side of the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent an unfair action on the setting means.

In the game machine 2,
Part or all of the plate is
A gaming machine 3 characterized by being formed of a metal material (for example, made of aluminum) having a hardness higher than that of wood.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exerted. That is, a part or all of the plate is formed of a metal material having a hardness higher than that of wood. In this way, the attachment portion of the protection means is attached to the inner wall of the portion surrounded by the front portion, the side portion and the rear portion of the plate body made of a metal material whose height is higher than that of the wood. It can be made difficult to access the mounting portion of the protection means from the rear side of the machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the protection means can be made difficult to attach or detach from the back side of the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent an unfair action on the setting means.

In the game machine 2 or 3
Said side part is
The support includes a side insertion hole (e.g., upper cover mounting hole 11e or lower cover mounting hole 11f) capable of inserting a fixing member (e.g., fixing screw 11g) capable of fixing the protection means to the support;
The mounting portion is
And a mounting insertion hole (for example, an upper mounting hole 152 or a lower mounting hole 153) which is provided corresponding to the side insertion hole and into which the fixing member can be inserted;
The fixing member is
A gaming machine case 4 characterized by being inserted into the side insertion hole and the mounting insertion hole from the outside of the gaming machine of the side portion.

  According to the gaming machine 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 2 or the whistle 3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the fixing member capable of fixing the protection means to the support is insertable into the side insertion hole provided in the side portion. Further, the fixing member is configured to be insertable by the mounting insertion hole provided in the mounting portion corresponding to the side insertion hole. Then, the fixing member is inserted into the side insertion hole and the mounting insertion hole from the outer side of the side of the gaming machine.

  Conventionally, the gaming machine is installed without a gap with respect to the island facility of the hall so that the player can not access the back side of the gaming machine from the front side of the gaming machine. In addition, on the side of the gaming machine installed in the island facility, a card sanding device capable of inserting a card storing an amount to be used for playing a game is provided, and this card sanding device also has a gap with the gaming machine. It is arranged so as not to be.

  Therefore, a fixed member is inserted from the outer side of the gaming machine to fix the plate body and the protection means, and by installing the gaming machine on the island facility in that state, a gap is generated at the site where the fixed member is installed. It can be avoided. Therefore, the protection means can be made inaccessible from the fixed member fixing the gaming machine to the gaming machine, so that the protection means can not be detached from the gaming machine, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved. It has the effect of

In any of gaming machines 2 to 4,
The protection means is
And an extending portion (e.g., a bending portion 154) extending from the mounting portion to the rear side of the gaming machine,
The extending portion is
A gaming machine 5 characterized in that it is formed in a shape that conforms to (is in contact with) the inner wall shape of the rear portion.

  According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 2 to 4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the extending portion provided in the protection means is extended from the attaching portion to the rear side of the gaming machine, and the shape of the extending portion is formed in a shape along (abuts on) the inner wall shape of the rear portion. Ru. As a result, the mounting portion of the protection means is covered by the rear portion of the plate from the back side of the gaming machine, and the extending portion is formed in a shape along (is in contact with) the inner wall shape of the rear portion. It is possible to prevent a gap from occurring between the side portion to which the fixing member is attached and the attaching portion. Therefore, the protection means can be prevented from being detached from the gaming machine, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine 5,
The extension portion is
A game machine according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized in that it comprises an elastically deformable bending portion (e.g., a resin made of a resin in which the bending portion 154 has an elastic force) when an impact is applied to the protection means.

  According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when an impact is applied to the protection means, the flexible portion of the extension portion is configured to be elastically deformable. Thus, for example, when the opening and closing body is closed, even if a part of the opening and closing body comes into contact with the protection means by the momentum at the time of closing and the impact is applied, the flexible portion is bent by elastic force to absorb the impact By doing this, it is possible to prevent the protection means from being damaged.

In any of gaming machines 0 to 6,
A gaming body (e.g., the game board 13) having a game area provided with ball entering means (e.g., the first starting opening 64a) that can be mounted on the opening / closing body and can enter game balls;
A launcher (eg, a sphere launch unit 112a) for launching game balls toward the game area;
Control means for controlling the game (for example, the main control device 110);
The control means
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, holding ball storage area 203b) for acquiring lottery information based on the fact that the game ball fired by the launching means enters the ball entering means;
A determination unit (for example, variation start process (S307)) that determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit;
Game value giving means (for example, large opening opening / closing process (S103)) for giving a predetermined game value to the player based on the determination result derived by the determination means;
The setting means is
A game machine 7 characterized in that the probability that the specific determination result is derived by the determination means can be set and changed.

  According to the gaming machine 7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 0 to 6, the following effects are exerted. That is, a game area is mounted on the opening / closing body, and a game area provided with ball entry means capable of entering game balls is formed in the game body. Further, the game ball is fired toward the game area by the shooting means, and the control of the game is performed by the control means. Then, based on the game ball shot by the shooting means entering the ball entering means, the lottery information is obtained by the lottery information obtaining means provided in the control means. And the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means is determined by the determination means similarly provided in the control means, and the game value provided in the control means is determined based on the determination result being derived by the determination means. A predetermined gaming value is given to the player by the giving means. Here, the setting means is configured to change the probability that the specific determination result is derived by the determining means. Thereby, the protection means for protecting the back side of the game machine of the setting means capable of changing the probability of the specific determination result and affecting the result of the game is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the game machine by the attachment difficult means. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized action from the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the setting means that the setting contents of the gaming machine are tampered with.

In any of gaming machines 0 to 7,
The protection means is
A game machine 8 characterized in that it is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine 8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 0 to 7, the following effect is produced. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. This makes it possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semitransparent protective means when the opening / closing body is closed, and to promptly detect any fraud or failure with respect to the changing means. It has the effect of

<User group: Settings can be changed / checked regardless of the opening of the inner frame>
Conventionally, in a control device provided on the back side of a gaming machine, the contents of a game value (a probability of winning and / or a hit type, etc .; hereinafter referred to as "setting contents") given to a player according to a game result. Setting means capable of changing the setting of the game machine and setting contents of the gaming machine are divided into a plurality of steps (for example, six steps of setting values “1” to “6”) based on operating the setting means by a person concerned It is configured to be changeable.

  In such a game machine, in order to improve the security performance, when the opening / closing body mounted with the setting means is closed to the support, it is determined that the setting is not possible, the opening / closing body is released from the support, and the setting means When it is determined that the game machine can be operated from the front of the gaming machine, the setting by the setting means is permitted. With such a configuration, in a situation where the opening / closing body is closed to the support, the setting of the gaming machine is performed even if the setting means is illegally operated by the fraudulent action from the back side of the gaming machine. It can be made unchangeable (for example, patent document 1 (Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-024202)).

  However, when determining whether to change the setting of the gaming machine based on the opening mode of the opening / closing body, the opening / closing body is opened when the opening detection means for detecting the opening of the opening / closing body can not detect the open state due to a failure or the like. It is not possible to change settings that can be made based on Therefore, by false detection of the opening detection means of the opening / closing body, setting change etc. which are important game elements of the gaming machine can not be performed, and it may not be possible to execute the sales form assumed by the hall.

  The invention of the group of people is made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (eg, inner frame 12) supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to a support (eg, outer frame 11);
A locking device (e.g., a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support;
Open / close detection means (for example, an inner frame open switch 208g1) for detecting the open / close state of the open / close member with respect to the support;
First operation means (for example, setting key 501) that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine when the locking of the opening and closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening and closing body is in the open state. When,
Changeable determination means (for example, S4412 in the start-up process: Yes) that determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state where the degree of advantage for the player can be changed when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner; , And
The changeability determination means is
The changeable state transition means (for example, S4407 in the start-up process: Yes) which changes to the changeable state when the first operation means is operated in the predetermined manner regardless of the detection result of the open / close detection means A game machine number 0 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine member 0, the opening and closing body is supported so as to be able to open and close with respect to the support, and the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the open / close state of the open / close member with respect to the support is detected by the open / close detection means. Further, when the lock between the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in the open state, the first operation means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the changeability determination means determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the advantage for the player can be changed. Here, regardless of the detection result of the open / close detection means, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the changeable state transition means provided in the change possibility determination means shifts to the changeable state. That is, as a condition for shifting to the changeable state, it is possible to shift to the changeable state when the predetermined operation on the first operation means is performed without determining the detection result of the open / close detection means. Therefore, even if the opening detection means for detecting the opening of the opening / closing body can not detect the open state due to a failure or the like, it is possible to change the setting which is an important game element of the gaming machine, and the hall is assumed There is an effect that it is possible to securely execute the sales form of

An opening / closing body (eg, inner frame 12) supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to a support (eg, outer frame 11);
A locking device (e.g., a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support;
Open / close detection means (for example, an inner frame open switch 208g1) for detecting the open / close state of the open / close member with respect to the support;
First operation means (for example, setting key 501) that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine when the locking of the opening and closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening and closing body is in the open state. When,
Confirmation availability determination means for determining whether or not to shift to an advantage confirmation enabled state in which an advantage for the player can be confirmed when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner (for example, S4408 of startup processing: Yes ), And
The confirmation availability determination means is
A checkable transition means (for example, S4407 in the start-up process: No) which shifts to the state where the advantage can be checked when the first operation means is operated in the predetermined manner regardless of the detection result of the opening / closing detection means A game machine according to the present invention is characterized in that it comprises:

  According to the gaming machine guide 1, the opening and closing body is supported so as to be able to open and close with respect to the support, and the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the open / close state of the open / close member with respect to the support is detected by the open / close detection means. Further, when the lock between the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in the open state, the first operation means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, it is determined by the confirmation availability determination means whether or not to shift to an advantage degree confirmation enabled state in which the advantage degree with respect to the player can be confirmed. Here, regardless of the detection result of the open / close detection means, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the confirmation possibility transition means provided in the confirmation availability determination means shifts to the advantage confirmation enable state. That is, it is possible to shift to the advantage confirmation enabled state based on the operation on the first operation unit without judging the detection result of the open / close detection unit as the condition for shifting to the advantage confirmation enabled state. Therefore, even if the release detection means for detecting the release of the opening / closing body can not detect the release state due to a failure or the like, it is possible to confirm the setting status which is an important gaming element of the gaming machine, and has been set There is an effect that the setting contents of can be confirmed with certainty.

In game machine number 0 or number 1,
Second operation means (for example, a RAM erase switch 122) operable from the front side of the gaming machine when the locking of the opening and closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening and closing body is in the open state. ), And
The changeable state transition means or the confirmable transition means is
When the second operation means is specially operated, the game machine shifts to the changeable state or the advantage confirmation possible state.

  According to the gaming machine staff 2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine staff 0 or 1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the lock between the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in the open state, the second operation means is configured to be operable from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the second operation means is specially operated, the changeable state transition means or the confirmation possible state transition means is shifted to the changeable state or the advantage confirmation possible state. That is, based on the predetermined operation for the first operation means and the special operation for the second operation means without judging the detection result of the open / close detection means as the condition for shifting to the changeable state or the advantage checkable state. It is possible to shift to a changeable state or a state in which the degree of advantage can be confirmed. Therefore, even if the opening detection means for detecting the opening of the opening / closing body can not detect the open state due to a failure or the like, setting change or setting confirmation which is an important gaming element of the gaming machine can be performed. Has the effect of being able to reliably execute the sales form assumed by. Further, in the control to shift to the changeable state or the advantage checkable state, the process of detecting the opening of the opening and closing body becomes unnecessary, and the control burden of the gaming machine to shift to the changeable state or the advantage checkable state is alleviated. Has the effect of being able to

At any of the game machines from 0 to 2
A third operation unit operable from the front side of the gaming machine when the lock between the opening and closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening and closing body is in the open state;
The third operation means is
When the specific operation is performed, the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned off is changed to the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned on,
The changeability determination means is
A game machine according to the present invention, which is executed in a start-up process that is executed when the power of the game machine is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine staff 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine staff 0 to 3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the lock between the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in the open state, the second operation means provided in the specific detection means is operable from the front side of the gaming machine Be done. Then, when the third operation means is specifically operated, the operation corresponding to the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned off is changed from the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned off, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In the start-up process that is executed in this case, the determination by the changeability determination unit is performed.

  Conventionally, when processing to detect opening of the opening / closing body is performed in determination processing of whether to shift to the changeable state in the start-up processing at power on, processing for detecting opening of the opening / closing body The control required at power-on becomes complicated, which may increase the processing load of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine staff 3, when changing the setting of the gaming machine, it is possible to change when the power of the gaming machine is turned on along with the operation of the third operation means provided on the back side of the gaming machine It can be determined whether to shift to the state. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the changeable state, and to set the gaming machine.

In the game machine number 3,
The confirmation availability determination means is
A game machine according to claim 4, which is executed in the start-up process.

  According to the gaming machine staff 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine staff 3, the following effects are produced. That is, similarly to the change possibility determining means, the determination by the confirmation possibility determining means is executed in the start-up process which is executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  Conventionally, when processing to detect opening of the opening / closing body is performed in determination processing of whether to shift to the advantage confirmation enabled state in the start-up processing at power-on, the opening of the opening / closing body is detected. As a result of the processing, the control required to start the power supply becomes complicated, which may increase the processing load on the gaming machine.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine staff 4, when checking the setting of the gaming machine, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the operation of the third operation means provided on the back side of the gaming machine, the degree of advantage It can be determined whether or not to shift to the checkable state. Therefore, before control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantage checkable state, and to confirm the setting of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machine staff 0 to gaming machine staff 4,
When the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the first operation means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening and closing body is released from the support, the first operation is performed. A gaming machine according to claim 5, further comprising: a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for making the means operable.

  According to the gaming machine staff 5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine staff 0 to 3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device by the protection means, the first operation means is made difficult to operate, while when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the first operation means Are configured to be operable. Thereby, when the opening and closing body is opened from the support, the first operation means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening and closing body is locked to the support, the first operation is performed by the protection means. There is an effect that it is possible to make the means difficult to operate and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening and closing body is locked to the support. Further, by making the first operating means incapable of operating without loss when the opening and closing body is closed by the protection means, the opening and closing body must necessarily be open even if the opening and closing body is not detected by the opening and closing detection means. For example, since the first operation means can not be operated, it is not necessary to determine the detection result of the open / close detection means as a condition for shifting to the changeable state or the checkable state. Therefore, in the control to shift to the changeable state or the checkable state, the process of detecting the opening of the opening and closing body becomes unnecessary, and it is possible to reduce the control load of the gaming machine to shift to the changeable state or the checkable state. effective.

In the game machine staff 5,
The protection means is
A game machine 6 characterized in that it is attached to the support.

  According to the gaming machine staff 6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine staff 5, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device by the protection means attached to the support, the second operation means is difficult to operate, while the opening / closing body is released from the support The second operating means is configured to be operable. Thereby, when the opening and closing body is opened from the support, the second operation means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening and closing body is locked to the support, the second operation is performed by the protection means. There is an effect that it is possible to make the means difficult to operate and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening and closing body is locked to the support.

In the game machine 5 or 6
The protection means is
A game machine 7 characterized in that it is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine staff 7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine staff 5 or the game staff 6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. This makes it possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semitransparent protective means when the opening / closing body is closed, and to promptly detect any fraud or failure with respect to the changing means. It has the effect of

<肆: If the front frame is open, setting change / setting confirmation is not possible>
Conventionally, when it is easily shifted to a state where setting change and setting confirmation of the gaming machine can be performed, since the room for unauthorized setting change and setting confirmation can not be excluded, a changeable state in which the setting change can be made as much as possible Alternatively, it is desirable to apply multi-step security measures to the gaming machine so that the setting contents can not be confirmed.

  On the other hand, when a person in charge of the hall or the like performs maintenance work on the gaming machine, the opening and closing body and the decoration are both released from the support (opening and closing body), and the maintenance work is performed for the hall having the authority of setting change and setting confirmation. Generally, it is not the person in charge, but an employee of a hall who does not have the authority to change settings or confirm settings (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-092371)).

  At this point, when maintenance work by an employee in a hall who does not have the authority to change settings or confirm settings can enter into a changeable state or a checkable state, the employee has passed inside with an outside fraudulent person The information on the setting status of the gaming machine may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

  The invention of the group is made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (eg, inner frame 12) supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to a support (eg, outer frame 11);
A decorative body (for example, a front frame 14) which is a front side of the opening / closing body and is supported so as to be openable / closable relative to the opening / closing body or the support;
First locking means (for example, a part of the cylinder lock 20) for locking the support and the opening / closing body;
Second locking means (for example, a part of the cylinder lock 20) for locking the decorative body and the support or the opening / closing body;
Open / close detection means (for example, an inner frame open switch 208g1) for detecting the open / close state of the open / close member with respect to the support;
Decoration opening / closing detection means (for example, front frame opening switch 208g2) for detecting the opening / closing state of the decoration with respect to the support or the opening / closing body;
A first operation means (for example, a power switch) operable from the front side of the gaming machine when the lock between the opening / closing body and the support by the first locking means is released and the opening / closing body is in the open state And second operation means (for example, setting key 501),
A changeability determination means (for example, for determining whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the degree of advantage for the player can be changed when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated in a specific manner , And start processing S4412: Yes),
The changeability determination means is
When the second operation means is operated specifically, the opening / closing detection means detects opening of the opening / closing body, and the decoration opening / closing detection means does not detect opening / closing of the decoration, transition to the changeable state is made A game machine 肆 0 characterized by comprising change transition means (for example, S4453: Yes and S4454: Yes in startup processing).

  According to the gaming machine 0, the opening and closing body is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the support, and the decorative body is supported so as to be able to open and close the opening and closing body or the support on the front side of the opening and closing body. Then, the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the first locking means, and the decoration and the support or the opening and closing body are locked by the second locking means. Here, the opening / closing state of the opening / closing body with respect to the support is detected by the opening / closing detection means, and the opening / closing state of the decoration with respect to the support or the opening / closing body is detected by the decoration opening / closing detection means. In addition, when the locking between the opening and closing body and the support by the first locking means is released and the opening and closing body is in the open state, the first operation means and the second operation means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine Become. Then, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated in a specific manner, the changeability determination means determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state where the advantage for the player can be changed. Ru. Here, when the second operation means is specifically operated, the open / close detection means detects the opening of the opening / closing body, and the decoration open / close detection means does not detect the opening / closing of the decoration, the change provided in the changeability determination means The transition means shifts to the changeable state. That is, as a condition for shifting to the changeable state, a specific operation on the second operation means, detection of opening / closing of the opening / closing body by the opening / closing detection means, non-opening (ie, closing) of the decoration by the decoration opening / closing detection means When the condition of detection is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the changeable state. In this way, during maintenance work in which the opening / closing body and the decoration are both open, it is difficult to change the setting to an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting by making the setting change impossible. There is an effect that the security performance to the machine can be improved.

In gaming machine 0,
Confirmation availability determination means for determining whether or not to shift to an advantage level confirmation enabled state capable of confirming an advantage level with respect to a player when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated in a specific manner (For example, S4408 of startup processing: Yes),
The confirmation availability determination means is
When the second operation means is operated specifically, the opening / closing detection means detects opening of the opening / closing body, and the decoration opening / closing detection means does not detect opening / closing of the decoration, the advantage confirmation possible state The gaming machine 1 characterized in that it comprises confirmation transition means (for example, S4451: Yes and S4452: Yes) for transitioning to the.

  According to the gaming machine 1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 0, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, and the second operation means is operated in a specific manner, whether or not the confirmation possibility determination means shifts to a confirmable state in which the advantage for the player can be confirmed. Is determined. Here, when the second operation means is specifically operated, the open / close detection means detects the opening of the opening / closing body, and the decoration open / close detection means does not detect the opening / closing of the decoration, the change provided in the confirmation availability determination means By the transition means, it is transitioned to the advantage confirmation enabled state. That is, as a condition for shifting to the possible state to the advantage degree core, a specific operation for the second operation means, detection of opening of the opening / closing body by the opening / closing detection means, non-opening of the decoration by the decoration opening / closing detection means (ie, When the condition of detection of closure is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the state in which the degree of advantage can be confirmed. In this way, during maintenance work in which the opening / closing body and the decoration are both open, it is difficult to perform setting confirmation for employees who do not have the authority to confirm settings by configuring so that setting confirmation can not be performed. There is an effect that the security performance to the machine can be improved.

In gaming machine 0 or 1
Third operation means (for example, a RAM erase switch 122) that can be operated when the opening / closing body is opened;
Operation mode detection means (for example, detection of ON or OFF of the RAM erase switch 122) for detecting the operation mode of the third operation means;
The changeability determination means is
When the operation mode detection means detects a first operation mode (for example, ON) of the third operation means, it is determined whether or not to shift to the changeable state;
The confirmation availability determination means is
When the operation mode detection means detects a second operation mode (e.g., off) different from the first operation mode of the third operation means, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantage confirmation enabled state A game machine 2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 0 or the whistle 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the opening / closing member is opened, the third operation means becomes operable, and the operation manner of the third operation means is detected by the operation manner detection means. Then, when the operation mode detection means detects the first operation mode of the third operation means, the changeability determination means determines whether or not to shift to the changeable state, and the operation mode detection means determines the third operation mode. When detecting a second operation mode different from the first operation mode of the operation means, the confirmation availability determination means determines whether or not to shift to the degree of advantage confirmation enabled state. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to shift to either the changeable state or the advantage confirmation state according to the operation mode of the third operation means.

  The “second operation mode” may be any operation mode different from the first operation mode. For example, when the first operation mode is pressed, the second operation mode is Operation modes other than pressing, that is, operation modes such as non-pressing, contact, and pulling apply.

At any of gaming machines 0 to 2,
The predetermined operation of the first operation means is
It is an operation to change the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned off to the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned on,
The changeability determination means is
A gaming machine 3 characterized in that it is executed in a start-up process which is executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 0 to 2, the following effects are exerted. That is, as the predetermined operation of the first operation means, an operation to change the state of the gaming machine to the state of powering on from the state of the power of the gaming machine corresponds to a state of powering on the gaming machine. In the startup process to be executed, the determination by the changeability determining unit is performed. Thereby, when changing the setting of the gaming machine, whether or not to shift to the changeable state when the power of the gaming machine is turned on along with the operation of the first operation means provided on the back side of the gaming machine Can be determined. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the changeable state, and to set the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine 3,
The confirmation availability determination means is
A gaming machine 4 characterized by being executed in the start-up process.

  According to the gaming machine 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 3, the following effects are exerted. That is, similarly to the change possibility determining means, the determination by the confirmation possibility determining means is executed in the start-up process which is executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Thereby, when the setting of the gaming machine is confirmed, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on along with the operation of the first operation means provided on the back side of the gaming machine, whether to shift to the advantage checkable state It can be determined whether or not. Therefore, before control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantage checkable state, and to confirm the setting of the gaming machine.

In any of game machine 0 to game machine 4,
When the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means, the second operation means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening and closing body is released from the support, (2) A game machine including a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) which makes the operation means operable.

  According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 0 to 4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means by the protection means, the second operation means is made difficult to operate, while when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the second The operating means is configured to be operable. As a result, when the opening and closing body is released from the support and the decoration is closed to the opening and closing body or the support, the opening and closing body can be easily supported on the support while the second operating means can be easily operated. When locked, the protection means makes it difficult to operate the second operation means, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support. There is.

In the gaming machine 5,
The protection means is
A gaming machine 6 characterized in that it is attached to the support.

  According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means by the protection means attached to the support, the operation of the second operation means is difficult while the opening / closing body is released from the support When the second operating means is operated, the second operating means is configured to be operable. As a result, when the opening and closing body is released from the support and the decoration is closed to the opening and closing body or the support, the opening and closing body can be easily supported on the support while the second operating means can be easily operated. When locked, the protection means makes it difficult to operate the second operation means, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support. There is.

In gaming machines 5 to 6,
The protection means is
A game machine 7 characterized by being formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine 7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 5 or 6, the following effect is produced. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. This makes it possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semitransparent protective means when the opening / closing body is closed, and to promptly detect any fraud or failure with respect to the changing means. It has the effect of

<Seal group: Cover to protect the part that affects the game specification>
Conventionally, on the back of the opening and closing body of the gaming machine, which comprises a support and an opening and closing body, a large number of influencing means for affecting the outcome of the game are arranged. The lock body is locked, and while the influence means is configured to be inoperable by the player, the open / close body is opened outside the business hours of the hall, and the maintenance work of the influence means is performed (for example, Patent Document 1 ( JP-A-2015-024202)).

  However, there is a risk that such a game machine may be tampered with the influence means from the back side of the game machine even when the opening and closing body is closed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the group is made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an injustice against the influence means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (eg, inner frame 12) supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to a support (eg, outer frame 11);
A locking device (e.g., a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support;
Influence means (for example, the setting key 501, the main control device 110 or the payout control device 111) mounted on the opening / closing body to affect the result of the game played by the player;
When the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, a part or the whole of the influence means is covered, while when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the influence means is A gaming machine including a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for enabling an operation.

  According to the gaming machine 0, the opening / closing body is supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to the support, the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and the influence means mounted on the opening / closing body The results are affected. And when the opening and closing body is locked by the locking device to the support by the locking means, a part or all of the influencing means is covered, while when the opening and closing body is released from the support, the operation for the affecting means Is made possible. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the influence means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, a part of the influence means is protected by the protection means Alternatively, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the whole, and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening and closing body is locked to the support.

  In addition, "influencing the result of the game" is, for example, a case where the main control of the game is performed to affect, or a case where the setting content of the game is changed or determined to affect. And the case of affecting the game value payout.

In gaming machine 0,
The influence means is
Main control means (for example, main control device 110) which controls game,
Payout control means (for example, payout control means) that performs control in accordance with a payout instruction for gaming media output from the main control means based on satisfaction of a predetermined award condition (for example, winning of a ball to the first starting opening 64a) Device 111), and
The protection means is
A game machine 1 characterized in that it covers part or all of the main control means and part or all of the payout control means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 0, the following effects are exerted. That is, the game control is performed by the main control means provided as the influence means, and the game medium output from the main control means based on the fulfillment of the predetermined award condition by the payout control means provided similarly as the influence means. Control is performed in accordance with the payout instruction of Here, the protective means covers part or all of the main control means and part or all of the payout control means. Thereby, when the opening and closing body is opened from the support, the main control unit and the dispensing control means can be easily operated, and when the opening and closing body is locked to the support, The protection means can make it difficult to operate some or all of the main control means and some or all of the payout control means. Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved by the one member (protection means) when the opening / closing body is locked to the support.

In gaming machine 1,
The main control means
A main control board (for example, a main board) on which a microchip (for example, the MPU 201) for executing processing related to gaming is mounted;
Main storage means (for example, the substrate box 100) for storing the main control substrate;
And a main sealing unit (for example, a sealing unit 100c) for sealing the main storage unit with difficulty in opening.
The protection means is
A gaming machine 2 characterized by covering at least the main sealing means.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exerted. That is, a microchip for executing processing related to a game is mounted on a main control board provided in the main control means, and the main control board is accommodated in the main accommodation means. And, by the main sealing means, the main storage means is sealed so as to be difficult to open. Here, the protection means at least cover the main sealing means.

  In the past, fraudulent acts such as unfair replacement of the main control board by cutting off the main sealing means for sealing the main storage means containing the main control board into a difficult-to-open state are performed, causing an unforeseen disadvantage in the hole. There is a fear.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 2, at least the main sealing means is covered by the protection means. In this way, the main sealing means of the main storage means containing the main control board carrying the microchip for executing the processing related to the game is covered by the protection means, thereby preventing unauthorized actions such as the main control board being exchanged When the opening and closing body is closed, the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1 or 2
The main control means
Game value giving means (for example, large opening opening / closing process (S103)) for giving a predetermined game value to the player based on the game result;
And setting means (eg, setting key 501) capable of changing the probability that the game value to be given to the player is derived by the game value giving means.
The protection means is
A gaming machine 3 characterized by covering at least the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the following effect is produced. That is, a predetermined game value is given to the player by the game value giving means, and the setting means makes it possible to change the setting probability that the game value giving means will derive the game value to be given to the player. Then, at least the setting means is covered by the protection means. In this way, by covering the setting means capable of changing the probability of deriving the game value to be given to the player by the protection means, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act such as the setting contents being changed illegally and closing the opening / closing body. The security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of gaming machines 1 to 3,
The main control means
A wiring attachment unit (for example, a connector attachment unit 100h) to which a wire is attached to output control information to another control unit including the payout control unit;
The protection means is
A gaming machine 4 characterized by covering at least the wiring attachment portion.

  According to the gaming machine 4, in any one of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the wiring for outputting the control information to the control means including the payout control means by the wire attachment section of the main control means. Are attached and at least the wiring attachment is covered by the protection means. In this way, the wiring attachment portion to which the main control means and the control information in the other control means are attached is covered by the protective means, thereby preventing an illegal action such as attaching an illegal substrate to the wiring. When the opening and closing body is closed, the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of gaming machines 1 to 4,
The main control means
Game performance information display means (for example, base display device 401) for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine;
The protection means is
A gaming machine 5 characterized in that the gaming performance information display means is not covered.

  According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 1 to 4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the game performance information display means provided in the main control means displays game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine, and the protection means does not cover the game performance information display means Configured As a result, the game performance information can not be confirmed by the protection means, and the game performance information can be constantly confirmed.

In any of gaming machines 1 to 5,
The payout control means is
A payout control board (for example, a payout board) on which a microchip (for example, the MPU 211) for executing processing relating to a payout operation of gaming media is mounted;
A payout storage means (for example, a substrate box 101) for storing the payout control substrate;
And a dispensing sealing means (for example, a sealing unit 111a) for sealing the dispensing storage means so as to make the opening difficult.
The protection means is
A gaming machine 6 characterized by covering at least the above-mentioned dispensing sealing means.

  According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 1 to 5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the microchip for executing the processing relating to the payout operation of the game medium is mounted on the payout control substrate provided in the payout control means, and the payout control substrate is accommodated in the payout storage means. Then, the dispensing and storing means is sealed so as to make it difficult to open the dispensing and storing means by the dispensing and sealing means. Here, at least the dispensing and sealing means is covered by the protection means.

  Conventionally, fraudulent acts such as unfair replacement of the dispensing control board due to disconnection of the dispensing sealing means for sealing the dispensing storage means containing the dispensing control board into a difficult opening condition are performed, causing an unexpected disadvantage in the hole There is a fear.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 6, at least the dispensing and sealing means is covered by the protection means. Thus, the payout control board is illegally exchanged by covering the payout sealing means of the payout storage means storing the payout control board carrying the microchip for executing the processing relating to the payout operation of the game medium with the protection means. There is an effect that fraudulent behavior can be prevented, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening / closing body is closed.

In any of gaming machines 0 to 6,
Storage means (e.g., RAM 203) for storing game information related to the game being executed;
And erasing means (for example, a RAM erasure switch 122) for erasing the gaming information stored in the storage means by performing a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation when the power is turned on).
The protection means is
A gaming machine 7 characterized by covering at least the erasing means.

  According to the gaming machine 7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 0 to 6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the information about the game being executed is stored by the storage means, and the game information stored in the storage means is erased by performing the predetermined operation on the erasing means. Then, the erasing means is covered by the protection means. In this way, by covering the erasing means capable of erasing the information on the game with the protection means, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent acts such as the information on the game being illegally erased, and to prevent the fraud There is an effect that security performance can be improved.

In the gaming machine 7,
The erasing means is
Erase information stored in the storage means when a first condition is satisfied;
A game machine 8 characterized in that the probability that the game value is derived is updated when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine 8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 7, the following effects are exerted. That is, the information stored in the storage means is erased by the erasing means when the first condition is fulfilled, and the probability that the game value is derived is updated when the second condition different from the first condition is fulfilled. Ru. As a result, the erasing means can erase the storage means and change the probability by the setting means according to different conditions, and various settings of the gaming machine can be performed with a small number of members, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. There is.

In any one of game machines 0 to 8,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The protection means is
A gaming machine 9 characterized in that it is cantilevered to any one of the plates (for example, the right side plate 11d).

  According to the gaming machine 9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 0 to 8, the following effects are exerted. That is, a plurality of plates are combined to form a support, and the protection means is attached to any one of the plates in a cantilever manner. As a result, it is possible to prevent the injustice against the influence means with a simple structure, and it is possible to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

  The “cantilever shape” is a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is not fixed but in a free state.

In any of gaming machines 0 to 9,
The protection means is
A game machine 10 characterized by being formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine 10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 0 to 9, the following effect is produced. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. This makes it possible to confirm the influential means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semitransparent protective means at the time of closing the opening / closing body, and it is possible to quickly detect an injustice or malfunction with the influential means. It has the effect of

<Land group: Pachinko machine back side covers connected>
Conventionally, on the back side of the gaming machine, a plurality of control means for executing various settings and processing of the game are disposed, and the player contacts the control means when the opening / closing body mounted with each control means is closed. It is configured to be impossible. On the other hand, the person in charge of the hall opens the opening and closing body outside the business hours of the hall and performs various setting and maintenance work for the control means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

  However, there is a risk that such a game machine may be tampered with the control means from the back side of the game machine even when the opening and closing body is closed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the land group is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an illegal act on the control means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (eg, inner frame 12) supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to a support (eg, outer frame 11);
The first control means (for example, the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114) mounted on the back side of the opening / closing body to control the game and the second control means (for example, the main control device 110 or the payout) Controller 111),
First protection means (for example, a back pack 92) which is provided on the back side of the opening and closing body and covers at least a part or all of the back side of the first control means;
And second protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) provided on the support and covering at least a part or all of the back surface side of the second control means on the gaming machine,
A gaming machine land 0 characterized in that a part of the first protection means is formed to abut on a part of the second protection means in the direction of the back of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine land 0, the opening / closing body is supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to the support, and the first control means and the second control means for controlling the game are mounted on the back side of the opening / closing body. Then, at least part or all of the back surface side of the first control means is covered by the first protection means mounted on the back side of the opening / closing body of the game machine. Further, at least a part or the whole of the back side of the game machine of the second control means is covered by the second protection means provided on the support. Here, a part of the first protection means is formed to abut on a part of the second protection means in the direction of the back of the gaming machine in a superimposed manner. As a result, the gap between the first protection means and the second protection means covering the first control means and the second control means is eliminated, and there is no room for the wire etc. to enter the inside of the gaming machine from the back side of the gaming machine. There is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the machine can be improved. Further, the first protective means provided on the opening and closing body is formed so as to overlap the second protective means provided on the support in the direction of the back of the gaming machine, whereby the opening and closing body is released from the support Even if the first protection means of the opening and closing body and the second protection means of the support do not interfere with each other, the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine is improved without increasing the extra work in maintenance work etc. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine land 0,
The opening and closing body is
Installing the first control means above the second control means;
The first protection means is
A first protection unit that covers the back side of the gaming machine of the first control means;
And a first protrusion (for example, a lower protrusion) which protrudes below the first protection portion and which protrudes to the back side of the gaming machine.
The second means of protection is
A second protection unit that covers a part or all of the back side of the game machine of the second control means;
And a second protrusion (for example, an upper side protrusion) protruding above the first protection portion and projecting to the front side of the gaming machine.
A gaming machine land 1 characterized in that the first projecting portion is formed to overlap the second projecting portion in the vertical direction of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine land 1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine land 0, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the opening / closing member, the first control means is disposed above the second control means. In addition, the back side of the game machine of the first control means is covered by the first protection portion provided in the first protection means, and the first projecting portion provided below the first protection portion is directed to the back side of the game machine. It is projected. Furthermore, the back side of the second control means is covered by the second protection portion provided in the first protection means, and the second projection provided above the second protection portion is directed to the front side of the game machine. It is projected. The first projecting portion is formed to overlap the second projecting portion in the vertical direction of the gaming machine. Thus, since the respective projecting portions of the first protection means and the second protection means are formed to be folded in the vertical direction, it is possible to eliminate the gap between the first protection means and the second protection means. Therefore, the intrusion of a wire or the like from the back side of the gaming machine can be effectively prevented, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In gaming machine land 0 or land 1,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The second protection means is
A gaming machine land 2 characterized in that it is attached in a cantilever shape to any one of the plates (for example, the right side plate 11d).

  According to the gaming machine land 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine land 0 or land 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of plates are combined to form a support, and the second protection means is attached to any one of the plates in a cantilevered manner. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second control means from being cheating with a simple structure, and it is possible to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

  The “cantilever shape” is a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is not fixed but in a free state.

In the gaming machine land 2,
The first protection means is
A gaming machine land 3 characterized in that it is attached to the opening / closing body in the form of fixed beams fixed to at least one end and the other end of the first protection means.

  According to the gaming machine land 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine land 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least one end and the other end of the first protection means are attached to the opening / closing member in the form of fixed beams at both ends. Thereby, even when an impact is applied from the back side of the game machine to the second protective means attached to the support in a cantilevered manner, the first protection attached to the open / close member in the form of fixed-end beams The means can compensate for the stiffness of the second protection means. Therefore, even when an impact or the like is given from the back side of the gaming machine, the second protective means can be prevented from being damaged.

In any of gaming machine land 0 to land 3,
A locking device (e.g., a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support;
A gaming body (e.g., the game board 13) having a game area provided with ball entering means (e.g., the first starting opening 64a) that can be mounted on the opening / closing body and can enter game balls;
A launcher (eg, a sphere launch unit 112a) for launching game balls toward the game area;
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, holding ball storage area 203b) for acquiring lottery information based on the fact that the game ball fired by the launching means enters the ball entering means;
A determination unit (for example, variation start process (S307)) that determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit;
Game value giving means (for example, large opening opening / closing process (S103)) for giving a predetermined game value to the player based on the determination result derived by the determination means;
And setting means (for example, setting key 501) capable of setting and changing the probability that the specific judgment result is derived by the judgment means.
The second protection means is
When the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening and closing body is released from the support, the setting means can be operated A gaming machine land 4 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine land 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine land 0 to the land 3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the gaming body is mounted on the opening / closing body, and a gaming area is provided in which the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball is provided in the gaming body. In addition, the game ball is launched toward the game area by the launch means, and the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the game sphere launched by the launch means entering the ball entry means. Then, the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means is determined by the determination means, and based on the determination result being derived by the determination means, the game value giving means gives a predetermined game value to the player. Be done. Here, the setting means is configured to change the probability that the specific determination result is derived by the determining means. The second protection means makes the setting means difficult to operate when the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while the setting means operates when the opening and closing body is released from the support. Configured to be possible. Thereby, when the opening and closing body is opened from the support, the setting means is configured to be easily operated, and when the opening and closing body is locked to the support, the setting means is operated by the second protection means. This makes it difficult to operate and improves the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support.

At any of gaming machine land 0 to land 4,
In the case where the opening / closing body is closed with respect to the support body, it is characterized by comprising engaging means in which a part of the first protection means and a part of the second protection means are engaged. Game machine land 5.

  According to the gaming machine land 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines land 0 to land 4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the opening and closing body is closed with respect to the support, the engagement means engages a part of the first protection means and a part of the second protection means. Thereby, the gap between the first protection means and the second protection means can be eliminated by the first protection means and the second protection means being engaged when the opening / closing body is closed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent intrusion of a wire or the like from the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is closed, and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine land 5,
The locking device is
It is configured to be operable from the front side of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine land 6 comprising an engagement release means for releasing the engagement of the first protection means and the second protection means by the engagement means by being operated in a predetermined manner.

  According to the gaming machine land 6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine land 5, the following effect is exerted. That is, the locking device is configured to be operable from the front side of the game machine, and the first release means and the second release means are engaged by the engagement means by being operated in a predetermined manner by the release means provided on the lock device. Is released. Thereby, the engagement between the first protection means and the second protection means can be released from the front side of the gaming machine, so even when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the engagement from the front side of the gaming machine By releasing the engagement of the first protection means and the second protection means by operating the release means in a predetermined manner, it is possible to open the opening / closing body from the support without hindrance.

In any of gaming machine land 0 to land 6,
The first protection means is
A gaming machine land 7 supported in an openable / closable manner with respect to the opening / closing body.

  According to the gaming machine land 7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines land 0 to land 6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first protection means is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the opening and closing body. As a result, a part of the first protection means overlaps with a part of the second protection means in the back direction of the game machine, thereby preventing the first protection means from being opened in the back direction of the game machine when the opening / closing body is closed. It has the effect of being able to

<Lacquer group: 2 types of moth group>
An opening / closing body (eg, inner frame 12) supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to a support (eg, outer frame 11);
A locking device (e.g., a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support;
A gaming body (e.g., the game board 13) having a game area provided with ball entering means (e.g., the first starting opening 64a) that can be mounted on the opening / closing body and can enter game balls;
A launcher (eg, a sphere launch unit 112a) for launching game balls toward the game area;
Game value giving means (for example, large opening opening / closing process (S103)) for giving a predetermined game value to the player based on the game ball shot by the shooting means having entered the ball entering means; In a gaming machine provided with
And setting means (for example, setting key 501) capable of changing the setting of the game value provided by the game value giving means.
The support is
When the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening and closing body is released from the support, the setting means can be operated A gaming machine including a protective cover (for example, a protective cover member 140).

  According to the gaming machine lacquer 0, the opening and closing body is supported so as to be able to open and close with respect to the support, and the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the gaming body is mounted on the opening / closing body, and a gaming area is provided in which the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball is provided in the gaming body. In addition, the game ball is fired toward the game area by the firing means, and based on the game ball fired by the firing means entering the ball entering means, the game value giving means causes the player to play a predetermined game. Value is given. Here, the setting value allows the setting change of the game value to be provided by the game value giving device. And when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device by the protection means provided on the support, the setting means becomes difficult to operate, while when the opening / closing body is released from the support, The setting means is configured to be operable. Thereby, when the opening and closing body is opened from the support, the setting means can be easily operated, and when the opening and closing body is locked to the support, it is difficult to operate the setting means by the protection means. There is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening and closing body is locked with respect to the support.

<High-level version of the high-speed group>
Conventionally, when a game medium is fired by the firing means to a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings, and the gaming medium wins any of the winning openings, a predetermined number of winning openings are obtained for the winning openings. There are gaming machines in which gaming media are paid out to players.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, there is a gaming machine having a function that allows a person in charge of a hall to change the game setting such as acquisition conditions and acquisition contents of the game value to be given to the player (for example, patent documents: Open 2015-024202)).

  For such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that the game setting may be changed due to a fraudulent act, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a change in game setting due to a wrongdoing.

An opening / closing body (eg, inner frame 12) supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to a support (eg, outer frame 11);
A locking device (e.g., a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support;
A gaming body (e.g., the game board 13) having a game area provided with ball entering means (e.g., the first starting opening 64a) that can be mounted on the opening / closing body and can enter game balls;
A launcher (eg, a sphere launch unit 112a) for launching game balls toward the game area;
Game value giving means (for example, large opening opening / closing process (S103)) for giving a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball fired by the shooting means enters the ball entering means In the game machine
Setting means (for example, setting key 501) capable of setting and changing the degree of advantage to the player in a plurality of stages;
The support is
When the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening and closing body is released from the support, the setting means can be operated A gaming machine including a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140).

  According to the gaming machine 0, the opening and closing body is supported so as to open and close with respect to the support, and the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the gaming body is mounted on the opening / closing body, and a gaming area is provided in which the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball is provided in the gaming body. In addition, when the game ball is fired toward the game area by the shooting means, and the game ball fired by the shooting means enters the ball entry means, the game value giving means gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is granted. Here, the setting means can change the setting of the degree of advantage to the player in a plurality of stages. And when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device by the protection means provided on the support, the setting means becomes difficult to operate, while when the opening / closing body is released from the support, The setting means is configured to be operable. Thereby, when the opening and closing body is opened from the support, the setting means can be easily operated, and when the opening and closing body is locked to the support, it is difficult to operate the setting means by the protection means. Can be Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening and closing body is locked to the support.

  The “degree of advantage for the player” refers to, for example, the jackpot probability of the first symbol, the selection probability of the jackpot symbol in the case of a jackpot with the first symbol, a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, probability fluctuation state) Transition probability, the number of winning balls in the case of winning a winning opening of 1, the driving time or driving mode of the movable role to change the flow mode of the game ball, the inclination mode of the member affecting the flow mode of the game ball, When the player plays a game, such as a tilt mode of the gaming machine itself, any of the members or processes may be used to affect the situation advantageous to the player.

<Ship group: Horizontally compatible version of the tag group>
Conventionally, on the back side of the gaming machine, setting means for performing various settings of the game is provided, and the player can not contact the setting means when the opening / closing body mounted with the setting means is closed. It is configured. On the other hand, the person in charge of the hall opens the opening and closing body outside the business hours of the hall and performs setting work for various maintenance work and setting means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

  However, with respect to such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that fraud may be performed on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine even when the opening / closing body is closed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the group is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can prevent an illegal act on setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (eg, inner frame 12) supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to a support (eg, outer frame 11);
A locking device (e.g., a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support;
Setting means (for example, setting key 501) mounted on the opening / closing body to perform various settings of the game;
And protective means (eg, a protective cover member 140) for protecting the setting means.
When the game machine is installed in a game arcade, the protection means is configured to be non-removable (for example, the pin screw 11g is entrapped from the outside of the right side plate 11d and the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the island facility without a gap) A game machine 玖 0 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine 0, the opening and closing body is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the support, the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and various settings of the game are made by the setting means mounted on the opening and closing body. To be done. Then, the setting means is protected by the protection means. Here, when the gaming machine is installed in the game arcade, the protection means is configured so as not to be removable. Thereby, in a state where the gaming machine is installed in the game arcade, the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various settings of the game is configured to be difficult or impossible to attach or detach from the gaming machine, and to prevent cheating on the setting means. Has the effect of being able to

An opening / closing body (eg, inner frame 12) supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to a support (eg, outer frame 11);
A locking device (e.g., a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support;
Setting means (for example, setting key 501) mounted on the opening / closing body to perform various settings of the game;
And protective means (eg, a protective cover member 140) for protecting the setting means.
When the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured so as not to be removable (for example, in a state where the mounting surface 151 of the protection cover member 140 is in contact with the inner wall of the right side plate 11d). , The fixed screw 11g is entrapped from the outside of the right side plate 11d) The game machine 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the opening / closing body is supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to the support, the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and various settings of the game are made by the setting means mounted on the opening / closing body. To be done. Then, the setting means is protected by the protection means. Here, when the support and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable. Thereby, in a state where the support and the opening / closing body are locked, the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various settings of the game is configured to be difficult or impossible to attach or detach from the gaming machine, and prevents unauthorized actions on the setting means It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine 0 or 1
The setting means is
It has a keyhole into which a predetermined key can be inserted,
The keyhole is
When the support body and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device, the gaming machine case 2 is characterized in that it faces the back side of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 0 or the whistle 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, a predetermined key can be inserted into the keyhole provided in the setting means, and the keyhole is oriented in the direction of the back of the gaming machine when the support and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device. . As a result, the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various settings of the game has the effect that it is possible to prevent the fraudulent action of the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

In gaming machine 0 or 1
The setting means is
It has a keyhole into which a predetermined key can be inserted,
The keyhole is
When the support and the opening and closing body are locked by the locking device, the gaming machine case 3 is characterized in that it faces the side of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 0 or the whistle 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the predetermined key can be inserted into the keyhole provided in the setting means, and the support and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device, the keyhole is on the side of the gaming machine (rightward or leftward) It is configured to face. As a result, the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various settings of the game can effectively prevent the setting machine from being tampered with from the side of the gaming machine.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to the configuration of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9. I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  Note that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to the configuration of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3. I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to the configuration of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6. I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to the configuration of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3. I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to the configuration of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5 I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, H1 to H3, I1 to the configuration of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3. I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  Note that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  Note that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to the configuration of any of the gaming machines I1 to I4. H3, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5. H3, I1 to I4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  Note that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  Note that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  Note that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to the configuration of any of the gaming machines N1 to N5. H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  Note that, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machine O1, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to the configuration of any of the gaming machines P1 to P5. H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to the configuration of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5. H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  Note that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to the configuration of any of the gaming machines S1 to S4. H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines T1 and T2 H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  Note that, with respect to the configuration of either of the gaming machines U1 and U2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  Note that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V9, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F2 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to the configuration of any of the gaming machines W1 to W7. H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F2 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines X1 to X6. H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, F1, F2 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 1 to 9, the above gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, E1 to E7, E1 to E5, E1 to E3, E1, E2, E1, E2, E2, E1, E2, E3 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines A1 to B7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, c1 to c5, d1 to d3, a1 to c2, a1 to a2 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and the configuration of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to b7, a1 to a3, a1 to a2, a1 to a2 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  Note that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the above gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1, a2, a1, a2, a2, aa1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and the configuration of any one of the gaming machines o1 and o2. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a 1, a 2, a, a 1, a 1 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3 with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 1 and 2 described above. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1 to a4 3, 3 1 to 3 3, 1 to 6 6, 1 to 5, 5 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, with respect to the configuration of any of the gaming machines 1 to 3 described above. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  Note that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above game machines 1 to 3, the above game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 1 to 6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, with respect to the configuration of any of the gaming machines co1 to co5. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2 キ 1 キ 3 ク 1〜 1 ク 3, 3 1〜 1 ケ 6, s 1, s 2, s 1, s 2, s 1, s 2, s 1, s 2, s 1, s 2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3 with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 1 and 2 described above. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, key 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 1 and 2 are described. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, key 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 1 and 2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 1 and 2 described above. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2. T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 1 and 2 are described. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2, T0 to T10, T0 to T8, G1 to T7, T7, T0 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 1 and 2 described above. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 0 through 8, 10 through 10, 7 through 10, 7 through 10 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 1 and 2 above. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1st, 2nd, 1st, 2nd, 1st, 2nd to 3rd, 1st to 5th, 3rd, 1st, 2nd, 0th to 10th, 10th to 8th, 0th to 7th, 7th to 10th ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and the configurations of any one of the gaming machines 1 to 3 are provided. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 0 through 10, 0 through 8, 8, 0 through 7, 7 ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T3. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 0 through 8, 10 through 7, 8 through 7, and 0 through 10. ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 1 and 2. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 0 through 8, 10 through 7, 8 through 7 through 10. ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and any one of the gaming machines 壱 0 to 10 H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0 through 7, 8, 0 through 7, 7 through 10. ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines 遊 技 0 to 弐 8. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0 through 10, and 0 through 7, and 0 through 7, respectively. ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and any one of the gaming machine members 0 to 7 H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1st, 2nd, 1st, 2nd, 1st, 2nd, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 1st to 3rd, 1st, 2nd, 2nd, 0th to 10th, 10th to 8th, 8th ~ 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 0 to 7, the above gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0 7 ~ 7, 7, 0 ~ 9, 9, 0 ~ 7 land, 0, 0, 0 ~ Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the gaming machines 0 to 9, the above gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0 ~ Gins 7, 肆 0 to 肆 7, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines land 0 to land 7. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0 7 ~ 7, 7 ~ 0, 7 0, 9 ~, 0, 0, 0 ~ 0 Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3 with respect to any configuration of the gaming machine lacquer 0 , I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1 and U2 , V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1 to a2, a1 to a2, a2 to a 1 to 3, 1 to 3, 4 to 1, 6 to 5, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 1 2nd, 1st, 2nd, 2nd, 1st, 2nd, 1st to 3rd, 1st to 5th, 1st, 2nd, 2nd, 0th to 10th, 10th to 8th, 7th to 7th , 肆 0 to 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, 捌 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3 are provided for any configuration of the gaming machine 捌 0. , I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1 and U2 , V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1 to a2, a1 to a2, a2 to a 1 to 3, 1 to 3, 4 to 1, 6 to 5, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 1 2nd, 1st, 2nd, 2nd, 1st, 2nd, 1st to 3rd, 1st to 5th, 1st, 2nd, 2nd, 0th to 10th, 10th to 8th, 7th to 7th , 肆 0 to 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 to land 7, lacquer 0, 玖 0 to 玖Configuration was limited by any one of the first may be applied.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines 遊 技 0 to 玖 3. H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, a1 to a9, a1 to a7, a1 to a5, a1 to a3, a1, a2, a1, a2 2, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 3, 3, 1 to 6, 6, 1 to 5, 5, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0 7 ~ 7, 7 ~ 0, 7 ~ 0, 9 ~ 9, 0 ~ 7 land, 0, 0 May be applied a configuration in which only at any one of 3.

  In these cases, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

  Game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A1 9, 1 1 to 7 7, 1 to 5, 5 1 to 3, 3, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2 to 1, 2 to 1, 2 to 3, 3 to 1, 3 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2 From ツ 3 to テ 1 to 33, 11, 22, 壱 0 to 壱 10, 弐 0 to 弐 8, 00 to 77, 肆 0 to 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 RaRiku 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, in any one of 玖 0 of 玖 3, the gaming machine wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine Y1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A1 9, 1 1 to 7 7, 1 to 5, 5 1 to 3, 3, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2 to 1, 2 to 1, 2 to 3, 3 to 1, 3 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2 From ツ 3 to テ 1 to 33, 11, 22, 壱 0 to 壱 10, 弐 0 to 弐 8, 00 to 77, 肆 0 to 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 RaRiku 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, in any one of 玖 0 of 玖 3, the gaming machine wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine Y2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (big winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A1 9, 1 1 to 7 7, 1 to 5, 5 1 to 3, 3, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2 to 1, 2 to 1, 2 to 3, 3 to 1, 3 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2 From ツ 3 to テ 1 to 33, 11, 22, 壱 0 to 壱 10, 弐 0 to 弐 8, 00 to 77, 肆 0 to 肆 7, 伍 0 to 伍 9, land 0 RaRiku 7, lacquer 0, 捌 0, in any one of 玖 0 of 玖 3, the gaming machine gaming machine is characterized in that one that combines a pachinko game machine and a slot machine Y3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

  Note that the "ball" described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the "gaming medium" or the "game ball" in the claims, and the "property item ratio" described in each of the above embodiments is in the "claims". Corresponding to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, the “continuous” according to each of the above embodiments The feature ratio corresponds to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning on the second winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the claims. Do.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 Outer frame (part of the support)
11d Right side plate (part of side part)
11e Upper cover mounting hole (part of side insertion hole)
11f Cover lower mounting hole (part of side insertion hole)
11 g fixing screw (part of fixing member)
12 Inner frame (part of the opening and closing body)
14 Front frame (part of the decoration)
20 cylinder lock (part of locking device, part of first locking means, part of second locking means)
63a 1st ordinary winning opening (winning opening)
63b Second normal winning opening (winning opening)
64a 1st starting opening (winning opening, 1st opening)
64b second starting opening (winning opening, first winning opening)
65a Large winning opening (winning opening, first winning opening, second winning opening)
100 Substrate box (part of storage means, part of main storage means)
100c Sealing unit (part of sealing means, part of influencing means)
100d setting part (part of change part, part of exposed part (key hole))
100e Setting side wall (part of immersion part)
100f bottom of setting part (part of immersion part)
100h Connector attachment part (part of wiring attachment part, part of influence means)
101 Substrate box (part of the dispensing storage means)
110 Main control unit (main control means, display control means, part of control means, part of influence means)
111 Dispensing Control Device (Disbursement Means, Part of Dispensing Control Means, Part of Influencing Means)
111a Sealing part (a part of sealing means, a part of influencing means, a part of dispensing sealing means)
112a Sphere launch unit (launch means)
122 RAM erase switch (predetermined operation means, information erase instruction means, first operation means, part of third operation means, part of erase means, part of influence means)
140 Protective cover member (part of protective means)
150 Cover mounting part (part of mounting part)
152 Upper mounting hole (part of mounting insertion hole)
153 Lower mounting hole (part of mounting insertion hole)
154 Curved part (part of the bent part)
160 Upstands (part of protective measures)
170 Cover (part of protective means)
171 Cover plate (part of protective means)
172 Cover side projection (part of the projection)
173 Key cover part (part of protection means)
200 register 201 MPU (computing means, part of microchip)
202e Prize ball number table (disbursement information storage means)
202f Trigger information data (predetermined trigger information storage means)
203 RAM (storage means)
203b Holding ball storage area (part of lottery information acquisition means)
203l Real-time base value data (part of game performance information storage means, 0th storage area)
203 m Previous base value data (part of gaming performance information storage unit, first storage area)
203n Second base value data (part of game performance information storage unit, second storage area)
203o Base value data (one part of game performance information storage means)
203p New launch flag (new launch specific means)
203x Use area area (first storage means)
203 x 1 Outside work area (1st work area)
203x2 outer stack area (first stack area)
203 x 11 Probability setting value data (first storage means)
203 x 12 Probability setting value data for update (second storage means)
203x16 RAM erase switch flag (storage means)
203y Area outside the use area (second storage means)
203y1 Outside work area (work area, second work area)
203y2 Outer stack area (stack area, second stack area)
203r Base value data (storage means)
203s Role ratio data (storage means)
203t Error data (error history storage means)
207 Object ratio management chip (microchip)
207a Inspection terminal (external device connection means)
208a 1st starting opening switch (prize detection means)
208b 2nd starting opening switch (prize detection means)
208c 1st ordinary winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208d Second ordinary winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208e Special winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208g1 Inner frame open switch (part of open / close detection means)
208g2 Front frame open switch (part of decoration open / close detection means)
211 MPU (part of microchip)
261 CPU (external device connection detection means, second calculation means, ratio calculation means)
263 1st reading memory (2nd storage means)
264 Second reading memory (storage means, third storage means)
267 Capacitor (power supply means)
300 inspection device (external device)
401 Base display device (game performance information display means, output means)
401a, 401b 7-segment display (segment display, second display means)
401c, 401d 7-segment display (segment display, first display means)
501 setting key (permission means, first operation means, part of setting means, part of changing means)
502 Error display button (error history display acceptance means)
S103 large opening opening and closing processing (part of the game value giving means)
S152 (Payout number setting means)
S307 Fluctuation start processing (part of judgment means)
S717 (Power-off detection means)
S728 (second memory control means)
S729 (determination means)
S740, S741 (storage control means, ratio calculation means)
S723 (third storage control means)
S761 (storage control means)
S751 to S754, S771 and S772 (output means)
S2022 (saving means)
S2024 (Stack pointer setting means)
S2025 (return means)
S2031 (First fixed value storage means)
S2041 (second fixed value storage means)
S3007 (Display means for confirmation)
S3008 (Stop means)
S3208 (Game performance information acquisition means, shift processing means)
S3302 (Special display mode display means)
S4004: Yes (first mode startup means)
S4004: No (3rd mode start-up means)
S4011: Yes (second mode start-up means)
S4011: No (4th mode start-up means)
S4005 (Modification method)
S4210 (Confirmation processing execution means)
S4213 (Modification processing execution means)
S4301 (Interruption permission means)
S4308 (Detection means)
S4309 (Detection means)
S4312 (Interruption prohibiting means)
S4401 (Interruption permission means)
S4405 (Interruption prohibiting means)
S4407 (part of specified detection transition means)
S4408 (part of confirmation permission judgment means)
S4412 (part of change possibility determination means)
S4451 (part of confirmation transfer means)
S4452 (part of confirmation transfer means)
S4453 (part of change migration means)
S4454 (part of change migration means)

Claims (1)

An opening / closing body supported so as to be openable / closable relative to the support;
First control means and second control means mounted on the back side of the opening and closing body to control the game;
First protection means provided on the back side of the opening and closing body of the game machine and covering at least a part or all of the back side of the game machine of the first control means;
A second protection means provided on the support and covering at least a part or the whole of the back surface side of the second control means at the gaming machine;
A game machine characterized in that a part of the first protection means is formed to abut on a part of the second protection means in the direction of the back of the game machine.

Images